^^^

^^K?-

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

I^|2j8 U2.5

■^ Ui2 12.2

^ Ills III '-6

Photographic

Sdeiices

Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. M580

(716) •72-4503

"^^

CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHIVI/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquaa

Tha Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha bast
original copy available for filming. Faaturas of this
copy which may ba bibliographically unique,
which may altar any of the images in tha
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.

□ Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur

r~l Covers damaged/

D
D

D
D
D
D

Couverture endommagie

Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaurie at/ou pellicul^e

Cover title missing/

La titra de couverture manque

r~~l Colourad mapa/

Carcas gAographiquas an couleur

Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)

Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations an couleur

Bound with other material/
Relii avec d'autres documents

Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/

La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distorsion !• long de la marge intAriaure

Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines peges blanches ajouttes
lors d'une restauration apparaissant dans la taxte.
mais, lorsqua cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas M filmAes.

Additional comments:/
Commentairas supplimentaires:

L'tnstitut a microfilm* ie meilleur axamplaira
qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-itra uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la m^thoda normale de filmage
sont indiquis ci-dessous.

r~n Coloured pages/

Pagea de couleur

Pages damaged/
Pages endommagies

Pages restored and/oi

Pages restaur^as at/ou palliculies

Pages discoloured. staine«1 or foxei
Pages dicolories, tachaties ou piquies

Pages detached/
Pages ditach^es

Showthrough/
Transparence

Quality of prir

Qualiti inAgale de {'impression

Includes supplementary matarii
Comprend du material supplAmantaire

Only edition available/
Seule Edition disponible

r~~| Pages damaged/

r~~~| Pages restored and/or laminated/

r~^ Pages discoloured. staine«1 or foxed/

r~l Pages detached/

r~7] Showthrough/

I I Quality of print varies/

r~n Includes supplementary material/

r~n Only edition available/

Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'srrata. une pelure,
etc.. cnt 4tA filmies A nouveau de faqon &
obtanir la mailleure Image possible.

s
7
y

h
d

b
ri
n
n

This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/

Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqui ci-dessous.

10X

14X

18X

22X

26X

30X

12X

IfX

20X

24X

28X

32X

Th« copy filmed h«r« has tmmn raproduead thanka
to tha ganarosity of:

Msmorial University of St. John's

L'axamplaira filmi fut raproduit grAca A la
gAnAroait* da:

M«morial Unlvenity of St John's

Tha imagaa appaaring hara ara tha baat quality
poaaibia conaidaring tha condition asid lagibility
of tha original copy and in Icaaping with tha
filming contract apacificationa.

Original copiaa in printad papar covars ara flimad
beginning with tha front eovar and anding on
tha laat paga with a printad or llluatratad impraa«
sion, or the back covar whan appropriate. All
othar original copiaa ara fiimad beginning on the
first page with a printad or iiiuatrated impree-
sion, and ending on the laat page with a printad
or iiiuatrated impreaaion.

The laat recorded frame on each mierofieho
shall contain tha symbol —» (meaning "CON>
TIN JED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever appliee.

Mapa, platae, charts, etc.. mey be filmed at
different reduction ratioa. Thoae too largo to be
entirely included in one eiipoeure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand comer, left to
right and top to bottom, aa many framea aa
required. The following diagrama illuatrate the
method:

Lae imagae suhrantsa ont 4t« raproduitea avac la
piua grand soin. compta tenu de la condition at
de la nettet* de I'ejiemplaira film*, at en
conformiti avac lea conditiona du sontrat dm
filmaga.

Lea axemplairea originaux dont la couverture an
papier eat imprimte sont filmte en commen^ant
par la premier plat at en tarminent soit par la
derrMAre page qui romporte une empreinte
d'impreeaion ou dllluatration. soit par le second
plat, seion le eee. Toua lee autrea •xamplairas
originoux sont film^s en commenpant par la
premiere page qui comporte une ampreinte
d'impreeaion ou dllluatration at an tarminent per
la demlAre page qui comporte une teile
empreinte.

Un dee symbolee suivonts apparaitra sur la
demiAre image de cheque microfiche, selon ie
cae: le symbole —^ signifie "A SUIVRE". le
symboie ▼ signifie "FIN".

Loa cartee. planchea. tableaux, etc.. peuvent itre
filmte i dee taux de rMuction diffirenta.
Loraque la document eet trop grand pour 4tra
reproduit en un seui clichA, ii est film* i partir
da I'angia sup4rieur gauche, de gauche k droita.
ec do haut en baa. an prenant le nombre
d'Imagae n4ceeaaire. Lee diagrammea suivants
iiiuatrant la m^thoda.

]>^

COMPR

COi

OHA

SAILING DIRECTORY

FOB THE ISLAND OF

NIU'

V K
14

f^'.'t'^-

NEWFOUNDLAND,

COMPRISING A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OP ITS BAYS,
HARBOURS, ANCHORING PLACES, &a., fto.

Bt JAMES F. IMRAY, F.R.G.S.

COMPILED CHIEFLY FROM VARIOUS A^lto AND
FRENCH SURVEYS.

LONDON, B: ^;^

JAMES IMRAY & SON, '

OHABT PUBLISHERS AND NAUTIOAL B00XSBLLBR8,
89 & 102,.MINORIEH.

1878.

Kt.

■■■'•.^■^(■•^H•

*** The Pt ^LISHBRS respectfully invite COMMtrNICATIONS THAT
TEND Ta THE IMPBOVEMENT OF THIS OR ANT OF THEIR WORKS.

aiATl

PREFACE,

Although Newfoundland is the oldest colony of the British crown, and has
been held to be an exceedingly valuable possession, not only on account of its
fishery, but as lying directly at the entrance to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and
hence, commanding our communication with what is now called the Dominion of
Canada, it has not been thoroughly surveyed and explored to the present day ;
indeed, for a knowledge of a portion of it we are even indebted to the French,
who held the island for a short time, and who. still enjoying certain treaty rights
of fishing on the north and west coast, and still ruling in the small contiguous
islands of Saint-Pierre and Miquelon, have always taken great interest in the
locality.

The Sailing Directions contained in the following pages embrace the observa-
tions of all English and French surveyors &om the time of Capt. Cook to the
present year. The most extensive survey of Newfoundland was made by Cook,
unci some parts have no^ yet been re-examined ; other parts have been carefully
gone over and sufficiently well described by Lieuts. Holbrook and Bullock, Staff
Commander Kerr, and Capts. Bayfield and Orlebar, of the Royal Navy. The
observations of all these surveying officers are comprised in the following remarks,
together with the researches of certain French hydrographers and naval officers,
as M. De la Roclie Poncie, Pierre, Lavaud, Clone, Ac. — all having contributed
valuable information over the area of their examination ; much of the latter
being contained in the Pilote de Terre-Nauve, to which constant reference has
been made.

The Longitudes of all places in Newfoundland are dependent upon that of the
Chaiu-rock battery, St. John's, viz. ;— 52° 40' 60" W.

We have endeavoured to make this work the most complete yet published in
this country on the island of NewfoundLmd and its hydrography, and trust that
our efi'orts have been successful. It has been carefully revised in going through
the press ; but as from the nature of the subject it is impossible that a work pur-
IMuting to be a " Saihng Directory " can be, or can remain any length of time free
fiom error, it is requested that any faults that may be detected in it be notified
to the publishers, wlio will very thankfully receive and acknowledge communica-
tions tending to its improvement.

J.F.I.

London. March, IH?:}.

CONTENTS.

General bemabks

••• •••

• •• •••

1—8

1 .

BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

Great bank 8 ; Virgin rocks, Reported shoals, Trou de la Baleine or Whale Deep,
Green bank ; St. Pierre bank, Flemish Cap, Misaine bank, Artimon
bank, Banquereau, Sable bank, Canso bank 10.

ROUTE TO NEWFOUNDLAND, CURRENTS, &c.

Route to Newfoundland 11 ; Passage through the strait of Belle Isle 12 ; Vicinity
of cape Race 14 ; Fogs, Currents. &c., 16 ; Winds, Ice 16.

CAPE BONAVISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND.

i. "■ <

Cape Bonavista, Harry Ground 18 ; Dacres rock, &c.. Gull island, cape Largent,
Bird Island cove, DoUarman bank 19 ; Catalina harbour. Green island 20 ;
Ragged harbour, English bay and Salmon cove 21 ; Robinhood bay,
Trinity harbour, Bonaventure head, Smith sound 22 ; Ragged islands, Old
Bonaventure, Cat cove, New Bonaventure, Kerley, British harbour 23 ;
Pope harbour, Hickman harbour, Hickman islands, Warwick harbour,
Haydon point and Long harbour 24 ; Lower Lance cove. Snooks harbour
25 : Irelands Eye island and harbour. Tray Town harbour. Gunner rock,
Black ledge, Green island, Anthony island 26 ; Duck island. Shag islets,
Indian islets, the Thoroughfare, Indian rock, Random island. North-west
arm, Little harbour 27 ; Long cove. Deer harbour, Verge island. Deer
rock, Gun ledge. Random Head harbour 28 ; East Random head. West
Random head, Random sound, Salmon cove. Quarry rock 29 ; Hickman
harbour, Maggotty cove, South bight. Bald Nap and Forster rocks 30 ;
Shoal harbour. Fox harbour, Little Heartsease, Hodge hole, Rocky har-
bour, Long cove, St. Jones Within harbour 31 ; Hatchers cove, North
bight, Long island. Green islets, Heartsease ledge, White rocks, Beaver
rock, Heartsease inlet 32 ; Bald head, St. Jones head, Round harboui-,
St. Jones harbour. Deer harbour 33 ; Poor Boy ledge, Big rock, Big
island, Grub island 34 ; Shoal bay. Copper island 35 ; Centre hill, Bull
island, Rix harbour. Bull ami 36 ; Tickle point. Bower ledge, Tickle bay.

VI.

CONTENTS.

Big and Little Chance coves, Kantem cove .'J? ; Cottier, Ijonj^ cove and
Chappie bay, Spreadeagle bay. Dildo arm, New harbour, Hopeall bay.
Greens harbour. Witless bay .'JH ; Shoal bay. Hearts' Delight bay. Hearts'
Desire bay. Hearts' Content 31) : White rock, I-'itters cove. New Perlican
40; Turks cove, Hants harbour. Seal cove. Salvage point. Salvage
rocks, Riff Raffs, Knife rock 41 ; Hants Harbour rock. Block rock. Tail
01 the Bank, Old Perlican, Martins ledge 42 ; Baccalieu island. Wall
rock. Inner Colling, Outer Colhns 48.

BACCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE FRANCIS.

Black cove. Bay Verd cove. Gull Island cove. Kettle cove. Island cove. Devil's
Point cove, Jove cove 44 ; Gull Island cove, Nortliern bay. Ochre Pit
cove, Job rock, Western bay, Bradley cove. Broad cove, Adam cove,
MuUy cove, Salmon cove, Percy cove. Folly rocks 45 ; Mad rock, Harton
rocks, Bradley rock, Maider island, Crockers cove, Carbonear island,
Carbonear bay, Kane rock. Saucy Joe, Mosquito cove, Harbour (xrace 4() ;
Long Harr}', Salvage rock. Feather point, Grace islands 47 ; Ihyants
cove, Spaniards bay 48 ; Mad point and rocks, Bay Roberts, Jugglers cove,
Fergus islet, Roberts harbour 4!) ; Green point. Bay de Grave. Hibbs hole.
Black cove, Blow-me-do\vn head, Ship cove, I'ort de Grave, Bareneed 50 ;
Cupids cove, Burnt point, Brigus bay, Colliers bay, James cove 51 ; Bacon
cove, Castries bay, Cat cove. Salmon cove. Harbour Main, Holy Rood bay.
Broad cove and Portugal cove 52 ; Bell island, Bell rock. Little Bell
island, Kelly island 5;<.

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO CAPE RACE.

Cape St. I'rancis and Brandies rocks 53 ; Biscayue cove, Flat Rock cove. Tor
bay, Tantam rocks. Red head, Longey cove 54 ; Quiddy Viddy, St. JoJins
harbour, Wash-balls 55 ; Vestal rock, Carey rock. Pancake rock. Chain
rock, Roby rock, Prosser rock, Merlin rock 50 ; Seal rock, St. Johns 57 ;
cape Spear, St. George bank. Old Harry rock. Petty bay 58 ; Bay Bulls,
Witless bay 59 ; Gull island. Green island, Mobile bay. Toad cove. Spear
and Pebble islands, Great island 00 ; cape Neddick, Offer rock, Broyle
harbour, Saturday ledge. Harbour rock (!l ; cape Broyle, Old Harry rock,
Horse rock, Caplin bay G2 ; Goose island, Bois island, Ferryland harbour
and head 03 : Crow island, Aqualbrt harbour. Black head. Chance bay,
Clearcove rocks, Ferraeuse harbour 04 ; Bear cove, Renewse harbour,
Kettlebottom rock, Sculpin shoal, Whaleback, Whitehoise, Shag 05 ;
Renewse rocks. Bantam rocks 00 ; cape Ballard, Shoe cove, Chaucccuve
head, Chance cove. Frenchman cove 67 ; Clam cove, cape Race, JJallard
bank 08 ; Pig bank. General Remarks on making cape Race, &c., 09.

CAPE RACE TO CAPE PINE— TREPASSEY BAY.

Cripple rock, Mistaken point, Freshwater point, Trepasaey bay 71; I'ortugul
covti, Bi&ciiy bay. Mutton Imy. Tropa.sM'y harbuiir 7-,* ; cajic I'ini' 7;i.

CONTENTS
CAPE PINE TO CAPl''. ST. M.VilY-ST. MARY'S BAY.

vn.

St. Shots covti 74 ; Freels rock, Gull island and Sliag rock, Holyrood bay 76 ;
Bank rock, Great rock, St. Mary's harbour 70 ; Mai bay. Shoal bay. Great
Colinet island. Little Colinet island, Mussel-pond bay 77 : Salmonier
river, Haricot bay, Colinet harbour 7S ; Nortli harbour, 79; Redhead
rock, Beckford shoal. Mussel rock, Redcove rock, Lance point, cape St.
Mary 80 ; Lance rock. Bull and Cow, Sunker, False cay, St. Mary's
cays 81.

CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

Seven-Fathom rock. Perch rock 82 ; Nest rock, Curslet rock, Patrick rock. Goose
shoal, South rock, False Girdle, Girdle rock, Virgin rock, Placentia har-
bour 83 ; Moll rock, Wolf rock, Placentia sound. Ship harbour 85 ; De
Peche and Rowland rocks. Ram islands. Long harbour. White rook 86 ;
Little South harbour, Great Soutli harbour, Come-by-Chance harbour,
North harbour, Piper's Hole 87; Sound, Woody and Barren islands.
Plant and Gulsh coves. Ship island. Great Sandy harbour. Bell island
88 ; Burgeo islands. White islands, Valen islands, Clatise harbour, Mera-
sheen island and Ragged islands 89 ; Merasheen harbour, Indian harbour.
Red island. Woody island. Long island. Buffet harbour 90 ; Mussel har-
bour, Bread and Cheese islets, Presque and La Perche harbours, &c. 91 ;
Great Paradise harbour. Paradise sound. Long island. Petit Fort, Monsuch
harbour, Cape Roger harbour. Green island 92 ; Xittle and Great Gallows
hurbours. Little harbour. Bay de 1'eau, Boat harbour. Bane and Rushoon
harbours. Cross island. Broad cove and Red harbour 93 ; John-the-Bay
harbour. Flat islands. Middle island. Saddle Back, Audierne island 94 ,
Fords island, Mortier bay, Boboy inlet 95 ; Little Mortier bay 96 ; Port-
au-Bras, Iron island and outlying rock 97 ; Mortier bank. Burin island
98 ; Cockle rock, Pardy island, Shalloway island. Burin channel. Poor
islet and rock 99 ; Mine rock, Oven rock. Hooper rock. Ship cove. Little
Burin harbour 100 ; Burin inlet, Woody islet 101 ; Burin bay. Little
Burin island, Emberly rock, Corbin island, Corbin harbour 102 ; Old
Harry rock. Devil's cove 103 ; Little St. Lawrence harbour. Garden bank.
Great St, Lawrence harbour 104 ; Laun bay 105 ; Taylor bay, Lamelin
islands and reefs, TylcM- rock. Point May 106 ; Danzig point and coves
107.

ST. PIERRE, LiVNGLADE, MIQUELON, BRUNET AND SAGONA

ISLANDS, &c.

St. Pierre island 107; St. Pierre harbour 108; Massacre island 109; Fletans
channel, Colombier islets, General Remarks on St. Pierre 110; Verte
island 111 ; Langlade and Miquelon 112 ; Miquelon reef, Veaux Marins,
Miquelon bank, Brunet island 113 ; Little Brunets, Plate islands, Jersey-
man bank, Sagona, the Fishery 114 ; Population 115.

.-'.'.•

\\i\. CONTENTS

DANZKi POINT TO CAPE RAY— FOUTUNE, HERMITAGE BAYS. 4o.

Fortune hay. Ship and Great Bunk ooves, Great Garnish and Frenchman cotar.
point Knra^ee 110 ; Great Jersev Plate, Grand Jean and Langue de Cerf
hiirboui'8. Jack Fountain, Argent and Millee harbours, Grand le I'ierre,
English harbour 117 ; Water bay. New harbour, Femme harbour, Brewer's
Mole, Le Gonte, Long harbour 1 18 : Belle bay, Hares harbour. Mall bay,
Belle harbour ll!i ; Lally cove, Lally Back cove, East bay, North bay,
Fivu Islands bay, Corben bay l'<iO ; Bande de Larier bay, St. Jacques,
Blue Pinion and English bays, Boxey harbour, Boxey point 121 ; St. John
island and bay, Great de Leau bay, Little Barrysway bay, Breton har-
bour 122 ; Morts bay, Connaigrr ^ay 123 ; Gunnaigre rocks, Connaigre
harbour, Dawson harbour. Pass islai"' Hermitage bay. Long island 124 ;
Galtaus island, Picarre islaro despair bay. Great Jervis harbour. Bonne
bay 125; Facheux bay, Hare bay. Rencontre bay, Chaleur bay. Bay
Fran(;ais 126 ; Oar bay, cape La Hune, Penguin islands. Whale rock,
La Hune bay and harbour 127 ; Little river, Ramea isles and rocks, Old
Man's bay, tlosquito harbour 128 ; Fox Island harbour. White Bear bay,
Burgeo isles 129 ; Wolf bay, Ha-ha, Connoire bay, Cutteau bay. Great
Bruit, Rotte bay. La Poile bay 181 ; Indian harbour and De Plate, Garip
bay. Harbour La Goue 132 ; Rose Blanche point. Dead Islands harbour,
Port aux Basque 133 ;' Grand bay, cape Ray 134 ; Tides 136.

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

Cape Anguille 135; Cod Roy road, St. George's bay 13G; Port-au-Port 137,
Bay of Islands, Lark harbour 138; York harbour, cape St. Gregory,
Bonne bay 139 ; Cow head, Ingrenachoix bay, port Saunders and Hawkea
harbour 140 ; point Rich, St. John bay 141 ; point Ferolle, St. Margaret
bay. Old Ferolle, Genevieve bay 142 ; St. Barbe bay 143 ; Savage cove.
Strait of Belle Isle 144.

CAPl^ NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

Cape Norman, Belle isle, Pistolet bay 146 ; Ha-ha bay, Sacred bay, Mauve bay,
Kirpon island 147 ; cape Bauld, Kirpon harbour. White islands, Griguet
harbour 148 ; Ronciere bay 149 ; Camel Island harbour, White Cape har-
bour, White cape. Great cove 150 ; Cow cove, St. Lunaire bay, Vanguard
rock, Amelia cove 151 ; North-west bay, Nymph bay, South-west bay,
Braha bays 152 ; Braha shoal, St. Mein bay 153 ; St. Anthony harbour^
Cremaillere harbour 154 ; Notre Dame island, Virgin bay, Three Mouu-
tains bay 155 ; cape Goose, Hare bay, Goose cove, How harbour 166 ;
Fichot islands, Grandes Ilettes harbour, St. Julieu harbours 157 ; Croc
harbour 158 ; Groais, Bell island 159 ; Cape Rouge harbour, Rouge is-
land. Conche and Hiliers harbours, Canada bay 160 ; Englee harbour,
Goufre harbour, Canada harbour, Hooping harbour, Fourchett harbour
161 ; Orange bay, Grande Vache and Little Harbour Deep, White bay,

CONTENTS.

iB.

BAYS. Ac.

iman covAB,
gue de Gerf
id le Pierre,
ur, Brewer's
r. Mall bay,
North bay,
3t. Jacques,
1; St. John
Breton har-
i, Connaigre
: island 124 ;
bour, Bonne
ir bay. Bay
Yhale rook,
d rocks. Old
te Bear bay,
bay, Great
Plate, Gari8
ads harbour,

Little Cat arm, Great Cat arm, Cony arms 102 ; Frenchman oore. Jaok-
Kon anil, Sops arm, liobster harbour, Southern arm, Middle arm, Westera
arm 103 ; Partridge point, Fleur-de-Lys harbour 104; Green bay, Etain
harbour 105; Mings bight, Hardy harbour, Paquet harbour 166; Con-
fusion bay 1(!7 ; Ilound harbour, La Scie ha.<-bour. cape St. John, Gull
iuland, St. Barbe or Horse islands 108.

CAPE BON AVISTA TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

Bona\i8ta lOH °. Black Head buy, Kings cove, Broad headi Plate cove, Indian
arm, Southward bay 170; Kate harbour, Sweet bay. Great Chance har-
bour 171; Chandler Reach, Goose bay, Clode souud, Lion's Den, Long
islands, Newman sound 172 ; Si>uth Broad cove, Minchins cove, Sandy
cove, Adventure coves. North Broau ; n-e 173 ; Barrow harbour, Salvage
bay 174; Morris cove, Va'w and FaL( bay, GoobebeiTy isles 176; New
harbour. Cat cove 170 ; L'ouls harbour, Greeuspond, cape Freels, Penguin
islands, Funk islands 178; B'°u in reef, Snap ijck, Wadham islands,
Fogo islands, Fofj^/ harbour llv : Chan/]e T:Ln(ls Tickle, Toulinguet is-
'i^. land 1h() ; Hi.shop rooks, Tilt cov" lf>l.

:t-,..":

LU-Port 137,
5t. Gregory,
ind Hawkea
it. Margaret
avage cove.

Mauve bay,
tds, Griguet
e Cape har-
, Vanguard
west bay,
ny harbour^
iree Mouu-
rbour 166;
157; Croc
Bouge is-
e harbour,
itt harbour
White bay,

LIGHTS.

The foUowing is a complete List of the Lights shown at this date, March 18th,
1873, within the Umits of the Navigation described in this work. As a full
description of them is given in the pages mentioned, it is unnecessary to add
more detailed particulars : —

Cape Bonavista .

Baccalieu island.
Catalina harbour

Harbour Grace .

St. Johns harbour

Cape Spear . .
Ferryland head .
Cape Race. . .
Cape Pine . . .

Cape St. Mary .

Burin island . .

St. Pierre island.

Fortune bay

Cape Ra)' .

Rich point.

Cape Norman.

Puffin island

Offer Wadham island.

PAOK.

I Revolves in 45 seconds {red and white alt.) ; vis.

( 16 miles 18

Flashes every 20 seconds ; vis. 28 miles .... 43

Green island : — Fixed ; vis. 15 miles 20

North end of Grace island: — Revolves in 30
seconds (two white and one red flash alt.) : vis.

18 miles . 47

' Point of Beach : — Two fixed (vertical, 11 yards

t apart) ; 3 and 11 miles 47

Fort Amherst : — Fixed ; vis. 10 miles. Gun in
fog eveiy hour. Also, two fixed red lights within
the harbour to lead through the narrows,

N.W. i W. . . 56

Revolves every minute ; vis. 23 miles 68

Fixed; vis. 16 miles. . i 03

Revolves in 30 seconds ; vis. 19 miles 68

Fixed; vis. 24 miles 78

( Revolves every minute {red and white flash alt.) ;

I vis. 26 miles 80

Revolves in 20 seconds ; vis. 27 miles ))8

iGalantry head : — Flashes every 20 seconds (two
white and one red flash alt.) ; vis. 20 miles.
Guns in fog 107

St. Pierre harbour ; two leading lights, N.W. . . 108
f Brunet island : — Flashes every 10 seconds ; via. 25

\ miles Il4

Flashes every 10 seconds ; vis. 20 miles .... 134
Flashes every 15 secondd ; vis. 18 miles .... 141
Revolves in two minutes ; vis. 20 miles .... 14(t

Fixed red; vis. 12 miles 177

Fixed ; vis. 12 miles 17tf

rch 18th.

\s a

full

y to add

VkOS.

VIS.

^ ^

'iO

via.

ards

ti in

thin

ows,

134
141

14(i
177
17U

SAILING DIRECTIONS

FOB

NEWFOUNDLAND

kSD ASJAOEMX

COAST OF LABEADOR.

*** The Bearings and Courses throughout this Work are Magnetic] unleit
I otherwise expressed.

The amount of westerly variation (1872) at the various points within the limits
\of this work is as follows : —

, Virgin Rocks 30° 30'

{CapeEace 29° 50'

ISt. John's Sr 30'

\Cape Bonavista 33° 20'

IGape Freels 33° 60'

\Canada Bay 36°

[Cape Bauld 37° 10'

leUe Isle 37° 50'

Cape Norman ....
Anchor and Forteau Points

Point Rich.

Bonne Bay d Cape Whittle

Cape Pine

Plaoentia 30° 20'

Miquehn Island 28° 20'

Cape Ray 27° 60'

«3

, .

It);

80
U8

two

les.

107

108

.25

114

The general line of equal variation on the eastern shores of Newfoundland rum
bout N.W. by W. ^ W. and 8.E. by E. J E., true; and in the Oulfof St. Law-
ence N. W. by W. and 8.E. by E.', true.

The Distances are in Nautical miles, — 60 to a Degree of Latitude.

A Cable is assumed to be i\ of a Nautical MUe and equal to 100 Fathoms.

PAKT I.

NEWFOUNDLAND.

GENERAL REMARKS.

mawromn^ZJUis lies between latitudes 40° 40' and 61* 30' N., and longi-
ides 62° 44' and 59° 81' W. It was probably discovered at an early period by
lie Northmen ; but no use was made of the discovery, and it remained
lown to Europeans until John and Sebastian Cabot, on their second
pyage, discovered cape Bonavista, on the 24th of June, 1407. After this
Ime Portuguese formed a settlement on the island, from which they were ^riven
the English under Sir Francis Drake in the reign of Elizabeth. 19 IHIO »

a ■>•' ^

*■.'.■

87»

36'

34° 10'

■;s<'

81° 40'

r-e^

29° 30'

v;yi

I .■• ' ■

NEWFOUNDLAND.

charter waa granted to a company of merchant adventurers of London and
Bristol, and a colony was established at Conception bay. From this time
numerous settlements were continually made along the east coast by the English,
while the French established themselves on the south, at Placentia, in the bay
of that name, and maintained possession of it until the treaty of Utrecht, in
April, 1713. By this treaty Newfoundland and its dependencies were declared
to belong whoUy to Great Britain, but the French were allowed to fish and cure
what they caught on certain parts of the shore; and at a subsequent date
fishermen from the United States were also allowed certain privileges in the
great fishery.

Newfoundland is nearly 300 miles long from cape Ray (Raye or Split cape, so
called by the French from its appearance at sea) to cape Quirpon, on the N.E. ;
and about 260 miles wide from cape Race (Raze), on the east coast, again to cape
Ray on the west. It contains about 40,000 square miles, and is of triangular
form, very narrow towards the North, — hence called by the French "Petit
Nord," — very wide at the soutliem base, and having attached to it, as it were,
the great peninsula of Avalon, separated from the great island by the bays of
Placentia and Trinity and joined to it by an isthmus of only 2 or 3 miles, and
this province is again divided by the two noble bays of St. Mary and Conception.

In no other part of the world are there more noble bays and harbours than in
Newfoundland. For 80 to 90 miles the ocean penetrates by great arms into the
land, conveying to the doors of its inhabitants the treasures of the deep, and
affording them a cheap means of conveying their produce to market, such as a
hundred millions spent in railways could not procure. It is most providential
that everytliing required to carry out the great industry of the country — the
fishery — is found here better than in any part of the world, — the bays and har-
bours, the vicinity of the gi-eat breeding grounds, the abundance of wood adapted
for boat building, cooperage, flakes, and stages, the bracing winds and absence of I
a burning sun for drying, the rocky ledges — the feeding ground of the cod, and,
above nil, the hardy, daring sons of the soil, men nurtured in danger, recked in
the tempest, men to whom the severest hardships are only sport, who know no
danger, who tread the frozen ocean with as firm a step as their native soil, and
yearly undergo without a murmur more danger than usually falls to the lot of I
the most daring through their entire lives.

St. John the capital, is placed almost in the centre of the great peninsula of I
Avalon, on the nearest point to Europe, with a port the most secure perhaps inj
the world, fortified by nature and only requiring a very moderate outlay to make j
it impregnable.

The following account of the physical geography of Newfoundland, byj
Julian Mobeton, is reprinted from the 34th volume of the Journal of the]
Royal Geographical Society : —

" This countiy presents a nearly plane surface of heaths, fens, and ponds, withj
some ranges of hills rather than mountains near the coasts, which are much I
higher in the south and west than on the eastern side of the island. The highest I
headlands to the westward are about 1100 or 1200 feet. On ^he east coast theyl
are lower : 300 feet is about their average height. Ponds or lakes and smaUl
brooks are numerous among the hills, and the scenery is beautiful, but not grand.!
There are but two streams deserving the name of river ; they are the Great audi
Little Codroy rivers ; the former is navigable for 16 miles, the latter for onljl
miles, from the mouth upward. Large rocks in the channel impede the paasagJ

GENERAL REMARKS.

of any craft larger than a two-Iianded Bat in almost all the other streams. One
large lake named Ocean or Grand Pond, an island in which is repated to have
been the last retreat of the now extirpated Red Indians, is situated in the interior
coontry, not far from the hea;! of the Bay of Islands. A gentleman who crossed
part of the country in 1853, entering at St. George's bay and emerging at Hall's
inlet, spoke of large lakes upon which he performed a great part of his journey, he
liaving a. boat with him. One of these lakes was nearly 40 miles long. From
the course the traveller took, this largest lake must be the Ocean Pond ; and his
account agrees with and confirms that which I received from an old furrier, from
whom I learned many particulars of the country. In the eastern part there are
some very large ponds, which are reported by the fur-hunters to be all connected
by brooks. These ponds are Gander Bay pond. Upper and Lower Gambo,
Upper and Lower Mackrell ponds, and Olode Sound water. Upon the Gambo
and Mackrell ponds I have travelled. The Gambos are two sheets of water,
18 miles in their united length, connected by a brook. The two Mackrell ponds
are very similar to the Gambos in form and size, but lie further inland, the
Lower Mackrell being parallel with the Upper Gambo. Fur-collectors frequent
the shores of these ponds, and are almost the only persons, beside the Micmao
Indians, who really know anything of the interior. From these persons I learned
that the country within was similar in character to a part which I traversed a
few miles inside cape Freels. Towards this cape the hills decline, the country
becomes for a space of many miles very low and level, and there is a large break
in the line of forest. The whole plain is swamp and heath, with frequent spots
of bare granite ro^k protruding, and here and there a small grove, or, as the
country people term it, " droke," of very stunted, blight-stricken fir-trees, none
of them of larger growth than firewood. In 1851 some Indians crossed the
island from Bay Despair to Freshwater bay. They were 9 days in the interior,
having stayed by the way to kill and eat venison, and spent time in the desultory
way which is usual with their race. It was reckoned that they might have come
across in 6 days. From this I judge that the character of the country does not
present much difficulty in the journey. An old furrier, who had spent years in
fur-collecting about the country between White bay and Bay ofrlslands^told me
when I was intending a journey thither, that I might travel from the head of
White bay without difficulty the whole distance in 3 days ; and this supports the
same conclusion. All that I have learned disposes me to believe that the central
parts generally resemble the open lands near cape Freels,

There is very much bare protruding rock in all parts of the island, presenting
I everywhere a rounded, worn, and water-washed appearance, such as could be pro-
duced only by their having once been part of the bed of ocean. Large boulders,
of stone of difierent character from all the rock around, are lodged in all parts ;
some of the most remarkable are upon the highest lands. A recent, and I sup-
pose still proceeding, uprising of the whole island from the sea is very observable,
land many proofs of it have been brought to my notice. For instance, a narrow
Itickle at the head of Greenspond harbour, in which the water now is scarcely
Ideep enough for a punt's passing, was, in the memory of aged people, sufficient
|for the passage of large fishiug-boats called Shallops. At Pinchard's or Pilchard's
island, and in Twillingate harbour, rocks now above water are remembered aa
formerly sunken rooks, over which it was possible and usual to row small boats,
[n many places, from the same cause, the fishermen cannot now let their boats
ride in the san^e water where their fathers were woi^t to n^oor them. I have

> ..'

i\.

■,■■•('•''.

li-uJL 'm

NEWFOUNDLAND.

been told of similar changes in Trinity harbour. Tho prevalent kind of rock is
a very dense grey granite, but there is upon an island in Conception bay a quarry
of very fine freestone. Copper, iron, and lead are known to exist in many places ;
generally in quantities too small to pay for working, though in one part to the
westward some good success has been obtained in mining for both copper and
iron. Manganese ore was found near the same place, but so impure that it
would not pay for working. During the last 5 or 6 years diligent search for
minerals has been made in the east and north-east, by competent persons^and at
much expense. Specimens have been shown of metals found ; but the only real
success, the only discovery at least which was followed up by a mining adventure,
was a large vein of lead, of very pure quaUty, in Bay Bulls Arm, Trinity bay,
which was worked in 1860-1, very profitably I believe, by some American capi-
taUsts. In the midst of success the work was suddenly ended by, it was said, n
failure of the metal : the vein was reported to be lost, and no great search seems
to have been made for a further discovery. In Indian bay there is a warm
spring ; and in Freshwater bay I have seen in a pond two springs which always
defy the frost, and keep, over each of them throughout the winter, a circular open
space, while all the other surface of the pond is coated with very thick ice.

The soil is generally poor and nearly unproductive. In many of the
inhabited places, especially on the north-east coast, the only soil is peat, often
not more than one foot deep upon the surface of the rock. A few miles within
the shore, however, there isia poor, yellow gravel beneath the turf; and in some
few places a substratum of clay. With this clay brick-making has been at-
tempted, but not very successfully. Whether the want of success was due to
the nnsuitableness of the clay, or to want of skill, I cannot say. On the western
shore near the Codroy rivers, I have seen good red marl of many feet depth,
and some gjrpsum.

Great heat and extreme cold are both frequent in Newfoundland. I have noted
the thermometer at 136° in the sun, when probably the height in the shade
would be 97° ; and this, though greater than the usual extreme, was not very
infrequent. At the place of my abode, near the centre of the east coast, the
winter is seldom known in which the mercury does not sometimes descend to 8°
below zero, and I have known it to reach 22°. It is commonly said in Newfound-
land, and the remark is near the truth, that the summer is but a three months'
season, and all the remaining nine months are winter. Sudden, great, and trying
changes of temperature are experienced at all seasons. In summer the western
winds, blowing overland, bring extreme heat ; but usually, on fine days, unless
the land-breeze is strong, tlie wind veers southward, and before evening brings in
fog from the sea, — often making fire and additional clothing grateful in the even-
ing of the same day in which tlie dry heat has been scarcely sufierable. In
winter tlie land-breezes blowing over a great extent of snow-clad country are
most severely cold, while those from the sea are mild and damp. With a shift of
wind it is not an infrequent thing for the mercury in one night to rise from some
degrees below zero to 30° or more above. The cold always becomes many degrees
more intense for a few hours before the coming in of a mild wind from the sea;
the frosty air being repelled, and returned in a dense state upon the land, by the
force of the incoming breeze. The same winds, namely, those from any quarter
between south-west and north, bring in summer the greatest heat and in winter
the most intense cold. For these 'ndnds pass over a great extent of land, which
is either greatly heated or snow-clad according to the season. A similar remark

GENERAL REMARKS.

is correct of the winds from north to south-west inolnsiye ; they are in winter tM
mildest, and in smnmer the coldest, because of the fog which they always bripg to
the shore. An exception may be made to this latter remark, because in March,
April, and May, when the Arctic ice is driving southward by the coast, the sea-
breezes pass to the land over so vast an extent of frozen water, and cause a biting
coldness in the air. But oven at these seasons the fog commonly prevaHs and
the atmosphere is damp. Connected with these observations is the fact, that some
winters which are very severe in the south of Newfoundland are mild seasons in
the north. In those winters the prevailing winds are from the north and north-
east, which come from sea to the north and eastward shores, and pass overland to
the south parte of the island. By similar reasoning the fact is accounted for that
tlic winters wliich are mild in the south are severe in the north, the prevail-
ing winds coming then from opposite quarters. Tue great fog-banks, which seem
perpetual at sea, are much more frequent in their visits to the shore of the south
than of other parts : a fact which I venture to take in confirmation of the theory
tliat these fogs are generated in the sea south of Newfoundland by the meeting of
the Arctic currents and the Gulf Stream. In a small book lately published I have
noted, as one principal reason of the severity of the climate, the fact that two
streams of Arctic water, the Davis Strait and East Greenland currents, combine
and run by the shores of Newfoundland, and repel the Gulf Stream. Proximity
to the vast Canadian continent, where so much land is forest and uninhabited, is
a cause capable of some amelioration by the increase of populaion there ; but the
former is one which must remain unaltered, and, so far as it is concerned,
Newfoundland must ever remain a cold country. It is a common assertion of
people in the country that the climate is becoming less severe. This assertion
seems unfounded. The winters of 1848-9, 1863-i, 1858-9, 1861-2, and 1802-8
were confessedly severe in the extreme, and the last two almost unprecedented.
More provision is now made against the cold, the houses are better, and the
clothing more suitable than in former times ; yet the rigour of the climate seems
to have been borne at least as well as it now is, and, indeed, fewer diseases were
known then.

There are some beautiful phenomena peculiar to such a climate, which I hope
it is not out of place to mention here.

The great frosts of winter cause so clear an atmosphere that the skies both by
day and night, appear in marvellous beau^'. The Aurora is remarkable for its
beauty and frequent appearance. It seem* c\ to me far finer on the north-west
side of Newfoundland than anywhere else. Its colour is usually yellow, some-

j times variegated, not often a general red. A man whom I knew attributed the
loss of sight in one of his eyes to the Aurora, the rays of wliich he said were
plajdng quite low upon the water, while he was attending to the sails of his boat.
A fcelmg of -something like a spider's web across his eye, which he tried to wipe
away, was, he believes, the effect of a ray of the Aurora through which he passed,

land from it blindness resulted. Whether this is credible or not I am unable to

Ijudge.

Mirage is a very usual appearance on the coast : so are very beautiful halos

Iboth of the sun and moon.

Scarcely any object in nature can be more strikingly beautiful than what is

[called " silver thaw," or " glitter;" and this is seen many time^in every winter.
When rain or thick fog quickly follows a change to mild wuul, the water falling
kipon surfaces which are yet frozen is at once congealed, and thus every object

''■Vi--':-.
''■<'.■ )•

■•■Mm

'■ ■''!*,

■cm

ai"^:

NEWFOUNDLAND.

reposed to it becomes thickly coated as n-ith glass. It can be imagined
how magnificently brilliant the whole scene becomes when the weather cleara
and the sun shines ; every minute branch upon a tree, almost every blade of
grass, if there be any bare of snow, appears a distinct crystal. Once seen it
cannot be forgotten.

Thunder-storms are frequent and violent. To my remembrance they seem
often heavier than any I have known during 18 months experience in the tropics.
I have seen in Newfoundland the trees consumed by lightning on a mountain's
sides, a house rent open, large timber cloven, clothes burnt, and iron fused, in a
fitorm of peculiar violence in August, ltt62. Such storms as this, however, are
rare. Some of the heaviest I have known were in the winter season.

The atmosphere around the whole country seems to be at all times very greatly
charged with electricity ; but perhaps it is most so in winter. AU fur, and the
human hair, will discharge the electric fluid very audibly and visibly at every
touch; and all woollen clothing, especially that worn next the skin, makes a
remarkable discharge whenever it is taken off the wearer.

As a consequence of the climate, rather than of any peculiar habits of life, the
people, though very few of them are more remote from English parentage than the
third generation, are in some particulars a distinct race. They are generally of
short stature, attain maturity very early, and are remarkably prolific. They have
wonderful power of enduring hardships ; but disease, attributable more or less
directly to their hard living, is lately becoming very prevalent among them.
Consumption of the lungs almost unknown when I first went there, has increased
alarmingly in the past 12 years. Of 37 deaths in my congregation in one year,
Id were from this disease. Caries of the bone is another disease, cases of which
ftre suprisingly numerous. Many of the people suffer from scurvy, especially
those persons who for the winter season live and work in the forest above the
coast. This, however, is not a new c ' increasing malady. Diseases of the
heart are very common.

A broad belt of forest surrounds the island. The woods are of much finer
growth, more various in kind, and much less despoiled by the axe and by firjs on
the western side and around White bay, than those to the eastward. Fir, spruce,
pine, and birch are in the greatest abundance ; but there are also larch, aspen,
balsam-poplar, mountain-ash and alder. Some kinds of timber are becoming
extinct in places where a few years ago they grew in plenty, in consequence of
unsparing cutting for building purposes and for sale. Hue is thus becoming
scarce ; so is larch , and it is diflicult to get birch of any size larger than for fire-
wood. Many thousands of fir-trees are destroyed annually by rinding. The rind
is required to cover fish in the course of curing. I have seen far above the heads
of the bays a solitary spot of fine yellow deal, which seems to be the only remnant
to the eastward at least, of a once common timber tree, and esoapeb the axe only
because it is far from water, and therefore could not be got out without too great
labour. All trees in Newfoundland are of rather stunted growth ; but the timber
is preferred to the larger and freer grown timber of the American continent, as
being harder and more enduring. Attempts have been made to introduce the oak
and Jie ivy, but under the utmost care the plants exist in dwarf size, only to show j
the impossibility of naturalizing them. Several kinds of fruit grow wild,
principally upon scrubby bushes, and trailing plants on the heaths and swamps,
A very good fruit is one named the bake-apple : this is yellow, round, about the I
mo of a cherry, granulated like mulberry. One fruit only is produced by each

plant: b

yellow ii

vulgarly

England.

use them

are killed

The se

and appl

are almoi

where no

great par

grown wl

St. John's

live throu

sea-shore,

in lands

Turnips a

but these

wholly to

manure an

hardy kin

peas may 1

has been

black sort,

first and la

Fur-beai

fishermen,

white, yel

precious.

unmolested

numerous, i

on the nort

having com

seas. Wol

came nearl

are becomii

has lately

in 1849, the

had chased

house for so

white. The

Deer are ali

solitary or i

general hal

summer, an

I southward t

them near tl

them on tli

winters in vi

but they tra

GENERAL REMARKS. 9

plant : but they are in such number as to make the whole BUtCaoe of the laarBhoi
yellow in their season. One other berry, equally plentiful upon the heaths, is
vulgarly named blackberry, but has no relation to the black or bramble berry of
England. These fruits are of great value, not only in the diets of the people, who
use them largely, but also for the support of birds and other wild animals, which
are killed for food and for their fur.

The severity of the climate, sterility of the soil, and difficulty of procuring
and applying manure, are all serious hindrances to agriculture. Fish and kelp
are almost the only manures obtainable, and these are very difficult of carriage
where no roads exist and there are no horses and carts, which is the case in a
great part of the country. Some Scotch settlers on the Codroy rivers have
grown wheat with some success. Wheat is grown also on the inside lands near
St. John's. Only the 13 weeks' grain can be sown, because no fall-sown seed can
live through the frosts of winter. Cultivated as it is only upon land far above the
sea-shore, the crop has often to be cut gi'een. Barley is grown with more success
in lands far up the bays ; but that also, in some years cannot be ripened.
Turnips are a good and sure crop, and great quantities of potatoes are grown ;
but these are almost all of a poor quality. For this, however, the land is not
wholly to blame, for I have proved by repeated experiment, that with proper
manure and care it will produce potatoes thoroughly good. Carrots, parsnips, a
hardy kind of onion, and cabbage are successfully cultivated, and in the south
peas may be grown. These are nearly all the es3ulent vegetables which the land
has been proved capable of producing. Grab-apples, currants, especially the
black sort, gooseberries, and damsons, are the only table-fruits ; and of these the
first and last can be grown only in the south of Newfoundland.

Fur-bearing animals are numerous, and a great source of gain to some of the
fishermen, who in winter turn funiers. Arctic foxes are here in all their variety ;
white, yellow, patch, silverhaired, and black-poles; the last-named the most
precious. Beavers, once nearly extirpated, are now becoming numerous, being
unmolested becaus'j of the low value of their fur. Brown bears are pretty
numerous, and valued both for meat and fur. White bears are sometimes found
on the northern promontory of the island, (where I imagine they are but visitors,
having come to the shore upon the ice which drifts down in spring from the Arctic
seas. Wolves were killed for a reward given by the Colonial Government, and be-
came nearly extinct. lu 1849 tiie reward ceased to be paid, and these animals
are becoming again numerous and very troublesome. I Imow one poor man who
has lately lost many sheep by them. A man in the Bay of Islands showed me,
in 1849, the skins of three large wolves which he caught, out of a gang of six that
had chased a deer from the interior country into his garden, and lurked about his
huuse for some days afterwards. One of the six was black, the others were greyish
white. Those caught measured six feet from the nose to the end of the tail.
Deer are always in very great number in the interior, and sometimes they stray,
solitary or in twos and threes, to the outside at any season of the year ; but their
general habit is to herd together in the northern parts of the interior during
summer, and as soon as the snow has set in and buried the moors, flock down
I southward throngh the woods, where only they can then find food. This brings
them near the outside of the country and within reach of the people who waylay
them on the shores of the lakes, and then shoot tliem in the water. In those
winters in which the snow does not fall early, no deer come through the forests ;
but they travel southward on the inside. I regard this fact as a corroboration of

'■' ■■■ ■":- r*

' ' ._ t

;

'..■'■''

', '_, s ■

,'*'■

'.K

f,'.'

- • 1

■ . -fj

' *\'.

■■'f '';?■

'•'.. '

'■ .■■'V

> , -

•i

.■»

' * li

' .1,

■i'-'\

';■ s

»,-K.

■ .'^

)■"

' '. ■

' "i

BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

the general report that the interior conntry is a great open plain. In such wintera
the moors being free from snow, the deer have no occasion to enter the forest, and
do not come to the outside. The skin of these animals is invariably spoiled in the
slaughtering and wasted. Martens, hares, and ermine are very numerous, and
otters aud musk-rats are found in almost bvery pond and brook." The population
of tho islanii is about 180,000.

BANKS OP NEWFOUNDLAND.

Eastward, south-eastward and southward of Newfoundland are several ex-
tensive sand banks, abounding with fish of various kinds. In sounding, the bottom
is commonly covered with shells. The banks are frequented by shoals of smaU
fish, jvhich serve as food for the codfish ; these tlirive so amazingly, and are so
inconceivably numerous, that although many hundreds of vessels have fished
there fur more than two centuries, there appears to be no diminution in the
supply. The fishery is not confined to the banks, but extends to the shores and
harbours of Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and Cape Breton Island. The fish are
conpnonly most abundant where the bottom is sandy and the depth about 30
fathoms ; where the bottom is of mud they are observed to be less numerous. In
winter they seek deeper water, but in February, March, and April, they return to
the banks, and fatten rapidly.

The Banks of Newfoundland, celebrated as the great fishery grounds'pf North
America, occupy a considerable area, — its boimdaries being, taking the line of
100 fathoms ; — ^northernmost edge lat. 48° 20' N., long. 51° 20' W. ; easternmost
edge lat. 46° 26' N., long. 47° 30' W.; southernmost edge lat. 43° N., long. 60° 10' W.,
whence it runs almost in a direct line to cape Bay, the S.W. extremity of New-
foundland : within this area besides the part specially known as the Great Bank,
are Green Bank and St. Pierre Bank — subordinate banks so closely connected
with the first as scarcely to be distinguished from it except by careful soundings.

OBBAT BANK. — The Great Bank, properly so called, extends between the
parallels of 43° and 47° 40' N., (north of St. John's) and between the meridian of
48° 20' W. and that of cape Race. On the parallel of cape Spear (47i° N.) it is
about 60 miles across with depths varying from 66 to 66 fathoms, sand. On the
parallel of cape Race, or in 46° 40' N., and long. 47° 30' W., soundings in 76 fa-
thoms, whitish sand, will be obtained ; this will be about 140 miles eastward of the
Virgin rocks, and its farthest easterly extension, but on crossing it here, bear in
mind the reported rocky shoal of only 21 feet water, about 100 or 200 feet in extent,
reported to have been seen by Mr. Jesse Ryder, of the fishing schooner Bethel.
Approacliing the St, Lawrence from the eastward, when in lat. 46° 30', sound-
ings will be obtained on the edge of the bank in long. 48° 48' W. ; here it is very
steep ; in lat. 44° N., long. 49° W, the edge of the bank has 105 fathoms upon it,
bottom of very fine grey sparkling sand ; but immediately westward of this posi-
tion the soundings rapidly decrease : thence the edge of the bank takes a S. W.-ly
direction to lat. 43° N., long. 49° 50' W., where is a depth of 60 fathoms, with
shoal water of 40 fathoms immediately to the eastward, and bottom of fine sand,
shells, iMid mud, while to westward is very deep water. The depths of the Great

VIRGIN ROOKS, QREEN BANK, &o. 9

Bank vary from 20 to 80 Cathoms, and the bottom also variea oonslderably, but it
generally consists of sand, or sand mixed with shells and gravel, rarely with
stones. The eastern face of the bank is of clear whitish sand, and often spark-
ling. But the best idea of the shape and soundings of tlie bank will be gained
by referring to the chart.

Virgin Boeka. — If the Great Bank be made between the 46th and 47th par-
allels, be careful to avoid drifting on the Virgin rocks : the bank on which they
are situated extends 4i miles in an E. by S. and W. by N. direction, and is 9
miles wide where broadest, the depths being regular firom 28 to SO fathoms, and
then 4i fathoms where shoalest. Beyond these limits, the depth increases
suddenly to 39 and 4!) fathoms. The 4i fathom rock is in lat. 46" 26i' N., long.
60° 51i' W. Mr. Rose, H.M.S. Tyne (1829), describes these rocks as extending
in an irregular chain, or cluster 800 yards in the direction of N.E. by E. and
S.W. by W., (true), their breadth varying from 200 to 300 yards. They were
distinctly seen under water, particularly a large mass of white rock, in 4^ fa-
thoms,* having 6 and 6i fathoms round it. Tlie shoal was traced in 7 fathoms,
ou detached rocks, near the edge of it, having deeper water between them. On
the southern edge of the shoal, from S.E. to West, the depth increases gradually
to 30 fathoms, at the distance of half a mile from the shoalest part. The same
depth was found N.W. and N.E. of the shoal, at the distance of one-third of a
mUe, and also between N.E. and S.E., at the distance of one mile. The current
was found setting W.S.W., at the rate of one mile per hour over the shoal, with
. a confused cross swell.

Boportfld Bhoala. — A shoal of 21 feet water was reported, in 1845, by Mr. Jesse
llyder, of the fishing schooner Bethel, in lat. 46° 30' N., which appeared to be a rock
of 100 or 200 feet surface. He discovered it accidentally while searching for the
d-fathom bank, to iish upon, and supposed it to be about 50 miles to the eastward
of the Virgin rocks, and to bear S. by W. about 1 J miles from the 9-fathom bank.
Mr. llyder was certain tliat it formed no part of the Virgin rocks, having after-
wards seen them. Commander Chimmo R.N. in 1868 could not find this reported
danger.

Other shoals have been reported as follows : — A bank or shoal 4 or 5 miles to
the S.W. of the Virgin rocks : the water brealdng, and the spot well-known to
tlio fishermen as dangerous. On the French charts of the banks, a shoal of 9
fatlioms, stated to lie in lat. 44" 42' N., and long. 49° 62' W. Also, a shoal of
about 4 fathoms, and about 150 to 200 feet in circumference, trending N.E. and
S.W. Lat. 46° 38' N.. long. 49° 52' W. These are otherwise unknown.

TBOU DS ZiA BAliBXivs or "WBAICB SBBP. — On the western side of the
Great Bank is a remarkable deep gully with soundings of 68 to 66 and 70
fathoms, on a bottom of mud or ooze which has a fetid smell : here fish of all
sorts abound, and the spot serves well to indicate a sliip's position : centre in
lat. 45° 20' N., long. 52° 40' W.

OBBBN SAUK. — Green Bank is just to the westward of the Great Bank and
on the meridian of the centre of Placentia bay ; it is 60 miles long (north and
south), and 30 miles wide ; the least depth on it is 38 fathoms, bottom of sand,
gravel, small pebbles and broken shells. At the south extremity it joins the Great

h'> ■

»' >■ .; ,•

( *■•■■''
.'4'.- ■'".

■:!n^:

'A^'i'f:

* It is very generally asBerted at St. John's, that there is one spot on these rocks which
has only IS to 14 feet water over it.

BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

Bank, and is separated from it at the north end hy a guUey 25 miles wide
and 60 to 80 fathoms deep.

ST. TKEMMM BAIIX. — St Pierre bank is separated from Oreen Bank by a
gulley running north and south, '20 to 26 miles wide, and 70 to 00 fathoms deep.
The bank extends 112 miles N.W. and S.E., liaving a width of 35 to 60 miles.
The least depths are from 10 to 23 fathoms, and it is generally shnaler than
the Great Bank and Oreen Bank ; the bottom is similar to that of the latter
bank : its centre is in lat. 4((° N. on the meridian of 8t. Pierre island (56' 10' W.).

TSMWatUK OJir. — The Flemish cap, called also the Outer or False Bank, |is a
shoal patch eastward of the Great Bank, in lat. 47° N., long. 44° 40' W.,— least
depth 72 to 80 fathoms. It has been partially surveyed by M. Lavaud. of the
French Navy, from whose observations it appears to be very steep on the western
edge, there being no bottom immediately after sounding in 130 or 160 fathoms on
its edge. From long. 44° 62' W., and lat. 40° 63' N., in a depth of 73>thoms,
large stones, a line of soundings, gradually increasing in depth, Was carried north-
ward, to lat. 47" 50' N., and long. 45° 12' W., where the depth was found to be
147 fathoms, bottom of soft mud. Between it nnd tlie western edge of the Great
Bank is much deeper water, on a bottom of fine sand and ooze, and thence
westward towards the Great Bank tine whitish sand, speckled black.

There are several banks off the S.E. sides of Nova Scotia and Cape Breton
Island which, though not forming part of the Banks of Newfoundland, are to a
certain extent connected wifih them and have their origin from the same source ;
these are the Misaine, Artiraon, Banquereau, Sable Island, Middle Ground, and
Canso banks.

MIBAIHB BAIR. — The Misaine bank, 56 miles from St. Pierre bank, having
depths between them of upwards of 200 fathoms, is 108 miles S.W.-ward of St.
Pierre island and 70 miles S.E.-ward of Scatari island : it is 58 miles long E.N.E.
and W.S.W., and about 28 miles wide, irregular in contour, with least depth
44 fathoms and numerous gulleys exceeding 70 to 80 fathoms.

ABTZKOV BAirx> — The Artimon bank is eastward of the Misaine bank and
N.E.-ward of the Banquereau ; it does not exceed 13 miles, with least depth 38
£athoms, coarse sand and pebbles.

BAHQVBItSATr. — The Banquereau is comprised between the meridians
of 61" 16' and 60° 5' W., and between the parallels of 44° and 45° N. It is
116 miles long E.S.E. and W.N.W., with a least depth of 15 to 20 fathoms,
bottom of different coloured sands, gravel, &c. This bank abounds in fish and is
much frequented by French and American vessels, particularly the eastern part.
The tidal currents on it are strong and irregular.

BABLB BAirx. — The Sable bank on which is situated Sable island, is east-
ward of the Banquereau ; its northern part is called the middle Ohronnd: all this
part is dangerous owing to the shallowness of the water in the vicinity of the low
island.

CAKBO BAHS.— This bank is nearer the shore of Nova Scotia and Cape
Breton island than those already named: it is W.N.W. of the Misaine and
N.N.E. of the Middle Ground, with least water 33 fathoms.

For further particulars respecting the latter banks see " Directions for the
tfoast of North America— Canso to New York," pp. 60—65.

ROUTE TO NEWFOUNDLAND,
CURRENTS, FOGS, &c.

Vessels bound to St. John's harbour, should keep on the parallel of 46'*, or 1^"
to the southward of the parallel of that port, and until near the outer edge of the
Great Bauk and soundings are obtained in long. 48° 30' or 49° W., should
steer directly to the north-westward for cape Spear; but if bound for the Gulf
of St. Lawrence, they should endeavour to cross the bank in 46' 30', and when
in about long. 65° or 66° shape a course north-westerly for St. Paul's island
or cape North, Breton island.

In thick weather the lead should be kept going when leaving the western edge
of the Green Bank, to ascertain the position by the deep gully of 80 to tfO fathoms,
mud, which runs N.N.E. and S.S.W.i about 60 miles, between St. Pierre and the
Green Bank. The middle of the gulley is in lat. 46° 36' N. ; by sounding in this
gulley, and feeling the edges of the banks on each side of it, a fresh departure
may be obtained.

If making St. Pierre, adopt the following course, which is followed by the
French fishing vessels. From long. 62° W., in lat. 45° N., steer a N.W. course,
across Green Bank in about 48 fathoms water, and when on the meridian of
55° 10' W., in about 45° 50' N., the water will suddenly deepen to 00 fathoms.
A farther run on the same course for about 10 miles, leads across this gully.
when the water will shoal to 35 and 30 fathoms ; and after a farther run of 23
miies steer about N.N.E. directly for the island.

In spring or summer, vessels from Great Britain should keep well to the north-
ward ; for it has been long observed that vessels from the Pentland Firth and the
Clyde, liave always made quicker passages than those from Bristol or the English
channel. During the winter season the American packets always keep well tu
the northward. The preferable course for vessels bound for the Bay of Fundy,
in the summer, is to keep as far to the northward as lat. 47°, until reaching long.
40" W., then to edge away so as to cross the tail of the bank in about lat.
43° 30' N. This route at this season of the year will be more clear of the
numerous fishing vessels that resort to the banks, and perhaps less ice will be
encountered, but a stiict look-out for it is always necessary. After getting west-
ward of the banks, endeavour to keep in lat. 43°, to avoid the northern edge of
the Gulf Stream ; but in the winter the bank should be crossed well to the north-
ward to guard against the north-westers, which blow very heavily.

Two vessels bound to the lower ports in the St. Lawrence have been known to
pass through the Pentland Firth together, in the month of April ; the one had a
passage of 21 days, and the other, the faster sailer, of 7 weeks. In comparing
logs afterwards, it appeared that they were both in about long. 80° W. on the
same day, but the one was about 100 miles to the southward, with a gale at West,
while the other to the northward was running 9 knots, with a fresh gale at N.E.
All the ships which kept to the northward had fine passages.

To these remarks on the passage from England to Newfoundland, the follow-
ing, by a correspondent of the Nautieal Magazine, 1833, p. 829, may prove not
unacceptable :-~

.•''{'

i \

'•

.' ^''

?; ,

'','

t ' '

■» I.

r '-J-

•',', '

: ^1

■('

r ,■■'

■■- ','^,

*. I'N'

h '

::-V''

•■■;i

'■'A

'.''

.r- ::m

ROUTE TO NEWFOUNDLAND

" Althongh the voyage to and from North America, betweon the parallels of

60" and 40°, has always boon attended with a degree of peril, from masses of ice
which drift southward, during the summer months, from the polar re{^ons, yet
many an unwary mariner makes his run across tlio Atlantic without apprehension
of mooting these floating dangers, or without suiricicutly exercising proper discre-
tion and vigilance to guard against collision with thorn. This is not mere
conjecture, but the information of persona who annually perform the voyage,
beside the result of my own observation, in accidents which have repeatedly
ooourred to vessels between Newfoundland and England, and in the number of
missing ships on this route. Shipmasters should therefore bear in mind the
imperative necessity there is for using their utmost vigilance and attention when
crossing the above-named parallels, especially between the meridians of 80° and
00" West, to guard against contact with these formidable dangers of the ocean.

The New York packet ships, well supplied with every essential equipment, and
elegantly fitted for the accommodation of passengers, when making thoir winter
voyage from Liverpool, keep in liigh lutitiiJes until near Newfoundland. This
they do for tho twofold object of avoiding the tempestuous weather so generally
experienced to the southward, and of obtaining fairer winds ; and thus, by slipping
^dthin the mighty stream from the Florida Cliannel, they evade its rettirding
influence. The voyage by tills route is shortened ; and, although bad weather
must be expected, it is not so violent as farther south ; besides which, the eastern
current is avoided. I beUeve it is an unusual thing to meet with ice in this part
of the Atlantic in tho winter; but still it may be met with and on that account
a look-out should be kept in that season, as well as in the summer, by vessels
making the voyage.

■From all accounts it seems that the greatest danger is to be apprehended in
the vicinity of the Banks of Newfoundland ; and this, as every navigator knows
is increased by a dense fog which generally pervades the atmosphere in that
quarter, and, of course, shortens the distance of vision to a very circumscribed
limit."

Pasaas* tbxonsh tb« Strait of Belle Isle. — Some discussion having pre-
viously arisen relative to the eligibility of the Strait of Belle Isle as a route to and
from Quebec, a letter, containing the following remarks, by Captain Ballantine,
appeared in the Nautical Magazine for 18fil. p. 475 : —

" While 1 admit that the Belle Isle route ought to be avoided when there is a
risk of lield-ice being encountered in it, I feel confident that, at all other times, it
is by far the safer route of the two.

Dangers arising from ice, from irregular currents, and from collision with other
vessels are greatly multiplied by dense fogs ; and in these respects tho northern
route has a great advantage over the southern one, for the fogs are seldom of long
continuance in the north, while off capo Kace they form the general rule in the
summer months.

I have no positive data as to the proportion of fogs to clear weather on the
Great Bank and in the vicinity of cape Race ; but my impression is, that fogs
prevail there half of the time during the summer months. They certainly are
very frequent, often of long continuance, and extending at times from 800 to 1000
miles, with scarcely a break in them.

Danger from icebergs can be, in a great measure, avoided by going slow or
stopping altogether if the fog is very dense. But in the ice track, and that of
many vessels at the same time, even extreme caution does not insure safety ; for,

STRAIT OF BELLE ISLE.

by going dead slow or stopping altogether, to avoid Soylla yon may fiJl into
Cliorybdis, or rathor Charybdia may fall into you, in the shape of a ship running
into a steamer amidships, her weakest and most dangerous part. But icebergs
won't nin into a steamer if a steamer does not run into them. Danger from ice-
bergs is ranch less than danger from other vessels in their vicinity.

Tltere is, perhaps, not above a score of vessels pass to and from Europe by the
I Belle Isle route in the whole season. There are no fishermen outside the strait,
and few inside, in the steamer's track. But by the southern route over the Great
Bank, they are very numerous, many of them of considerable size, with large
crews on board for fishing purposes. Then a great proportion of the United
States traffic, by steamers and sailing vessels, pass over that track, as well as the
Now Brunswick and Nova Scotia trade from Europe, and all the Gulf of St.
I Lawrence trade from Europe, less the few by Belle Isle.

The Quebec fleets alone average over 1000 vessels a season, and aU these shipa
I and steamers pass over this south track, which by usage is not very broad, and a
portion of it is obstructed by field-ioe in the early summer, and by icebergs
{t\ 'oughout all the summer months.

)auger arising from irregular currents is alike common to both routes. Fre-
Idem from danger arising from sailing in the vicinity of land is also in favour of
tlie Belle Isle route, for the distance by that route is 220 miles less than by cape
■ Race, 125 of which is the coasting part of the passage. If some parts '^^ the
I coast of Labrador are more dangerous than the south coast of Newfoundland,
both are dangerous in thick weather, if too closely shaved. In clear weather
I there is danger in neither, and clear weather is much more prevalent on the
I Labrador coast than on the south coast of Newfoundland.

The strait of Belle Isle is only 80 miles long, it is some 10 miles broad at its
I narrowest part ; the passage is free from rooks, except one or two close to the
I shore. There are soundings throughout, and in many parts a vessel can anchor
if necessary. There are also several harbours in the strait; Forteau bay, a
I spacious one. The^e are first-rate lights at each end. The Canadian Govern*
ment are about to erect another on cape Whittle, the worst part of the Labrador
I coast.

If the strait be attempted too early there is a risk of more field-ice being met

I with outside Belle Isle on the north route than on the south one, and this is the

only real advantage that the south route has over the north one, in my opinion.

For although the icebergs are more numerous north than south, there is little

risk incurred when a steamer can go slowly in a fog without any danger from

■ other vessels. In 1867, the strait was clear of field ice on April 9th ; in 1868, on

I Jime 10th ; in 1859, on May 12th ; for 1860 I have no data at hand ; this year it

I was after June 4th, and it was in considerable quantities 150 miles east of Belle

lisle on July 6th ; I am not aware if any has been seen since. But thisia an

I exceptional bad year for ice both north and south, the worst since 1856.

Lieut. Ashe seeing icebergs near Belle Isle on Aug. 7th, is not a snffident
[reason for the passage of the strait being avoided until September, for icebergs
I do not block the way as field-ice frequently does, and by waiting until June is over,
I the risk of encountering field-ice is very small indeed. We might as well avoid
■going south of cape Race, for there will be icebergs on that route in a season like
jthis until the end of September. Even as a general rule, icebergs are encountered
|on both routes throughout the summer and autumn months."

Admiral Bayfield, however, in the same magazine, p. 511, writes as follows:—

■ ■ f w\

V .

'...;■- *'

',t-. -'tl
. , ■ ■ /■• (

' •. ' ■ 'I

■m

y"fj

,AjL:M

ROUTE TO NEWFOUNDLAND.

** I was oonsolted years ago respecting the passage through the strait of BeOe I
Isle, and gave my decided opinion that the advantage of a few miles less distance
from Liverpool to Quebec was not a sufficient compensation for the danger of |
passing through a strait 66 miles long, and in its narrowest part only 9 miles
wide, and which may be full of icebergs at any season of the year. In August,
1833, I couijited no less than 200 bergs and large pieces of ice in the strait. In
the following year 6 or 7 large bergs were all that could be seen in the same
month. I once found the western entrance of the strait to freeze across i^ a calm
night on June 20th. which will give you some idea of the climate. Of course, it
was only a very thin covering of ice, which disappeared soon after sunrise. The
main entrance of the Gulf, between Cape Breton and Newfoundland, is free from
ice, excepting in the spring of the year.

As to the proper time of passing the strait, I think the fall of the year — after
the middle of August — the least dangerous, because then northerly winds, atten-
ded with clear weather and smooth water, are more frequent ; whereas in June,
July, and the early part of August, southerly and easterly winds and fog prevail,
and render the ice far more dangerous."

Vteintty of Cap* Bae*. — In reference to the approach to cape Race, and
the currents and soundings off that headland, the following information was com-
municated to the Admiralty by Captain J. Orlebar, R.N.

Currents — Although the current between the Grand Bank and Newfoundland
commonly sets to the W.I^.W., sometimes at a rate of nearly one mile per hour,
it is not always so, and near the shore, in moderate weather, it even changes with
the tide. At these times during the flood it runs to the S.W., and during the ebb
to the N.E., the former being the stronger. Westward of cape Race, it must also
be remembered that the current, so frequently setting to the N.W. one mile per
hour in the ofBng, is not invariable in strength or direction, but is affected greatly
by the prevailing wind. It is observed generally to mn in upon the eastern side
of the great buys indenting the south coast of Newfoundland, and out on their
western side. In the offing it is influenced by the winds, and near the shore it is
also altered and influenced by the tides ; so that during spring tides, the stream
of ebb runs weekly to the S.E., and the stream of flood to the N.W., the latter
sometimes two miles per hour round the headlands.

Vessels coming from the eastward in thick weather, if sounding carefully,
will probably cross the Ballard bank, which lies parallel to the shore, and
is about 16 miles long, varying from one to five miles in width. A careful
comparison of the soundings thus obtained with those on the new Admiralty
chart will show tlie position of the vessel with sufficient accuracy to enaUe the
navigator to round cape Race without danger.

For instance, if after sounding in about 80 fathoms, on« cast of comparatively
shoal water (that is from 30 to 12 fathoms) should be obtained, and afterwards
should the depth increase to 40 fathoms, it may be concluded that the vessel has
passed over the narrow part of the Ballard bank, and is to the northward of cape
Race, and the course should be changed accordingly.

But, if shoal water under 80 fathoms continue for 5 miles, and after deepening
sUghtly should again become shoal, the vessel may be safely concluded to be on
the southern part of the bank, and therefore sou^ of cape Race, and her coarse
to the westwsdHl may be continued with confidence.

A Tessel from westward in thick weather may round cape Pine and cape
Race with perfect safety, if only attention be given to the lead. The water aboals

FOGS, CURRENTS, 4o.

1ft

gradually to the shore, and at the distance of 10 miles there is not more than
40 fathoms, so that by maintaining a depth of more than 90 fathoms no risk can

I be incurred. !

It is to be regretted that there is no well marked difference in the nature of

[the soundings off these headlands that would show the position of a vessel, the

I bottom being generally rock, with shells of the sea-egg, gray sand, and small
stones predominating.
roKs.— The banks are frequently enveloped in dense fogs, which, from the

I middle of spring to December, have been known to last 8 and 10 days successively ;
at such times they are often so thick that it is scaruely possible to see an object
10 fathoms distant ; a continual drizzling rain is dropping from the sails and
rigging, a general calm prevails, and sometimes attended with a considerable
swell of the sea, so that there is constant fear of running foul of some vessels, or
of being drifted by the currents upon some danger. The currents which surround
Newfoundland are frequently so strong and irregular, sometimes tending towards
the shore and sometimes towards the sea, that the greatest caution will always be
found necessary ; while the current coming from the northern regions sweeps
along the shores of Labrador, and, in the spring, detaches immense icebei|[8,
which float southward, and become exceedingly dangerous, especially in foggy

[weather; some of these masses will frequently be grounded in 40 or 60 fathoms
water, and others will be met with farther out to seaward, at the distance of 125
or 130 leagues from the land. Fortunately these formidable objects may generally
be discovered, even in dark weather, by a white and bright appearance of the sky
above them, and also by the roar of the waters breaking against thenk ; they also
may be apprehended by the intense coldness they diffuse to a great distance
around them ; they continue and are usually met with as late as June, July, and
August. Any wind may bring a fog but it is more persistent and thicker with

I winds between S.E. and S.W. than from any other quarter.

The approach towards the Banks may be known by the numerous sea fowls.

I The greet fishery commences in May and continues till the latter end of Sep-

I tember^

Cun?«nta, *e. — The Polar or Arctic current which in summer brings the ice

{ from Davis strait pursues its course from north to south along the Labrador eoest

I find thence along the N.E. coast of Newfoundland. To the northward of the
'?reat Bonk it assumes a W.S.W. dLection, and after doubling cape Race take* a
jiore westerly one, often attaining a velocity of a knot an hour. In its progress

I it deflects the Gulf Stream more to the eastward.

The following observauons from the French chart of the Banks are by M.

I Lavaud of the French Navy ; —

" The direction of the currents at the north and south, and on the eastern

I approach to the Great Bank, varies little from E.S.E. to S.S.E. (true), and is
generally between these points ; its velocity is seldom less than 8 to 10 miles in
the 24 hours, and sometimes increases to 24 or 30 miles. Mariners should observer
that outside all the Banks, and especially off the south part of the Great Book,
the currents boil and foai such strong eddies, that a vessel becalmed, or with
light winds, cannot estimato her position with exactness; this ia probably

I occasioned by the edge of the v>nlf Stream.

The currents on the Great l^ank h'*ve a variable direction, of which the mad

I is not the only cause, as it is, at ti les, in a different direction. The fishennea
state, that the current every <^.ay irakes the round of the compass ; and it is found
by dose observation, that bryond the meridian of cape Raee it is mostly to th»
westward."

■■m

j^^;:«r'

■ft •■' 't(-

CURUENTS, WINDS, Ac.

Mr. B. Bursell of Si John's, Newfonndland, in a letter to the Wnvontib
Magazine, in 1800, makes the following observations on the currents in the strait
of Belle Isle, and on the south-west and south coasts of Newfoundland :-—

" From cape Bauld to cape Norman, at the entrance to the strait of Belle Isle,
there is a current at times setting to the. eastward, notwithstanding that the
arrows on the charts indicate a general set to the westward. After passing cape
Norman, being a few miles to the north-west of it, the yacht (the Bishop of |
Newfoundland's) was carried in the course of 12 hours (August), during a dead
ealm, as for as Forteau bay ; we passed the icebergs in the strait as if going 2|
knots per hour : it is a wonder more vessels are not lost in these parts, consider-
ing the foggy state of the atmosphere, the numerous icebergs aground and afloat,
and the uncertain strength and direction of the currents.

In beating up the Gulf of St. Lawrence, from Blanc Sablon to the Meccattinas,
it is best to work up on the Labrador shore, as the tide sets strongly down the
Gulf on the Newfoundland shore : I have proved both.

Leaving God Roy and bound round cape Ray to the southward, I found the
current very variable. I was becalmed 9 miles off cape Ray the whole of one day,
and was carried to the north-west at the same time that a schooner, also becalmed,
but more in-shore, was taken to the southward out of sight ; the next day, haul-
ing in, I could not make headway to the southward in her track with two knots
of a fair wind. The fishermen told me that, within ,3 or 4 miles of the land, the
currents hereabout are verytimcertain, setting for lays alongshore in one direction,
and then suddenly changing to an opposite course ; at the same time, in the offing;
there is a constant set to the S.W. Along the whole line of coast to cape Race I
found the current not only strong but irregular.

On the north side of Fortune bay the current sets strongly to the westward ;
on the south side it sets as strongly to the eastward.

From point May past the Lamalin islanJs to St. Lawrence harbour, the
current is not only irregular, but there are breakers in many places fully 3 miles
off-shore ; in the channel between the Lamalins and St. Pierre island, and thence
to Miquelon island, it is impossible to rely on its direction, it varies so greatly;
on this account accidents frequently occur."

Winds. — On the east and south coast of,the island of Newfoundland the winds
most generally found are from South, from May till October. They are, however,
very changeable, and generally moderate during this period. Nevertheless, there
are occasional squalls from S.E., with rain and fog, which latter is especially
prevalent in July and August. The N.W. winds which sometimes blow are dry
and cold, ani* generally attended with a clear sky. In October these winds be-
come strong. S.W. winds are also found here, but very variable in force at all
times of the year.

On this part of the American coast S.E. winds are analogous to those from
S.W on the coast of Europe.

In January — ^W.N.W., weather generally fine ; Febmary-^'West and E.N.E.,
with much snow ; March — West and East, with snow and rain, April — variable
generally fine ; May — variable, generally fine ; June— variable, generally fine ;
July — variable, generally fine; August — variable, generally fine; September-
variable, with rain and cloudy weather ; October — E.N.E., with snow and rain;
November — S.S.E., snow ; and in December — ^W.N.W., weather variable.

Ze«.— The following remarks upon ico in the North Atlantic are by Mr. W. C.
Bedfield;—

ICE.

e westward ;

<< Of the various dangera which beset the path of the mariner, perhaps there ars
none which excite to more vigilance than the known or expected proximity of ioe.
In some frequented portions of the Atlantic Ocean the ice appears almost every
year, in the various forms of field-ice, floes, and massive ice-islands, drifted from
the arctic regions by the constant action of the polar currents. These ice-bearing
currents, in flowing towards the South must necessarily incline towards the
western limits of the Ocean, owing to the increased velocity of the diurnal rota-
tion of the earth's surface as we depart from the poles ; a law well understood as
regards the currents of air which form the trade winds. Hence it is that on and
near the banks these ice currents are found to cross the usual track of vessels
bound from the ports of Europe to North America.

The quantity of ioe which appears on this route of navigation in different years,
is exceedingly various. It is sometimes seen as early in the year as January,
and seldom later than the month of August. From March to July is its most
common season. It is found most frequently west of long. 44° and eastward of
long. 52° ; but icebergs are sometimes met with as far eastward as long. 40% and
in some rare cases even still further towards Europe.

Experience has shown that fhe proximity of ice is fax less hazardous than rocks
or shoals : and this floating danger would be still less formidable were it not for
the fogs and mists which it often causes. The thermometer has been often held
up as affording sure indications of an approach to ice, by the reduction of tem-
perature shown both in the air and water, and these indications are important
and should by no means be neglected. But there may be many cases of approach
to ice where a reliance upon the thermometer alone could not afford security.

Although little or no ioe be seen in one passage, or even in many times crossing
the Atlantic, yet it has been frequently met in such quantities as seemed to indi-
cate a vast or indefinite extension of the ice-fields, towards the polar Beas."

.'if>

-^ v-,^

it . '. •-
I?,.- ■

ir ■■ ■■'.

CAPE BONAVISTA TO BAOCALIEU ISLAND—
TKINITY BAY, &c.

Tbe boundaries of Trinity bay are usually considered to be Horse Chops point
•on the west, in lat. 48° 21' N., long. 53° 12i' W., and Grates point on the east, in
lat. 46° 10' N., long. 62° 66 i' W. ; but for the purposes of our description it is
more convenient to consider cape Bonavista and Baccalieu island ^3 the proper
limits. Between the two first mentioned points of land the distance is 15 miles,
and the bay extends 50 miles in a W.S.W. direction, being eyerywhere very
deep and its shores having off them few outlying dangers.

Viewed from eastward the most remarkable feature north of the entrance to
Trinity bay is Burnt ridge (a tcble land 4 miles south of Cape Bonavista)
which is 600 feet above the sea, nearly 100 feet higher than the land in its
imm&£ate vicinity, and 300 feet above the general elevation both north and
south of it. As the land i6 approached Largent hill, north of it, becomes visible,
then Qreen bay head, and lastly cape Bonavista lighthouse and Gull island off |
it. From the north-east, Green ridge (the north part of Burnt ridge) will
probably be the first land seen, but Bonavista lighthouse, if the weather be
cloudy ; this building may be seen from a distance of 14 miles.

OJUPB BOITA'irZBTA and lAgbt. — Cape Bonavista, the lighthouse on which
is in lat. 48° 41' 56" N., long. 63° 5' 10" W., is a bold cliffy point having a depth
off it of 4 fathoms at a very moderate distance from its base, which rapidly
deepens to 15 and 30 fathoms, the latter being at the distance of about a mile
from it in a north-easterly direction. The lighthouse, a square tower 36 feet
high painted in red and wliite vertical stiipes, shows a revolvimj light 150 feet
above the sea, visible in every direction seaward at the distance of 16 miles * ; if
kept well open of Spiller point it leads clear of the Flower rock, the most
dangerous of the suiilcen rocks off the const southward of the cape, and all the
other dangerous outlying rocks in its vicinity.

The bottom in the neighbourhood of cape Bonavista is very uneven, especially
within the depth of 30 fatlioms. The outermost bank, known as Harry Ground,
is distant 4, miles from the lighthouse in a N.N.E. J E. direction.

Barry Oronnd, — Harry ground is more than 'i^ miles in length in a W.S.W.
and E.N.E. direction, and IJ miles in breadth. It consists of a bank of 20 j
to ilO fathoms, having upon it several rocky patches of 7 feet to 16 fathoms water j
which bear the names respectively of Old Harry, Young Harry, Kelp, Middle
and Eastern rocks. Within half a mile of the north, east, and west sides of the j
bank the depth is 50 to 60 fathoms.

Old Harry, the southern rock of Harry giound, has 7 feet water on it ; it lies

* Ca))*) Bonavista light appears red and white alternately.
15 seconcls luid eclipsed KO Bcconds.

It is visible during

CAPE LARGENT. DOLLARMAN BANK, &o.

IN.N.E. ^ E. distant 4f'a miles from Bonavista lighthouse, and N.E. by E. from
1 Stone islet. Young Harry, the northern rock, has 4 fathoms on it, and lies
In.E. i N. 6t\ miles from the lighthouse, and N.E. by E. from Stone isl6t.
XKelp rock with 21 fathoms on it, lies S.W. J W. 3 cables from Young Harry.
IMidtlle rock has 8 fathoms on it, and lies S.W. ^ W. 1^ miles from Young
[Harry and nearly midway between it and Old Harry. Eastern rock, two-thirds
I of a mile south-eastward from Middle rock, has a depth over it of 7 fathoms.

Bonavista lighthouse, bearing S.W. by W., leads eastward of these dangers ;
[the same building S.S.W. leads westward of them. A vessel to the north-east of
lYoung Harry should keep the angle between Largent hill and the west end of
■Green ridge less than 7 degrees. In foggy weather, and the position of the
Ivessel well known, close with Gull island, as there are no dangers in the imme:-
Idiate vicinity of cape Bonavista to affect a ship in moderate weather, the Old
I Harry being 3 miles from tliat island. »

Bocks with less than 5 fathoms water on them break with a moderate sea,
Ithose from 5 to 10 fathoms break with a heavy sea, and those with 10 to 16 fa-
|tboms break after heavy gales from seaward.

BacMs Bock, 4iie. — Dacres rock, with 9 fathoms water on it, lies N.N.E. i E.
Idistant S^'a miles from cape Bonavista lighthouse. The Skimmerton ground,
■with 12 fathoms. East (southerly) 1-^ miles from the lighthouse ; and the East
\Brandy, with 7 fathoms on it, S.E. I E. l^V miles from the lighthouse.

Onll Island. — GuU island is a cable in extent and 117 feet high : it is distant
|6 cables N. f E. from cape Bonavista lighthouse, and the channel between it and
■the land is clear of danger except near the respective shores. A rook 2 fathoms
lunder water lies S.W. a cable from the island ; and another, with less than 6 feet
|over it, 2 cables westward from the cape but close to the land.

OAPB XiABOBnT, — From cape Bonavista to Spiller point, a distance of
iu.j miles in a S. i W. direction, the coast is of cliff, falling a mile back to several
Ismail bays, which afford no anchorage. SpUIer point is a flat-topped cliff with
[several remarkable small but high detached rocks off it, the highest being 121 feet
labove the sea. Gape Largent, a mile further to the south, is a shelving point
Iwith the extremity cut off from the main part of the land by a deep rent, and at
la short distance off it is a small rock just above the water. The hiU witliin the
Ipoint is 433 feet above the sea and remarkable, being separated from Burnt
Iridge by a deep valley, and rising more than 200 feet above the flat cliffs of the
■coast.

Bird Xslrnd Oot*. — A mile south of cape Largent is Bird island cove, which
laffords no shelter, but it is a good station whence cod fishing in boats may be
carried on.

The North Bird island, 1{ miles southward of cape Largent, is small and 130
|feet high. The South Bird island, half a mile south of North Bird island,

also small, and 124 feet high.

Flowers point is 4 miles southward from cape Largent. The coast between
this point and North head, 3 miles to the southward, is flat with steep cliffs and
bends inward forming a bay three-quarters of a mile deep.

poTiTiABBIAW baxvx. — The coast from cape Bonavista southward is bordered
by an irregular rocky bank, known as the Dollarman bank, wliich is considered

1 excellent fishing ground. Upon this, from the depth of 20 fathoms at its north-
east end (S.E. i E. distant 5^% miles from Bonavista lighthouse) to 1^ miles off
^orth head, are numerous rocks 7 to 10 fathoms under water on which the sea

8 ♦

■i. , " ,-

ny.v

CAPE BONAVISTA TO BAOCALIEU ISLAND.

brflaka after an easterly gale ; it is therefore advisable in bad weather to pass
eastward of the Haypooks, the outer danger, by keeping Bonaviata lighthouse
westward of N.N.W., or Largent hill open of North Bird island, until Skerries
hill (westward of Gatalina harbour) bears northward of W. by N., when a vessel
may steer more to tho westward.

OATAUniA BASBOVa. — Gatalina harbour at the north side of the entrance
to Trinity bay, is good for small vessels; it is dangerous to approach
and should not be attempted by a stranger. The Feather rook (6 foihoAs under
water) bears from Green island lighthouse S.E., distant nearly 4 miles. The
Skerriet, a rock with 6 fathoms over it, bears from the lighthouse E. i S., distant
61 miles, and 11 miles farther out in the same direction is th^ Haypoohs, with
6 fathoms on it. The Morris rock, with 32 feet over it, bears from the liglithouse
S.S.W. \ W., distant one mile. The Poor shoal (a mile in length E. by N. and
W. by S., and lying between one and 2 miles about E. \ N. from the Iight)ioust>)
has 22 feet water on it; orer this the sea breaks heavUy in easterly gales.
Besides the Brandies shoal (4 feet under water) which is nearly three-quarters of |
a mile in length and faces the mouth of the harbour and the Charlton rock (f( feet
under water) nearly midway in the entrance, there is the White rock at about
120 yards from the south shore, half a mile within Burnt point*

The entrance of the harbour is formed between Shepherd point on the north
and Burnt point on tlie south, and is barely \\\ cables wide ; whilst about half a
milf farther in between Wliite rock and Goodland point north of it, it is less than
3 cables across. Within, one part of the harbour (known as the North-east j
arm) runs in that direction more than half a mile ; and another part (named the
South-west arm) extends a mile in that direction. The houses are scattered |
along the north-west or inner shore of the North-east arm, and at the head of the
South-west arm is the watering place.

Vessels drawing U feet water will find excellent anchorage, mud bottom, in the j
North-east arm. A swell sets up the South-west arm after heavy gales, but nqt j
so as to endanger vessels ; the anchorage here is in 4 fothoms, mud.

Light. — On Green island, at the south side of the entrance, is a white lighthouse j
having a red roof, which exhibits at 02 feet above high water a fixed white light, |
visible in clear weather at a distance of 15 miles.

The entrance to C'atalina harbour will be recognised by the lighthouse on Green |
island. As the sea breaks heavily on the shoals and rocks in front of the har-
bour diu-ing and immediately alter easterly gales, the approach at such times is I
difficult and dangerous. The fishermen are trustworthy pilots, and may nearly
always be met with off tlie )iarbour during day. To enter between the south-west
end of the Brandies shud (which generally breaks) and Oreen island, — after
clearing the outer dangers, steer in witli Burnt point in Une with the chui'ch onj

• A rook, 12 feet under water, lies 2 cables W. by N. \ N. from the Charlton, and l\
cables S.E. ^ £. from the extremity of Goodland point. From it the centre of Mannel
inland is in one with Goodland point bearing N.W. by W., and the white spire of the
Episcopal church is on with a rock westward of a grey sandy beach N.N. W. | W. To I
pass southward of it, the whole of Manuel islet should appear open of Goodland point.

A 2J-fathoni rock lies a cable S.W. i S. from Goodland point ; and, another rook, the!
Lowe, 2 fivtlionis under water, lies on the southern side of the harbour at rather more |
than a cable Irou) the uortherii point of South-east cove, with Goodland point bearing N.E.

RAGGED HARBOUR. &c.

tlie sliore of the North-east arm N.W. f N., until the lighthoiwe bears W<>st ;
then steer about N.N.W. and round Burnt point, keeping the low grasHy iulct
of Manuel partly open of Goodland point, so as to avoid th^ Charlton rock, and
8teer mid -channel up the Sontli-west arm.*

To enter northward of the Brandies — steer in with Goodland point in line with
tlie church on the north shore of the Suuth-west arm, until Careen island \iir)>t-
house bears nearly S.W. by S. ; then tsteer towards Burnt point until Mauuel
islet is partly open, and proceed as befoi-e.

It is high water full and change, at 7li. : springs rise 6 feet, and neaps 4 feet.

B«cK«d Barbon*. — Ragged harbour, a small harbour about H miles south-
westward from Green island, is so named from the rough and craggy appearance
of the islets that shelter it, and as these are more or less connected togetlier by
rooks, entrance to the harbour is far from easy for strangers. The depth within
is 2i to <)| fathoms, and protection against southerly and south-easterly winds
(and the heavy sea sometimes accompanying them) is nifordcd by tlie islets.
Vessels entering must go northward of the islets and thciL* connecting reef, run-
ning on north, until the harbour comes quite open, then steer in between the
round island near the main, and a large black rock (the outermost of the ragged
ones before mentioned) until westward of them all, or until the south head of
Catalina appears between the westernmost rock and the main, when they may
anchor. A river of good water is at the head of the harbour.

From Ragged harbour the coast trends in a W.S.W. direction about 10 mik's
to a prominent headland named Horse Chops, which is the most easterly part of
the land forming Trinity harbour, and rises to the height of 266 feet ; iu the
space between there is no inlet nor place of shelter. Green bay head, a bluff
91 miles south-westward from Catalina harbour and 2\ miles from Horse Chops
point is often the tirst land observed when bound for Trinity bay, if Baccalieu island
or light has not been seen. In bad weati at night or in a heavy sea, a stranger
should not approach the coast nenrer than 7 miles while northward or eastward
of cupe Bonavista ; nor any part of the land as far to the south-west as Catalina.

Under (westward of) Green bay head, is Green bay, which is open and exposed
to southerly wmds. At its eastern part there is a small sandy beach with a
rivulet. Vessels anchor here only when the weatiier is very fine and with the
wind off the land.

From Green bay head the coast to Horse Chops point and round to English
head, a distance of 5i miles, is high land, steep-to, and clear of danger.

Snglish Bay and Salmon Cot* — English head, the southern point of , English
bay, is a bold point 100 feet high and having a depth almost close to it of (i feet
to 4 fathoms. In the bay is a depth of 4 to il fatlioms, and shelter fro'n uU winds
except those from west^vard and south-westward ; vessels usually anchor off the
church in 6 to Oi fathoms, gravel and mud.

Salmon Cove rues in northerly from English bay, its western side being formed
by Fox island, which is joined to the northern shore by a very narrow neck of low
land. It is a good fishing place, clear of sunken dangers, and from 17 to 10 and
H fathoms deep. Its eastern shore is bold, and at its northern end tlicro
is a small run of water, wliich extends a considerable distance inland. Vessels ut

iflii'' ■ '

if •!■■

1 '•

ii.-- ;

.* ,

> "

'v'.

^^:';r

■* ;

i'.,):'.-

I,*

'' " v^r

■■■ V-

•>'''J-

'.-

-■« ■■\'-.

•i

:v:-k

:i'

'*', ■'.':.

<;,

l4:' ';.:'

>.'

■■■•'% '

,'t

!.?"".■.

>■■; '. .

■■^

•• :' .V

■A,' v'..

j. ..-

'■' :

J- ■> ■

^■■'v

:':'■

i ..K

/ ,-

■ ,

.. ,»■

* A detaohed rook, about 10 feet higli, lies 20 yards off Burnt point,
tends half a cable from the point.

Shoal water ex-

CAPE BONA VISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND.

anohor near the head of the cove, in 5^ to 10 fathoms mud, are sheltered from
almost all winds.

BeMnliood Bay. — Robinhood bay is on the western side of Fox islaoid. Its
flntranoe is a mile wide between Fox head (on the east side) and Skerwink head
(on the west), and the bay thence extends northward nearly 2 miles, gradually
decreasing iti width to its head. The depth in midchannel at the entrance is 2(1
fathoms, and at its head 6 to 5 fathoms. Vessels sometimes anchor here to fish,
in 7 to 17 fathoms, but «re exposed to winds between South and S.W. ^

On the west side of the entrance to Robinhood bay is a group of rocks about 40
feet high known as the Skerwink rocks, almost close to which is a depth of 4
fathoms. A sunken ledge of 2i fathoms, the Fox rock, also lies a cable southward
from Fox head, the east point of entrance. The only danger in the bay, with the
exception of these and the ledges jutting out from various parts of the shore on
each side, is a 3^ fathom patch in mid-channel at about a cable from the head of
the bay. If therefore a vessel keeps midway from the shores when proceeding
up the bay no danger whatever will be incurred.

TBHrXTT SABBOVB. — Trinity harbour lies westward of tlie point of land of
which Skerwink head is the southern extremity, and is considered one of the best
and largest in Newfoundland. It is surrounded by hills ranging from 200 to .'(80
feet above the sea. A high rocky irregular peninsula extending from the western
side of the harbour, divides it into two portions, known as the North-west and
South-west arms, in each of which are several small bays and coves. On the
lower part of the peninsula facing the south-east are scattered the houses com-
posing the town, and along shore are the several wliarfs.

A narrow strip of land which projects half a mile in a north-westerly direction
from the base of Salvage hill on the south-west side of tlie entrance interlocks
Skerwink head outside it, and thus completely protects tlie South-west arm and
nearly land-locks the whole harbour. At the termination of this strip of land
is a small islet 20 feet high, named Admirals island, and 1^ cables north of the
latter, is a sunken ledge of If fathoms, known as the Mussel rock. Within the
islet and rock a tongue of sand extends from the shore Ij cables to the north.

Jutting out from the eastern shore, a quarter of a mile mthin Skerwink head,
are the Herring rocks, between wliich and Admirals island (about the narrowest
part of the entrance) tlie distance is 2^ cables.

The depth in mid-channel of the entrance is 20 to 11 and 16 fathoms. Vessels
bound in should keep in mid-way, and give the Mussel rock (whose position is al-
most always ckTly indicated by discoloured water) a berth ; they can afterwards
anchor in any convenient spot, and be sheltered from almost all winds, — the
bottom throughout is of tough clay, mud and gravel.

Trinity church is inlat. 48° 22' 4" N., long. 53° 21' 33" W. It is high water,
full and change at 7h. 10m. ; springs rise ;U feet, neaps 2 feet.

Bonaventnre Bead, — From Trinity li;nl)our to lioniiveuturc bond, the iioilli
point of entrance to Smith sound, tlic liistauce is o miles iu a S.W. by W.
direction ; the coast between is irregular a id forms several coves, the principal of I
which are named Cuckold, Trouty and Spaniards,— the two last-mentioned have
a depth of 4 to 10 fathoms and are exposed to eastward. Bonaventure head is a
bold blufif 537 feet high, having several clilTy rocks off its southern side.

BMXTB 80VKD. — The enti-ance to Smith sound lies between Bonaventure
head (with the coast westward of it) on the north side, and the island known as
Irelands Eye (with its outlying islets, the Ragged islands) on the south side, and

BRITISH HARBOUR, Ac.

eltared frnm

is from 1 to 1} miles wide. The soand thence extends 26 miles between the
north shore of Random island an4 tlie main to the narrow channel at its head,
which separates it from the North-west arm of llaudom sound ; its breadth variea
from a half to 1^ miles, and the shores are steep and rocky until near the head.
tlie hills near the coast rising 400 to 700 feet. In the lower reaches the depth is
60 to 80 fathoms, and the shores are so steep that no spot can be recommebded
fur anchorage, except the various small harbours near the entrance.

liagijed Islands. — These, the north-eastern of the islets at the entrance to
Smith sound, cover a space of cables east and west by Ik cables. They are 115
feet high with a ragged and barren appearance, and their eastern extremity is 21
miles W. by S. h S. from the south side of Bonaventure head. Off their south
side there is a dangerous rock, known as the Ragged rock, which dries 2 feet aft
low water springs ; it lies with the east extreme of the islands bearing N.E. \ E.
distant half a mile, and the west extreme N.N.W. ^ \V. half a iniie ; and should
not be approached on its east side nearer than When New Bonaventure church
comes in line with the east end of Ragged islands ; — Wolf head in line with the
west end of the islands leads westward of it.

Old Bonavanttixe. — Maiden point, at about a mile W.N.W. from the south part
of Bonaventure head, has on its west side (separated by a narrow channel) a
small flat-topped inaccessible islet with detached rocks extending half a mile
from its south side. Between the head and the islet is Old Bonaventure inlet
which runs N,W., about a mile, and is 14 to fathoms deep. Here small vessels
anchor vtithin two islets, the western of which is 20 feet high and the eastern 10
feet, in 6 or 7 fathoms, mud. On either side of these islets there is a channel half
a cable wide ; the western is 4 fathoms deep, the centre 9 fathoms, and the
eastern fathoms. The anchorage is about 2 cables in extent and is sheltered by
the islets from the heavy sea sometimes sent in by southerly winds.

Cat Cove. — Northward of Maiden islet is Cat cove, an inlet about 2 cables wide,
and having a depth of 8 to 15 fathoms, sand and shells. It affords no anchorage,
and is exposed to southerly winds.

Mew Bonaventure. — Between Maiden islet and Wolf head, 1 j miles westward
from the islet, are New Bonaventure bay. Broad cove, and Kerley harbour, all ex-
tending in about a mile, but open to the S.E. At the head of New Bonaventure bay
and 1^ cables from the shore there is a rocky patch 3 fathoms under water. The
village of New Bonaventure is at the head of the bay on the aastern shore, and
the church on its left is in a commanding position and a remarkable object. The
settlement was formed for the purpose of cultivation, and although the bay is not
at all times safe for shipping, the ice does not form so soon, and breaks up earlier
than at Old Bonaventure. Broad cove rocks, on the west side of New Bona-
venture bay and in the entrance to Broad cove, dry 2 feet at low water springs.
New Bona venture church bearing northward of N.E. by E., and well open of the
point opposite the village leads eastward of them.

Kerley Harbour. — Kerley harbour is an inlet half a mile loTig in a N.N.W.
direction, and a cable wide, with a depth of 23 fathoms at tlie entrance gruduully
shoaling to its head. It is separated from New Bonaventure and Broad cove by
White point, which is low and slopes fi'om the hills within it ; these are about
300 feet high— the point is steep-to.

British Harbour. — Between Wolf head and British harbour point, 1^
miles westward from it, the coast consists of a remarkable flat topped clitf, the
coutral part of which (from its appcai'ance of being artificiiil) is known as liattorv

■'i--

• V

ik- '

P^:^:

;'t,T

i- "

■*^.

-•^■^ ■■;

:;^i?

•4

•■'■{'■'

%■<

■u'\ *' ■

iil

*' ;•'

^v.

, f

♦ V .*'

V^'^

*i- '

"tl .

i^..>-

f ■". ,

?,i

>.-■"■ :■■■

Iff

f;'

t.' ;

*■'

$■

ii';

i?1-/'

OAPE BONAVIBTA TO BAOOALIEU ISLAND.

point ; anil Hm behind it stenp bniren hills nOO and 700 feet high. British
harbonr is formed between the point of this namo and West point, a small steep
rooky promontory, steep-to, half a mile west of it. The harbour runs in north-
ward about a mile, and at about three-quarters of a mile from the entrance
dscreaMs to a cable in width ; it is here 7 fathoms deep— within these narrows is
the aoiohorage in 10 or 12 fathoms, mud, over a space of 1) cables. The head of
the harbour forms into three littlo bays, on the shores of which are the houses of
the fishermen.

A rook i feet under water lies outside the narrows at half a cable from the
easteru shore. It may be avoided by keeping the western shore aboard.

Vop« Bavbenr. — From West point to Pope harbour, rather more than If
miles, the coast is broken and rocky ; midway is Derby cove, where there are a
few houses and fishing stages beliind a small peninsula ; and a rock 8 feet under
water lies half a ouble ofif a small cove 8 cables east of P«>pe harbour. At the
entrance to Pope harbour tliere are two rocks above water, the western of wliioh
is 18 feet high ; and there are other rooks (uncovered) eastward of the above
near the shore within Wont j^oiut. The two western channels formed by these
rooks are a little more than a cable wide with deep water. Inside, the harbour
opens out to half a mile east and west by a quarter of a mile wide, and has a depth
of 4 and 6 fathoms water, mud.

A Bunkeh rock with shoal water around it lies three-quarters of a cable off the
centre of the north shore,' and another rook lies about the same distance off the
east shore. A largo stream runs into the harbour on tlie uortli ; it drains a con-
siderable tract of country, and good-sized spars are brought down by it. On the
western side of the harbour there is a snug basin *i cables east and west, three-
quarters of a cable wide, and three fathoms deep, known as Round harbour i the
entrance to it is narrow with 2 fathoms water.

Immediately over the went shore of Pope harbour there is a remarkable hill,
bearing the name of Indian Look-out. Its summit is a steep cliff 506 feet high.

Blekfluui Islands. — Tliia is a group of islets and rocks, half a mile westward
from Pope harbour, which extends rather more than half a mile parallel to the
shore ; tlie eastern and liighest is \)S feet high. The islets are separated from the
coast by a channel i cables wide and '20 to '20 fathoms deep ; at half a cable firom the
main aro two rocks, one uncovers, the other has less than one fathom water on it.

fyi^v— « Bailtonr. — Hickman harbour is a narrow inlet, fronted by the Hick-
man islets. It is half a oable wide at tlie entrance, and 4 fatlioms deep a cabk
within, when it quickly narrows to -20 yards, and is choked with rocks.

Warwiok Barbour. — Warwick harbour, tliree-quarters of a mile above Hick-
man islands, lies on tlie west side of a small peninsula, 45 feet lilgh. The
entrance is neo-row, but witliin the harbour is 2i cables east and west, and a
cable wide ; much of this space is occupied by an islet with rocks in the channel
on either side of it. A vessel drawing feet water could be warped in.

At 2i miles westward of Warwick harbour is Burnt point, the coast between
forming a slight bond, which is steep-to, and cliffy. At 1} miles further on is a
small bay with a stream ninnuig into it ; a rock 8 feet high lies close off its east point.

Baydon Point and Xions Barbour. — Haydon point and Long harbour are on
the soutlt side of Smith sound. Tlio coast of Random island, also the islets
forniirg tho west side of tlie Thoroughfare, are flat and of little elevation.
Hnydou point, the north extremity of tho island, is rocky, and bordered close-to
by rocks above water ; a little islet of the same name lies 6 cables eastward of the

SNOOKS HAUBOUU. Ac

point, and hax rooks extendini^ from it towards ttie shore. At rather less than a
vA\o eastward of the point on the north aide of Random island ia tlie entrnnoo to
Long iiarbour, a narrow inlut running to the south about tliree-quarters of a mile,
and carrying from 8 to 2 fatlioms water to its head. An islet at the entrance has
deep water on either side of it ; but a reef wliioh covers at high water, exteudb half
a cable from its south-east point, and narrows the passage on that side.

X«w«r IMUM* OoT«. — At three-quarters of a mile eastward of Long hai1)oar
there is an islet 10 feet high, and about 50 yards square, which is steep-to ;
in the channel between it and the shore, which is one cable wide, the water is
deep. From this islet the coast of Random island continues eastward, almost
straight fur 41 miles, to Lower Lance cove and is steep-to, witli no anchorage
off it. Lower Lanoe cove is open to the N.E., and H cables wide, but tlio depth,
42 fathoms, is too great for anchorage.

Between Lower Lance cove and Bluff point, about lit miles to the N.W. of it,
the ooast forms a bend to the S.W. and contains several little coves separated by
rucky points, where fishing stations have beeu esttiblished near small streams, the
whole under the namj of Britiinnia cove. As the viciuity of this cove is favourable
for agriculture, a less migratory people them Newfoundland fishermen generally
are have settled here.

Off Upper Lance cove is /wi/100 Cove rock, with one fathom water on it ; it is
small, with S to 10 fathoms water ronnd it, and 4 fathoms between it and the shore,
from which it is distant H cables. Burnt point, shut in with Tilton point, leads
northward of it.

Anchorage. — There is anchorage in Burgoyne cove west of Tilton head, on the
north side of Smith sound, in 12 fathoms water, at li cables from the shore.
This is a fair stopping place, and sheltered from the strong winds which generally
blow up and down the reach.

Baooks Barbour. — From Bluff point on the south shore to Snooks harbour, the
coast curves to the north with a general W.N.W. bend for 41 miles ; it is steep, in
places cliff, with a few rocks half a cable off. The so-called harbour is half a mile
square within the line of the coast, and the depth is 12 fathoms, mud, at three-
quarters of a mile from its head.

Smith Point on the nortli shore, directly opposite Snooks harbour, ia steep-to;
the coast between it and Burgoyne cove is bold, clear of danger, and much broken
by numerous gorges and small valleys. Approaching Smith point the land is less
broken ; there are a few houses on the coast a mile eastward of the point, and a
cable off them is a depth of 4 fathoms but it suddenly deepens to 10 and 20
fathoms.

At Ij miles eastward of Smith point is Upper Ro'^ky valley, here the depth is
6 fathoms, rocky bottom, at 8 cables from the beach ; from this it suddenly deepens
to 80 fathoms.

The Bar. — The shallow channel connecting the head of Smith sound with the
head of the North-west arm of Random sound, (up to which they both gradually
shoal) is known as tlie Bar. At high water it is a quarter of a mile wide ; at low
water spits of sand and stones stretch off both shores leaving a narrow channel
half a mile long and 2 feet deep.

At a mile above Smith point the depth in the centre of the soimdis 24 fathoms,
thence to the Bar, a distance of 4 miles, the water shoals gradually. The breadth
of the sound is here eight-tenths of a mile, and along each shore the soundings
indicate a submarine terrace with 3 to 7 fatiioms, shelving suddenly to the deep
water of the channel.

• .'t

'< M ■■■'.'

^ *'",'' f

Vu <

CA^^E UONAVISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND.

TtMttiimu vn IflLAWS. — This iaknd is on t)ie south side of the eutrance
to Smith sound ; it is about 2^ miles in longth N.E. by N. and S.W. by S., and a
milo in breadt)i. Its coast line is deeply indented, and several reniarkabjo peaks
rise from the island, — the highest near the centre, 440 feet above the sea, is steep
and rocky on all sides, — and at the north-west point is a conspicuous cone 870 feet
high. A narrow channel, called tlio Thoroughfare, separates the island from the
north-east point of Random island.

Irelands Eye point, the north-east extreme of the island, is a steep cliff; and 1^
miles S.W. of it is the entrance to Irelands Eye harbour. About midway is
Jacobs cove, with several email islets or rocks.

Xrtlanda By« Bsurbonr is an inlet, running in north about half a mile, and less
than half a cable wide, with an islet and several rocks above water at its entrance.
It is available for large boats, which can lie alongside the stages.

Tray Town Harbonr. — This inlet is westward of the highest peak of the island,
and half a mile from Irelands Eye harbour ; the coast between is rocky. It winds
in northward and then turns to the south-westward, a distance of a mile, with an
average brer.dUi of three-quarters of a cable. In the first reach the depth is 14
fathoms, in the second it shoals to I) feet eastward of an islet near the end where
it becomes narrow ; beyond the islet tl>e depth is 12 feet.

At half a mile S.W. from Tray To-.vn harbour is a small basin called Round
harbour with IJ fathoms water, but the entrance being nearly dry at low water, it
is of little value even for boats.

The south-west point of Irelands Eye island is of shelving rock ; thence the
coast trends northward for |1;^ miles to the north-west point, having about mid-
way a small rooky bay. Eastward of the latter point, and at tho base of the
conical hill, is another small ba,y a quarter of a mile deep, with a li fathom patch
near the centre, and a rock above water off its west point. Irelands Eye point is
2 miles eastward of this bay ; between, and a cable from the shore, a little east of
Black Duck cove, is a patch with 4 feet water on it.

Gunner Mock. — Gunner rock (awash at low water) lies about 2 cables S.W, of
the entrance to Tray Town harbour, ond three quarters of a cable from the shore.
The harbour kept open leads clear to the north of it ; and Bonaventura head,
appearing between the Ragged islands and tlie north side of Anthony island,
bearing E. by >^ , i N., leads southward of it, and along shore between the rock
and Black lr>dge.

Black Ledge. — -Tlie Black ledge, south-west of Anthony island and fronting
Round liarboiu', i.s 3 cables in length W.N.W. and E.S.E. ; its east end has one
fathom water on it , and at its west end is a rock just covered at high water.
Bonaventura head, in line with the east extreme of Anthony island, E.N.E. leads
southward of the ledge, and tho head between the east end of the Ragged islands,
and the west side of Anthony island leads northward or between it and Irelands
Eye.

OBBBZr laitAXTD. — Green island, the south-eastemnioRt of the islands at the
eutrance to Smith sound, is 121 feet above high water, nearly level on the summit,
8i cables in length east and west, and 24 cables in breadth ; its east end lies
S.W. § W. 5J miles (nearly) from Bonaventure head, and from it Duck island
bears W. by S. | S. distant 2f miles. A 7 to U fathoms bank extends half a
mile from its north-east end, and a quarter of a mile from its east side.

AXTTaoirr X8&Ain>. — Anthony island is about three quarters of a mile in
length E.N.E. and W.S.W., nearly half a mile in breadth, and on its west side

RANDOM ISLAND, LITTLE HARBOUR, Ac.

i!7

1208 feet high. It lies N.W. by N. rather more than a mile from Oreen island,
and S.W. by W. li'o miles from the Ragged islands. The channel between it
and Irelands Eye island is •') cables wide and 20 to HO fathoms deep.

BVOX XBZJUffS. — Duck island is 1.S9 feet high, 4 cables in length north and
south, and 2 cables in breadth ; it slopes towards the east, and is divided into
two peaks by a '"nlley running in the direction of its length.

Shag Inlets. — The Shag islets extend N.N.E. 3 cables from the northern part
of Duck island, forming a channel between a cable wide. These islets are 80 feet
higli, about 50 yards wide, and steep all round.

Indian hist*. — The Indian islets, off the north-west point of Irelands Eye,
cover a space of 3i cables north and south. The outer and largest islet is 145
feet liigh.

Via* Thoronshflure. — The channel, known as tho< Thoroughfare, separating
Irulanuj Eye from Random island, is 1^ miles in length ; at its south entrance are
several rocky islets, the Eastern one (Thoroughfare rock) is 11 feet high, and
between it and the south-west point of Irelands Eye is the channel, half a cable
wide with 8 fathoms water. After passing the rock from southward bring it in
liuc with the north point of Duck island (bearing about S. i E.) and it will lead
westward of the Indian rock at the north end of the channel ; and when Bona-
venture head is open of Irelands Eye point, a vessel will be nortliward of the rock
and in 10 fathoms water, on the south side of Smitli sound

The Indian is the only rock in the Thoroughfare, which la not always above
water; itom it tlie north end of the largest Indian islet bears about E. } N., and
distant 2 cables from its nearest part.

BAiroom XB&AMS, which separates Smith sound from Random sound is 16
miles in lengtli N.W. and S.E., and (ii miles in breadth. Its highest liill, Gin-
picker, is 4 miles from its east coast ; it rises to tlie height of 843 feet. The east
coast of the island is much indented with small harbours, and off it are several
islands and rocks, the most noiihern of which are the Ragged islands (already
desciibed) . At its north-east end the land rises 540 feet and forms a remark-
able peak named Bakers loaf. From tliis point of the island the coast is bold
and rocky for 1\ miles to Connor islet, a low island at the entrance to the North-
west arm.

N<»tli-w«at Arm. — On the south-west side of Connor islet, separated about
half a cable, is Sullivan islet, 25 feet high ; between the latter and a flat promon-
tory 46 feet high, named SUldown point, half a mile westward of it, is the entrance
to the small inlet known as the North-west arm. The western half of the entrance
to this inlet is obstructed by a bed of rooks, some of which are uncovered ; the
channel in is between these rocks and Sullivan islf>t, and along at the foot of
Bakers loaf. The anchorage is about a quarter of a mile square, in 9 fathoms
water, mud. There is a small nook inside Sullivan islet with 2 fathoms water,
called Riders harbour. A rock with one fathom water on it lies just off the east
end of Sullivan islet.

Vessels rounding Connor and Sullivan islets, should give them a berth of a
cable, particularly at night ; v.hen south of SulUvan islet witli Bakers loaf open,
bring the south point of Duck island in lino with the south point of Sullivan islet,
bearing S.S.E. % E., wliich leads into the North-wesi arm.

Zilttle Harbonr. — Little harbour is immediately westward of the North-west
arm ; the entrance is 2 cables wide between the rocky islet south of Silldown
point and the opposite shore, which is bold with a small rock above water off it.

V "I

■> .",■,.

CAVE HONAVISTA TO llAOCALIEU ISLAND.

The Itikik runs to the uort^vweAt iibout half a mile, and then tiima to the south-
west for !2 cables ; it is narrow and carries n depth of -4 fathoniH.

The coast between Little harbour and I'liist head 2 miles southward from it Is
of low cliff; the hills over it are ilat topped, and the highest, is M'i feet
above the 8ca. East head, a cliff HH feet liigh, in tlie north point of entrance to
Long cove and Deer harbonr.

On the coast north-west of the Noi-th Bird islet is a remarkable flat cliff, called
from its supposed resemblance to a fish flake. Cold East flake. The Nort,h Bird
islot lies a mile north of East head, and a quarter of a mile from the shore ; it
is 110 feet high, 2 cables in length north and south, and a cable in breadth. The
South Bird islut lies half a mile north of East head and licablea from the shore;
it is 121 feet high, 2 cables in lengtli north and south, and half a cable in breadth.

iMug Oor; — Long covo runs in N.N.E. three quarters of a mile; it is abo'ta
cable wide, and shoals from 20 fathoms at the entrance to 2 fathoms at its head.
A little within the west point and a third the distance across to the east shore, is
a rock with one fathom water on it.

OMr Barbour. — Deer harbour is about half a mile west of Long cove ; its
entrance is half a cable mde and 5 fathoms deep, between a small low islet on
the nortli, and the rooks close off a point on the south. The harbour is 8 cables
in length and about a cable in breadth, and has from 5 to 9 fathoms water. A
small sunken rock Ilea close to the shore south of a waterfall.

The approach to Long oove and Deer harbour is between East head and Black
rock, nortl) of Verge island : from East head to Long cove the distance is about
three-quarters of a mile, the coast being low cliff with small indentations. At i
oables east of Long covo is a roof of rocks extending more than a cable from tho
coast.

▼BBOB l8&Ain>, — Verge island lies about a quarter of a mile from the coast
between East head and East Random head, and covers (with the rocks and Ideta
off it) a space of a mile nortli and south by half a mile in breadtli ; it m 204= feet
liigh; 31 cables in length east and west, and 2i cables in breadth. From its north-
west end rocky islets extend half a mile to the N.E., terminating in a small
black rock about .'<0 foot high ; from the south-west end rocky islets extend 8
cables to the southward, tho largest (Rat island) being 05 feet liigh. At tho south-
east end. Copper islet (l.SO feet above the sea) lies 3 cables off, with rooks
between ; and Ik cables off the north-east end of the island is a rock called the
Virge.

D«or Book. — Tliis s'uall rock has 4 foot water on it, and is generally marked
by a break, except in a smooth sea at high water. It lies with Bonaventure bluff
in lino with tho saddle of Duck island bearing N.E. by E. \ E., and tho norili
point of entrance to Deer harbour on with Black rock N.W. by N.

^«« Leiigc—ThG Gun ledge, with «i and 7^ fathoms water on it, lies about
half a mile N.E. from Deer rock, tho depth between being 21 fathoms. Bonavenfurc
head appearing midway between Duck and Green islands, N.E, by E., leads
pouth-eastward of these dangers; Ginpicker hill in line ^iili the north point of
entrance to Deer harbour N.W. J W., leads northward of the Gun ledge; and
Bakers loaf in line with the west points of tho two Bird islets N, by E. ^ E. leads
westward of tlio dangers.

mAHBOM BBA9 flASBOUB.— Random Head harbour is about a mile from
Verge isUuid in a nearly west direction, and on the north side of I^nst Random
head. It is about half a mile square, 10 to IH fatlionis doop, and the soutJi uuil

RANDOM SOUND.

2»

to the Bouth-

west shores are much indented with rocks extending out 3 cnblos. The north
lahoro iB bold, and here small vessds niny anchor in a bight ; with this exception the
harbour is not recommended. Rgeon islet, on the north side of entrance, is 2 cables
in length N.N.W. and S.S.E., half a cable wide, level, and about 40 feet high;
from it n ro^f extends sontli 14 cabins, terminating in a rock awash known as the
Mouse. The pnHsage in, between the Mouse and the south shore is 8 cables wide
and has deep water.

SAST BAZVSOiMi BBAB. — East Uandom head the north point of entrance to
Random sound, is the termination of a range of hills, the highest of which rises
H08 feet ; it is 612 feet high, and its eastern extremity consists of several quoin-
shaped masses, which appear from the head as landslips. A 10-fathom bank ex-
tends 2 cables from the head.

wasT BARBOra BBAD, the south point of the entrance to Bandom sound,
is distant nearly H miles W. by S. from East Random head. Its summit is 291
feet high, level, and the eastern extreme of the land is a high cliff, just separated
by a chasm from the main part of the head. Rooks mostly above water extend
from it a cable eastward.

BANSOK BOunm. — The entrance to this sound is between the western coast
of East Random head and West Random head and is 1^ miles wide, with a depth
of 50 to 185 fathoms. At 51 miles within East Random head the sound ia
divided into two branches by a tongne of land 11 miles in length in a W.N.W.
and E.S.E. direction, and about 8 miles in breadth, the eastern termination of
which (named Middle cliff) faces the entrance to the sound, and is a steep cliff
S57 feet high. The shores of the sound are generally steep-to.

Nortb-w«8t Arm of Bandom Bound. — At less than half a mile westward of East
Random head and half a cable off a steep shelving point, is a rock with less than
one fathom water on it, and another rock (awash) lies close off the east side of
the point ; at about three-quarters of a mile farther on are some rocky islets, and
about a cable from the shore a patch with 3 fathoms water on it ; rather more than
1^ miles further* westward there is an islet 40 feet high, and 4 cables farther on
another islet at the entrance to Salmon cove, — these latter islets are separated
from the shore by deep water.

Sdrnon Cove. — Salmon cove extends in 4 cables, and has at its head a salmon
fishing station : from ilus cove the coast trends N.W. and N. by W. 3 miles to
Strong islands. The coast from East Random head to tJiese islands is in general
steep and cliffy, the hills close over it ranging 400 to 700 feet in height.

Strong isla ads consist of two principal islands ^e 123, the other 145 feet high,
with a few rocks above water. The north stab 'these islands forms with the
coast an inlot called Strong Tickle, which is nearly three quarters of a mile in
length and half a cable 'vide, with 10 to 4 fathoms water, except near its head,
where there is 1^ fathoms. The channel between the main islands has 6 fathoms
water in it.

Quarry Rock. — Quarry rock, lying 2 cables W.S.W. from the south point of
the west Strong island, has 2 fatlioms water on it. Passenger point (north of
Middle cliff) open of Holloway rock, S. i E., leads eastward of the Quarry ; the
point just westward of Tolly poiuL open northward of Gooseberry islet about
W. by N. i N., leads north of th, rock ; and the same point south of Gooseberry
islet, W.N.W., leads south of t) - rock.

Gooseberry islet, nearly in '.aid channel, IJ miles westward of Strong islands,
i> small and 00 feet high. A racky shoal with If fathoms water on it lies a

((*;. *■ ■■■.

lit-.

■'■■%■:■
'■•■' V:. ;:

■ I..-.

CAPE 130NAVISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND.

quarter of a mile, N.E. from Gooseberry islet, and another with 5i fathoms on it^
4 cables N.N.W. ^ W. from the islet. From tliis islet the first reach of the north-
west arm of Eandom sound continues to the westward for T\ railes, with the depth
in mid-channel decreasing from 00 to 60 fathoms ; the shore is steep-to, and
there is no anchorage.

From Middle cliflf (the eastern extremity of the land separating the two arms
of the sound) a steeo cJilTy coast trends 1^ mUds northward to Passerger, the
south point of entrauoe to ihe North-west arm. at 4 cables beyond which is HoUo-
way rock, close to the shore and the termination of a steep point. The latter
point separates two coves, and half a mile to the N.W. of it is Pudding point, a
rocky termination of a ridge of hiUs, which are 548 feet abo\ e the sea. At three-
quarters of a mile more westward is Black Duck cove, a quartor of a mile deep,
with from 20 to 6 fathoms water.

Hickman Harbour. — Hickman harbour opposite Black Duck cove, is 3 cable»
wide at iis entrance, and runs in North three-quarters of a mile ; on its east
shore there is a bed of rocks H to 6 feet under water ; with this exception the
depth is 18 to 8 fathoms, over gravel and mud. This harbour is a mile from
West Strong island, and at about two-thirds the distanci. tbero is a slate quarry.
The coast is clear of danger.

Maggotty Cove. — At nearly 2J miles westward of Black Duck cove (on the
south shore) there is a remarkable cone 650 feet high, called the Tolt ; between
this and Maggotty cove 3i miles farther on the coast forms a curve to the north,
and its extremity is known as Tolt point. Maggotty cove is 3i miles above Tolt
cone, and is 25 fathoms deep at 2 cables from the shore. A large stream runs
into it, at the mouth of which is a sawmiU ; the valley of this stream runs
southward in the direction of Hatcher cove (in the South-west aim) with low
land right across.

South Bight. — On the south shore in the elbow of the North-west arm there is
a bay, called South Bight ; here the coast trends northward, and about three
quarters of a mile is another bay, known as the Bottom. These bays are each
about 3 cables wide and a quarter of a mile deep, with 12 fathoms watei at 3
cables from tho shore.

Bald Nap and Forster Bocks, — From South Bight the sound is 2^ niius acrcsa
to Bald Nap and Forster points on the eastern shore ; these points as a r-hoU iag
and rocky, with patches of rock and shoal water off them. Bald Nap rock ( ) toot
under water) lies 3 cables West (nearly) from Bald Nap point. The Forotc/
rocks extend off more than a quarter of a mile from the point of the same name ,
the outer rock, with one fathom water on it, lies a mile N. by W. from Bald Nap
rock, with 10 to 6 fathoms between at half a mile &om the shore.

Goossberry islet, just open of Lady point, leads southward of these dangers :
and Red point hill (517 feet high) in line with Bluff point (or, Red Man point),
North, leads westward of them.

Beyond the Bald Nap rocks the second reach of the North-wbPf ^,rm trends
N. by E. 7 miles to the Bar (described in page 25). The land on iin-. evHt side
is wooded, undulating, aud about 150 feet high. On the western siCn. r> iihwar.l
of the Bottom, the land rises steep (is 007 feet above the sea for about i mi'es to
Bluff point) with the coast mostly of cliff ; thence to Red point, nearly 3 miles
farther on, the coast becomes low. Lower silioal hiu'bour. If miles northward of
Bluff point, dries at low water, anu rocks whicli nro floverod at high water lie a
cable off the upper point; a large stroaia ru:"n into it.

R4'(l p

sound h

the naiT
I water, co
IShoitl
I quarters
I tlie lino o
I half a mil

from tho
There
I the Bar,

gradually

RANDOM SOUND.

horns on it^
f the north-
;h the depth
teep-to, and

le two arms
serger, the
ch is Hollo-
The latter
ing point, a
At three-
I mile deep,

, is 3 cable»
on its east

Lception the
mile from

late quarry.

!Ove (on the
It ; between

the north,
above Tolt

stream runs
ptream runs
n) with low

irm there is
bout three
ys are each

1 water at 3

ni.ie^ acrcsa
rr, ''hoiv'.ng
rock (.(toot

le For^tc ,.•
ime name ,

Bald Nap

e dangers :
!an point),

'xm trends
e-'at side

L TOi'es to
rly 3 miles
rthward of
water lie a

ll<;d point is a low cliff with a rcmarkablw liill over it, 617 feet high. Tlie
sound here is only half a mile across to Brown Mead on the east shore ; this is
the narrowest part of it. Brown Mead is a spit of sand a few feet above high
water, covered witli fri'ass and brushwood.

Shonl Htirhour. — S)ioal Imrbour on the west shore above Red point, is three-
quarters of a mile wide at the entranco, and at high water extends a mile within
tlie lino of coast, but the deposit from a large stream which runs into it dries out
1 half a mile. The depth ijradually increases to 5 fathoms three-quarters of a mile
from the dry bank.

There is good anchorage from a line between Red point and Brown Mead to
the Bar, a space li miles in length by half a mile wide. The depth decreases
gradually from 24 fathoms in approaching the Bar, but rather suddenly towards
either shore.

Bontli-west jaLrm of Random Sound. — The South-west arm runs in about 14
mibs from West Random head and has an average breadth of a mile. It is 175
fathoms deep at the entrance, which decreases to 60 fathoms at a mile from the
head of the sound.

Fox Harbour. — The coast between West Random head and Fox islet (li miles
westward of it; is steep and broken, with rocks half a cable oflF. Fox islet is
li cables in length, and a cable in breadth, with steep cliff 93 feet high on the
north. The entrance to the small harbour of the same name is on the east side
of the islet, and about a cable wide ; within, the space is 2 cables in extent, but
' encumbered with rocks, and fit only for large boats which lie under the east head
I close to the shore.

Little Heartsease. — At half a mile from Fox islet is a bluff promontory 309 feet
high ; thence to Little Heartsease 1 J miles fartlier on the coast is low and rocky.
Little Heartsease runs in S.S.W. three-quarters of a mile, with several arms, one
I of which reaches within 2 cables from the pond at the head of Heartsease (a har-
I hour described subsequently). The harbour is free from danger with an average
breadth of three-quarters of a cable, and the depth decreases from 5 fathoms at
tlic entrance to 2 fathoms at the head. A rock 3 feet under water nearly closes
the entrance of the first arm on the eastern shore.

Hoilye Hole. — A.t about 3 cables westward of Little Heartsease there is a cliffy

I point 135 feet high, with a rock 3 feet above high water close off it ; about If

miles beyond this, is Hodge Hole bay, having an islet in the middle of it, on the

souiii west side of which, small vessels may anchor in a space about a cable

I square.

Rocky Harbour. — On the north coast of the South-west arm, three-quarters of

I a mile westward of Middle cliff, and half a cable from the shore, is the South-west

rock, 8 feet above high water ; and immediately west of this is Rocky harbour,

wliich runs in North half a mile and is Ij cables wide. A rock (awash at low

water) lies near the centre of the harbour, leaving a channel along the east shore,

I but the west shore is foul.

Lotuj Cove. — Long cove, a mile westward of Rocky harbour, is small, with 6
I fathoms water. The coast between is steep cliff and 310 feet liigh.

St. Jones Within Harbour. — St. Jones Within harbour is 4} miles westward of
I West Random head, and on the north shore of the South-west arm. It is 4
cables wide at the entrance, and trends in N.N.E. half a mile, with 20 fathoms
I water, and then N.W. another half a mile to its head. In the inner part the
I breadth is 2 cables, and here good anchorage may be obtained in 7 to 6 fathoms
I water. Off the east point of entrance th' is a small rook above water

5 ■.

'!•

;( r .

"■ .

;

•\.

. <:

!;-'■ •

A/.--

'■V .'

v;-

-.1 . ^'

CAPE BONAVISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND.

Hatohtrt Cove. — Hatchers oove, Hk miles westward of St. Jones Within, has »|
depth of 5 fathoms. Small vessels occasionally anchor in it.

North Bight. — North Bight, on the north shore, at about li miles from the|
head of the South-west arm, is 4 cables in extent and has a depth of 8 to 4 fa-
thoms. The bottom is strewn with boulders, many of them (i feet in diameter,!
particularly on the eastern shore. A shoal 2 fathoms under water extends fromf
its west point.

At the head of the South-west arm there is a stream named Bla^k brook.)
Anchorage in 10 to Si fathoms, mud, may be obtained half a mile from its mouth.

XAiro l0&Ain>. — Long island, on the east side of West Bandom head, is I
about a third of a mile from the shore and immediately north of the entrance toi
Heartsease harbour. It is about three-quarters of a mile in length E.N.E. and!
W.S.W., 2 cables in breadth, and 132 feet high ; its south-east coast consists of I
steep cliff. A rock just above water lies half a cable off it and 8 cables from itsj
south-west extreme.

•^.•••n Zsl«ta, — The Green islets lie upwards of half a mile eastward of Long is-
I with 8i fathoms water between, and about the same distance from West Ban-
iv. < bead. They consist of a group of fiat-topped rocks or islets, 63 feet above |
high water, covering a space 2 cables square.

Heartsease Ledge. — Heartsease ledge, a ehoal of 2 i to 10 fathoms water, ex-
tends E. by S. about three-quarters of a mile from the Green islets, with a I
breadth of 3 cables. The, north-west extreme of West Random head kept open, I
bea-nng N.W. } W., leads north of the ledge ; Heartsease church, in line with the!
nor^^h rock of the Green islets W. k N. just clears its north-west side ; and Duck I
island open of East Bandom head N.E. by E. i E. leads to the south-east of|
the ledge.

wiiit* Books. — ^The White ro^ks off the entrance to Heartsease, are 9 fe«t|
above water, and a few yards in extent. At a cable westward of them is a rockl
on which the sea generally breaks, and at a quarter of a mile in the same direc-
tion the depth is less than 10 fathoms : on the north and east sides the rook is I
ateep-to. Heartsease chuiob open south of Long island leads westward of ih« |
rock.

Beaver Book. — The Beaver rock, 8 fathoms under water, lies with the White I
rocks bearing E.N.E. distant li miles (nearly), and the west end of Heartsease I
beach in line with the west side of Heartsease point, N. by £. { E. West I
Random head touching the north-east point of Long island leads south-east of |
the rock.

BBJUiTSlUUna ZHUDT. — Heartsease is a long narrow inlet running in west- 1
ward about two miles, and carrying from 24 fathoms water at the entrance to I
shallow water at its head. The north-east point of entrance is a small peninsula I
connected to the main land by a neck of shingle 800 yards long, and feet above!
high water. A hundred feet up the hill over it is the church, in the form of aj
large ordinary house, isolated and conspicuous.

The south-west point of entrance is West 8i cables from the nortli-east point.!
The breadth of the inlot is 2 cables for nearly a mile, with 18 tc 10 fathoms |
water, mud ; then about a cable for nine-tenths of a mile with 10 to V fathoms, [
mud, beyond which is a pond. On the north shore opposi^e the south-west point!
are two rocks, each with 2 feet water on them, t-^e only dangers, and should be I
avoided. A swell sots into the entrance mth easterly gales, but not sufficient to I
affect a vessel off Cranny cove, on the norti< shore half a mile within the entranced

ROUND, ST. JONES AND DEER HARBOURS, &o.

Hie passage in north or south of tho White rocks is clear of danger. There is a

fcliannel three-quarters of a cable wide between Long island and the north-east

t)oint of entrance to Heartsease.

Bald^Iiead. — The coast from the entrance to Heartsease trends S.W. by S.

miles to Bald head ; it is rugged, with several large steep rocks close off it, the

and within being broken into numerous hills, — over the coast these reach an

lltitude of 670 feet, and at li miles within the highest rises to 669 feet. Bald

lead is a bold cliffy bluff, 4K<) feet high ; a valley runs at its back parallel to the

joast, giving it u remarkable semi-isolated appearance.

St. Jones Bead, about 2 miles S.W. by W. from the south part of Bald
Jead, is (il2 feet high, bold, and cliff}' ; the coast between the heads is of the
ime character, and about half way is Round harbour.

Hound Rarbonr, — The entrance to this little harbour is only about 120

lards wide, and is not easily recognised in the straight cliffy coast that extends

pi each side of it, but when well in with the land, the south head, a narrow strip

JIG feet high) projecting north waru, will be seen against the higher land behind

. The entrance is 3 fathoms deep, and runs in about a cable, when it turns

bruptly south-westward to the anchorage behind the south het^d. The harbour

less than 2 cables in length, a cable wide, and has a depth of S to 6 fathoms,

\ui.

Between St. Jones head and St. Jones harbour, 2J miles south-westward from

is Seal islet, at half a cable from the shore, and parallel to it. It is 4 cables

length, and the extreme breadth is li cables ; it consists of two principal parts,

ke northern CO feet high, and tlie southern 148 feet, connected by a lo^r neck, on

pich are several rocky hummocks.

Off the entrance to St. Jones harbour is St. Jones islet, a small islet 67 feet

Igh and inaccessible. It lies S.S.E. 6 cables from the north head of the har-

]»ur, and S.W. i W. 4J miles from the south part of Bald head. It is steepto

its east side, and rucks above and under water extend 1^ cables north-west-

xrd from its west side.

I ST. J0NII3 BASBOmt. — St. Jones harbour is a narrow inlet running in

[.W. by W. 3 miles ; when seen on this bearing, it appears remarkable from its

eep shores appearing as cliff behind cliff to the head. Crown liiil, steep and

Igged, rises at the head of the harbour to the height of 820 feet, and with the

Ine-shaped hills rising abruptly from the land north of the harbour is sufficient

1 indicate its position ; but St. Jones islet is a good mark for the entrance.

(The average breadth of the harbour for 1^ miles is a cable, with kO fathoms

Iter at tho entrance shoaling to 6i fathoms, rocky bottom. At about three-

[arters of a mile within the north head and on tho same shore, is a small bay

1 several rocks extending a short distance beyond the line of the coast. Within

iirst 1^^ miles the harbour narrows to two-thirds of a cable and carries 4ir

Ihoms for a long half mile, when it opens out to its head, wliich is formed by

k) bays. The East bay has an area of about 3 square cables ; on its south-

ptern shore are some small islets or rocks two-thirds of a cable off, leaving an

chorage north-westward of them in 7 to 4 fathoms water, mud. A small arm,

I to 30 yards wide, with 2 fathoms water, runs southward from the head of the

to within a cable of the north-east arm of Deer harbour. Xorth-icest

is the extreme head of the harbour ; it is about 3 cables in length, N.E. and

|\V., and 2 cables wide, and has a depth of to 4 fathoms, mud.

IBBB HABBOXTR.— What is kuowu as Deer harbour is an extensive narrow

f-.^;

Ai';

■h •-■

•i

';■ .. ' 1 r '.'■

"i '<.>■■'•■

•-;•!,« ;

■v.- 5!',,

..■%:■■

'■''A: '.'

.■ Vi .'. '

'l'.;i ■•:

*■■■ •■ f

■ -vi ' ■ •-

i ..'vi. ■■•

'>', ' .' " ,'."

;is^ V'''-'!

^f :'■■■■■:■' ■'■.

;*■- '■.■■■

J-'^'-
t'.;: ■'

m:v'-

'•■■ .'■..

K':.'

..-. ■■• .'■■•■*

»,' ■" . •- /' .

■'.•'■ ■■ ;

';i'y-:-'

^■:;^-- ■!'

> ■ " . •

W-\-

*■'.! ^^'

■> A ■-■

h ' .■'■ ''. '

;». ^- . '

;* ..?v ^y

-i^^ X^:.

^: :■>■'. '"

^ .^'" '' •

t-F

I.;'. ',

CAPE JJONAVISTA TO BAOOALIEU ISLAND

inlet running about 4) miles to the north-westward and indented with small
arms and bays. It is nearly half a mile wide at the entrance, and here has a
depth of 80 to 17 fatliums. Until nearly half way from the sea it is enctpnbered |
with islets. Immediately within the entrance it opens out to more than three-
quarters of a mUe in extent, a portion of it being taken up by Grub island, (an I
island 11)6 feet higli, separated from the south-western shore by a very narrow
channel ({ fathoms doep^, but arms extend to the north-eastward and eastward.
At half a mile north-westward from tlie north-east point of Grub island is tlie I
entrance to the main portion of tlie inlet, which is narrowed to two-thirds of a
cable by an islet 128 fuut high, and is 7 fathoms deep ; thence the inlet quickly I
widens to about 4 cables, but diminishes again towards the inner part, to 2^1
cables, and the depth of water decreases from 6 and 8 fathoms near tlie islet tu|
the shallows at its head.

Deer harbour head, the north point of entrance, is 400 feet high, and on its east I
side clear of danger. Between the head and llobinson point, a mile north-west- j
ward from it, tliere are several rocky islets ; the outermost, named Green islet,!
is 24 feet high, and the eastern, named Poor Boy, is ^0 feet high. Shallowl
ground, with 3 and Si fathoms water on it, extends a short distance southwardi
from this latter islet, and broken ground with li fathoms on it, skirts Robinsonj
point to the distance out of li cables.

Poor Boy Ledge. — A ledge 24 fatlioms under water lies nearly South 2 cablesi
from Poor Boy islet ; it is a cable in extent, steep on all sides, and the depth iil
its immediate vicinity is 17 to 80 fathoms. To clear it, keep St. Jones islet justi
open of Deer harbour head, until down hill is nearly in line with the uorth-ea8t|
extremity of Grub island bearing N. by W. ^ W.

Big Bock. — A small rocky patcli. Si fathoms under water, and steep-to alll
round, lies nearly in the middle of the entrance to Deer harbour between GreenT
islet and liig island, with the east end of St. Jones islet in line with Deer harl
bour head, bearing E.N.E., and Tea cove point N.N.W. \ W. Crown hill, iiif
line with the north-east point of Grub island bearing N. by W. f W., leads east!
ward of tke rock; Sophia head, open of Robinson point N. i E., leads westward]
and St. Jones islet, open of Deer harbour head, leads southward of the rock.

Bis Island. — Big inland, on the south side of the entrance, is 218 feet high, J
cables in length N.E. and S.W., and 2 cables in breadth ; as it is separated from
the main-land (which is liigher) by only a very narrow channel it is not easiljl
distinguished when maluug the harbour. A rock, on which the sea generallij
breaks, lies 40 yards olf its north-east point.

Tea cove point half a mile northward of Big island, is shelving end steep-tol
Between this point, and Poor Boy islet and the shore of Robinson point, tlia
distance is under 4i cables ; this is the narrowest part of the entrance to thj
harbour:

orub Island, about half a mile within Tea cove point, is 4 cables in lengtlj
N.E. and S.W., and 2 cables in breadth. Its southern end is its highest part.

Bouth-east Arm. — The South-east arm, north of Robinson point, runs bacl
E.S.E. three-quarters of a mile, is a ofble wide, and from 12 to 7 fathoms deepi
its licad is separated from Birch cove on the sea coast by a low isthmus 2 cableT
in breadth. Eastward of Robinson point is a Uttle bay a cable wide wliich ru
in to the south-west a cable, and is 7 fathoms deep ; and east of Sophia heaj
there is unotlier narrow little bay running in north-east 14 cables.

igfortb'eaat Arm, — Sophia head, 257 feet high, separates South-east arm froij

SHOAB BAY AND COPPER ISLAND.

North-east arm. The latter riiua in N.E. by E. 4 cables, is 1} cables wide, and
has a depth of 7 to 4 fathoms.

There is fair anchorage for small vessels in the bay west of Grub island, in
from 20 to 7 fathoms water, over a space of 3 cables N.E. and S.W., by 2 cables
wide. At the head of this bay is a small arm. 30 yards in breadth, with a depth
I of li fathoms, running in N.W. by W. 4 cable^;.

Directions. — With a fair wind bring Crown hill in line with the north-einst

I point of Grub island, and steer in N. by W. f \V. between Poor Boy ledge and

Big rock — Crown hill will soon be lost sight of, being behind the near range —

I until the east extreme of Big island is in line with Tea cove point ; then steer

N. by E., pass round Grub island, and anchor as convenient.

To enter the harbour westward of Big rock, open Sophia head of Robinson

I point, and steer in with the head bearing N. i E. until the south end of Poor Boy

islet is seen between Green islet and Deer harbour head; then steer about

N. by W. f W. in mid'Channel, being careful to avoid the shoal extending from

I Robinson point, and when the east point of Big island is in line with Tea cove

[point, proceed as before. In working a vessel should enter west of Big rock.

If intending to enter the inner part of the inlet, a rock (with 6 feet water on it)
hying Ik cables within the entrance, should be avoided by keeping a little to the
[southward of the entrance ; the channel is then between Gooseberry islet and a
[patch of rocks 6 feet above water, li ca )les northward of it; having passed these,
vessel may anchor anywhere in from ^0 to 4 fathoms water, until within half u
lile of the head, where the depth is only 1 J fathomti. Two considerable streams
|liere run into the inlet, the banks of which dry out a quarter of a mile.

BBOAL BAT. — Shoal bay, south-west of Big island, is about 1^ miles deep
and narrow ; it is also encumbered with small islets and rocks, open to the east-
^vard, and has consequently nothing to recommend it to seamen. Its north shore
consists of steep cliff, and at its head on the south is a bight, about 2 cables deep,
kvith 6 and 7 fathoms water over rocky bottom, called Shoal harbour. On the
south side of the entrance are the Harbour rocks, 37 feet high, lying nearly 3
pables northward of Thames harbour point ; and a reef (awash) extends 2 cables
korth-eastward from the rocks. The passage into the bay between the reef and
pouth end of Big island is 3i cables wide.

Thames harbour point is separated from Harbour rocks by a channel a cable
ride and 2 fathoms deep. This point is the east extreme of a flat island 40 feet
jiigh, which is separated from the main land by a channel half a cable wide,
diere large fishing beats lie in 2 fathoms water, but the south entrance 1$ dry at
aw tide.

Goose cove, on the south side of Shoal bay, is nearly 4 cables deep, a cable
^'ide, with 14 to 9 fathoms water,, rocky bottom. The RiffRafls are sbveral rocks
Intending IJ cables to the north'-east from the west point of Goose cove ; the
Iter rock (awash) bears W. by N. 4i cables from the north extreme of the
larbour rocks.

Copper Island, iet. — Copper island, south of Thames harbour point, is 2
[ibles in length north and south, broken and 82 feet high, and from its west side
|)cks extend in that direction 3 cables ; the most distant is 15 feet above water,
a mile W.S.W. from the island a patch of slate rocks extends li cables iroia
[le shore; and about S.W. by S. 4^ miles from the island is the north-east point
Bull island, on the north side of the entrance to the bay of the same name— -
ke intervening coast is bold and rocky. Niagara point, the northern termination

s ■•■/!

':.-'-^Ml

--■■■"!*'■ ■■■■.

■'■■ -.■'■■...

, '■ ■" "*','■'■..■

■: . -■"■* ' ' - ' .
■'■'• ■ ,'■"', ' ' *

,!■•'■ "■■■' : vl

, '... -W*?'

iiii

CAPE KONAVISTA TO BACOALIEU ISLAND.

K :;:,

of a ste«p cliff, is rather more than 1^ miles from the north-east point of Bull I
island ; and, 1^ miles E. J N. from this point, at a long half mile from the shore, I
is a narrow !»-fatliom lodge, '<i cables in length N.N.E. and S.S.W., which is |
known as the Niagara ledge.

Centre Hill. — Centre hill, an isolated cone and the highest land in this neigh- 1
bourhood, separates the head of Deer harbour from that of Bull arm ; it is 1081 1
feet above the level of the sea and rises 640 feet above an elevated broken pla-
teau. It overlooks the isthmus of Avalon, and from its summit a commandingl
view of Placentia and Trinity bays can be obtained ; but although the highesti
land, it is not the most remarkable from Trinity bay, as the rocky hills of lesal
elevation in the foreground attract attention, particularly Crown hill at the backf
of St. Jones harbour wliich is 820 feet high, and the two cones north of thatj
harbour which are of the respective heights of 786 and 878 feet.

Bull Island. — Bull island lies E. by N. i N. 3 miles from Masters headi and!
North 5 miles from Tickle harbour point ; it is li miles long, partially coveredl
with wood, and its centre rises to the height of 281 feet. On its northern sidel
near the east end, there is an excellent little harbour for fishing craft, which isj
quite landlocked, with a sufficient supply of fresh water, and sufficiently large i
accommodate in stormy weather fifty to sixty small schooners and boats. A rock,!
awash at low water, lies near the western side of its entrance, but this dangetl
may be easily avoided by keeping the gravelly point on the opposite shore closel
aboard.

Bull island is separated from the main by a channel half a mile wide ca
Bull island Tickle. Near the centre of the Tickle, but rather towards its easten
entrance, there is a ledge, G feet above water, known as the Flat rocks, the northj
em end of which is steep ; E. by S. half a cable and S. by W. the same distano
from the south end of this ledge there are two rocks about 2 feet under water|
The shores of the Tickle are otherwise bold and steep-to; the best pass
thi"Ough it is north of the Flat rocks.

Temporary anchorage may be obtained at a third of a mile westward of thJ
Flat rocks, in from 10 to 12 fathoms water over a coarse mixed bottom,
current, principally depending on the wind, sets through the Sound at the rate c
half a mile an hour.

It is high water at Bull island, full and change, at 7h. 22m. ; springs rise frod
3 to 4 feet, neaps one to 2 feet. The geographical position of the centre of I
island is lat. 47° 4ft' 21)" N., long. 53° 46' 41" W.

Bix Barbonr. — ^Northward of the west end of Bull island is Rix harbou
with a depth of 7 fathoms, in which is good anchorage for small vessels.
Chalk rocks nearly in mid-cliunnel of the entrance to the harboiu: are about 1
a cable in extent N.N.E. and S.S.W. and con.sist of several heads, all a few 1
above water. Small vessels may enter on, either side of the rocks, both shun
beiiij4 bold and steep-to.

Water is easily procured liere from the streams at the head of Rix harbour.

vmtt ABM. — The entrance to this inlet or arm is 3 miles wide between fiul
island and Masters head, tlienoe it takes a northerly direction for 7 miles, i
thon trends to the N.W. lor 2 miles to its liead, from which part the distand
across country to Chance river, at tlie head of Placentia bay, is only two mila
There aio no dangers at a prudent distame from either shore, and no go(
anchorage except at its head.

A rocky !)i -fathom patch, the Porcupine, hes nearly in mid-channel at al)

'■A 'l'.*"'

TICKLE POINT AND BAY, Ac.

2i miles N.N.W. i W. from the west end of Bull island. There is deep water
witli muddy bottom on its western side ; northwiuJ and eastward of it the depth
is 14, 18 and 30 fathoms.

At 6J miles from Masters head, on the west side of Bull arm, is Great Mus-
qnito cove, at the head of which the depth is 7 fathoms at a cable from the shore.
Tliere are several other small coves on this side of tlie arm capable^of receiving
fishing boats ; the largest, Little Musquito cove, has a rock 5 feet under water in
nearly the middle of its entrance.

MastersJ head, the west point of entrance to Bull arm, forms the north-east
point of Rantem cove, and has deep water close-to, but at half a mile to the south-
ward of it, there is a spot with 15 fathoms water.

Tlokle roint. — Tickle point 6J miles S.E. from Masters head, is the termina-
tion of a narrow promontory extending 5 miles in a north-easterly direction from
the head of Trinity bay, and dividing it into two nearly equal parts. Tho land
near the extremity of the point rises 432 feet above tlie sea, tuul continuoa with
Bome undulations about the same heiglit.

Bower Ledge. — This rocky patch, with H| fathoms least water on it, lies
N.N.W. nearly 21 miles from Tickle point; from it Hopeall head sliows open of
Tickle point, and Western head (bearing W. by N. f N.) is in line with the south
part of Flat hill. Uneven ground extends half a mile from it in a north-easterly
direction.

Tickle Bay. — Tickle bay, on the west side of Tickle point, is an excellent place
for fish ; but though the water near its head is comparatively shallow, and the
bottom good it is not a safe anchorage, as a swell nearly always sets in, and tlus
with east or north-eAst gales is very dangerous.

Hudson Bank. — At three-quarters of a mile from the south-east shore of Tickle

bay, there is a rocky bank which runs parallel with the land about a mile and

I has deep water almost close to it on all sides. At the outer or north-east end of-

this bank there is a rock 15 feet under water, known as tlie Hudson rock ; it lies

nearly 2 miles W. J S. from the outer part of Tickle point, and at a very moderate

I distance from its northern and eastern sides is a depth of 15 to 20 fathoms.

Tickle harbour, in the south corner of Tickle bay, at the entrance of a suit
I water lake, is protected by a small islet and a reef of rocks. The entrance is only
a cable wide and is not more than 4 feet deep at low water. Tho ebb stream
sets out very strong, and over a sandy spit, so that none but those locally ac-
quainted should attempt to enter. A few families reside here in ill constructed
I wooden houses, and their attention is altogether directed to fishing.

Big and xattle Ctaance Covsa. — Th^e two little bays, 4 miles northward of
I Tickle harbour and 4i miles W. by N. f N. from Tickle point, are only lit for
small vessels during the summer months. The best shelter will bo found in a
Ismail bay on the north side of Little Chance cove. Vessels entering either cove
I must keep the north points aboard. About a dozen families residti on the shores
I of these coves.

Santem Cove. — Rantem cove, 2 miles northward of the Chance coves, is
[nearly a mile square and is exposed to south-eastward. In it the water is very
■deep, but anchorage and good shelter may be obtained by standing well up into
jits north or north-west arras. Near the middle of this cove, nud rather on the
Inorth side, is Boulton islet, 20 feet above high water. Thero sire iilsotwo sunken
jrocks rather in the way of a vessel going up the north-wesi arm; — one, with 2
Ifcet on it, lying S.S.E. IJ cables ; and tho other, with o luel,, S.S.W, 14 cablea
Ifrom Boulton islet.

m •

.'ft _ '- ; ■•
'.'"'' '■'. '*. -'I

■< ■.

■i 1

*.'t ►•'>•

V ' ■ ■ it

CAPE BONAVISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND.

The flonth-west arm of the cove is too much exposed ftom northward for an
anchorage. A fresh-water stream mnning into it ia considered excellent for
trout fishing.

The shores of Rantem cove are steep-to and well clothed with wood sufficiently
large for hoats' masts, and small studding sail booms. There are no inhabitants.

OOTmia BAT, zona govs and obafpIiII bat.— These are inlets on
the south side of the promontory of Tickle point, the first named being the west-
ernmost. They are all open to north-eastward, have very deep water, and afford
no shelter, excepting that in Chappie bay (which extends south-westerly about |
8 miles and has an entrance a mile broad) small vessels may anchor in B to 12
fathoms on good ground, under protection of a small island near the southern j
sliore, at about two mUes from Mc. Leod point, the east point of the entrance.

■pr«ad«acl« Bay, — Spreadeagle bay, south-eastward of Chappie bay, is ex-
posed to north-easterly winds. The depth at the entrance is 16 and 20 fathoms, I
which decreases gradually to 7 and 6 fathoms almost close to the shore on each
side. Two islands, named North and South Dildo, lie off its eastern point of I
entrance, in nearly midway of the channel into Dildo arm ; they are about 60 [
feet high.

BXXOO ABBK. — Dildo arm is nearly a mile wide at the entrance, whence it I
extends 2i miles in a S.W. by S. direction. Its depth averages 25 to 80 fathoms,
except near the southern shore where to some distance out it is not more than 4
to 7 fathoms. A small cove, on the east side of tlie arm just within the entrance,!
known as Dildo cove, affords good anchorage in 10 to 7 fathoms, and shelter from |
almost all winds.

Vessels may enter Dildo arm northward or southward of Dildo islands. If the I
latter, they will cross a narrow spit of 5 to 8 fathoms connecting the islands to I
the>est point of the arm.

Hew Barbour. — ^Nearly two miles north-eastward from Dildo cove is a large I
open, but shallow, bay called New harbour. The depth in it is not more than 1)1
feet at low tide, hence it will only receive the smallest class of vessels. A rocl^l
spit juts off from its western side about half a mile in a N.N.E. direction.

BOFBAUi BAT. — Hopeoll head, which separates New harbour from Hopealll
bay, is the extremity of a bold promontory, the shore of which has a depth of 6 to!
10 fathoms at a very moderate distance from it. The head itself rises to thel
height of 407 feet, and close off it is a depth of 7 to 14 fathoms. From a berthi
off this point the course to Dildo arm is S.W. by S.

Hopeall bay is open to northerly winds, and affords no shelter ; hence vesselil
seldom anchor in it except when the wind is directly from the land. It is \\\
miles wide at the entrance, and extends about 2i miles in a S. by E. direction.!
From 22 and 19 fathoms, midway between the points of entrance, the depthl
gradually decretises to 9 and 3 fathoms off the beach at its extremity.

Hopeall island, an islet off the east point of Hopeall bay, is about one-f.iird oil
a mile long in a N.N.E. 4 E. direction, 76 feet liifrh. and very narrow. A rodl
awash, lies off its eastern side. A large vessi-l sliould iilways pass this island oii|
its west side, the channel eastward of it being only 2 or 3 fathoms deep.

Or««na Harbour .-^Greens harbour, immediately eastward of Hopeall si
land, is nearly two miles long in a S. i W. direction, and about three-quarten
of a mile broad. Vessels anchor in it in 10 to 7 fathoms, but exposed to northerIi|
winds. The west point of the bay has rocks under water at its extremity.

WiTXasa BAT.— Witless bay is the large bay north-eastward from Green

HEARTS' CONTENT.

liarbour ; it is 2) mileo in extent E.N.E. nnd W.8 W., About a mile deep, and i«
open to northerly and westerly windH. Tlio sonndiiigs in it am 1.1 to 8 fathomji,
over rock and ;^avel, and the ground does not hold well ; hence vessels seldom
enter it. A huge rock 110 feet high, named Red rock, lies at its entrance at '
Rliort distance from its northern shore ; and, three-quarters of a mile S. ^ W .
from this is a rock 4 feet under water, known as the Witless rock, from
which the middle point of the bay is distant 4 cables in a S. i W. (westeHy)
direction. Black rock, a patch of fathoms, and with 16 fathoms close to it, lies
rather more than half a mile from Black point, the west extremity of the bay, in
n N.W. by W. i W. direction ; this point has also sunken rooks extending from
it to some distance seaward, — consequently a wide berth should bo given it when
I passing. Black rock may be cleared on its east or west sides by bringing the
■ first summit within Hopeall head open on either side of Hopenll island and the
puiddle point of Witless bay, well open of Black point, leads north of it.

Bboal Bay. — At about a mile northward from Witloss bay i^ Sluml bay, a small
lexposed anchorage of 3 to n fathoms, having in front of it a sunken patch of 1^
Ifatiioms. It is open to north-westerly winds, and its south-western point has
rocks under water extending from it a short distance.

Bearts' BoUcht Bay. — From Shoal bay the coast trends .S^ miles in a north
{easterly direction to a bay about half a mile in extent known by the name of
learts' Delight. A projecting point about midway bears the name of Long
point ; this is a bold projection, with a depth of 16 fathom.4 almost close to it.
^ud, near the bay are some rocks above and under water at a very moderate
distance from the shore. Hearts' Delight has a depth of 7 to 3 fathoms, is ex-
posed to north-westerly winds, and is seldom entered except by the small vessels
of the country. It has a population numbering about 250.
At about half a mile from the west point of Hearta' Delight, in a north-westerly
irection, there is a small patch of 3i fathoms, known as South rock. Between
It and the nearest land is a depth of 8 fathoms. From it Shuffle-board appears
\n line with Gannet point bearing N.E. by E. (easterly) and Long point bears
3.W. by W. i W. distant lA miles.

Hearts' Boaire Bay. — About 2i miles north-eastward from Hearts' Delight is

Ihe bay of Hearts' Desire, an open roadstead facing N.N.E., in which vessels

tometimes anchor in 14 to 5 fathoms but only when the wind is from the land.

pChe coast between is moderately bold, with sunken rocks off it in places.

A 5-fathom patch, 14 miles W. by N.i N. from the westprn point of Hearts'

)esire, is known as the Gannet rock. Close to it on all Bi>~ j . deep water, and

Ispecially on its western side, wh^'uce the lead drops almost at once into 86

ithoms ; on its eastern side the depth is 20 fathoms. From it Long point bears

^.W. distant 3,*^ miles. Sugar-loaf point, in line with the Shuffle-board

.E. by E., leads eastward of it ; ihe first house within the south head of Hearts'

)elight open of Norther head If u,ds westward ; Gannet point E.S.E. leads north,

[ud the same point E. by S. leads southward of it.

RBABTB' OO W T BW T. — From the bay of Hearts' Desire the coast trends

f.E. by E. about 4} miles to that of Hearts' Content, and is bold with a depth

about 6 fathoms at a very moderate distance from it. Shuffle-board, a bold

liffy point 1} miles from the head of Hearts' Desire bay, rises to the height of

\l2 feet, and is very steep, the depth close to It being 25 fathoms.

Tlie entrance to Hearts' Content harbour is 4 cables wido between Norther

uiiit on the east, and Souther point on the west. Thence it runs iu 1^ milee^

• ■ •

' vl '

4' . '■ ■ '■■■

..i

CAPE UONAVISTA TO BACCALIEU ISLAND. *

and opens out in the middle to more than three-quarters of a miio, with sonndingn
varying from 20 to 7 fathoms ; tlie town lies along the eastern shore, and has in
its rear a large lake, behind which Mizen hill rises to the hoi<{ht of ft70 feet.

Hearts' Content bay is a very good harbonr capable of receiving the largest
vessels. The best anchorage is off its northern shore in 1-2 to 7 i fathoms, mud
and gravel, northward of the church. When entering keep in mid-channel, the
points on each side of the entrance being foul. The b ' " exposed to northerly
winds, and is almost completely sheltered from all oth

The shore end of the Atlantic Telegraph cable passes 150 yards west of
Norther point, on the east* side of the entrance to the harbour ; and from thib
spot two beacons (over the southern cove of the harbour) will be seen in line
S. by W. ; these beacons mark the direction of the cable's first course into the
harbour.

When the ^''hite beacon on the eastern shore is in line with the School house
the cable commences to curr^e to the eastward, and continues to do so until the
church tower is in line with the northern pier, on the shore under the church ;
on this line the Atlantic cable approaches the shore within a cable, and thence to
the land under the Telegraph office.

Vessels intending to anchor should carefully avoid the line indicated above, by I
anchoring either east of the line of the southern beacons, and north of the line
where the east beacon (appearing midway between the School house and the
house next south of it) bears S.E. i E. ; or by anchorir )uth of the lino where
the telegraph station flag (on with a whitewashed on the shore) bears

S.E. by E., as on this latter line it is intended to phicc . .-.ond telegraph cable.

It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. 30m. ; springs rise 4 feet, neaps
2i feet. The church is considered to be iii lat. 47^ 52' 35" N., long. 53° 22' 14" \V.

White Bock. — In nearly midway of the entrance to Hearts' Content, but nearer I
the northern shore, is the White rock, a small patch of 6 fathoms water. It lies I
with the Sugar loaf (a hill close to the sea, 4j miles N.E. by E. from Hearts'!
Content, and 416 feet liigh) bearing N.E. by E. ^ E. ; Norther point, the north I
head of Hearts' Content, S. by E. (southerly) 7 cables nearly ; and Lousey rock I
(off the south head of Hearts' Content) S.W. J S. half a mile. The Sugar-loafI
well open of the south head of New Perlican N.E. by E. ^ E. leails westward ofl
it; and Hearts' Content church open of Norther point S.S.E. J E. leads south- f
ward of it.

Fitters Cove, 2i miles north-eastward from Hearts' Content, is a small openl
bay 7 to 3 fathoms deep. It is exposed to wind«» between North and N.E.

xntW PBBUCAir. — The bay of New Perlican is immediately eastward ofl
Fitters cove, being divided from it by a projecting point of land whose oxtromityl
is known by the name of Bloody point. The two bays are bounded by Jeansl
head on the east, and Garlep point on the west ; each is bold laud, with a depth!
of 10 fathoms almost close to it.

The depth in New Perlican harbour is s to :i l'itthoni;i, the latter being in tlwl
immediate vicinity of the village. At its eutnince, between the outer points, it lil
about tliree-quarters of a mile wide, whence it narrows to li cables in its innerl
part. Although the shores are bold, a vessel entering should maintain a midf
channel course as much as posiuble ; when under Bloody point the anchor mayl
be cast in 9 to 7 fathoms. The anchorage is tolerably good and the shelterl
nearly land-locked. A rocky patch (4 feet under water) lies near the head of the|
harbour, off the eastern shore.

height

HANTS HARBOUR AND SEAL COVE. Ac.

Turks Oot«, *o. — The oouut at about 1} miles north -eastward from Now
Perliean trends inwards and forms an open bay known as Turks covo, the depth
in whicli is Itt to L fathoms. The rocky bold coast continues thence a milie in
the same direction to Sugar-loaf hill, a liill cloi^e to the sea and 415 feut high ;
and, on the north-east side of this is Sillee cove, a little inlet, which is about half
a mile in extent and can only receive boats or very small vessels.

From Sillee cove the coast trends E.N.E. 4 miles to Hants head, and is every-
where steep and rocky. It curves slightly northward, and being of almost uniform
height presents no distinguishing features ; the part that projects most to sea-
ward is known as Kings bead. The hill over Hants harbour head is 337 feet
high.

KAirra BAXBOVB. — Hants harbour, a mile eastward of Kings head is
1) cables wide, 3 cables di^ep. and open to north-eastward. Its west point is low
and rocky, with shallow patches extending from it three-quarters of a mile in a
N.E. by E. direction. During and after gales a heavy sea sets into the bay
causing an under tow at the north-east side, but a few vessels manage to lie here
in safety during winter.

To enter the harbour steer for the church bearing S.W. \ W. between the tail
of the bank and the Riff Raffs a reef subsequently described ; — the latter under
ordinary circumstances will be seen brciiking. When Seal rock (off Seal cove
point) is on with Seal point, steer alxjut S. ^ W. for the highest coast hill
between the harbour and Seal cove, to avoid the shoal which runs out from the
west point of entrance ; when Seal rock is on with Salvage point, bring the
church to bear W. by S. i S. (appearing one-third across the entrance) and enter
the harbour in mid-channel. Anchor near the west shore in 4 fathoms water.

Seal Cove. — Seal cove, 2 miles E. ^ N. from Hants harbour, is about half a
mile deep and affords no shelter. The soundings in it are B to 6 fathoms. Its
west point is steep and rocky on its northern side, but shelves to the eastward
witli shoal water off it.

8alvag« Point. — From Seal cove to the extremity of Salvage point the coast
trends E. by N. about 3i miles, and is rocky aud dangerous. The point itself ia
a rugged beach of stones around what appears to be a steep gravel cliff, behind
which the hills rise to the height of 400 or 500 feet ; a reef extends from it a con-
siderable distance, and is immediately succeeded by a depth of about 6 fathoms.

The coast between Hants head (or rather Kings head) and Salvage point, ia
extremely dangerous, on account of outlying reefs ; it should consequently have
a berth of at least 2 miles. As there is generally deep water at a very short
distance from these rocks, and the sea does not always break over them and
thereby show their position, more than ordinary care should be exercised when
in their vicinity. The following, reckoning from eastward, are the principal
dangers : —

Salvage Bocks. — These, consisting chiefly of a patch 5i feet under water, lie
about Ij miles N.E. ^ N. from Salvage point ; at a short distance northward and
north-eastward from them is a depth of 30 to 32 fathoms, and between them and
the point 12 to 6 fathoms.

EiffBaffs.— The Riff Raffs, 4 cables in length N.E. and S.W., and half a
cable in breadth, is 3 feet under water. From the north end of this reef Seal
cove point bears S. f E. distant one mile, and the west point of Hants harbour
S.W. by W. f W. lr% miles.

Knife Bock. — The Knife rock, with 4 fathoms on it, and having a depth of

"*> ■■''J;

r •:.;

|.':^-

*'■'■.'

-4-i

CAPK noNAVIH'lA To KACCAIilKU ISLAND

to 11 fiithoTOB ol()8o-to arfMinil it, lios tbr«)«-(iui»rt«irH of n iriilo W.N.W. from Uio
IlilV ItiiflM, with tho west pnjiit of IIimtH liarbour bearing S.S.W. § W. disLiuit
IJ inilos.

HtiHt» Hiirhonr Uovk.—WxnU Harbour rock, 'i feot under wator, licis with
Seal covo point boaring S.li. i V,. distant 'H iniUis, and Kings head S.W. by
W \ W.

BUn'k tlock, — Block rock, a patch of 4} fatlionia, lioa half a mile south of
HnntH harbc nr rock, with tho west point of Hautti harbour bearing S. i| Wv dis-
tant niue-tontlis of a milo.

'Tail of tho Bank. — Tha Tail of tho Bank, fathoms under water, lies with
Salvage point bearing S.E. by E. i E., and tho west point of Hants harbour
S.S.W. 'i W. distant 2t'o miles. Thence, in a S.W. by W. § W. direction
iVo "lilus i.4 Hants harbour rock, and at l^"o miles farther on is Arthur rock;
between the latter arc several other rocks with li to 7 fathoms water on them,
and all dangerous with a moderate sea. Arthur rock, with one fathom on
it. is 4 cables from the shore, with tho Sugar-loaf bearing S.W. by \V. and just
open, and Hants harbour head S.E. by E. distant 5i cables.

Tho depth increases a few yards seaward of the outer cdgo of tho rocks wo
hav« just described to 80 fathoms, ar.d at a short distance to 100 fathoms ; c6n-
BOquontly tho lead is no guide when near them. To avoid all these reefs on
their iinrth aide, vessels must not upproaoh the coa&t nearer than to have
Grates point boar E. by S. ; and, on their went side, the Sugar-loaf hill should
be kept well open of Kings liead bearing S.W. J W.

OLD PBSUCAN. — From Salvage point the coast trends southerly and
easterly about 5J miles to Old Porlican bay, tlio direct bearing between being
E. by S. J S. The bay is of limited extent and faces north-westward. Its
northoru point, named Skerwiuk, is steep and has a rock above water off it at
about a cable from its northern side, close to which is a depth of 5 and fathoms.
And, in the centre of the bay is an island, 115 feet high, half a mile in diameter
and nearly round, v^hich is connected to tho shore eastward of it by a shallow-
flat only suflioicntly under water to permit the passa-^e of boats. Southward of
Uiia island uniall vessels anchor during suimner in 8 K) 5 fathoms, but exposed to
a heavy swell when tho wind bl.'vs strongly from north eastward to north-west-
ward. When entering tho bay give tho i&liimi a berth of 2 cables, to avoid tho
shallow ground extending from it, and anchor witli its extremes bearing N.W. by
N. and N.E. The ground is said to hold badly ; henco tho harbour is safe only
in fine weather. It is high water iiero, full and change at Oh. 4(lni.; springs riso
,'U foot. Tho church is in lat. 48^^ 4' 47" N., long, ^r 0' 0" W.

From Old Terlican bay tho coast trends N.E. by E. J E. RJ miles to Grates
point (usually considered to bo tho southoin boundary of Trinity bay) and is
irregular in outline, fonning several small bays; speaking gonernllv, it is bold,
and safe to approach to a moderate distnnco. At about a mile from Skerwink
point, and a quarter of a mile from the shore, there is a reof under water ; and,
2 miles from this is Sgeir islet, 18 feet high, f.nd at a short distance from tho
land. IJreakhoart point, ft mile north-eastward from Sgeir islimd, is dangerous
to approach, as a long rocf extends from it in a northerly direction ; between this
point and point Grates, one mile further eastward, the land bonds in and forms
a email bay in which boats sometimes auehor with oil-shore winds. A rock off
the north-eabt side of point Grates is 25 feet high.

Martiri l.-dnf, .fc— The sea around Grates point is generally di op, tho lead

droppini
howevei
1 <)i mil]
and 20
breaker
sides is |
N.E. bj

At po|
point of
distancd
which id
establish
and is
i'rom
irregulal
short dii

BAO<
describe
Trinity

BACCAIJEU ISLAND AND LIGHT.

dropping into 100 fnthomH at a mile dne North from it ; thia great depth is not
however found eastward of it, as a bank of 30 to 100 fathoms extends from it
Ifii miles in an East direction. Upon this bank are several patches of 7 to 15
and 20 fathoms ; of these, Martins ledge (7 fathoris) shows itself sometimes by
breakers, — ^it lies iVo miles E. by N. I N. from the point, and close to it on all
sides is a depth of 60 to 00 fathoms. A 6-fathom patch also lies half a mile
N.E. by E. from the same point.

At point Grates the coast turns sharply southward and then eastward to a
point off which are several rocks high out of water ; the wlu^le comprised in a
distance of about a mile in a S.E. i E. direction. In the bay thus formed,
which is open and exposed to north-easterly gales, there are numerous fishing
estabUshments. The coast then turns S.S.E. for about 1{ miles to Red head,
and is high and steep ; off it, at about midwi^y^ there is a rock 10 feet high.
From Red head it trends S. i W. ahout 3 miles to Split point, and forms by its
irregularities several small bays. Split point is very bold, with a depth at a very
short distance from it of 40 to 50 fathoms ; tlie hill over it is 580 feet high.

BACCAiuilV xSLAXai) and Xdght. — Baccalieu island, 2 miles off the const
described in the last two paragraphs (the extremity of the peninsula separating
Trinity and Conception bays) is 3 miles in length, and about three-quarters of a
mile in breadth. Its northern point lias a reef above and under water, extending
from it about 2 cables. With this exception and the reefs extending a cable from
its south and south-west points, its shores are steep and almost free from sunken
dangers. An islet lies close off its western side. A landing upon it can only be
accomplished in a few places. The lighthouse, half a mile within the northern
end of the island, consists of a brick building, which exhibits at o30 feet above
high water a white light showing a flash every 20 secondt, which may be seen
in clear weather at the distance of 28 miles ; it is however hidden from the
observer when the southern end of the island bears N.N.E. k E., and is distant
less tlian 8 miles. The keeper's dwelling is a detached square white building
with a red roof. The light-tower is 6 miles S.E. from Grates point, and is con-
sidered to be in lat. 48' 8' 51" N., long. 62° 47' 50" W.

The channel between Baccalieu island and the coast westward of it is very
deep, and contains no known rocks sufficiently near the surface to endanger a
vessel, provided a mid-channel coUa te ^<^ maintained as much as possible. The
following are the principal shallow pat . > s in the channel and in the vicinity of
tlie island : —

Wall iZocA.— The Wall, a rock of 5 fathoms, lies \^\ miles N.W. ^ N. from
the south-west point of Baccalieu island, and about three-quarters of a mile N.E.
by E. f E. from the extremity of Split point. It has a depth of 10 to 10 fathoms
close to it on all sides, and upon it the sea frequently breaks.

Inner Collins. — The Inner Collins, a ledge of 15 fathoms with 40 to 30 fathoms
close to it, lies l^V miles N.W. 4 W. from the lighthouse on Baccalieu island.
I'pon this the sea has been observed to break in very heavy weather.

Outer Collins. — The Outer Collins, with 1(J fathoms ovei* it, is distant 1 ^'^ miles
I^.E. by N. from the lighthouse on Baccalieu island. Close to it on all sides is
a deptli of 30 to 40 ti\thoma.

1 ■' . ' ■»■-

■f.-;:

!;•■.,;■,
f. ■ ■■-!

'i ■'

■tf .• ■ 4 •

BAOCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE ST. FKANCIS-
CONCEPTION BAY, &c.

Conception bay is bounded on the north side by Baccaliea island and on the
south side by cape St. Francif ,nich bear from each other S.S.W. ^ W. and
N.N.E. § E. distant 18 miles. From a position midway between these two, the
bay has a general direction of W.S.W. [ . for about 38 miles, and is 11 miles
wide throughout nearly its whole extent, gradually tapering to a point at its
southern extremity. It is remarkable that all its inlets, and they are very
numerous, are on its western side, the eastern coast being regular in outUne and
of almost uniform height. The depth in its centre is considerably over
100 fathoms.

. 'Slack Oove. — From Split point, wliich is a very bold point with deep water in its
inMnediate vicinity, the coast treiids West about 2 miles to a bold projecting penin-
Biua, Imo^n as Bay Verd head, the inner part of which is of moderate height ;
hence 'from a distance the peninsula appears to be an island. Upon this lower
lanS are several houses. The bay which tliia headland forms with the coaat
eastward of it is known as Black cove ; it is exposed to south-eastward and is
not a safe anchorage.

Bay Verd Cov«. — Bay Verd cove, on the western side of the headland just
mentioned, is of very limited extent, and affords but indifferent shelter, being open
to southward and south-westward, from which direction heavy seas are sent in
when the wind prevails with strengih. The entrance is not more than a cable
across, and vessels ride in 5 fathoms at about half a cable from the head of tho
cove, with one anchor out astern and another fast on shore ahead. There is
room for only seven or eight small vessels to ride even in tliis manner ; notwith-
standing wliich it is a iishing station of considerable resort. Wood and water
are obtained with diflBculty. There is no known hidden danger in the entrance
or in the vicinity of tlio cove.

The locality of Bay Verd cove is easily recognised by Baccalieu island and
Split point. Bay Verd head also serves as a point of recognition. Bay Verd
head. Split point, and BaccaUeu island appear prominent bluli' land, and are very
similar in appearance when soen from southward.

Oull Island Cov*^ *o. — Fiom Bay Verd cove the coast trends northward and
westward about 2i miles to liow point, on the north side of which is luttle cove,
an anchorage for very small vessels but exposed to eastward. From this point
to Flamborough head, a black steep projecting point, tho cc ast continnes in a
south-westerly direction iii miles, and is steep with deep water at a moderate
distance from it. Idaml con; IJ miles south-westward from Flamborough .' "ad,
is an open anchorage, without shelter from easterly winds ;— tho land behind tlie
church rises to tho height of 100 feot. DcvU'n Point cove, 2 mikis I'lom Island
cove, is also an exposed anchorage of no impoitancc. Joir cave, about 1^
miles from Devil's Point cove, is also exposed to easterly wi.'.ds, and safe only

WESTERN BAY.

daring veiy fine weather ; when appraaching it from northward care is required
to avoid a bank of 12 to 18 feet which extends a short distance from the land on
its eastern side. Oull Island cove, about a mile beyond Job cove, has an islet
a* its entrance, and is exposed to eastward. Northern hay, a large open bay,
on J mile beyond Gull Island cove, has 10 fathoms water at its entrance, and
aiiords no shelter. From this bay to Ochre Pit cove, the coast trends about a
mile in a southerly direction ; this, like those previously described, is an open
roadstead, and safe only while the wind is from the land. None of these coves
can receive any but very small vessels ; they are seldom entered except by the
small coasting craft.

Joh Bock. — ^Vessels nmning down the coast from northward will sometimes
observe breakers on Job rock, a small rocky patch about a mile from tlie land in
tlie direction of S.E. by E. i E. from Gull island, from which it is distant
li miles. It is 5 fathoms under water ; between it and the shore is a depth of
12 fatlioms, and close to its eastern, southern and western sides is a depth of
about 25 fathoms.

Western Bay. — Western bay is formed on its southern side by a projecting
point known as the Head, or Western bay head, which is distant about 9 miles
from Flamborough head and about lOi miles from the south end of Baccalieu
island in a W.S.W. direction ; and it is a bold cliffy point, rising to the height-of
185 feet. The bay is about a mile in extent and exposed to eastward and nolQi'-
eastward, upon wliich account vessels should not enter far when the wind|-is trSm
that quarter. Vessels usually anchor in the entrance in 15 or 16 fathoms 'water ;
fiu-ther in, the depth is about 6 fathoms. *

In midway of tlie entiimce to Western bay thero is a 6-fathom rock known as
the Puddy rock. It lies half a mile N.E. ^ E. from the Head, and has close to
it on all sides a deptli of about 15 fathoms.

At about a mile sDiith-westward from Western bay head is Bradley cove, and
three-quarters of a mile further on Adam aove ; both open anchorages, of little
value to shipping. Broad cove, 1 J miles from .Adam cove, is more extensive than
either, but is equally unsafe when the wind is from eastward. Vessels
occasionally anchor ofif this part of the coast in 10 to 15 fathoms, but always in
such a manner that they can sUp away easily if an easterly wind comes on with
any strength.

iduUy Cove, on the south side of Broad cove head ; Percy cove, 2i miles more
to the south-westward ; and Hulmon cove, H miles further on, are all exposed
anchorages, which should be used only by boats. Salmon cove head is high
and steep.

Between Percy and Salmon coves, at half a mile from the former and about
the same distance from the coast, there is a rock 60 feet high, named Ochre Pit,
which has a depth close to it all round of about 12 fathoms. And, N.E. by E.
nearly a mile from this, there is a rock under water at about 2 cables from the
land.

Salmon covo head is distant 14 miles N.W. by W. J W. from cape St. Francis,
on the east side of Conception bay. From it the land trends W.S.W. 3 miles to
Crockers point, on the north side of the entrance to Carbonear bay ; the coast
between is steep, in places cliff, and the hills rise to the height of 490 feet.
Several small lishing villages -ire on this shore — at the entrances of three ravines;
the principal ai-e Clements, Freshwater, and Crockers.

Oif this part of the coast are several small islets aud rocks. The Folly rook»

It '.

BACCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE ST. FlUNCIS.

is a small ridge above water, a short half mile south of Salmon Cove head, and
about half a cable from the shore ; M(ul rock is small, above water, and lies
H cables eastward of the Harton rocks of Clements cove. A small chain of
rocks or islets form the south side of Clements cove, and terminate in a rock
awash at low water; they are known as the Harton rocks, and separate Clements
from Freshwater cove. Bradley rock is small and above water ; it lies nearly
midway between the extremity of Harton rocks and Maiden island, a little with-
out the line of direction. '

Maiden Island is 49 feet high, but being small and similar in appearance to
the cUflfs of the coast, is not easily distinguished. Half-way between it and
Crockers point are some rocks above water, two-thirds of a cable from the shore.

Crackers Cove immediately north of Crockers point (the north side of entrance
to Carbonear bay) is suitable only for boats. Bocks and shallow water extend a
cable eastward from the point.

Carhonear Iiland. — Carbonear island is 6 cables in length east and west,
2 cables in breadth, 102 feet high, anu slopes to the westward. Its coast id
mostly cliflf.

OABBOmSAR BAT. — Carbonear bay is distant about 26 miles S.W. by W.
f W. from Baccalieu island, is 2| miles deep in a W.N.W. direction, and three*
qujEirters of a mile wide, with bold shores, except at the head, where it shoals
gradually to a shingle beach. The entrance is easily recognised by the island
off it, and by Saddle hill, 503 feet high (the most remarkable land seen from sea-'
ward) immediately south of it. The anchorage is off the north shore, in 7 to
10 fathoms, sand; although open to the sea, which rolls in heavily with easterly
gales, many vessels of about 100 tons winter in safety at the wharves of the town.

The centre and soutli side of the bay is exposed to the sea and should be
avoided.

Tliere are no dangers in entering Carbonear bay from northward in ordinary
weather, except those off the coast between Salmon head and Crockers point,
which are all visibld and avoided by keeping Broad cove head open of FoUy
rocks. During heavy seas from eastward the Kane rock and Saucy Joe break
occasionally'. The Knne, with fathoms water on it, lies in the entrance of the
bay, with Grace islands light just open of the north-east point of Carbonear
island, S. J W., and Maiden island, N.W. by W. \ W., 7 cables. The Saucy Joe,
with 11 fathoms on it, lies with Eastern rock (Grace islands) just over the break
in the north-east end of Carbonear island bearing South ; it is distant 3 cables
from Carbonear island.

Between Carbonear island and Mosquito point, the south point of Carbonear
harbour, the distance is half a mile, but the channel is narrowed to one cable by
sunken rocks extending froir the island and point. To steer through in 4 fathoms
water, keep the Haypuk on Fer ^her point (Harbour Grace) just shut in with the
cliff of Old Sow point, bearing S. by \V. J W.

Mosquito Cove. — Mosquito cove, south of Carbonear bay, is formed on the
south side by a bold point, known as Old Sow point. It is about 4 cables wide
at the entrance, and H cables deep. The water shoals gradually to its head, and
it affords no shelter nor safe anchorage ; hence it is seldom entered by shipping.

BARBOUR GBAOB. — The extremity of Old Sow point, on the north side of
the entrance to Harbour Grace, is shelving rock at the base of small cliffs; — the
latter increase in height to 70 feet at a short distance westward of the point, and
maintain the same elevation for 1\ miles towards Harbour Grace; the hills over

HAKBOUR GRACE.

them are 285 feet high. Frum the tennination of the cliffs to the harbour light,
a distance of 1;^ miles, the coast is low with rocks extending off nearly a cable.
At about 80 yards off Old Sow point there is a small rock above water called Old
Sow rock.

At about three-quarters of a mile westward of Old Sow point, and 00 yards
from the shore, there is a rock named Long Harry ; it is 72 feei; high, although
its diameter is small. And, at a third of a mile S.S.W. from Long Harry rock
is another small rock, 63 feet high, known aa the Salvage rook, which has deep
water around it, but in a heavy sea it breaks a third of a cable inside it.

Feather Point, on the south side of entrance to Harbour Qn/Ase, is the termi-
nation of a ridge of hills over the south side of the harbour. The extremity of
the point is a mass of slate just disconnected by a rent from the main body of the
point, and called the Haypuk.

Grace Island* and Ugbt. — Grace islands, off Feather point, are a cluster of
small islets and rocks covering a space of about three-quarters of a mile in the
direction of the point, by a third of a mile in breadth. The principal islet is
105 feet high, and on the western islet is a summer fishing village. Between one
and 2 cables to the north-east of the islands are other islets or rocks, the outer
of which is called Eastern rock ; beyond these is rocky ground with 4 fathoms
water on it, known as the White rock, on which the eea breaks with great
violence.

At 2 cables W.N.W. from the south end of Grace islands are the Ragged rocks,
above water. Between these aud the shallow ground extending from Feather
point there is a clmnnel 2 cables wide and 3 to 4 fathoms deep, which should not
be attempted by strangers, tliere being no good leading mark for it.

The north-easternmost Grace island is very steep and accessible only by
ladders in fine weiither. The lighthouse on it consists of a square building
35 feet high, having a roof painted red and white in stripes. It shows, at 151
feet above the sea, a light revolvimj every half minute, visible at the distance of
18 miles, between the bearings from seaward of N.N.E. and S.S.W. Two white
flashen and one red /lash appear successively. Its geographical position is lat.
47° 42' 45" N., long. 53" 8' 11" W.

From a line between Old Sow and Feather points, Harbour Grace runs
westward 4i miles, with a breadth of 1^ miles at the entrance to a third of
a mile at its head, the hills on either side reaching 500 feet above the sea. At
6 cables eastward of tlie harbour lights, a bar runs across the harbour ; the
greatest depth on this bar is 24 feet, and tlie least depth 9 feet, the latter being
over a boulder bank forming the soutli side of the main channel, — between the
bank and south shore the depth is 13 feet. In heavy weather the sea breaks on
the shoal part of the bar, but seldom or ever in the 24-foot channel. The depth
of 30 fathoms at the entrance of the harbour decreases to 10 fathoms at 2 cables
from the bar ; witlun the bar the depth is to 4 fathoms to the head of the
harbour.

Harbour Lights. — At the outer end of Point of Beach, which is a shingle point
on the north side of the harbour, are two fiiced lights placed vertically ; one
33 feet high, the other 40 feet high, visible 3 and 11 miles. Both lights are from
gas.

Vessels entering Harbour Grace should give Eastern rock (Grace islands) a
berth of 3 cables, by keeping the dome of the church (Roman Catholic building)
at the east end of the town open north of Salvage rock, and steer in mid- channel,

': •'•/(

■:.v. ■•} ■

BACGALIJiU ISIiAND TO CAPE ST. lUANCIS.

pasfiing oither north or south of tlio latter. To cross the bar in the deepest watef
bring tho lightlioiiso on Point of licach W. ^ N. and in lino with Ship head — a
hill !)8 feet high on tho samo Hhore a Jong niilo beyond it. When clearing
tho bar, and tho dome of tho church at tho cast end of the town is in line witli
Oreeu hill (44') feet high) do not shut in tho point oast of Long Harry with that
rock, but edge southward to avoid tho shore bank east of Poiut of Beach ; this
point is steep-to on its south side.

At night run in with the lights at Point of Beach W. i S., until Grace islands
light bears about S.K. ; then steer southward — to avoid Salvage rock — until the
Point of Beach lights bear W. i N., then proceed as before.

Having passed the lights, anchor where convenient in R to 9 fathoms water,
mud. The harbour is safe throughout nearly the whole of its extent ; the best
anchorage is, however, on tho north shore, as at times the sea ia felt on the south.
The worst winds are from westward, and blow occasionally with much force.

Vessels working in may stand to either shore to a prudcut distance until up to
tho bar. Brennau hill (3M2 feet higli, and soutliward of Green hill) open east-
ward of the church at tho east end of the town, leads eastward of the bar ; and
Green hill open westward of the samo church leads westward of the bar. When
crossing tho bar the point cast of Long Harry should not be shut in with thot
rock, and short tacks should be made between this line and tiie line of the lead-
ing marks until Green hill is seen westward of the church, when the boai'd to the
southward may bo prolonged. There is uo tidal stream in Harbour Grace to
assist a vessel either in or out.

It is high water at Harbour Grace, full and change, at 7h. 26m. ; springs rise
44 feet, neaps 3 feet.

Next to St. John's, tho town of Harbour Grace is the largest town in New-
foundland. In 1857 it liad a population of 12,000. Supplies of all kinds required
by shipping can be obtained there. A patent slip has been established about
half way down tho harbour, on the northern shore. ,

Bryants Cove. — Bryants cove on the soutli-west side of Feather point, is
about ;) cables in extent, and has a depth of 10 to 3 i fathoms ; it is however open
to seaward and affords no shelter. In nearly its centre are sovnral patches of
rock.H that <',ovor at Imlf tide, \\ liich may be cleared on the south side bv bringing
a conspicuous liili up the valley open southward of the steep fall of the north
shore of the inner part of the bay, bearing W. i N. In this valley (formed
between the ridge of hills on the south side of Harbour Grace and those on tlie
north shore of Spaniards bay) are several lakes and bogs.

Bryants covo affords excellent fishing, but is a very bad anchorage. Vessels
entering keep along its southern shore at a moderate distance, it being rocky, anil
anchor in 4i fathoms westward of the Suuker, the rocky patch in the middle of
the harbour. This rocky patch is 2 foot above water at low tide, and tliere is a
channel on all sides of it , that southward of it is the best.

Spare point, ou tlie .south side of IJryiiuts covo has several detached rocks
above water near it, three cables from which is a depth of 10 fathoms. From
tliis point a cliily coast, with hills over it 500 feet high, trends W.S.W. i miles
to Island covo (a small rocky bight fronted by an islet) on the north side of the
entrance to Spaniards bay.

SFANlARSB BAY. — Spaniards bay is a mile wide, and runs Hi miles to tho
westward, with a depth in niid-cluinnel of 40 to "^(l fallioms. Itw north shore is
clear of danger. The southern shore is exposed to Iho heavy sea whicli sets iu

ipnngs nse

HAY ROBERTS, &o.

[with easterly gales, and its eastern part has several rocks extending a cable from

I il ; farther in, the water is slioal to the same distance off, and at the head of the
bay to nearly 2 cables.
(Ircen point, at the head of Spaniards bay, is 112 feet high. The only safe

liinclioraj^'e in the bay is off the north shore northward of this point, in 4 to 8 fa-
tlionis water ; when rnnning for this, vessels must keep Green point westward of
S.W. to avoid a shoal patch with Ij fathoms on it, lying with the north church
N.N.W., south cluirch W. i S., and Green point S. by W. It is high wator

I here, full and change, at 7h. 45m. ; springs rise 4^ feet, neaps '•) feet.

Mad Point and Booka.—Mad point, on the south side of the entrance to

I Spaniards bay, is the eastern termination of a peninsula 4 miles in length and 4
cables in breadtli, which separates the bay from Bay Roberts. The rocks, above
water and extending eastward about two cables from the northern part of the
point, are known as the M<ul rocks from the circumstance that the sea breaks
upon them with considerable violence when the wind sends in a swell from east-
ward. Broken ground with less than 10 fathoms over it extends 6 cables east-
ward from these rocks, and this again is prolonged, gradually deepening to 20
fatlioms, about three-quarters of a mile in the same direction. With the excep-
tion of two small rocks above water, about 00 yards from its south side, the point
is steep-to ; it should not, however, be approached in bad weather nearer than a

1 mill! when bearing West.

BAT bobbhts,— Between the peninsula just mentioned and another south-

I ward of it having its eastern termination in Green point, is Bay Roberts, which
is about ''H miles in length, nearly a mile in breadth, and 27 to 15 fathoms deep
in mid-channol. In it are weveral excellent anchorages, and vessels may anchor
almost anywhere according to their draught of water. It is exposed to easterly

I winds, and such winds sometimes send in a strong swell.

Jutjijiers Cove.— On the north side of Bay Roberts, at about cables from the

I extremity of Mnd point, is Jugglers cove, a small boat harbour formed by some
rocks. The depth in it is 7 to 10 feet.
Fenjus Islet. — At rather more than a mile from Mad point* and two cables

j from the north shore of the bay, is Fergus islet, an island 2 cables in length east

I and west, a cable broad, and 134 feet high with a rounded summit. Rocks ex-
tend a cable from its east end, and at about a cable N. by W. from its west end
is a rock 4 to (5 feet under water. Between it and the northern shore is a depth
of 16 fathoms, and almost close to its Houth-eastern side 8 to 10 fathoms. Vessels
entering the bay sometimes go northward of this island, but the usual and safer
passage is southward of it; the ancliorage northward of it is very indifferent,
over gravel and sand.

The liead of Bay Roberts is divided into two parts by a headland terminating
ill Coldeast point, upon which is a church and several houses. The point is
surrounded by roi^lcs above and under water to tlio distance of a cable seaward ;
at a cable soutli-eastward from it, but separated from it by a narrow channel 6
fathoms deep, there is a rocky patch 10 to 12 feet under water, — the depth close
to the south side of this patch is 10 fathoms.

Itobcrts JJnrbour. — Roberts harbour, between Coldeast point and the northern
shore, is a safe anchorage and easy of access. It is about a mile in extent
W.N.W. and E.3.E., with an average width of 2 cables, and tlie depth decreases
gradually from 10 fathoms at the entrance. The bottom is mud and holds well.
<>n the north shore of the harbour is the town, two churches, and fishing estab-

l-i'^'^

::'v

!•.:■'■/

BACCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE ST. FRANCIS.

lishmeuts. Vessels drawing 12 feet wuter can lie at the wharves at any time of|
tide.

The north head of Roberts harbour, a steep cliff known as Roberts look-out. I
has at its eastern extremity a ridge of dry rocks which extends from it eastward I
two-thirds of a cable, and with the coast fonns Mercers cove, where are a few
bouses and fislimg boats. Under the west church, and 70 yards from the shore, |
there are two rocks ; these, with the rocks and foul ground oflf Coldeast point,
are the only dangers in. the harbour. A shingle spit with a lagoon in it projects |
iiom the north side of Coldeast point.

The south side of Coldeast point is broken and rocky, with rocks extending I
from it about half a cable. 0£f the shingle beach at the head of the bay south-
westward of the point, there is an islet 10 feet liigh ; and a rock (awash at low
water) lies li cables from the south shore with the extremity of Coldeast point
bearing N.W. 1 N. (nearly) and Bareneed church, S.E. by E. f E. From this
rock seaward the south shore of Bay Roberts is foul a cable off. There is no safe I
anchorage on this side of the bay.

Or««ii Point. — Green point, the termination of the narrow peninsula 4 miles I
in length which separates Bay Roberts on the north from Bay de Grave on the
south, has close off it some small nigged rocks 14 feet above water. Broken
ground extends 2 cables froixi the point ; at one-third of a mile from it the depth {
is 20 fathoms.

BAV SB OBAVB. — Buy de Grave is formed on the north side by the penin- 1
sula just mentioned, and on the south side by a headland terminating in Burnt {
point. It is 5^ milos long East and West, has an average breadth of three-
quarters of a mile, and is very deep, shoaling from HO fathoms in the middle of I
the entrance to 30 fathoms at a mile from the beach at its head. It contains but
few pliiccs ci safe anchorage, being exposed to easterly winds throughout its |
extent.

Hibbs Hole. — At rather more than half a mile from the rocks off Green point I
the coast forms a cove known as Hibbs Hole, in which is a depth of 2 to 8 fa-
thoms ; this cove affords no shelter. Black Cove, half a mile further westward,
is 4 to 7 fathoms deep and equally unsheltered. Bloiv-me-down head, Ik miles
south-westward of Green point, projects a cable beyond the line of coast ; half a
mile beyond this is Ship Gove, a little inlet but indifferently sheltered from east-
ward by the head, off which small vessels may anchor in summer in 10 fathoms |
water, with Port de Grave church (midway between Ship cove and Port de
Grave) bearing N.W. by N.

Port de Grave. — This cove, three-quarters of a mile westward of Blow-me-
down head, is fronted by some low islets or rocks. In it is a depth of 6 to 9 feet.
Shoal water extends a cable eastward from the western rocks.

Bareneed. — The coast westward of Port de Grave, is cliffy as far as Bareneed
2i miles from Blow-me-down head. Off this village small vessels can anchor in
summer in 10 fathoms water, at two-thirds of a cable from the shore, with the
church bearing between North and N.N.E.'

From the village of Bareneed round the head of the bay to Cupids cove on the
south, there are no dangers nor sheltered anchorage ; the depth decreases gradu-
ally, and at three-quarters of a mile from the head of the bay there are 10
fathoms water. Two streams here empty themselves, one at the north, the other
at the south comer of the beach ; they are named North and South Out — both
can be entered by boats at high water, and are navigable a considerable distance.

CRIGUS AND COLLIERS BAYS.

Gvpiih Cove. — Cujiids cove, on tlie soutli side i.f ft remnrkable hlufif 330 feet high,
iKiiued Spectacle head, runs iu about tliree-quarters of a mile, and is 2 oahles
\\ ide. Here small vessels can anchor in 3 to 8 fathoms water, mud and sand, and
be well sheltered from almost all winds. Although this cove is open to seaward,
but little sea sets into it.

rnmt Point. — Burnt point, the south point of entrance to Bay de Grave, is
181 t'eet hi^li. and has a small cove on its north and another on its south side.
At ii cable N.E. \ \. from its northern extremity there is a rock with less than 2
feet water upon it, named Snpers, close to which is a depth of 13 to 15 fathoms ;
ou the south side of the point at about the same distance are other rock^, some
of wliicli are just tmder water. To avoid these dangers a vessel should not
approach tbe point nearer than half a mile.

I'roni Burnt point a steep rocky coast, with hills immediately over it rising to
tbe height of ".280 to upwards of 400 feet, trends S.S.W. 11 miles to the north
point of entrance to Brigus bay. The most remarkable of these hills is Btigus
look-out, a round summit, 408 feet high and close to the sea, at about a mile firom
Burnt point. At a quarter of a mile from the land the depth is 18 to 30 fathoms.

BBZOUa BAT. — Brigus bay runs in a mile to the westward with an average
brendth of 4 cables, and is 35 fathoms deep in midway of the entrance which
graduall}' decreases to about 4 fathoms off the town at its head. It is exposed
to easterly winds and contains no anchorage which can be recommended to
Btranpiers. There are no dangers, but at about 50 yards from the shore are
BBveral boulders which have rolled down from the hills. The sealing vessels
belonging to Brigus, moor head and stern in the north-west corner of the bay ;
and also under Admirals island in the south-west corner in 8 to 4 fathoms,
liaving a fast to the shore.

The town is a small but thriving place of wealthy sealers ; it is picturesquely
situated round the shores of a lake in a valley between steep barren hills. Its
importance is accounted for by the circumstance that the sea setting into the bay
breaks up the ice, and releases the sealing early in spring. At the last census
tbe population was 1620.

The south point of Brigus ba)' is rugged, terminating in some slate rocks.
Tlie land about 1} miles within it is mucli broken and irregular in appearance,
and rises into a double peak 542 feet higli, known as the Twins.

COXiLZEKS BAV. — From the south point of Brigus baj' the coast trends
S.W. by W. 5 miles, and forms with a peninsula three-quarters of a mile east-
ward of it, a bay named Colliers, in which vessels may anchor during summer
^^ith off-shore winds. It is 60 fathoms deep in midway of the entrance, and this
tiradually decreases to H and 4 fathoms, the latter being off tJifc beach at its head.

Winds from N.E. by E. are felt throughout its extent, and thcra is no anchor-
age suitable for large vessels. Its population at the last census was 310.

At ratiier more than a mile within the enti'ance of the bay there is a rock
wliicli dries at about three-quarters ebb. It lies in nearly mid-channel (nearer
tbe west coast than the east), has close to it a depth of 15 to 20 fathoms, and
may be passed on all sides in safety.

James Cove. — James cove, a little inlet on tiie east side of Colliers bay 2i miles
from the entrance, is sufficiently deep to accommodate small vessels. It has
2^ to 4 fathoms water, and it is usual to anchor in 10 fathoms at the entrance.

About Ik miles further up (JolUers bay and ou the same side as James cove,

6 *

'' ■ ..)

BACCALIEU ISLAND TO CAPE ST. FRANCIS.

tlicre is a shallow inint full of rocks. At the head of the bay vessels sometimes |
anclior in 9 or 10 fathoms on good ground.

BaeoB Oov*. — The peninsula on the east side of Colliers bay is hilly, rising in I
parts 800 to 484 feet ; the latter, Campbell hill, is near the head of the bay
The coast is also bold and rocky. On its eastern side, at about li miles from <ta|
extremity, is Bacon cove, a small open bay 17 to 10 fathoms deep, in which the I
vessels of the country sometimes anchor with off-shore winds. The village had I
a population of IttS when the last census was taken.

OA8TBZBB BAT.— Castries bay, immediately south of Colhers bay, is about I
a mile wide at the entrance, whence it has a direction of about W. by S. for about
2 miles, and maintains throughout that distance nearly the same breadth. It
then divides into two arms, that to the north-westward taking the name cf Cat I
cove ; that to the south-westward, Salmon cove. In both these arms there is I
good anchorage. In the middle of the entrance the depth is 40 to 45 fathoms,
and this decreases gradually as the bay is ascended. The shores are in general
steep and have no outlying dangers.

Cat Gove. — Cat cove has an extent of about a mile in a westerly direction, I
and is 8 to 5 fathoms deep When entering, keep a rock (above water, on the
port hand) well on board, to avoid a sunken rock (nearly opposite) a short dis-
tance from the starboard shore ; there is a channel on each side of this rock,— |
the southern is the wider and better passage.

Salmon Cove. — Salmon cove is 10 to 4 fathom»deep. It is about 11 miles in I
extent and to be preferred to Cat cove as an anchorage. The ground holds well,
and there is no known sunken danger to bring up a vessel. The shelter is also |
excellent.

BABBOUB MAur. — Harbour Main, south-eastward of Castries bay, has an I
extent of about Ij miles in a south-westerly direction, and, like the bays hitherto
describee ^ open to easterly and north-easterly winds. It is 30 to 6 fathoms I
deep, and affords no shelter except from off-shore winds. A 2-fathom patch lies]
off the village of Castries, on the west side of the bay. Population 848.

BOXiT ROOD BA7. — Holy Rood bay, at the head of and innermost anchorage I
in Conception bay, has a direction of nearly S.W. for about 4 miles and is a half
to nearly a mile wide. Its depth at the entrance is 40 fathoms and this gradually
decreases to « fathoms at its iiead. When well within, vessels are sheltered from [
all winds except those from north-eastward.

The best anchorage in Holy Rood bay is in a cove at its south-western end, in |
12 to 10 fathoms. The ground holds well, and there is plenty room to moor.

Broad Cov« and Portngal Cove. — From Holy Rood bay the coast trends in I
an E. by N. i N. direction about 13 miles to a small bay, known as Broad cove,
and is in general safe to approach to a moderate distance. The projecting points
have each a reef pi-ojecting a cable or so, and must tlierefore be carefully
approached; nsnally an oflBng of half a mile should be preserved, when the depth
will bo fiboiit 10 fathoms. Broad Gove has a depth of about 2 fathoms water
only, and is an open bay. Portmjal Cove, 2J miles from Broad cove, is about
half a mile in extent and also an open bay ; it has a depth of 12 to fathoms
and is not a safe anclioragc. A good road connocts this cove with St. Johns, and
steamers ply from it to Harbour Grace ; thus maintaining a communication
between the latter and the capital.

From Portuiial cove tlie coast trends N.E. 11 miles to cape St. Francis, the |
eastern boundary of Conception bay, and is bold with deep water at a moderate

BELL AND KELLY ISLANDS.

.53

-!;■■'■<■

[s sometimes I

distance off. The land in the interior ia high and gradnally decreases in eleva-
tion as tlie cape ia approached. The cape is comparatively U>\v and of wliiti^h
appearance.

BBLXi ZBXiAiro. — Bell island is about 54 miles long E. by N. and W. by S.,
2 miles across in its widest part, and 405 feet high. Its northern and western
shores are foul, and at its western end there is a rock 2*20 feet high situated close
to the shoie, known as the Bell ; another rock at its south-western end is named
the Clapper. From its east end a shoal extends out 4 cables, and immediately
succeeded by a depth of 10 fathoms. At the last census the island had a popula-
tion numbering 4^s.

On the eastern side of Bell island, at rather more than a mile from its north-
east extremity, there is a very low beach named Grand Bench ; and here it is
shallow a short distance out. Vessels sometimes anchor southward of this
beach, at about 2 cables from the island, in 80 fathoms, sand, good holding
ground. Good anchorage may also be obtained off Lance Cove, 8 miles west-
ward from Orand beach, in 13 to 16 fathoms, sand. Also, between Bell island
and Little Bell and Kelly islands iu IS to 20 fathoms.

Bell Rook. — The Bell rock, 21 to 3 fathoms under water, is a very formidable
danger to large vessels passing round the south-west end of IJell island. It lies
three-quarters of a mile from the nearest shore, one mile S.W. J S. from the
high rock (the Bell) at the west end of the island, and close to it on all ^ides
except the northern is a depth of 10 fathoms ; from that side a 4-fathom ledge
projects half a mile in a northerly direction.

UTTLB aaxx ZBZiAIID. — Little Bell island, 2 miles S. by W. from Bell
island, is only half a mile in extent East and West, very narrow, and 92 feet
high. Its eastern and western ends are foul to some distance seaward ; hence a
close approach is not advisable.

XBUiT ZSUUtS. — Kelly island, 2i miles south-westward from Bell island, is
about a mile in extent and 183 feet high. Each of its projecting points has a reef
extending firom it a short distance.

r"<\-

■.;■■■•■■ ^

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO CAPE RACE.

CAPB 8T. rSANCZB and Brandies Boeka. — Cape St. Francis has been
previously mentioned; its extremity is in lat. 47° 48i' N., long. 52° 47 J' W.
At about two-thirds of a mile south-eastward from the extremity of the capo are
some rocks above water, and outside (to seaward of; these, about a quarter of a
mile in a northerly direction, are some sunken rocks known as the Brandies.
The latter consist of three rocks, respectively 4, 7J and llj feet under water,
which are very steep on their northern side, there being at a very short distarjce
from them on that side a depth of about 50 fathoms : between tliem and the
rocks above water, and also between them and the cape, the depth is about 12 fa-
j thoms. The outermost of the Brandies rocks lies 8 cables E.S.E. from ihe cape,
and they may be cleared by keeping Tor Bay point open of Black hosul ; tlio sea
generally shows their position by breakers. The channel between these sunken
rucks and the cape is too dangerous for strangers.

:..;r./ .r;

CAPE ST. iua:;cis to cai-k race.

Blaeayn* Oot*. — At a very sliort distiince from thn I'xtreniitv of cape St. Fran-
cis, on its southern side, is a little inlet named liiRciiyne (and al»o Hlioe) cove,
wliich is frequented in bad weather for M])littin<^' and saltin;; lish. Durinj;;
northerly, westerly and southerly wind.s. small vesselrt occasitmally anchor here.
Nearly r>pposite it there is a rocky islet, and further out ftre the rocks above
water mentioned in the preceding; paragraph. Good tishing may generally be
obtained in this locality.

From Biscayne cove the const trends South 2j miles to Pouch cove and has
oflf it, near the latter, a bank of (! to 7 fatlumis ; it then turns sharply S.E. by E.
nearly 2 miles and forms Black head, a bold cliffy headland. The Vlijf', a small
rocky patch of 8 fathoms, lies about a mile from this part of the coast, with the
extremity of the head bearing S. by W. J W. ; close to it on all sides is deep
water.

riat Bock Cove. — From Black head the coast has a general direction of S. by
W. \ W. for about .Si miles, to a narrow projecting point, known lias Flat Hock
point, from a flat rocr close to its extremity. A spit (( to 1(» fathoms under water.
which projects north-eastward fror this jxiint about a third of a mile, helps t.i
break the force of the sea setting into the little cove on the west side of tlie point.
This cove, in which is a depth of 20 to l(i fathoms, is open to north-easterly
winds.

TOB BAT. — Tor bay. southward of Flat Rock point, is about .'I miles in ex-
tent, and open to eastward, from which direction a strong swell generally sets in ;
hence the anchorage is considered by no means safe. The dopth is ;i() to 40
fathoms in the entrance, which decreases to about 10 fathoms off tlie town at the
head of the bay. Its southern point (Tor Bay point) has less height than the
coast in its vicinity ; from this point to Green cove, the usual anchoiage, the
course is about N.W. by W. J W. 2 miles. It is customary to anelior in 14 to
12 fathoms, but only in summer or with the wind from the Luul, ns u strong
easterly wind would almost certainly carry the vessel on shore. Population,
119().

Tantam Rocks. — These are two rocks off Tor Bay point. The outermost
(4f fathoms under water) lies three-quarters of a mile N.E. } N. from the point ;
the other, at about midway, has over it only 2} fathoms. Tiie situation of the
last mentioned rock makes it a foimidablo danger to vessels entering Tor bay
from southward, and also to vessels keeping too close in with the land. The sea
in their immediate vicinity is very deep.

Bed Head. — Red head, IJ miles S. f W. fr m T Bay ;ioint, is high, steep,
and of red appearance. Behind it the c s to tlie lioight of 700 feet.

Viewed at a distance from northward it i .os tlie Sugar ' T. a remarkable

hill (700 feet high) close to the sea at al)i l i miles south ol it. Many caves
are at its base, one of which faces North.

At about midway between Tor Bay point and R* i head, there is a 5-fathom
rook, known as tted Head rock. It lies half a mile from the shore, has ep
water close to it on all sides, and from it Tor Bay point bears N. i W. distant
nearly a mile.

At Red heiid the coast turns to S.W. for about a mile when it juts out eastward
into the proji 'ting point upon which is the remarkable hill, the Sugar-loat.
already mentioned ; it thus forms Longey cove, a small bty open to ea erly
winds, at the head of which is a village having a population of about 180. In
this bay there is no shelter, and the water is deep. The Sugar-loaf has a red
appearance fi'uiii u distance.

ST. JOHNS HARBOUR.

QQlddy Vlddy. — From the Sugar-loaf hill the coast trends 2^ miles S.W.,
I passing' a projecting point knovt'n an Small point, to Quiddy Viddy, an inlet about
a ciiblo in extent havin<; a depth of 17 to 1$) fathoms, sandy bottom, and too
limited in area to be of Heivice to shipping. This inlet is open to E.S.E. and
behind it is a naiTow creek 24 cables long in a N.N.W. | W. direction, generally
known as Quiddy Viddy harbour, having a depth of 2 to 31 fathoms, access to
which is over a bar that noarly dries at low tide. Quiddy Viddy harbour is the
outlet of a large fresh-water lake.

The entrance to Quiddy Viddy harbour may bn mistaken by strangers for that
to St. Johns harbour, if the weather has been insufficiently clear to enable them
to distinguish the lighth.ouse on cape Spear and port Amherst; it should be borne
in mind therefore that on the south side of Quiddy Viddy harbour is a very steep
rounded hill of reddish appearance, not unlike a hay-cock, and bearing some
resemblance to the Sugar-loaf hill previously mentioned. This hill is 390 feet
high and steep to the sea, — the headland of which it forms part is known by the
name of Cuckold head.

ST. JOBirs HABBOVB. — From Cuckold head the distance to St. Johns har-
bour is about three quarters of a mile, tlie coast between trending S.W. J W.
Immediately under the head the coast falls in to the westward and forms a rocky
cove having a depth of 29 fathoms at its entrance. All this shore is very bold.

St. Johns harbour is remarkable for its narrow entrance, which is only 380
yards wide, with high land on each side, and is consequently not readily discerned
at a distance ; it is however deep enough to receive vessels of the largest size,
there being in its shallowest part (excepting the Merlin rock in mid-channel)
about a fathoms water. This mrrow entrance is half a mile long N.W. i W.
and S.E. J E. ; the harbour then opens out into a bay having an extent of about
a mile in a W. by S. i S. direction, and a width in its broadest part of 4 cables,
in which is a depth gradually shoaling from 15 fathoms to 3 fathoms, th' latter
being near the Naval Yard at its head. Although small, the harbour is con-
venient and secure; the ground, of mud and gravel, also holds well. The water
in it is generally smooth, for though near the open sea its entrance is narrow
ami nearly at right angles to it. It is shut in from the sea by the high land on
the south side, in not often frozen over in winter, and is accessible at all seasons,
except wlieii the prevalence of easterly winds in early spring drives the heavy
fKld-iee upi-n the coast, which does not often occur. The largest vessels can be
securely moored at the wharves.

LiciiiTs. — kfiM'd light, shown in fort Amherst (on the south side of the entrance)
iit 114 fet't above the sea, is visible at the distance of 16 miles between the bear-
iunrs from seaward of W.S.W. and N.N.E. {22.')°). When the harbour or cape
Spear, 8J miles S. by E. i E. from it, is enveloped in fog, a gun is fired every
hour during dnyli^'lit.

There sue also two jixed red lights within the harbour. One is on the roof of
the custom-house at 50 feet above the sea ; the other near a chapel, in front of the
Cathedral, at 2.i.i IVet iibove the sea; — they are distant from each other about
'■i cables, and wiien in one, N.W. ^ W., lead through the narrows of the harbour.

DAN(iF,uK fN TiiK Api'hoach TO St. Johss. — The vaiious rocks iu the vicinity
of and in the entrance to St. Johns are named as follows ; — Wash-balls, Vestal,
Carey, Pancake, Chain, Roby, Prosser, Merlin and Seal. Of these the Vestal,
being outside the harbour, is the most dangerous.

Wash-halh. — North head, on the northern side of the entrance to the harbour,

■:..'TV'

■;

[■ ■'

:'^.:.'"-

fv,.:

- »

OAI'K St. FRANCIS TO CAPK HACK.

Im u 1)!>1(1 hoadliind having a dopth of n to 10 fathoniH at a vory tnodorato distanco
fi'oiii it At about a cnbhi north ouNt ward from ita uxtroinity thoro aro hoiru ateop
rod(H, uwauh, kiiiiivii k.« thu WaHh-ballu; those aro at a Hliort di;itaiic*) from tlie
laud, and shoal uutor oxtonds Bouth-oaHi,ward from thorn about half a cable, out-
eidfl Avhioh iH a d»))th of 10 fathoms.

ye»tal /iork.— South head, on thu south oide of tho ontranoo to the harbour,
is alHo vory Ixtld bind, and will at once bo reoogniHod from seaward by fort Am-
ImrHt upon it, Tho VcHtal rook, 12 foot under water, lioH half a cable from the
Bhoro in tho dirootion of S.K. by IC. ij K. from tho lightiuwi on tho fort; oloso
to it on tho seaward Hide in a dopth of (I to B fathonia, and between it and the
land of about 10 fathomu. When in tlio vicinity of tliin rock the land should not
bo appro<icii"d nearer than a cable ; tlie rock may bo cleared on the north side
by kecpiiig the Koman Catholic cathodral open uortIi-«astward of fort Amherst,
or Ii'rederick )|)o*r.t open of South head.

(hiify iiiH'h. — Carey rock, a huhiII patch of about fJ feet water, lies on the
north Hide of the ontranoo at about two rabloH N.W. \ W. from tho extremity of
North head. It in about 40 yaids i'rom tho clitf under SigiukI hill, and close to
itH pouth-wentern edge i» a dopth of R to 7 iathom.s.

Viinciike liwk. — Tho Paucako rock (on tho Houtli ahoro and about a third of a
mile within South liead) is awash at iiigli watcrr, and from it a ^-fathom 8pit
extouds about tO yards to tho eastward.

( /iifiM Hiwk. — Tho Chain rock, on tho north shore at about 40 yards S.S.W.
from the Chainrock buttery, is noarly covered at high tides. It lies on the ex-
tremity of a 8-foot spit oxtoiuling southward from the battery, and from it a spit
of VX to 14 feet water extends southwiird a short distance and is immediately
Huecoeded by a depth of 5 to fathoms, i-

liobij Hock. — The Hoby. M fathoms inidor water, lies 10 yards W.S.W. from
Chain rock, the depth iik the narrow riiannel between being 4i fathoms. Close
to its outer edge is a dopth of (( to H t'ulli tms.

Pfoxni'r Hock. — t")!! the bunk surrounding the Pancake rock is a dopth of only
I J to 'i^ fathoms. The edge of this bunk follows the lino of coast for about tliree-
(luartcrs of a cable westward of the rock, at the distanco of one-third of a cable,
it then falls in and approaches the coast but soon afterwards aiivanoos again
until at Cahcel point it extends out about half a cable. Upon its outer odgo i»
tho Prosaer, a rock 5 foot under water, which lies a quarter of a 'jnV.le from the
tish stage at Caheel point in .■ N.H. by N. direction.

Caheel point is the inner point of ihe entniuco to the harbour, on the southern
shore. The IVosser rock uuvy be cleared by keeping Si)ulli htnid open of
Frederick battery point.

Merlin Hock. — The Merlin rock, with 1 fntlunus water on it, lies W.N. W.
three -(luartors of a cable (nearly) fron> the Cliain rock, and baa close to it ou all
sides a depth of M to !> fathoms. The two i'<l lij^'hls inline; or the Custom
house on with the nortli side of tho Conj^rcyuiional cliiiicli, loads southward of
the rock.

• Tho j;oon;r«iiluoal |iosiliou of Clmiii-roi-k InUtcry ia consiilorcd to bo lat. 47° 34' 2" N.,
Un)j. 52~ 40' 60" \V. The longitutlos oi' all plaooa in Nowlbuiullaud depend upon this
position.

CIi^uo-VihIj is so i!:uiieil bn-nus, in forimr tiiuos it was customary to hang a chain from
it to tho opposite f ulo of tlio cliaiiiicl when hostile ships were expected.

ST. JOHNS HARBOUR.

Sf(d Rook.— The Seal, a small rock 40 yards from the north shore and rather
moro tlian half a cable N W. by N. from Chain-rock battery, is on the outer ei^ge
of the bn nk that linos the coast. It covers at three-quarters flood, and may be
cleared by keeping South head open of Chain rock.

Bt. Johns. — St. Johns, tho capital of Newfoundland and the seat of Govern-
ment, covers tho s*eep hilly ground on the north side of the harbour, and con-
tinues along the banks of the river and the south shores of the hnrbour ; it has
Bovcral handsome public buildings, of which the most conspicuous^is the Roman
Catholic cathedral, erected from the designs of Sir Gilbert Scott, the celebrated
architect. The population according to the last census was about 25,000, and
tlicro were upwards of ll,:iOO tons of shipping employed in the fisheries. In one
year the amount of codfish cured in. the colony reached the large amount of
(Ht.SOO tons, besides 18,745 tons of herring, 2603 tierces of salmon, and 1,006,989
gallons of seal and cod oil. On the wharves there are numerous^ oil-vats, the
stench from which is very unpleasant in the summer months, and .^stages for
drying fish are placed in every available spot.

The city is abundantly supplied with excellent water from a lake'|[4 miles
distant, and pipes are placed on the wharves for the supply of the shipping. Sup-
plies of every kind may be readily obtained, aud a floating dock, capable of
taking up vessels of 800 tons, is in active operation.

DiKKCTioNs. — Fogs are less frequeut at St. Jolins than along the coast south
of it, owing to the interposition of land to the south-westward by which the fog
is dissipated. Pilots and steam-tugs are generally to be met with off cape Spear,
and it is recommended that strangers at all times obtain tlie assistance of a pilot,
on account of the narrowness of the entrance and also because the winds
frequently prevail in gusts, coming on with sudden and great violence. Winds
from S.E. by E. southward to S.E. ^ S. blow through the channel and are con-
sequently leading winds. With foul or baffling winds a vessel will find temporary
anchorage in 15 fathoms water, just within the heads, and be thence taken in
tow by a steam-tug.

The entrance to the harbour may be uasily recognised in fino weather by fort
Amherst (on the south side) and by the flagstaff, blockliouse, and barracks on
Signal liill (on tho north side) but is so narrow that in foggy or hazy weather,
wlien tho hills are indistinct, a stranger must be careful not to be misled by the
opening into Quiddy Viddy harbour, which is about a mile to the north-east of it.
At a distance the coast looks hilly, bleak, and desolate ; — the land rises abruptly
from the sea to the height of 600 to 740 feet.

After making cape Spear light, as the land is approached, by steering so as to
pass about 2 miles north of the cape, the block-house on Signal hill will soon be
visible ; then steer for this hill, and bring the north side of a church in front of
tho cathedral in line with the Custom house, bearing N.W. f W., and proceed on
tills course through the narrows into the harbour to any convenient anchorage.
The Roman Catlxolic cathedral should always be open of fort .Amlierst to avoid
the Vestal rock. If the leading marks cannot be seen, steer so as to keep the
Chain rock a little on the starboard bow until abreast of tlie Pancake rock, when
steer for the Custom house N.W. J W., bearing in mind tliat South head should
be kept open of Frederick Battery point to clear tho Pvosser rock.

Small vessels, with boats to tow. often beat in, but tho imsteadiness of the
w ind renders it tedious and difficult.

At night. — At night bring the two red lights, already mentioned as leading

■^■■■' ■-n

,.■• ■ s 't

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO CAPE RACE.

lights, in one, and they will carry a vessel in mid-chunnel through tlie entrance,
clear of all danger.

It is high water full and change, at 7h. SOm. ; springs rise (5 feet, neaps 4 feet.
There is very little stream of tide in the narrows.

Ooa»t to Oap« Bpear. — From the entrance to St. Johns harbonr to cape Spear
the bearing and distance are S. by E. \ E. 8^ miles. The coast between is bold,
nnd forms by its irregularity four open bays named respectively Freshwater,
Deadman, Black head and Cape, in each of which are establishments for fishing.
On this coast the sea breaks very heavily during north-easterly gales, and in
u(me of these bays can a vessel obtain the least shelter, — they are safe only
when the wind is from the land.

^Y. George Bank. — At about three-quarters of a mile S.E. from the entrance to
St. Johns is St. George bank, a narrow rocky shoal of 15 to 20 fathoms, having
an extent of Ij cables in a N.E. and ^'.W. direction. It is very steep, rising from
a depth of 30 to 40 fathoms, and the sea breaks over it in very bad weather.

Cap* Sp«ar and Ught. — Cape Spear is a barren headland of greyish appear-
ance, and about 200 feet high. On its northern and north-eastern sides it falls
in a gentle declivity to the sea ; on its eastern side it is very steep. The ligl»t-
house, a square tower painted red and white horizontally, is .38 feet high, and
erected on the highest part of the cape, at about one-third of a hiile from its
extremity ; it shows a light revohnng every minute at 204 fet^t above the sea,
visil)le from all parts of the sea horizon at the distance of 22 miles. The geo-
graphical position of this building is e.stimated to be lat. 47° 31' 11" N., long.
62° 3«' 5»" W.

Cape Spear is the easternmost headland of Newfoundland and maj' readily be
recognised from a distance when viewed from south-eastward, as it appears
then' to stand out prominently, the land immediately behind it to the northward
trending sharply to the N.N.W. It is the point usually steered for by vessels
bound to bt Johns after they have obtained soundings on the Great Bank and
thereby ascertuiaed, approximately, their position.

Old Harry Hock. — In close vicinity to cape Spear is a depth of 8 to 10 fathoms
which increases to 20 and 30 fathoms at about half a mile from the land ; and,
a bank of to 10 fathoms extends from it about three-quarters of a mile in a
N.E. by N. direction, whence the lead falls at once into 20 fathoms. On the
eastern edge of this baak is the Old Harrv, a 4-fathom rock over which the sea
usually breaks when there is a swell, liiis rock lies half a mile E. by N. | N.
from cape Spear, and 3^ miles S.S.E. from fort Amherst.

PBTTT BAV.— From cape Spear the coast ♦rends S.W. 24 miles to North
head, the north point of Petty bay ; it is of moderate height, steep and of dirty
red colour. It then turns to the westward about the same distance, and forms
with Motion head. 3i miles S.W. ^ W. from North head, a bay known as Petty
bay, in which is a depth of 35 to 7 fathoms and no shelter, every part of it being
exposed to easterly winds. At the head of this bay is a small harbour (a narrow
gully between rocks, half a cable wide. 2 cables in length and ."i fathoms deep at
low water) which is considered to be an excellent lishing station and has ;i
scattered population of about HOO.

The depth in Petty bay is very irregular. A small lU-fathom patch liet* half a
mile S. by E. i E. from North head, and another of !) fathoms at tht aamo
distance S.W. by S. from the head. A lU-fathom patch exists in nearly' the
middle of the bny, with North head bearing E. by X. ;\ N. distant nearly 2 miles,

BAY BULLS AND WITLESS BAY.

511

hi,:i

and Motion head S. by W. J W. the same distance. Thore is also a 7-fathora
patch at about three-quarters of a mile N.E. i E. from the extremity of Motion
head. AH these rocky patches aro very steep.

The shores and also the sea bottom of Petty bay are rocky. Off Motion head,
its southern horn, the ground is irregular and broken, and although a reef ex-
tends only a cable from the point, the heavy cross sea met with near the Motion,
makes it advisable to give it a wide berth. Gape Spear light, in sight opqu of
North head, bearing N.E. J N., clears all danger.

Tbe Coast. — Watch hill, behind Motion head, is 740 feet high. From this
head the coast trends S.W. by W. 8i miles to Bull head (on the noilh side of
Bay Bulls), a bold headland which rises to the height of 116 feet. The coast
between is of slate cliffs, and the land rises back to the height of 700 feet ; it is
bold-to, and free from off lying dangers. At 4 miles to the north-east of Bull
head is the Spout, a remarkable natural phenomenon caused by the successive
rush of the sea wave into an underwater cavern, from which a fissure in the rock
allows its escape in jets of foam. It is most remarkable at high water, and when
there is much ocean swell. It makes a roaring noise and may be seen distinctly
3 miles from the land.

BAT BVIiXiB. — Bull head has deep water in its immediate vicinity, the depth
close to it being as much as 16 fathoms, and at about half a mile from it in a
south-easterly direction 'H\ fathoms ; its south point, South head, is also bold.
The bearing and distance betwesn these two headlands are S.W. by W. ^ W.
and N.E. by E. i E. about IJ miles. At about 2 miles within Bull head, on the
north side of the bay, is Ironclay hill. 810 feet high, which is the highest land
on the coast between cape Ilace and cape St. Francis.

Bay Bulls runs in 2i miles to the N.W. and is a mile wide at its entrance.
It is exposed to the sea, but a slight change in its direction above Pepperalley
point adils to the protection cf the anchorage, and the holding ground is good,
being of sand and mud. The best bertii is off the mouth of a little brook on
the north side, in 10 fatlioms water.

There are here about 700 inh'ibitants. who are prin(Mpally en.^aged in the
fisheries. They have a neat chapel, and the ground is cultivated to some ex-
tent. Water can be had in abundance from the river at tlie head of tiio bav.
After heavy gales ft'om eastward much ground s.vell enters the harbour, but not
so as to endanger the shipping.

When St. Johns harbour is heset witli ice. this bay is often clear, and vessels
may anchor here and communicate witii St. Johns hy land. The mail road, a
distance of IH miles, is in excellent order.

Danijers. — A rock (under water) lies S.V»'. by S. 8(1 yards from Breadcheese
point, on the north aide of the bay at about IJ miles within Bull head; and
another, named Magotty, at about I'^O yards from the sliore. off a gravelly beach
on the south side, li miles from the entrance, — this rock is <i feet under water.

Ironclay hill, if seen, is a good guide to Bay Bulls. With a fair wind, the
course in is about N.W. Vessels should keep the north shore aboard after pass-
ing Breadcheese point, and may anchor when convenient. The north side of the
harbour is always more sheltered from the ground swell than the south side.

WITliBSB BAT. — Witless bay, immediately south of Bay Bulls, is open to
south-eastward, and in every part too much exposed to south-easterly gales to bo
recommended as an anchorage. Its south point, Witless point, (iJJ miles
S.W. by W. \ W from South head) is low and wooded. The bay is about two

\:'

;>■/!

j ■• V.' ' ,

CAPE ST. FRAMCI3 TO CAPE llACE.

miles iti extent, and has a depth of 30 to 3 fathoms, the latter being off the houses
at its extremity. Generally speaking the ground holds well. The village has a
population of about 800. There is a large church, and above the village is a
conspicuous pointed hill, 430 feet liigh.

Witless Lay, although in some degree sheltered by Gull and Green islands
from the heavy swell that is sent on the coast during south-easterly gales, can be
considered safe only during summer or when the wind is from the land ; it is
therefore at best only a temporary anchorage. The anchorage rt coramendod is
half a mile above Bearcove point (If miles within the entrance, on the north
shore) in 8 fathoms, sand ; from this point a ledge of rocks, partly dry, extends a
quarter of a mile in a south-westerly direction.

OnU Island. — Gull ijland, outside Witless bay, is 210 feet high and steep-to.
It is nearly a mile long N.E. and S.W., and about a quarter of a mile broad.
It is rocky and wooded.

Oreen Island. — Green island, half a mile S.E. of Witless bay point, is flat,
and faced with cliflf 140 feet high. Some dry slate ledges extend from it in the
direction of Witless bay point, and half a cable south of it is Man-of-war rock, a
dangerous rock 6 feet under water.

As shoal water extends 2h cables from Witless point, the navigable channel
between Green island and the const is less than half a mile wide, although 5 fa-
thoms deep over sand and i-ock. Vessels running through this passage should
keep in mid-channel, with South head (of Bay Bulls) just shut in with Gull
islanu.

aKOBXXJB BAT. — Mobile bay, on the south-west side of Witless point, has an
extent of about li miles in a N. by W. i W. direction, with a width at its on-
trapce of about a mile. It has a good depth of water, 17 to 3 fathoms, but is
exposed to south-eastward ; hence is safe only during summer, or while the wind
is from the land. Its population is about sJOO.

TOAB OOVB. — From Tinker point, the south point of Mobile bay, the coast
trends in nearly a W.S.W. direction rather more tlian a mile to Fox island.
a small rocky islet just ofl' the shore ; and, on the west side oi this is Toad covo.
A rock, fathoms under water, lies a quarter of a mile N.E. from the south
point of the island; it has close to it on all sides a depth of lU to 20 fathoms.

Toad cove is of limited extent, but has a depth of about 5 fathoms, over sand.
It is exposed to south-eastward, and is consequently safe only during summer or
witli the wind from the land. It is a lishiug establishment, and has a population
of about 300.

Bpear and rabble Islands. — South-westward of Fox island, at nearly half a
mile from the coast, is Spear island, about one-third of a mile in extent ; and,
beyond this (but nearer the land) is a little islet named Pebble ;—!>■: li nre steep
to. Spear islet is separated from the shore by a channel 14 to lu lailioms deep,
in which there is very indifl'erent anchorage.

Oraat Island. — Great island (two-thirds of a mile south-eastward from Spear
island, and 3 miles S.W. i W. from Green island) is three-quarters of a mile in
length, and half a mile in breadth, 300 feet high, and may be distinguished from
the neighbouring islands by its three hills. Its dill's are of ylate, and at its
north end there is a dry ledge of slate rocks, half a cable fioni tlio foot of the

cliffs.

In the channel betwepn Great island and the «horo tliero is a deptli of 3H to |h

fathoms. '

BROYLB HARBOUR. &c.

Th* Coaat. — In the direction of almost West from Great island there is a
little cove named Baline, which can only accommodate boats ; and, south-west-
ward of this about 1^ miles is Lamanche cove, which is also of limited capacity
and depth. Towards the N.W. from thir last mentioned inlet are two pointed
liills. Cape Neddick, a bluff headland 2ft0 feet high, then follows, and will be
easily recognised, as it consists of a steep black cliff level at the summit ; this
cape is distant 2i miles W.S.W. from Great island, and 1^ miles S.W. ^ W. from
Baline point, — the intermediate coast falls in to the westward and forms
Lamanche bay.

Freshwater bay,, under cape Neddick, is a small inlet 10 fathoms deep, in which
fishing vessels occasionally anchor with the wind from the land. The coast
then trends two miles in a south-westerly direction to the inlet named Brigus-by-
Soutli, a boat harbour situated a mile north of Brigus head ; this is a small ex-
posed place, but of some importance as a fishing station, — its population is about
170, and there is a church on its north side visible from the sea.

Offer Rock. — All the coast described in tho preceding paragraphs is very bold,
and has deep water almost immediately off it, which increases to 60 fathoms at
the distance from it of about a mile. There is however an exception in Offer
rock, a patch of 6 fathoms lying off the coast between Freshwater bay and Brigus-
by-South inlet, which is distant Ij miles S. by W. from cape Neddick. As the
sea generally breaks over this rock its situation is usually indicated ; it should
be avoided in heavy gales.

Brigus head is a bold cliffy point 280 feet high, with deep water at a very
moderate distance from its base. A high rock on its north-east side is almost
detached from the cliff.

BBOVXiB BASBOUB— From Brigus head to the north point of cape Broyle
(a bold projection from which a ledge of sunken rooks extends about a cable, and
is then at ouce succeeded by a depth of 9 or 10 fathoms, which increases to 26
fathoms at about a quarter of a mile N.E. i N. from the point) the bearing and
distance are S. | W. 1/a miles. Between is Broyle harbour, an inlet of about
4 miles in extent in a N.W. by W. direction, gradually decreasing in width to its
extremity, where it is about 4 cables across. In midway of the entrance is a
depth of 50 to 40 fathoms, and this shoals to 6 and 8 fathoms off the church at
the head of the harbour. On account of its complete exposure to south-easterly
wiuds, which occasionally send in a very heavy sea, Broyle harbour is by no
means recommended as an anchorage. Its shores are in general safe to approach
to a moderate distance ; there are, however, two sunken rocks, each 1} cables
from the nearest shore, which must be carefully avoided, — these are known as
Saturday ledge and Harbour rock.

!^atiirda!/ Ledije. — Saturday ledge, feet under water, lies off the western shore
(f j^dmirals cove (the second bay on the north side of the harbour, reckoning
frum the entrance) and is of limited extent but with a depth of 4 to fathoms
close to it on all sides. To clear it on the soutli side, keep the whole of the cliff
at the head of the harbour open of Carrier point (the west point of Admirals bay)
bearing N.W. } W. ; or, Brigus head well open of Admirals head.

Harbour Rock. — Harbour rock is in the inner part of the harbour, in mid-
jhaunel, at about half a mile from its extremity. It has 2 fathoms water over it,
and close to it on all sides is a depth of 4 fathoms.

Vessels frequenting Broyle harbour usually anchor in Admirals cove, the first
bay (Island cove) westward of Brigus head being too exposed for safety ; the

, i

.^ [

«2

CAPP: ST. FKANCIS TO CAPE RACE.

depth in that bay (80 to 10 fathoms) is also inconveniently great. In Admirals 1
cove the depth is 11 to 10 fatlioms, mud, and Admirals head, its eastern point,
slielters it in some decree from the swell sent in by easterly winds ; it is, how-
ever, expiised to the full force of S.E. winds. Better, and more secure anchorage,
cov. be obtnii el fnrt (iv in the harbour, westward of Carrier point ; tlio depth
here is 7 to 8 fatlioms. mud, and the p[round holds well. — water can be obtained
liere from the waterfall in Spoilt cove, on the northern shnro.

The land of Broyle harbour is feitihi, and the inhabitants number about 400 ;
moat of them are in easy circumstances.

Broyle harbour may be entered with facility from seaward with a fair wind,
after maUing cape Broyle, steer about N.W. for the middle of the harbour until
near Admirals head on the north shm-e. then haul in for the anchorage in
Admirals cove ; or, if wishing to proctjed fui tlier in, keep sufficiently over towards
the south shore to avoid the Saturday ledge, and anchor about 2 cables above
Carrier point.

It is liigh water here, full and change, at 7h. 20m. ; springs rise oj feet, neaps
U feet.

Cape Broyle. — Cape Broyle, showing a front to the south-eastward 1^ miles
in length, is a remarkable wooded headland which rises abruptly from the sea to
the height of 553 feet ; its south point, bare of verdure in places, shows several
large white spots. The cape is a conspicuous object from seaward, and remark-
able from being ^he highest land adjoining the sea between Bay Bulls and cape
Itace. The depth close to it is 10 to 15 fathoms.*

Old Harry Rook. — The Old Harry, a rock 12 feet under water and with a
depth close to it on all sides of 8 to 20 fathoms, lies S.E. half a mile from the
north extremity of cape Broyle ; it is consequently much in the way of vessels
entering Broyle harbour from southward. Breakers usually show its position.
It may be cleared on the south side by keeping Ferryland church open of Stone
islands, bearing abo^l W.S.W.

Horse Rock. — The Horse, a rock of 5 fathoms, lies one-third of a mile N. by E.
from the Old Harry and nearly half a mile E. J S. from the north extremity of
cape Broyle. Close to it on all sides is a depth of 11 to 20 fathoms. When on
it, the head of Broyle harbour appears open (that is, the harbour can be seen as
far as its extremity). In bad weather, its position is usually shown by breakers.

OaXWXI BAT.— Off the south point of cape Broyle, ut about a cables' length,
are some rocks known as tlie Stone islands, which are joined to the shore by a
bank of 2 to 4 fathoms ; there is consequently no passage between, except for
boats. The depth almost close to the seaward side of these islets is 8 to 20
fathoms.

Caplin bay is rather more than a mile wide at the entrance, which is formed
by the south coast of cape Broyle on the north, and by Bois island (and the reef
which connects it to the shore) on the south, whence it extends about 2} miles
in a N.W. by N. direction, gradually decreasiu^' in width to its extremity. It
has a depth of 26 to 5 fathoms, tlio former being midway between Goose island
(the island in the entrance to the bay) and Stone i?lands, and the latter almost
close to the shore at its head. The shelter it affords is only against off-shore

• Cape Broylo has been described as table lau.l, wliich when viewed from utirthward or
southward has the appearance of a sacUlle.

FERRYLAND HARBOUR AND HEAD.

winds as it is open to the s«ii throughout. The holdinj? ground is lood nnd there
are no oflF-lyjng dangers; tlieie is, however, a s]i <al spit, with '2 fathoms water on
its outer edge, which runs off a qunrlcr of a luile from Coldsjast point, the filrst
projection withm Bois isLind on tlie south-west side of the bay.

Ooose I»ln»d is about a cable in extent. 70 feet high, and 8tep|i-to (except on
the north side, where at about oO yards off are two rofks that cover and imcover).
Its northern part is the highest.

IhiU Maud is larger than Goose island, with a slightlj' rounded surface, and
IS sparsely covered with verdure. It is 90 feet higli, and from its eastern side a
rocky ledge extends about half a cable. A reef, with several rocks upon it above
water, oxteuds from the island to Coldeast point ; consequently, vessels cannot
pass we jtward of it.

Caplin bay may be entered north or south of Goose island ; if the latter, care
i"! required to avoid the reef already alluded to as extending from Coldeast point, —
this is easily done by keeping Hare's Ears (the two high rocks off the south end
of Ferryland head) open eastward of Bois island, bearing S. \ W. When within,
anchorage may be obtained according to the wind either in Broad cove (on the
north side, half a cable north-westward of Stone islands) in 10 to 6 faihoms, or
abreast Lance cove (on the south side, 1^ miles from Goose island) in about 16
fathoms ; the last mentioned is considered the better ancliorage.

rBBBTXiAllD BABBOVH.— Ferryland harbour, between Bois island and reef
and the coast of Feriyland head, is small but easy of access. The holding ground
is good, and the anchorage is secure except in strong easterly gales, wlien much
swell enters the harb;>ur at higli water, between the rocky islets extending from
the island to Coldeast point, and which form its north-east side. The entrance is
only one cable across, but inside the harbour widens to 3 cables. The best
anchorage is in 10 fathoms water, sa'^d and mud, on the line joining Coldeast
point and the Pool beach, between the two churches at the head of the harbour.

Tlie village is at the head of the bay and lias a population of about 600 ; the
liuid is of fair quality, nnd cultivated to a greater extent than in general. Water
is scarce, but can be obtained from Caplin bay. There is a court-house here, a
jidl, and two churches ; one of the latter can be seen from seaward. The Pool
affords winter shelter to fishing boats.

Tluonj;liont Ferryland harbour there are no dangers, except near the shore on
cither side. Vessels entering should bring the south-west church at the head of
the harbour in the centre of the passage between Ferryland head and Bois island
N.W. by W., and run in upon this bearing. After passing the narrows, they
should steer a little northward to avoid the shoal water off the Pool beach.

rBBBVZ.Ain> BBAO and UOHT. — Ferryland head, the extremity of a very
remarkable peninsula, is 126 feet high. It is very bold land, and its inner part
consists of a narrow isthmus 100 feet high which is joined to the shore by a beach
of shiuglo. Off its south-east extremity are two rocks, 50 feet high, which from
their peculiar form are known as the Hare's Ears ; these are separated from the
shore and from each other by only a narrow boat channel, — on the seaward side
they are very steep. And, off its south-west side, at ahout 11 cables in a S.W.
by S. dii-ection and ;H cables West from the Hare's Ears, is the Burnshead, a
2 i -fathom rock having 10 to 8 fathoms water close to it on all sides, except be-
tween it and the head ; in this direction there is no safe channel.

Ferryland head is not easily distinguished at a distance, the land immediately
behind it being of greater altitude. The lighthouse on it now lessens this diffi-

..-;•/»

■\:

..- : „•:

;;';K-f

■ -1 '

.'^V--;!

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO CAPE RACE.

culty to a considerable extent. It consists of a red brick tower, which shows a
Jixed light at 200 feet nbove the sea, visible from all parts of the sea horizon at
the distance of 16 miles.

Vrow Island. — Aquafort harbour is 2 miles W. by N. from the Hare's Ears.
In the bay between there is an island gf dark colour and 70 feet high, named
Crow ; oflf which, li cables in the direction of S.E. by E., is a rock nearly dry at
low water, known as the Crow rock. At the bead of the bay there is also a shoal
9 feet under water. This bay is rarely entered except by small vessels, the close
proximity of Aquafort and Ferryland harbours rendering such shelter as it is
capable of affording very unimportant.

AQVArOBT BABBOVS. — Aquafort harbour is little more than 2 cables wide
at the entrance, and runs in N.W. by W. 2i nules between high steep hills. The
anchorage is good, and vessels may lie in perfect safety in fathoms, mud,
abreast the small and outer chapel on the north side. The water is generally
smooth, and but little sea swell finds its way up the harbour, except during heavy
easterly gales.

Spurwink island (40 feet high) at the south side of the entrance, is bold-to, so
also are the rocks off North head. Except a small rock, 120 yards from the north
shore abreast the Roman Catholic chapel, there are no dangers in the harbour.
Above the beach at the harbour head there is a small deep pool, useful for careen-
ing and wintering fishing craft. There are only 200 inhabitants here, although
the land is fertile and well wooded ; salmon and trout abound in the two rivera
which run into it. Water can be obtained easily.

When entering bring the harbour open and run in on a N.W. by W. course,
passing Spurwink island, and when abreast the outer chapel anchor in 10 fathoms
water, mud. If the wind be contrary a vessel may work up and anchor where
convenient, if caution be observed to avoid Burnshead and Crow . cks on the
north, and Lawler rock on the south outside, and the shoal water bordering the
north side within. There is little stream of tide, perhaps half a knot.

Black Bead. — Black head, S. ^ E. about three-quarters of a mile from Aqua-
fort harbour, is a bold cliffy point with a depth of 12 fathoms close to it. At
about midway is the Lawler rock, at half a cable from the shore, which dries at
low water.

Cbance Bay. — Between Black head and Bald head (a bold point 00 feet high,
a mile S.S.W. i W. from Black head) the coast falls in to the westward and
forms a bay named Chance, in which vessels sometimes anchor with off-shore
winds in 8 to 10 fathoms water. In front of this bay there is a patch of rocks,
the Aquafort rocks, which is steep-to and consequently very dangerous ; it lies
2 cables N.E. by N. from Bald head, is awash at high spring tides, and has close
to its seaward side a deptli of 8 to 17 fathoms. On the shore of Chance bay are
a few houses and cultivated lands.

Clearcove Bocks. — The Clearcove rocks, a small rocky patch awash at high
water, lie 2 cables from Bald head in the direction of S.W. by W. They are
steep, with a depth close to them of about 7 fathoms, and upon them the sea
breaks heavily during a southerly or easterly gale. In the narrow channel
between them and the land is a depth of 5 to 7 fathoms.

FBBWBVSB HABBOTTB. — At about 8f miles S.W. by W. from Ferryland
head is Fermeuse harbour, which is 2 cables wide at the entrance, and runs in
N.W. i N. 2i miles. This harbour is a favourite fisliing station, and is more
frequented than Aquafort, being less embayed and the anchorage more con-

venient ; t
cove on the
tishing ve.s
sea, but the
sontli-west
licliiud !^he
pliici's on

The slioi
tioii ot" Mm
of the ouU
south slior(
liurboin- is
iit'l lit ah;
is north of
When e
it. After
the course
bearing S.
to go i'lu-tli
passod Shf!
Bear Co
little open
and fishing
under wati
the easten
south-west'
rock -t fee

IIKNKWSK HAlllJOUU.

c...

vcnient ; the populatiDii is about 000. The principal settlement is in Admirals
CDVO on tlie north sides, wliero thore is a Roman Catholic church, and a nunnery ;
lishing vessels generally anchor in this cove because of its nearness to the open
sea, but there is more roomy anchorage in Kingman cove, a mile farther in on the
south-west shore, — the safest anchorag^e is, however, at the head of the harbour,
licliind Sheep head, in l\ fathoms water, mud. Water can be obtained at various
pliici>s on either shore.

The sliores of Fermnu.se harbour are clear of off-lying dangers, with the excep-
tioi of Mml ronk. 4 feet under water, which lies half a cable from the south side
(if tlie enlrance, and may be cleared by keeping Blow-me-down head (on the
south shore of the liarbour) open of Traces point. At nearly the head of ihe
liiirbnnr is tlic Dnr xhmil, a roek '.) feet under water situated in almost mid-chan-
iH'l iit ab;)ut ■2,| cables S.E. h E. from Slieep head ; the passage 'ip the liarbour
is north of this shoiil.

When entering bring the harbour open on a N.W. \ W. bearing and steer for
it. After passing Admirals cove ou the north shore (known by its church) alter
tlie course to N.W. by W., and when Northern head touches Blow-me-down head,
lioiiring S.E. i E. anclior in Kingman cove in 12 fathoms. If the intention be
to go further up tlie harbour, keep near the north shore by the lead, and having
pnssed Sheep head anclior at about a cable N.W. from it in 6 fathoms, mud.

Bear Cove. — At about a mile southward from Fermeuse harbour there is a
little open bay known as Bear cove, which is rocky and can only receive boats
and lishing smacks ; it is exposed to north-eastward. The Bear (a rock 8 fathoms
under water, and with a depth almost close to it of 10 fathoms) lies a cable off
the eastern side of the point which shelters this cove on its east side. And,
south-westward from this rock nearly three-quarters of a mile, is the Sunher, a
ruck 4 feet under water, 2 cables from the nearest shore, and having a depth of
111 fathoms in its close proximity; from this danger to Sculpin head, on the
north side of the entrance to lienewse harbour, the bearing and distance are
W. by S. I S. nearly three-quarters of a mile.

Bear cove head has an elevation of 40 feet, and the land immediately behind it
rises to 200 feet. At a short distance south of the point of the cove there is a
high grey cliff, produced by a landslip, which is rather conspicuous. The coast
between Fermeuse and Renewse harbours should not be closely approached, the
near and Sunkor rocks being each a formidable danger.

BENS'WSZ: ZXAKBOTrR. — Renewse harbour runs in 2 miles N. by W. from
lioiiowse liead. the south point of entrance, a bold headland that rises from slate
liilis in two wooded hummocks to the height of 200 feet, and is steep-to. It is a
very indillerenl anchorage, being exposed throughout its extent to south-east
winds wliich send in a very heavy sea ; hence it is rarely entered except by
small \essels. Nevortlieless its convenient position with regard to the fishing
ground renders it a resort during the summer season. In it are many dangerous
roeks. which should bo carefully avoided ; the most important of these are, — the
Ivetth'hotloin. one fathom under water which lies at the entranee of the harbour at
about a quarter of a mile South' of Northern head. Scufpin shoal, with 3 fathoms
water on it, lies S.E. ^ E. from Northern head, and about 1^ cables from the
nearest shore. Whaleback, awash at low water, lies about S.S.W. a cable from
Northern head. Whitehorsfi, with 2 fathoms on it, is in the line between Anchor
and Shag rocks, and li cabL's from the latter. The Hhiuj is a little black rock,

I \ 0..,;- ..

' .t

I ,

(to

CAPS ST. FUANCIS TO CAI'E RACE.

above water, in nearly the middle of the harbour. There is also a rock 5
fathoms under water, 2 cables S.S.E. from the Shag.

The village (containing (fOO inhabitauts) with its church, is on the north ehorc
of the harbour, at about a mile from Renewse head, and cannot be seen from sea.
The best anchorage is off this village in .S fathoms water, at about li cables
N.W. by N. from Anchor rock ; above this the water becomes shoal and the
')Oi,tom is strewn with boulders, — there is only a narrow 3-foot channel to a
small pool near the head of the harbour, where the lishing craft careen and winter.
In bad weather the whole harbour is a mass of breakers.

Vessels bound into Renewse harbour should get the harhour open and run in
about N.W., so as to pass about a cable from Renewse head ; then follow along
the south-west shore until past the Shag and Anchor rocks, when they should
anchor in 4 fathoms, sand. Water can be abtained from a brook in the village.

Tli« Coast. — PVom Renewse harbour the coast trends south-westerly 7i miles
to cape Ballard and is comparatively speaking low, but backed by hills. It can
be approached to a moderate distance ; but a prudent shipmaster will keep east-
ward of the Renewse rocks, especially in bad weather. At about three-quarters
of a mile southward of Renewse head is a low rock, known as Renewse islet,
which is separated from the land by a narrow boat channel. Burnt point, '2^
miles soutli of Renewse head, is a small projecting cliffy point, having fishing
establishments on its north and south sides. Between Burnt point and Small
point i4i miles southward of Renewse harbour) the coast is only about 50 feet
iiigli ; Small point is the southern tei-mination of a small exposed bay, known as
Seal cove,— off it, and also off Black head, one mile further south, are many
sunktiu rocks at a very short distance from the shore. At Small point a cliffy
coust commences and gradually increases in height until it reaches cape Ballard,
a distance of about 3 miles.

In the interior, behind the coast just described, the country rises into hills of
considerable altitude. The Butter Pot, 6 miles N.W. } W. from the entrance to
Fermeuse harbour, is 956 feet high, and often visible at sea when the land
beneath it is hidden by fog. The Red hiUs, a range of elevated land 3i miles
from and parallel to the coast between Renewse harbour and cape Ballard, rise
in one part to the height of 710 feet.

Bcaawae Soeka. — This dangerous cluster of rocks is situated 1} miles from
the shore and distant 2 miles from Renewse head in the direction of S. by
W. i W. It is about 160 feet in extent north and south, consists of three
principal heads always above water (the middle one, the highest, being 10 feet
above the surface), and at a very short distance from its eastern side is a deptli
of 15 fathoms, which at a further distance of half a mile increases to 50 fathoms.
A rock, 6 feel under water, lies half a cable S.E. from it.

Vessels can pass between the Renewse rocks and the shore, but should only
oUow tliis passage in fine weather. In bad weather, and especially during south-
easterly gales, the sea breaks heavily over them. When in their vicinity it will
be prudent to keep cape Race light in sight open of cape Ballard, bearing S.W. by
W. i W. as the vessel will then be rather more than a mile south-eastward
from them.

BAMTABS BANKS. — At about 4.^- miles from the coust, between Fermeuse
harbour and Burnt point (3 miles south-westward of Renewse harbour), are the
Bantam fishing banks, which extend about 5 miles N.E. and S.W. and are not

more than
rocky bott

b'enncu.
S.E. 3 mi
soiitliorn

linUhcn
luili-'h of
to it on a

ItfllfliSt

about 3 ni
from and
N. by W.
there are '
(leptli of

With t
St. Johns
from the
account t
fog, the sj
carefully (
of the vesi
During
wheu uud
every feat
Capa Bi
harbour, ]
eastern si(
fiitlioms.
summit, a
falls, and
dense rou
Shoe C,
mile, and
exposed c
bottom.

Cbancc
(■;ipe Bal
base is h
Chanci
mentione
easterly
sand, 't
and ill 1
the cove
tlieir boi
the sea b
In fro
rock. It
southern
Frenci

OAl'K BALLAUO. &c.

(17

more thau half a mile wide. The depth over them is irregular, to 30 fathoms,
rooky bottom.

b'enneuHe Jhtntam. — The uortherii bank, known as the Fermeuse Bantam, lies
S.E. 3 miles (nearly) from Bearcove point, nud about li miles N. by E. from the
soiitliern banks. It lias over it a depth of 11 to 20 fathoms.

/Uililudil Ihintam. — The middle bank, Bullliead Bantam, is a small rocky
]iiitih of li fathoms, distant ii miles S.E. J E. from Kenew.se harbour. Close
to it oil nil sides is a depth of 35 fathoms.

/ieiifuse nuiitc:m.—'£\u' southern bunk, the Renewse Bantam, has an extent of
about :{ miles S.W. i W. and N.E. J E.. and is half a mile across ; it lies 4 miles
fioin and parallel to tlie coast, and from its southern end llenewse head bears
N. by W. distant '> miles. The general depth over it is 20 to 2 1 fathoms, but
there uve two spots of !> fatlioins. At a very short distance from it on all sides is a
(lei)th of i:,') fathoms.

With tlie exceptions just mentioned, the soundings all along the coast from
St. Johns harbour to cape Ballard are doop, 90 fathoms being found at ii miles
from the land, and ;iU t'athoms often within half a mile of the rocks. On this
account tlie lead is not a sure guide ; nevertheless in approaching the land in a
fog, the speed should be frequently slackened and soundings taken, — the latter if
(MirefuUy compared with those shown on the chart, will give some approximation
of the vessel's position, and prevent disaster.

During south-west and light south-east winds, often near the coast, especially
when under the lee 6f a point, the vessel will suddenly emerge from the fog and
every feature of the land will be distinctly visible.

Cap* Ballard, — Cape Ballard, the highest part of the coast south of Renewse
harbour, rises to the height of -^"JO feet. It is wooded at its summit and on it^
eastern side is a chfl" which slopes to the sea. Close to it is deep water, about 15
fiitlionis. Captain Orlebar, R.N., describes the cape as having a bare round
summit, and say.s it is the more remarkable because on each side of it the land
falls, and even in fogs the fishermen recognise it by the fog hanging black and
dense round its sides.

>Sh(ie Coiie. — At cape Ballard the coast turns sharply N.W. by W. for about a
mile, and then S.E. i S. 11 miles to Chancecove head, and forms thus a rocky
exposed cove known as Shoe cove, in which is a depth of 17 to 5 fathoms, rocky
bottom. On its shore are the cottages of a few iishermen.

Chancecove Head. — Chancecove head, distant i> miles about W.S.W. from
(ipe Ballard, is of dark slate clift's loO feet high. At a short distance from its
Inise is a deptli of 7 to 10 fathoms.

Chance Cove. — Cluince cove, on the west side of the projecting point just
lULUtioned, has a gravel beach at its head, and is exposed to southerly and south-
easterly winds. During north-east winds, coasters anchor here in 4 fathoms,
.sand. The I'hihidnlphiu was run upon the sand in this cove some years ago,
and in 1H():5 part of her iron frame was to be seen. On the north-west side of
the cove there is a small fishing settlement, and the inhabitants are doing well ;
their boats and stages are protected by a shoal of sand and stones, upon which
the sea breaks.

In front of Chance cove there is a rock always visible, known as the Black
rock. It is about 15 feet above the surface at low water, and has close to its
southern side a depth of V\ fathoms.

Frenehman Cove. — The west point of Chance GOve is low (relatively to the

6 *

P,..T/

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO CAPi: RACE.

land in its immediate vicinity), its hifihcst part rising to 100 feet The little bay
on itft western side, Frenchman coves is rocky. «xpi)aed tn Hontherly winds, and
6 to U fatiioras deep. It is rarely entered except by the fishermen.

Olam OoT*. — B'rom Frenchman cove, a bold cliffy coast (in some parts the
land immediately behind it rises to the height of aOO or 250 feet) trends S.W. J W.
6} miles to capo Race. Clam cove, 4 miles from cape Race, is the outlet of a
shallow stream, in which boats can land in safety during ordinary weather.
From this cove to- cape Rd.ce the coast is cliffy and broken, with here and there
a small cove where a boat can land in a smooth sea. At cape cove, about half a
mile north-eastward from the cape, a boat is kept ready by the telegraph
company at all hours, day and night, to board and collect intelligence from the
passing Atlantic steamers.*

OAFB BAOB. — Cape Race, the south-eastern extremity of Mewfotmdiand, is
distant 9 ■ miles from cape Ballard in a S.W. by W. i W. direction. The land
fonning it is steep, almost level, and of the mean height of 1(!4 feet ; it is bare of
trees, and has a brown, desolate, barren appearance, — but in sheltered hollows
and along the courses of the rivers there is a stunted growth of spruce, fir, and
alder. The rocks are of the Silurian system, and are thinly covered or overlaid
nith peat and bog. At its extremity there is a detached wedge-shaped rock, 40
feet high, and at a very short disti ice northward of this there is another, of
smaller size and near the coast.

The land in the vicinity of the cape appears low and flat, in comparison with
cape Ballard or cape Pine ; the latter 19 miles westward of it. Its cliffs of slate,
100 to 200 feet high, are in nearly vertical strata. The land rises gradually ; and, in
clear weather will be seen, between 10 and 12 miles to tlie north-eastward of it,
the rocky range known as the Red hills, already alluded to.

Cap* Haee Uglit. - -Cape Race may be easily recognised in clear weather by
its lighthouse, close to wliich is the keeper's dwelling with the old beacon in
front, and a telegraph station on the rising ground in the rear.f This light-
house is a circular tower, 40 feet high, painted red and white in broad vertical
stripes ; it shows at the height of 180 feet above the sea a revolving white light,
which attains its greatest brilliancy every half minute, and is visible in clear
weather at the distance of 19 miles. Geographical position lat. 46° 89' 24" N.,
long. 53" 4' 20" W.

In the coves east and west of the lighthouse boatEf can land in moderate wea-
ther, but, as already observed, it is in Cape cove, on the north-east side of the
cape, where a landing is generally effected. It is high water here, full and
change, at 7h. ; springs rise 6i feet, neaps 5 feet.

BAUUlSD BAXnc. — At about (j miles from the coast between capes Ballard
and Race, and parallel to it, is the Ballard bank, upon which is a depth of 15 to
30 fieithoms. Its northern end (where it is less than a mile across, and has over
it 23 fathoms water, rocky bottom) lies ft miles S.S.E f E. from cape Mallard; it
thenoe extends 13 i miles in a south-westerly direction, gradually increasing in

• In Clam core were buried tbe remains of the 2d0 paBsengcrs drowned in the Jn^Jb
Saxon, April 18C3. A neat fence and inBcript.i<a)} m^rk thi> place.

i The beacon has, we beliere, a pointed roof, and is painted red and white in vertical
stripes, similar to the lighthouse.

PIG BANK, 4(;

width to its southern nxtreniity (whore it is about 4 miles across, and has upon
it :iu futhoma, rocky bottom) which is distant nearly B miles South from cape
Iliice. The depth over the northern part of this bank for about H miles is
in-i'gular, 15 to 20 fathoms, rock and gravel ; in its southern part it is lesa
viiiial)lo. The eastern odge of the northern part is very steep, there being 60 to
W fi Ihoms water almost close to it, which increases to 80 fathoms at about a
mile from it ; at its southern part this edge is less steep, a depth of 35 to 40 fa-
thoms being found in its close proximity. Midway between the bank and the
I'oiist the depth is 40 to 87 fathoms. During the strong gales of winter it is not
at all unusual to see the sea breaking on thb north-east end of this bank.

A sinttU l-.J-fatliom patch exists at Ik miles N.E. by N. from the Ballard bank.
It is very steep, and from it cape Ballard bears N.W. distant 5^ miles.

Pia BAITS. — The Pig bank (17 to 20 fathoms water, rocky bottom, and 2^^
miles in extent in a W.S.W. direction) lies 34 miles from the coast between cape
Hac<' nnd Mistaken point, with the latter bearing North distant HJ miles. It is
ii lishing ground.

General Observation* on the IVavlsatlon of the eoaet between Oape Bona*
TlBta and Cape Baee. — Between cape Br)navista and cape Race, winds from
E.N.E. to South are generally accompanied with fog; with those from South to
S.W., West and North, fog is seldom encountered northward of cape Ballard- -
at such times the whole coast northward of that cape is usually free from mist,
and can he approached to a moderate offing.

The general direction of the current along this coast is southward ; that of the
tides is however, flood southward, and ebb northward. Vessels crossing the
great bays of Trinity and Conception must guard against the current, particularly
when the wind assists its flow ; it then, not unfrequently has a strength of about
a knot per hour, and the indraught in foggy weather should be cai'eftUly guarded
against, by giving the land a berth of 7 to 10 miles and by keeping off the direct
course a quarter of a point or so to seaward, especially when there is some un-
certainty as to the position of the ship.

Winds from seaward send in a heavy sea upon all parts of this coast, especially
when they blow strongly from north-eastward. A gale from north-east or east-
ward drives before it at times a terrific sea, against which the best found vessel
finds it impossible to hold its way.

Ice is met with on the coast until May. In the middle of summer it is rarely
encountered southward of Baccalieu island.

General Bemarks on making Cape Baee from eastward. — Captain Orlebar
K.N., in his hydrographical notes on the south and east coasts of Newfoundland
18(18, says ;—

" Currents. — As fogs gi-eatly prevail along the south coast of Newfoundland,
especially between June and October, it is very necessary that the ordinary set
of the currents, and the dangerous indraught into the deep bays, should be known
and guarded against. The great polar current which sets to the south-west
down the east coast of Newfoundland, and in spring is charged with icebergs and
field-ice, changes its direction after passing cape Race, and runs sometimes at the
rate of 2 miles an hour to the W.N.W.

Hound cape Pine and cape St. Mary the current sets to the north-west, incvea-

•'■■• - '-■■tl

CAPE ST. FRANCIS TO CAFE RACK.

sing in strength near the land, and following the bend of the shoi'e. It sets
strongly into the bays on the east side, but less strongly out on the west side ;
near the shore it is also altered and influenced by the tides ; so that during
spring tides the stream of ebb runs weakly to the S.E.. and the stream of flood
to the N.W.

The current is much influenced b}' the prevailing winds, and is strongest on
the flood tides and after north-east gales. At the distance of 30 miles froni the
land the rate of tlie current is very much reduced.

Although the current between the Great Bank and Newfoundland commonly
sets to the W.S.W., sometimes at a rate of nearly one mile per hour, it is not
always so, and near the shore, in moderate weather, it even changes with the tide.
At these times during the flood it runs to the S.W., and during the ebb to the
N.E., the former being the stronger.

Soundings. — When in the vicinity of capes Race and Pine, care should^be
taken to obtain frequent casts of tlie lead ; the soundings will be found to be
regular, and of moderate depth, and in addition to tliese precautions the Admiralty
chart should be referred to.

Ice. — It should be remembered that ice -bergs may be met with on tlii^ const
at nearly all seasons. In the summer months, and especially in foggy weatlier,
they should be carefully looked for and guarded against. It should be observed
that the white glare of the iceberg is more quickly seen than any other object in
a fog. In March, April, May, June, and sometimes July, field-ice is often met
with, either on the banks or nearer to Newfoundland. The approach to ice is
often shown by the rapid fall of the thermometer, and in clear weather tlie " ice
blink," a peculiar white appearance over the horizon, will often give earning of
its position Loth by night and day before it can be secu from the vessel.

!SaiUiii/ Directions. — In approaching cape Race fi'om eastward, after crossing
the Great Bank, the water gi-adually deepens to 90 and 100 fathoms ; after wliicli
on the Bnllard bank it rapidly shoals to about 20 and 15 fathoms.

After crossing this bank the water again deepens to 40 fatliorns, and then
shonls gradually to the shore, which is generally bold, so that 7 fathoms water is
often found at a distance of a cable irom the cliffs.

Coming from tJie westward ir. thick weather the soundings are so regular that
a depth of <)0 fathpms may bo easily ninintained, and both cape Pine and capo
Race can be rounded with safety. As tlie soundings after pa t^sing cape Race
deepen, a cast of 00 to 80 fathoms will show the navigator that lie has rounded
the cape, and with attention to the lead a couroe rany be steered to the nortli-
pattward flith assured confidence."

CAPE RACE TO CAPE PINE— TREPASSEY BAT.

f- '

From cape Race the coast trends 1^ miles in a W. J S. direction to Cripple
cove, a small creek having on its western side a steep cliff : and, westwardjfrom
tliis is Shingle head with slate cliffs 150 &et high, off which are some low rocks
abitve water.

Cripple Bock. — In the dirnci'on of S. by W. from Cripple cove, at about one-
tliird of a mile fro.j the coast is the Cripple rock (believed to be a pinnacle rock)
a smnll patch of 4i fathoms, having a depth close to its seaward side of about 13
fathoms. It lies about "i miles from cape Race, and may be cleared on the south
side bj' keeping cape Ballard open of cape Race until cape Pine is open of Mis-
taken point, and vice versa. Between it and the coast is a depth of 9 fathoms.
Its position is seldom shown by breakers.*

Mistaken Point, — Mistaken point, westward of Shingle h cA and 4 miles
West from cape Race, is the most southerly projection of this part of the o ja^t.
It is 100 feet high, and consists of a green hummock, rising from slate cliffy. At
its extremity there is a rock always above water, having near it a depth of ^Lcut
5 fathoms.

The sea bottom bet^^■een cape Race and Mistaken point, witliin two miles of che
land, is apparently very uneven, tliere being several scattered patches of 7 and 8
fathonis .\n «-fathom rock, 'Z cables eastward of the Cripple, is distant 14 miles
8,W l/y W. J \V. from cape Race lighthouse ; while another, of 7 fathoms, lies
'2^ niileH H.W. by W. i W. from the same building, with the extremity of point
Mistrtkrti bearing N.W, by W. :^ W. ; — and, westward of these Cnearer point
]\li'it»l'<>; 1 are an H-fathom and a 7-fa(hom rock, — the first is distant 1^ miles
S.S.ij. V B., and t!ic second Ik miles -i ,^ E. from point Mistaken respectively.

*T«»hwat«ir Point. —Fiom Mistaken point a steep rocky coast trends two
miles N.W. by W. to Freshwater point, u low projection composed of sharp
pointed slace rocks, with the land rising in the roar ; at its extremity there is a
rock, — with this exception the coH^it is safe to approach to a moderate distancu.
In the cove north of this point Lhere is a watipifall 100 feet high.

TREPAB8BT BAT. — Trepassty buy. to the ntjrth-wetstward of Freshwater
pohit, is formed by that r>""t :;...'l c:';'e I'io^ wliicl' bear from each other N.W. by
W. J \V. and S.l'j. by ih } I'l distant 1;)^ miks. It extends northward into lh>
land about 8 miles, hap deep water throughout at a sh^rt distance from the ooaai,
a:ul is expcsed in c/ery part to tlie full strength of suutli- westerly winds, with
tl'.e exception that in TrepB.shey harbour (at its Jiead) it is on!}' those from West
and W.S.W. that blow directly in. 'i'lie irregularitv of its northern shore foi.i'j
rortugnt-cove, Biscay and Mutton bays, and Trepassey harbour. Between

* Jii tlic cntiliii HCiison (.Iiuio iiiul Jiilyj between 200 ami 800 bontB are engaged alor~
this jiurt ol the courI of NtwrmmtUuiul,

CAI'K 1;A('K lO (ArK I'lM'. it.

Freslnvalor )u>iut, uiid Portugal cdvw, l.lic cliU's nn; :.*()() trot lii,i;h, and Hit! h\uiu>.
rocky and dilliciilt of access; uih'M tliis slion^ iiiniiy wmck^ have oicurred in
foggy weather, cansod doubtless by the indiaught. wliich soinetinios runs li miles
an hour on the east side of this l)ay, —sailing vessels should be careful to keep a
good ofling, as the wind often fails light near (he shon!, and the drift of the sea
and current aro nearly ahvn3H fowai '.s the 'and.

Vortttgal Cove. — I'crtugal cove is Ti miles northward of Freshwater point and
on I ho north-cast side of Trepasscy bay. At about midway between is Drook
point, having ofl it a ro'.;k ujum wh'cli thn sea breaks; this is the only known
outlying dangci off this coast. The cove is rocky and dangcryus ; on its eastern
Bide aro located a few families, who farm as well as lisli, and have a good stock
of oows, horses, and she'>p (iHtiH),

Biscay Bay. — JJiscay bay, north-wi'stward of I'ortugal co\c is bounded on its
west side by a steep shore terminating in cape JMiitton. It is ball a mile wide,
has an extent of about z miles in a north easterly direction, and a depth of water
averaging 8 fathoms at its entrance, which gradimlly decreases to :i fathoms at
its head, wliere is a stream aliounding with trtait and salmon. As already ob-
seived it is exposed to south-westerly wijids ; hence vessels rarely, if ever, ;;.iclior
in it, and especially when a strong wind prevails from seaward. With winds olf-
shoic. steamers can anchor in safety in the middle of the b;iy in f) fathoms water,
sand.

(Jape Mutton rises from sLi'te cliffs into a round hill :!;!() feet hig'i. ?t is clilly,
and its extremity is steep with a depth of water almost clo.st '« ; of 5 to Id
fathoms.

Mutton Bay. — Mutton bay, westward of Kiscay bay, is bonnded by ca)>e
Mutton on the east and Powles head on the west. It is about 2 miles in extent,
of sijuari' form, and b.as a depth of about 10 fatlioms in its entrance, wbenciMt
gradually decreases to 2 fatlumis olf the low shore at its head, 'i'be ancliorage
(over rock) is very bad and unsheltered; it is consequently unsafe except with
olf-shon^ winds, and then only to vessels extremely well found,— from tlii:- iMuse
sailing vessels rarely enter it. Souiherly and south-westerly winds Mow dinclly
in, and at limes send in a very heavy sea.

The north -western shore of Mutton bay is very biw, and eoiitisls, for tiie
greater part, of a beach of shingle and sn id about sb'iO feet wide, over which ciin
bo seen the vessels at anchor in Tre]iass(y harbour. Its eastern ^lioie is sale to
approach to a moderate aistance ; but not its Avestcrn, — theie being a n if at
about half a mile easlvvard of Powles head, which extends from the shore nearly
half a mile in a y.S.W. J "W . direction and is .sleep to seaward — on ei this reef the
sea generally breaks.

I'owles head, the extremity of a long narrow peninsula which siparates Tre-
passey harbour from Mutton bay, is I'JO feet high, whilst liie land on the north
shore of the harbour rises to the height of l.'iO feet. On this account (because
vessels from eastward often, conseiiuently, cxjieiience difficulty in distinguishing
the entrance to th.' harbour) it is the intention of the Newfoundland (.lovernnunl
to erect a beacon on the head. Shoal water extends a cable from it in a south-
westerly direction, and is immediately succeeded by a depth of I to (1 tatiionis.

Trspassoy ZXarbour. — Trepassey harbour has an extent of alxail ."» miles in a
N.E. by K. i K. direction, and a depth throughout of t< to 5 fathoms, the latter
being near its nottheaslern extremity. Its width at tlie entrance is thre«
quarters of a mile, w hence it gradually diminishes to one-third of a mile at the

CAl'K I'INK AM) l.IMllT

i.<

iiorllierii purl ol" tht; peainsiilii ; it Llnii suddenly widens to twu tliiids ol" a mile
mid tlieii grndiially decreases in breadth to its extremity. The vUlage is on the
soutli-eastern slion;, reaching as far southward as Beach point (the north end of
tlu; peiiinsuhi) ; it has a popuhition of about 550. Theliouses and also its Itoman
Catholic cliapel may bs seen from seaward over the beach of Mutton bay. Op-
posite the village, at about a mile beyond Ueach point, io point Meadow, a low
projecting point having a bank of H tect to 4 fathoms extending from it about ;J
cables ; this point forms the south-western aide of a bay, into wliich falls North-
wosl river. Daniel i/)int, the north-east point of the bay, is liilly.

Tlie only otl'-lying danger in Trepaasey harbour itj tlie ISavadown rock, <i feet
under water, which lies ofl'tho eastern shore in the direction of W.N.W. f.om the
first gravelly beach a mile north-east from I'owles head, and may 1)0 cleared by
iaejiing Sims point (at the south-viist side of the entrance to the n./rth-east arm)
(,peii of JJcach point. Abieast this rock, a bar of sand extends across iJie har-
liiiur. over which o fathoms can be carried at low water. Meadow bank, on the
north side of the Inirbour, is cleared by keei)ing Jiaker pohit about S.W. by W.
I \V. open of Skinner rock.s. On ooLh .sides of the harbour the water is shoal
iind rocky.

The usual anchorage in Trepassey harbour is in 5 "fathoms water, mud, at
about 8 cables above lieach point, and is fairly sheltered ; but the best Miicliorage
is aliove Meadow point, in 7 fathoms, where a vessel nniy be completely land-
liukcd, — at this anchiuage water may be obtained from North-west river. Or,
\ t'ssels may ascend the north-east arm and anclior in H to o fathoms, mud.

W'.ssels Iniund to Trepassiiv harltonr with a fair wind, should steer for Bakers
JHiid (a piLcipitons bluif ;t(JO leet high, I miles E. l)y N. of cape I'ine lighthousej
and Ihen keep nilher towards the shore of I'owles head ; they should then pro-
((((l up the harliour with the south-east shore of the north-east arm on with
IJciich point, as that nnirk will lead in the deepest water. When about It cables
iiliove Beaeii point, they should aiudior in o fathoms, with Beach point and
.I'owles hoail in line, bearing S.W. by W.

With a eoiitniiT wind the lead must be the guide. The ciiannel to work in
will be about 1 eiibles wide.

It is high water in Trepassey harbour, full and change, at Th. Om. ; springs
rist ci feet, neap tides 5 feet. The tidal stream is weak, bciii;'- only half a mile
ill! lioar.-i-

I'lio geograiihical position of tin- low shingle isthmus at the v.llnge on the east
side olliieliarliour, according to Oaplain Buy lield, B.N., IMtT, is bit. iti" I.T 41)" N.,
ioii^. ,").r' 2'1' 'ii)" \\. This iatilud'. la almost idt ntieal with that determined b}'
tiie Maripiis de Chabirt in 1751 at the same spot. viz. ;— 40" l-S ,*(((" N.

OAFE FXm: and Xiight. — I'loni Trepassey harbour the coast trends W. by
S. i S. to cape I'iiie and is bold, with a depth at a very moderate distance from it
of (i to HI tallioins. The country immediately, behiutl it is ;<5I) to 4(M» feet high;
at about midway, and two miles from the sea, it rises (o the height of .50(1 feet, —
hence it is visible at a considerable oiling. The cape is of slile clifl's, 'JOd feci

'm:. ■■'■■•

* III winter, it ieo be lieavv on the oiiKt const of Kewl'eniullniKl (iilocking up nil access
111 Si. Johns and the enstcru harbours) vcHSela may f-afely enter Trepassey harbour, ns it
IS iilwiiyH open. l'"iabing boats from the harbour arc nearly always to be met in the otKiig ;
'lie liHlieruien are generally qualitied to net us pilots.

CAPE PINE TO CAPE ST. MARY-ST. MAllY S BAY.

liigh ; on its south-west side the land is not so steep,— everywhere the coast is
fringed with slate rocks in nearly vertical strata. Tlie cape is bare of trees, and
the land rising back is rocky and barren. In moderate weather boats may land
in Arnolds cove, about three-quarters of a mile west of the cape : or iu a cove :j
cables to the north-east of it. Tlwre is a good road from the lightliouse to Mea-
dow bank on the north side of Trepassey harbour.

The lighthouse on the cape exhibits at ;U4 feet above high water a /ixed white
light, visible in clear weather at the distance of 24 miles. The tower is circular
and painted with red and white bands. Cape Freels, westward of the cape, being
low, does not hide the light (it is seen over it) ; hence it is not obscured by inter-
vening land until on a S.E. by E. bearing.*

CAPE PINE TO CAPE ST. MARY— ST. MARY'S BAY.

St. Mary's buy is about 20 miles wide at the entrance (between the land of cape
Pine and Lance point, ti miles south-eastward from cape St. Mary) and ;<0 miles
in extent in a north-westeriy direction. Its sliores are of moderate height,
having generally an elevatiuii of !iOfl to MOO feet at a sliort distance from the sea,
and the soil is of average qualit}-, yielding when cultivated fair crops of oats and
potatoes. At its head the land lises in ridges, and is partly wooded with spruce,
willow and yellow birch ; here are situated Salmonier river. Haricot ba\', Colinet
and North linrlioui-, the principal anchorages of tlie bay, wiiich enjoy a much
superior climate to tliat of the seaboard, being comparativelj' clear and free
fi'om fog. The country throughout the bay, when brought under cultivation, is
well adapted for piisture, or the. growth of the hardier cereals. The inhabitants,
few in number, lue all engaged in the lisher}', and as cod are large and
numerous round tlie headlands, especially when the caplin strike in upon tlie
shore, they are pursued and cnught not only by the residents, but by fishermen
from other parts of Newfoundland. Ihe greatest catch offish is with the seine,
— the more ordinary means is by hook and line.

The depth across the mouth of the bay is not more than 40 fathoms ; further
in the water become deeper, until on the west side of (ireat Colinet island it in-
creases to 110 fathoms, mud. Its eastern shore, north of cape English, should
not be approached by vessels of heavy draught into a less depth than 40 fathoms,
or nearer than '■Z\ miles. At its entrance fog is nmch more frequent than in the
vicinity of Salmonier river.

St. Sliota Covo. — From cape I'ine the coast trends N.W. '\ W. (passir.g cape
Freels, which is distant one mile W.N.W. from the capej 'i\ miles to tlie east
point of St. Shots coves, a low point whicii sliould not bo approached-iftmrer than
1^ cables. At about midway between cape Freels and the cove is Siioal point,
and there are also several places at which a landing can he eliected wiiile the

* Captain Orlibor, li.N., 1868. In ilic Adniinilty List of Lights, 1872, the arc of
visibility from seaward is stated to be W. by S. to S.E,

HOI.YHOOl) DAY, \o.

wind is from the land. St. Shots cove h.is an extent of about 'i miles (its west-
ern point bears from He eastern N. by W. ^ W. that distance), is about three-
quarters of a mile broad, and has a deptii gradually decreasing from 8 fathoms at
the entrance to 4 fathoms immediately oflF the beach ; it is eutircly exposed to
south-westerly winds and must be considered a very dangerous pai-t of the cnast,
—consequently, it should at all times have a wide berth. A few familiea roside
on its eastern side.*

FraalBlBoek. — A small rock, 3 fathoms under water and with a depth close to
it ou all sides of 10 to 12 fathoms, lies nearly two miles from the coast between
cape Pine and St. Shots cove. It is distant 8 miles W. 4 S. from cape I'iue
lighthouse, aud 2 miles S.S.W. ^ W. from the east point of St. Shots cove.
IJetween it and the land there is no known sunken danger, tlie general depth
Iteing 9 to 12 fathoms ; at a short distance from it in a south-westerly direction
the depth is 18 fathoms. Witii a iieavy sea its position is sometimes indicated
by breakers.

Powles head open of cape Pine, bearing E. by N., leads southward of Fieels
rock. Gull island point open of the western point of St. Shots, N. by E. J E.,
l<iids westward of it.

Oull Island and Shag Bock. — From St. Shots cove the coast trends N. by E.
about 4J miles to Gull island, an islet close to and as high as the coast ; cou-
.soquently it can be distinguished only at a very moderate distance, — at about
midway is St. Shores and Broad cove, two open creeks of little iniportaneo and
exposed to westerlj' winds. Shag rock, 1,^ miles N.E. by N. from Gull island, is
nlso very close to the hind.

Holyrood Bay, — From Shag rock to cape English, the northern termination
of Holyrood btiy, the bearing and distance are N.N.E. 4 miles. This cape, a
jirccipitous blntl' ;$ iO feet high, appears like an island when seen from a south -
wL'st direction ; almost close to it is a depth of H to 10 fathoms. Holyrood bay
lu'iug open and exposed to the sea. affords no safe anchorage. It has a depth of
14 to :{ fathoms, tlie hitter being close to the long gravel beach whicli forms its
isiiore. liehiiid this beach is Holyrood pond, a fresh-water lake 11 miles iu
lungth, a mile wide, and of considerable depth. A few tishermen reside at the
north end of tlie beach, and the lake abounds with codlisli, trout, and salmon.
In spring, when tin.' waters rise from the melting of the snows, the beach is
broken through, and tiie channel during summer becomes snfliciently deep to
peruiit tJie entrance of small iishing boats, but heavj^ seas in autumn usually
close it again ; hence during winter the pond has no outlet.

False cape, '2 miles north-eastward of cape I'jUglisli. is a slight projection of (he
const to which it will be prudent not to make a close approach ; tlie depth at half
a mile from it is about 1'2 fathoms, rocky bottom. The coast now trends N.E.

.: ?

y\\

* St. Shots core, 3 miles north-west of cnpe Pine, is open and exiioscd. A iiipiauchiily
interest is attached to St. Shots dii nccouiit of tie iiniiiy shiiviuls wliich have tiikcu
I'liicc in its vicinity, niul jirinciiiiilly on tlie I'listcrn lii'iul, froui wliicii ii Icilgc of slatn niclis
< xti'iids ii calile to the soutli-west. It wus n|ion tiiis i'ccf that II. M. Iiri},' Jiritkf was lost
in IH'22, Hiiil oven now seldom a year jinsscs witliont ii wn ck "(1110111,' pliicc in its iirii'iilmur-
lidod. Ill most cases the wrecks have occurred diiriiit,' fof,', nnd too oltcii tlicrc 1ms been
!i iif^,'icct of sonudinfj aud a want of attention to the ordinary set of tiio currents. Captain
Orlrbnr, R.N.

CAPK PINE TO CAPE ST MARY— ST. MARY'S BAY.

^ E. ') mileB to a gravelly beach behind whicli is a lake, and then turns north-
ward forming a point of moderate heiglit. named Lahave ; tliis point shonld also
have a wide berth given to it because a ahoal of largo rounded stones extends
S.W. by W. from it about 4 cables — the sea breaks bcnvily over this reef in bad
weather, and its extremity is stet^p, the dtjpth close off it being (1 to 7 fathoms.

From Lahaye point the coast trends K. by N. J N. 1? miles to Donbleroad
point, which forms the soutliern shore to two inlets, nauied St. Mary's harbour
and Mai bay ; the latter is tlie westernmost.

Off the coast just described there are two r)cks, nnmed Bunk and (ireet, upon
which the sea occasionally breaks in very lieavy weather, liargo vessels shonld
avoid their locaUty. although tlie depth upon each is not less than 4 fatlioms.
The water in their dose proximily is deep.

Jidnk Rock. — l^ank rock, a small patch of 4 fathoms nnd liavirg close to it a
depth of not less than 15 fathoms, lies N.N.E. M miles from capo English.
Vessels will clear it by keeiuug Shiig rock (iit the souih end of Ilolyrood hay)
open of cane English, until Li/zy point (in St. Alaiy's hmbour) is seen open of
Doubleroad point.

Greet Bock. — (Irecl i.nk (4 fiilhoms under water) lies three (juiuters of a mile
from the shore, and S W. by W. li miles from Lahaye point.

ST. BKABT'S HA.liBOUR, — St. Mary's harbour is a mile wide at tlie entrance,
whence it extends about 4 miles in an E.N.E. direction and gradually decreases
in depth from ■il fathoms. uiuA. in mid-chnnnel off the villnge, to 2 fathoms at its
head. It atl'ords ahuost complete shelter as the land of Doubleroiid point protects
the anchorage at the entrance from westerly winds, and further in the harbour
sea winds are scarcely felt. The villnge is on the south shore at the back of a
little bay imniediotely eastward of Ej^lis point (the eastern end of Douhhiroad
point) and continns about 700 inhabitants, who are mostly employed in the
fisheries. The )i! d where cleared of stones bears good crops of oats, potatoes,
and hay ; it is culiivated in small patches, and the cattle and sheep have fair
pasture. Good Wiiter can be obtained at the head of the harbour, and small
supplies of milk, egi,'s. and butler at the villiige.

At about •JrJ miles witliin tlu' liarbour, on the eastern shore, is Coote pond,
behind a bench of shingle ; and a mile beyond this, on the opposite shore, there
is a small projecting sandy point ujion which a vessel can be hauled down if
necessarj' — tlie depth almost close to it is 7 fathoms. Vessels seldom ascend the
harbour so far us this point.

Vessels usually anchor in 1 to (i fathoms, sand, abreast the villnge, on the flat
which extends about Imli' a mile from that side of the harbour. A heavy ground
swell is occasionally exptricnced here. It is necessary to be t u-eful not to go
too far to the eastward because of the Conljiil, a rocky 't-fatlioni shoal, which
lies rather more tiian a mile eastward from the anchornge, three-quarters of a
mile from Ellis point, nnd ."> cnhL's from C'onlpit point. The l)est anchorage is
two miles further up the hnrbour near Coote point, in 7 fatlioms, mud.

A rocky shoal, 4 feet ^indt-r water, nnmed I'tuldock, lies near the head of the
harbour, northward of the north-west h ch. It is above the usual anchornge,
and only very smnll vessels ascend the hHri)our lo this extent.

St. Mary's harbour can he ensily entered wli'eu the wi-ather is sulliciently
clear. After jinssiiig cape Eugli.^h n vessd should keep tiie Shng rock (at the
south end of Hokrood bay) well open, or v. ell shut in with the cape, until Double-
road point ifi in line with Jjizzy point, bearing Iv j N. When northwtud «!'

MAL KAY.

Uaiik rock, she alio iM steer about E. by N. for the eiitranoo of t'le harbour, so as
to <i\v*i Doubleroafl point a prmlont berth : and wlien within tlii>i point, sliould
liiiiil ti> tlie southwiird and ancibor in fatli nns water, sand, witli the chapel
beminfjf S.W. A more secnre anchorage in ft f'atlioms. nind. will be found farther
up the harbour, with Doublorond point shnt in witli Li//y point.

It is hi<»h water at the villa;,'e, full and clian(j;e, at 7 b. 40ni. ; springs ride
7 1 feet, and neaps T) feet.

MAZi BAT. — Mai bay is separated from St. Mary's harbour b}' a tongue of
liiiid 2'\0 feet high, the extremity of which, known as North point, has a depth
(iff it, in its close proximity', of about 7 fathoms. Tlie bay is about a mile wide
at tlic enti-ance, whence it gradually decreases in width to its head (a distance of
.'i miles) its general direction being N.E. j N. Tlie anchorage in it (as its name
implies) is not good, being exposed to sea winds which sometimes send in a very
lieavy swell ; hence vessels seldom remain except witli northerly winds. The
lest anchorage is near its extremity in (i fathoms, sand.

Shoal Bay. — Shoal bay, westward of Mai bay — separated from it by a bold
projecting point which risen into a hill 425 feet higli — is about 2 miles in extent
and has a depth of wfiter of 10 to 5 fathoms, the latter being close to the beach
at its head ; behind tliis beach there is a pond. It is exposed in every part to
the pravailing winds and consequently not safe as an anchorage.

Shoalbay point, the western point of Shoal bay, is 485 feet high and moder-
ately steep. A sunken rock, a quarter of a mile N.W. from its extremity, is
cleared by keeping Mussel-pond point open of Admirals beach. On account of
this rock, vessels passing through Colinet passage shoxild keep closer to Great
Colinet island than to the coast.

Oreat CoUnet Island. — Great Colinet Island, the large island in St. Mary's
bay that is most to seaward, lies north-westward from St. Mary's harbour, its
south point being distant 5^ miles N.W. ^ N. from Doubleroad point. It is
4 miles in length, a mile in breadth, iV^O feet high, and generally bold-to. At its
south end anchorage can be obtained in Wild cove, in about 5 fathoms, but ex-
posed to southerly winds, which are almost always accompanied with a heavy
sea ; and also at its north end, in Mother Ixx cove, where, although the space is
very limited in extent, there is shelter from southerly winds.

Little CoUnet Island. — Little Colinet island, 1^ miles north-eastward from
Great Colinet island, is a mile in length, half a mile broad and 235 feet high ;
at its south end there is a rocky islet, known as Gull islet. Its shore is steep,
there being at a very moderate distance from it a depth of 10 to 16 fathoms, and
lit a quarter of a mile westward from it as much as 75 fathoms. This island
contains no bay nor sheltered anchorage.

Both the Colinet islands have bare hills rising from rocky cliffs. The depth
in the channel separating the islands is 25 to 80 fathoms ; on the bank which
connects the little island to the eastern shore of St. Mary's bay it is 14 to 24 fa-
thoms. Vessels bound to Salmonier river, or any of the harbours at the head of
St. Mary's bay, should go eastward of the islands (although the channel westward
of them is wider) as that passage is more convenient with the winds that usually
prevail ; — this eastern channel is a mile wide in its narrowest part, and clear of
danger, except the rock (already mentioned) a quarter of a mile north-westward
of Shoalbay point.

Bluasel-pond Bay. — From Shoalbay point the coast trends E.N.E. about
ti miles to Mussel-pond bay, a smull bay in which anchorag* may be obtained iu

»"'■'.' ;;.^"'

CWK PINK TO CAPE ST. MARY— ST. MARYS RAY.

about 7 fathoms water, but exposed to westerly winds. The hind forming its
northern side rises to the heiglit of -^'yO feet. Along this coast, which is for the
most part cliffy, the depth at a moderate distance is about H fathoms. A beach,
one mile from the extremity of Shoalbay point, has obtained the name of
Admiral's beach.

■AXiMONZEK RZVBB. — From Mussel-pond point the coast trends north-east-
ward and eastward to Salmonier river, tlie entrance to which (distant about
6 miles E. by N. from Little Colinet island) is 7 cables wide; the river then
gradually decreases in breadth, and at the distance of (S miles within receives the
waters of a shallow stream over rocky bottom.

There is good anchorage above the curved gravel beach on the north side : but
but a shoal spit of sand, extending a cable from the shore, will be cleared by
keeping the south point of tlie entrance open until the valley of Little Harbour
opens south-east.

Shoal water also extends from the sandy beach in front of Little Harbour, and
may be cleared by keeping BluflF head and Cross point in line about E.N.E.
Little harbour is the outlet of a fine run of fresh water, — on the eastern shore,
about '6\ miles frcmi the entrance — and affords within the sandy beach safe winter
shelter for fishing craft.

There is a neat Roman Catholic church on the south side of the liarb(nir.
The inliabitrtuts number about l]')0, and the land, whicli is of fair quality, is cul-
tivated to some extent. The ialmon and cod fisheries are followed with success.

As both shores of Salmonier river are clear of danger, with the above exceptions,
no particular instructions for entering are requu-ed. A vessel having passed on
eitlierside of the Colinet islands and ascended the bay so far as to have the river
open, may steer E. by N. to the entrance and following the south shore, should
anchor in 8 fathoms water, mud, abreast the church ; or she can proceed farther
ill and anchor above the curved gi-avel beach on the north side, in (i fatlioms.

It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. 40m. ; springs rise 1^ feet, neaps
fi feet.

Haricot Bay. — Haricot bay, northward of Salmonier river, is about "J miles
in extent, and has a depth gradually shoaling fnmi 20 fathoms, mud, at the en-
trance, to 2 fatlKuns off the low shingly beach at its head. It is open to south-
westerly winds, ill no part alfords shelter, and is consequently but littlo fre-
quented.

COXiXNET HARBOVB. — Coliuet harbour, at the head of St. Mary's bay, is
separated from llaricot bay liy a iiiirrow tongue of land having an elevation of
about •"iO foot, ufi'tlie westcin side of wliicli tliero is a long narrow island 15;") feet
high, known as I'iinrligut island; in the narrow channel between il'inchgut
Tickle) there is a doptli of only 2 fathoms to :{ feet, the latter being at its northern
end. — hence it cannot be used by vessels. The harbour is distant (i miles
N.E. by E. from Little Colinet island, and 2 miles X.^Y. by W from the entrance
to Salmonier river. Its entrance, between Pincligut island on the east and Johu's
p(md on the west, is a mile wide and 10 fathoms deep ; thence the harbour ex-
tends N.E. \ E. 2={ miles to the north end of I'inchgut island, gradually decreas-
ing in width to about half a mile and in depth to 7 fathoms, — it tiieu becomes
■wider and the depth decreases to 2 fathoms at a short distance from its head.
The anchorage evciy where is good on ground that holds well, and shelter is ob-
tained from all winds except those from S.W.

The only inhabitants of Colinet harbour, about HO persons, reside at Jolms

NORTH HARBOUll.

11)011(1, where tlieiT lis fair anchomgi! for small vessels, and more convenient for
Itlin iisheries than in the harbour. Good water may be obtained from a river at
Itlie licad of the harbour.

Vessels entering Colinet harbour should give the shoi'o of Johns pond a wide
Ibcrtli, because of the shoal extending from its beach, whioli runs out about a
cable to the south-eastward, has t)ver it 3 to ft feet w iter and is steep (m its sea-
ward edge ; — this mny he cleared by keeping Little Colinet island open of Bushy
point. S.W. by W. Within the harbour, on tlie oi)posite side, a shoal of sand
and stones also extends from the north end of Pinchgut island nearly half way to
tlie western shore; vessels clear this by steering with the lead and keeping
Davios point (at the head of the harbour) ojjcn of Half island (a low sandy islet,
joined to the north-western shore at the north end of Pinchgut island at low
water) bearing N.E. by E. i E.

Tlie best anchorage in Colinet harbour is abreast Half island in 7 to 5 fathoms,
mud. It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. 40m. ; springs rise 7^ feet,
neaps o feet.

Vessels bound to Colinet harbour, after passing Little Colinet island, should
steer N.E. by E. ^ E. 5 miles, when they will be abreast Johns point; beyond
tills will be seen the houses of Johns pond, and Pinchgut island ahead. They
siiould then steer N.E. up the harbour, keeping well over to the north side, but
so as to have Davies point bearing N.E. by E. ^ E. open of Half island ; and,
with the lead going, anchor when abreast of Half island in 7 fathoms, mud.

NORTH BABBOVB. — The entrance to North harbour is distant 2 miles
N.E. by N. from Little Colinet island, and separated from Colinet harbour by
the land of North harbour point, which rises to the height of about 180 feet.
Cape Dog, on the south-west side of the entrance, is a bold cliff, with a depth
close off it of about 5 fathoms ; it is 380 feet high and consists of perpendicular
cliffs of slate.

North harbour is nearly a mile wide at the enti-ance and about 10 fathoms
deep. It thence extends 5 miles in a N.E. direction and gradually decreases in
breadth and depth until it receives at its head the waters of a small stream.
Within it there are no dangers except near the shore, but as it is open to the pre-
vailing south-west winds, it cannot be recommended as a secure anchorage except
for small craft, who may anchor in safety in 3 fathoms water, mud, at about 4
miles within the entrance under shelter of a beach on the north side. There are
about 50 persons residing on the shores of this harbour (1808).

Tlie Coast. — On the west side of cape Dog is Dog cove, a small bay open to
southerly winds and having a depth of 8 fathoms to 6 feet at low water ; the
tiie coast on the west side of this is very bold, Sepoy liill, immediately over it,
rising to the height of 498 feet, yjggr head, a rocky point 2 miles S.W. by ^
W. \ W. from cape Dog, has a ledge of rocks extending from it about a quarter
nf a mile in a S.W. direction ; hence it must be carefully approached, and especi-
ally because the edge of the reef is very steep. At nearly 1^ miles further down the
coast is Little Nalmonier bay, which receives the water of a small stream ; it has
i) to :j fathoms water, and is open to southerly winds— its western point, Barachois
point, is foul to some distance seaward. On the west side of Barachois point
there is a shallow bay, known as Big Barachois, which is about a mile in extent
and almost divided into two parts by a long narrow sandy bar that runs across it.
Little Barachois is a creek 1^ miles south-westward from Big Barachois. From
this creek to Lance point, the western boundary of St. Mary's bay, the coast

.1.:

CWK PINK TO CAI'E ST. MAUY-ST. MAllYS J{AV.

trends W.S.W. 17^ miles, contains no slieltered Anchorages, and has off it in
nmny pluces sunken rocks, but in general at no great distance from the clitf!) ; it
is all bold, rising from tlie sea frequently to the height of 200 or 800 feet.

ll'ilil cove, one mile from Little Ikrachois. is, as its name implies, a dangerous
placo affording no slielter. In front of it are the Lanaeoaii rocks, a small patcli
( nearly awash) at a quarter of a mile from the sliore, having close to tludr seawarl
edge a deptli of ir» fathoms. Point Liiiinfivun. one mile south-westward from
Wild cove, has over it a hill 470 feet high ; this point is foul to about a cable-
near the rocks is a depth of !) fatlioms. Mai/itttif point, half a mile southward
from Lansecau hill, has also sunken rocks at its base. >/if/;/in)j cove, 'V miles
southward from Lansecan liill. is open to southerly winds and afl'ords no shelter.
Southward of this 1^ miles is tlie projecting point. Red head ; a bold cliff with
U fathoms water almost close to it. Branch cove, t miles further along the coast,
is the outlet of a little river, over whose bar at high water in moderate weather,
fishing vessels art' able to cross and lie secure ; here about 150 fishermen reside
in great comfort (IH(i.J). Ihimult head, the south point of the bay of Branch cove,
is a bold cliffy point 200 feet higli. having ofl' its extremity two rocks 40 feet higii.
known as the Hare's Ears. Red cove and Gall cove now follow ; both are open
and unimportant, and too exposed for anchorage except wiiile the wind is from
the land — the last mentioned is ■\\ miles north-eastward from Lance point.

Stinken Sangers. — Tiie following sunken dangnrs on tlic north-west side of
St. Mary's bay, are beyond the distance of a mile from its shore ; namely, Kod-
head rock, Beckford shoal, and Mussel and Redcove rocks.

Redhead Rock. — The Redhead rock, with 4 fathoms water on it. lies E. J S,
4i miles from Hare's Ears, and S. J E. 2 miles nearly from Red head. Close to
it on all sides is a depth of 45 to 50 fathoms.

Beckford Shoal. — The Beckford shoal, a small patch of 7 fathoms having a
depth of 24 fathoms close to it on all sides, lies rather more than a mile from llio
coast in the direction of S.E. by E. from the northern bluff of the buy ol Bruucl*
cove. and2i miles E. ? S. fnnn Branch head.

Mussel Rock. — The Mussel rock, (i fathoms under water, is dangerous in heavy
weatlier. It lies S. i PL IJ miles from the Hare's Ears rocks, and has (dose to it
on all sides a depth of IH to 25 fatlioms — within half a mile from it in a sotitli-
cHsterly direction the depth is 50 f ithonis.

Redcore Rock. — The liedcove rock, with 8 fathoms on it, lies S. by W. i W.
2 miles nearly from the Hare's Ears, and S.E. by E. i E. 2 niiles from the iiortli
point of (lull cove. Close to it on all sides is a depth of ','0 to 25 fathoms, and at
half a mile south- eastward from it 40 fathoms, rooky bottom.

Xiance Folnt, — I^aiice point, the south-west extremity of St. Mary's bay, is
distant Vi\ miles W. by S. \ S. fmni Branch head. It is low. with land a mile
northward from it lising to the height of 2(tO feet. Its extremity is in Lit.
4(5° 47' 86" N.. long. 54 8' 88" W., and from it a shoal extends about two cables
in a soutlierly direction ; as the depth close to this shoal is about 10 fathoms, and
the point is of but moderate heiglit, the greater circumspection is necessary when
navigating off this part of St. Mary's bay in thick weather.

OAFB 8T. XSART and Ught. — The coast from I^ance point trends in a north-
westerly direction 5f miles to cape St. Mary ,and forms by its irregularity threo
bays exposed to the sea. The cape is a steep cliff, about 880 feet high, and from
a moderate distance has the appearance of high table land of uniform height, at
the western extremity of which is the lighthouse. High barrens of bog an(\

/^.

CAPE ST. MARY AND IJGHT.

moorland, with the usual stunted growth of spruce, fir, and alder, along the M-ater
courses and sheltered hollows, are the prevailing features of the land in this
vicinity. Lance cove, on the west side of Lance point, is an open bay having a
depth of 7 fathoms to U feet ; its western point, Bullisland point, is bold, rising to
the height of 150 feet — off it is a small islet. The next projection to the west-
ward is Eedland point, and then at the distance of 2 miles in the direction of
N.W. is Fahe cape, so named because before the erection of the lighthouse on
cape St. Mary it was not unfrequently mistaken for that cape ; the bay formed
by these two points is known as Oolden bay.

Light.— Th.e lighthouse on cape St. Mary stands near the edge of a cliff 300
feet high, and exhibits a revolving light showing alternately at intervals of a
minute a red and white face. The light is 300 feet above tlie sea, and in clear
weather may be seen at a distance of 26 miles. The tower is white, and rises
from the roof of the keeper's dwelling ; its geographical position is lat. 4C°49' 30"N.,
long. 54" 11' 34" W.

Dangers off the Coast. — The following rocks lie at various distances from the
coast between point Lance and cape St. Mary ; namely, Lance rock. Bull and
Cow, Sunker, False cay, and St. Mary's cays. They are all steep, and in heavy
weather can generally be distinguished by breakers.

Lanee Rock. — The Lance, a 2-fathom rock, lies rather more than 1^^ miles
S.W. by S. from Lance point. Close to it on all sides is a depth of 16 fathoms.
It has been stated that it may be cleared on the south side by keeping the Bull
a very little open to the left of the foot of cape St. Mary ; but this mark appears
by the chart to lead close to it.

Bull and Cow.— The Bull and Cow are two black slate rocks, 30 feet above
water, distant a little more than 1| miles West from Lance point. They are
very near each other, and are surrounded by many smaller rocks. All are above
water, and when viewed from eastward or westward (when they stand out from
the land) the two principal rocks can be seen in clear weather at the distance of
8 or 10 miles ; when viewed from southward, they cannot be seen from so far, as
they cannot tlien be distinguished from the land behind them.

Sunker. — The Sunker, a rock nearly awash at low water, lies 2 miles from
Lance point in the direction of N.W. by W. f W., 4 cables S.W. by S. from the
islet off Bullisland point, and a mile North from the Bull and Cow rocks. In
tlie narrow channel between it and the islet off Bullisland point, there is a depth
of about 4 fathoms, and between it and the Bull and Cow rocks of 11 to 6 fathoms.

False Cay. — The False cay, a rock 2 fathoms under water, lies nearly 5J^ miles
S.W. by S. from tlie lighthouse on cape St. Mary, 6 miles West from the Bull
and Cow rocks, and IJ miles N.E. ^ E. to N.E. by E. from St. Mary's cays.
Close to it on all sides is a depth of 17 to li) fathoms.

St. Mary's Cays. — These two small rocks are distant a little more than
6J miles from the lighthouse on cape St. Mary in the direction of S.W. i S., and
fi miles W. 4 S. from the extremity of Lance point. They are distant from each
other 60 fathoms N.W. and S.E., and are always visible, being nearly awash only
at high water. Between and also around them is a depth of 15 fathoms, except
in a S.S.E. direction, where at the distance of 2 cables is a depth of only fa-
thoms ; consequently if suddenly encountered during night or thick weather, a
vessel might pass between them if compelled by necessity.*

* According to Captain Orlebar, B.N., " the water is slioal around, and the sea gener-
ally breaks heavily upon tlieni."

:^ '^

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

J25

lis

Ui Kii 12.2

2.0

lit

14.0

IJ&

IlliiSi IIIJ4 iJi^

^ —

►

Photographic

Sciences

Corporation

L1>^

N*. «^\

33 WIST MAIN STMI?

WnSTM.N.Y. MSM

( 71* ) •72-4503

82 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT- PLACENTIA BAY,

At rather more than a mile S.E. by E. ^ E. from St. Mary's oays there is a
small patch of 6 fathoms. Between it and the cays is a depth of 13 fiathoms, and
close to its eastern and sonthem sides 18 to 20 fi&thoms. y

Between St. Mary's cays and False cay, and also between False cay an4 pape
St. Maiy, the depth is 10 to 19 &thoms, rock. The SO-fathom line of soundings ,
is less than a mile from St. Mary's cays, so that in foggy weather it is not
safe to approach the cape nearer than into 85 fathoms.

CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POmT—PLAOENTIA

BAY, &c.

The boundaries of Placentia bay are naually considered to be cape St. Mary ,
and cape Ghapeau Rouge (on the western side of Great St. Lawrence harbour)
which bear from each other N.W. by W. i W. and S.E. by £. | £. distant
47 miles. The bay thence extends about 67 miles in a N.E. by £. direction and
contains many fine harbours and anchcnages. Its shores are as yet but sparsely
inhabited, and its harbours ire rarely entered except by the small fishing craft
of the country. During winds from south-westward the fog is generally very,
dense on the eiistem coast of the bay, jjni especially in the vicinity ^ cape,
St. Mary.

me ooast.— At abo^t a mile northwar^ of cape St. Maiy is Brierly cove, the.
nearest landing place to the lighthouse. From the cape the coast trends N.N.E.
^ E. 7 miles to Cross point, then N.E. Si miles to Breme point, and afterwards
N.E. ^ E. 16i miles to point Verde on the south side of the entrance to Placentia
harbour; it is of nearly uniform height (250 to 400 feet) a tolerably straight
shore, and consists.generally of high diffs, which are broken here and there by
valleys in which can be seen a few honees. It is a most inhospitable shore, the
headlands are steep, and the coves between only a£ford shelter to a few fishing
stations. Fish are everywhere in twenty, and the land when cultivated yields
good crops of potatoes, oats and hay.

D«Bs«rs eS tlk« &ana.— The coast jut described should at all times be very
carefully navigated, there being sunken rocks off it at various distances, but
chiefly within 2 miles of it. In the immediate vicinity of each the water is deep
and in fine weather breakers do not always show their position«: hence, except in
very dear weather, vessels are recommended not to approach the land nearer
than into the depth of 40 fiathoms. These rocks are named as follows ; — Seven-
Fathom, Perch, Nest, Curslet, Patrick, Goose, Scuth rock, False Girdle, Girdle,
the Virgins and Gibraltar.

Seven-Fathom Bock.— A small patch of 7 fathoms lies 21 miles N.W. by W.
\ W. from the lighthouse on cape St. Mai^^. Close to its eastern side is a depth
of 16 fathoms, and to its western side 20 fathoms. In mid-channel between it
and the cape the depth is 12 to 14 fathoms.

Perch iZocAr.— The Perch rock, 21 fatlioms under water, lies N. by W. 6| miles
from the lighthouse on oape St. Mary, and N.W. f W. Si miles from Island head,
a bold bluff 4 miles N.N<E.-warvl ul' oape St. Mary and 400 ieet high. Close to

'-•^

PLACENTIA HARBOUR

its norih side is a depth of 12 fethoms, and its sonfh side 20 fitthoms. The Bull
and Oow open of cape St. Maiy, bearing S.S.E. i E. leads U miles soath^west-
A( aid of this roek.

Kmt Book'.— The Nest, with U fiithoms water on it, lies N.E. by E. a mile
from the Peroh rock. It has a depth of 15 &thonu close to it on all sides, and
the sea generally breaks on it.

Ourilet Book.— Tb» Corslet rook, 2 fiKthoms under water, lies Vf. by S.t nearly
2 miles from Breme point The depth almost dose to its seaward side is 10 to
14 fathoms, and in mid-channel between it and the coast 10 fathoms.

Patriek Book. — Patrick rock, with 1) fathoms water on it, lies N.W. ^ W.
U miles from the month of the river at Patrick cove. It is of small extent, and
has dose to it on all sides a depth of 10 fethoms.

Ooou Shoal. — ^The Goose, a shoal 4| &ihoms under water, lies nearly three-
quarters of a mile northward of Goose cove. In the narrow channel between it
and the coast the depth is 8 fathoms, and dose to its seaward side 10 to 12 &-
thorns.

South Book. — The South rook, with 1} fiithoms water on it, lies S.S.W. nearly
three-quarters of a mile from the Girdle, a rode above water mentioned subse-
quently. Close to it on all sides is a depth of 10 fathoms, which in the seaward
direction rapidly deepens to 20 fothnms.

Faise Oirdle.— The False Girdle, 6 feet under wate^, lies abont S. by £. half
a mile from the Girdle ; almost midway between it and South rods.

OirdU Book.— The Girdle, above water (escept at very high tides), lies S.W.
a mile from the Virgin rocks.

Virgin Boeki,— The Yirgins, three Uaok rodn above water (one of them is
18 feet high) lie If miles from the diore, and 6^ miles W.S.W. (nearly) from
Verde point, at the entrance of Placentia harbour. The depth in mid-ohannd
between them and the nearest land is 8 to 10 fkthoms, and almost dose to their
western edge 16 fathoms which deepens rapidly to 80 fathoms, the latter being at
less than a mile from them.

Nearly opposite to, or a short distance southward of, the Virgin rooks there is in
the di£b a white spot of about half a male in extent. This is a good mark by which
a vessel making the land in thidc weather, and running along it at the distance
of a half to three-quarters of a mile to avoid the various rocks we have just
particularized (a oourse by no means recommended), may know when she is iu
tlie vicinity of the Viigins. A short distaooe southward of this white spot, or
great white cliff, there is ft valley containing numerous fishermen's houses.

OibreAtar Book.— The Gibraltar, 5 feet under water, lies 1^ miles W. i N.
from Vesde point, Plaoemtia harbour. The depth dose to its east side is 8 fa-
thoms, to its west side 10 to 18 fitthoms, and there is a dear channel 5 to 7
fathoms deep between it and the shore. To dear it on the north side, keep
Castle hill (a hill 840 feet high, on the north side of the entrance to Placentia
harbour) open of Verde point, bearing E. by S.

rhAommA babboob.— Placentia harbour is an excellent place of shetter,
being completely landlocked and having a depth suffident for large vesselu ; it
has however the disadvantage of a bar of only 10 feet water at low tide, hence is
rarely visited except by small craft trading for fish. The village or town is ou
the south side of the entrance to the harbour, at about 2 miles from Verde point,
on the eastern side of an extensive shingle beach ; it has two ohurohes, a oourt-
housti, kc., and the population (including the scattered inhabitants of the tili(.ro)

11^

84 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

amounts to only about 800, who are all engaged in thd fisheries. There is a
moderately good carriage road from it to St. Johns.*

The vicinity of Placentia harbour may be recognised by the roniided and
detached character of the hills, which are higher than the table land of cape
St. Mary. Yiewed from south-westward, point Verdo, oo the southern side of
the entrance to the roadstead, stands out prominently as a long grayish rampart;
and, northward of this will be seen Signal hill (377 feet high), on the nqrth point
of the entrance, with its bare sides of yellowish colour and having at its foot a
oonspicuons pale yellow spot, known as point Frivecoeur. Castle hill, on the
north shore opposite the village, soon presents itself as a hill (with a bare summit)
840 feet high ; upon this hill, a tort was erected by the French during their
occupation of Newfoundland, and we believe a few vestiges of the works can yet
be traced. Northward of Signal hill (no longer, as its name implies, a place for
signalling the approach of vessels) the coast forming points Moll and Shalloway is
low, but behind is a group of remarkaUe high steep hills, many of which resemble
haycocks ; no other land in the vicinity of the harbour has this appearance ooa-
sequently they are a good mark for it from a distance.

The western part of point Verde is a cliff of moderate height and grayiiifli
colour ; behind (eastward of) this the shore is a shingle beach, which encloses tt
high tide a sheet of water. From this point, a shoal of rounded stones and
having over it a depth of ^2 to 18 Heet, extends about 3 cables in a north-easterly
direction, and is immediately succeeded by a depth of 6 fathoms.

Placentia roadstead, at the eastern end of which is the harbour, consists of a
bay extending E.S.E. from Yerde point nearly 2 miles, and about two-thirds of a
mile broad. In it is a depth of 18 to 30 feet, except in its eastern part, abreast
Castle hill, where a bar of sand and stones having 14 feet water on it extends
across it ; eastward of this it deepens to 6 and 7 fathoms, and then shoals to
10 feet at low water between the low points of the entrance to the harbour.
The anchorage is in its western part and is about a mile in length, and cables
wide ; the bottom is of sand and gravel, and there is no shelter against winds
from West north-westward to North, which send in a heavy sea. Vessels should
not remain here when the wind veers from S.W. to West with a low barometer.
It is considered not a very safe anchorage.

The harboiir is entered by a channel only 65 yards wide, and, as before
observed, 10 feet deep. It extends H miles E. by N. with a width of about
8 cables, and then (being very narrow and shallow in places) about 3} miles
S.E. by E. i E. It contains well-sheltered anchorage, in 6 and 6 fathoms, mud.
The best berth is on the north side, where the whirl and eddy of the tide are less
felt. When entering, the assistance of a pilot is necessary as the tide flows
through the channel at the rate of 4 miles an hour and there are no good leading
marks ; the greatest depth is between the ripples on each side, and a leading wind
is desirable.

* Plaoentia harbour was apparently deeper in Oaptain Cook's time (1765) than at
present, as according to bis chart vessek could then carry 20 feet at low water through
the Ntirrowa. He shows nowhere ontside the entrance a depth of less than 4 fathomi,
andithere is no bar in the roadstead where Captain Orlebar, B.N., (1860) inserts one of
14 feet. His depth in the harbour ia and 8 fMkoms ; Captain Orlebar gives it a» 4 to
6 fktbons.

PLAGENTIA SOUND, &o.

The harbour is also known as the North-east arm. The Sonth-east arm
behind the town, is about S miles in extent and S to 5 fathoms deep in places ;
it'>is,thoweyer, too shallow at the entrance to permit other than boat naviga-
tion, and in this part also is a very strong currant when the tide is flowing in
or ebbing.

Vessels bound to Placentia harbour should steer in with a house at the north
end of the town nearly touching Oastle hill (on the north shore) bearing S.R.
by E. until past Verde point, when they should haul more to the southward till
abreast Castle hill; they should then bring a house at the Narrows of the North-
east arm on with the cliffy south shore of the same arm, bearing E. ^ N., as it
will carry them through the deepest water into the harbour. When within the
points, they should haul up towards the north shore, and anchor as convenient
in 5 or 6 fathoms water. Good water can be obtained at about a mile within the
Narrows.

It is high water here full aud change, at 8h. 30m; ; springs rise 7 feet, neaps

5 feet. The geographical position of the south church is considered to be lat.
47* 14' 63" N., long. 68" 67' 27" W.

Vh* Coast. — From Placentia harbour the coast trends N.E . by N. about
41 miles to point Latine, and is low near the sea but backed by high rugged land ;
it should not be closely approached because two sunken rocks, known as the
Moll and Wolf, lie off it.

MoU Book. — The Moll, 6 feet under water, lies N. by W. I W. one mile from
Moll point, on the north side o( the entrance to Placentia roadstead, and W. by
N. i N. three-quarters of a mile from Shalloway point (the nearest land). It is
nearly a cable in extent, and close to it on the east side is a depth of 3i to 6
fathoms ; on its west side, Sj fathoms. Vessels bound to Placentia should not
approach it nearer than to have the two points, Dixon and Priveooeur, in 'me,
bearing S.E. by E. (See the Admiralty chart. No. 2829).

Wolf Book. — This is a small sunken rock lying about half a mile from the
shore, at a mile to the southward of point Latine.

Point Latine, and point Roche, a mile eastward of it, are both foul to some
distance seaward ; the latter probably as far out as one third of a mile. Between
point Roche and Fox point, li miles from it in a S.E. by E. direction, the coast
falls in and forms an extensive bay named Placentia sound, in which there is a
good depth of water, and shelter from southerly winds.

PfcA Cim yi A aoviis. — The western part of Placentia sound, that which
extends 1^ miles W. i S. along the south side of point Roche, is known to the
fishermen as Little Placentia harbour. It is nearly half a mile broad, and 17 to

6 fathoms deep. A cove on its north shore (recognised by its west part being
wooded) affords excellent anchorage in 8 to 7 fathoms water, but a shoal extends
from its east point nearly one-third over the channd. Population about 600.

The eastern part of Placentia sound extends from Little Placentia harbour
about 4 miles, and is deep almost everywhere, there being 30 to 17 fathoms water
for some distance within. It 1% but little frequented. Fox harbour, a. little
sandy bay on its northern shore just within the entrance, can only accommodate
boats.

SHIP BABaovK, north-esfttward from Placentia sound, trends 8 miles in a
north-easterly direction, and is half a mile wide for about two-thirds of its extent.
The water throughout is deep, 20 to 8 fieithoms, the latter being near its head, and
vessels can anchor almost anywhere, although the best place is at about a mile

,''.-\'i-

'■i1

•'.f'

80 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIO POINT— I'LACENTIA BAV.

^i.^

within tho entratkce in a oove on its east side, in about 10 fEtthoms. Shelter is
afforded fkom ahnost all winds.

The outer projecting point on the north side of the entrance to Ship harbour is
a low point of stones. It is distant 5 miles E. ^ N. from point Latins, and from
it a series of shoals (separated by depths of 2^ to 10 fathoms) upon which the
sea breaks in bad weather, extends 8^ miles N.W. | W. to Fox island, a little
round island having near its western side a depth of 18 fathoms.

De Piehe and Rowland BooJu. — ^A very steep rock above water, known as the
De Peche (Fishing^ rook, lies If miles N. by W. from Fox island ; and, another,
the Rowland (under water, and causing breakers except in very fine weather)
lies 1^ miles N.N.E. from the De Peche. A rock, 6 feet under water, has also
been reported to lie northward of the Rowland, in an E.S.E. direction from the
north-east comer lof Red island.i< As the position here given for these rocks may
not be strictly accurate, and this part of Placentia bay has been but indifferently
examined, more than ordinary care should be exercised while in their vicinity.

Bam telanda. — These are some sc8,ttered islands of moderate height, forming
a duster about 11 miles in extent. They are nearly 6 miles N.E. i E. from point
Latine, and 81 nules E. by S. I S. from the centre of Red island. Between them
and the coast eastward of them is a depth of 26 to 35 fisithoms.

KOiro BAmBOVm.— Long harbour, 2 miles eastward from Ram islands, has
an opening about 2 miles wide, whence it extends 3 to 4 miles in two arms divi-
ded by a projecting point off which is a large island, mown as Harbour island.
In each of these is a depth of 20 to 9 fathoms ; but the southern arm, which
bears the name of Long harbour, is the most extensive and convenient, — here
vessels anchor on the northern side, eastward of Harbour island (between it and
the main) in 6 or 7 fathoms, and obtain shelter from almost all winds. Popula-
tion about ISO.

An islet, to which no name is attached, is inserted on the chart of Placentia
bay at about a mile N.W. by W. i W. from the northern point uf the nortli arm
of Long island, and about the same distance N.E. i E. from the north-eastern-
most Ram island.

m* Ooast. — ^From Long harbour the coast trends N.N.E. 141 miles to Little
harbour, and is devoid of interest, there being no harbour or place of shelter into
which a vessel can run. Tinny oove, Famithgut cove, Pinohgut cove, respectively
6, 8 and 12 miles from Long harbour, are all little bays of no importance. At
LitUe harbour, which has an extent of about a mile in a north-easterly direction,
vessels may anchor in 7 fitthoms, but exposed to south-westerly winds ; these,
when strong, send in a heavy sea, and the ground is also bad.

White Book, do. — ^A rock (known as the White rook from the appearance
given it by the dung of birds) lies 21 miles from Tinny cove, in the direction of
N.W. \ W. and almost midway between Fox island and Little harbour. It may
be passed on all sides, but a close approach to it is not recommended, as it has
not been surveyed — the position we assign to it may also be not strictly correct.
The chart of Placentia bay has also inserted in it a rock or islet at about a nule
W. 1 N. from the north point of Pinchgut cove.

* This rook was reported as the E8E rock, probably with refarenee to its bewing from
Red island. As no particulars \rere stated, and nothing it known of it, we suspeot it to
be the Rowland rock. See the Mercantile Marine Magazine, 1860, pagt 8.

PIPER'S ROLE. &o.

XJTTXili I101ITM BABBOVB.— Little Sonth harbour, one mile northward of
Little harbour, has an extent of about H miles in the direction of E.S.E. (?j| and
is half a mile broad. It is 8 to 6 fothoms deep, the latter being dose to the beach
at its head, and affords shelter firom all winds except firom south-westward,|to
which quarter every part of it is exposed. When withhi, vessels anchor in 6
futhoms, soft mud.

The south point of entrance to the harbour has extending from it a ohain of
rocks, the outermost and largest of whioh bears the name of Grass island.
North-eastward of these, and nearly oyer to the opposite shore, are two rooks
(with a clear channel 4 fathoms deep between them) known as the Winging
rocks. The usual channel into the harbour is between these rocks and Grass
island in 13 to 15 fathoms water, but vessels may also pass betwe«i them and
the coast in their immediate vidnity. Within all these rooks, a sunken ledge
(the Seal rocks) extends li cables from the southern shore ; and, nearly opposite
this, some rocks at nearly a cable from the land, show at half ebb, — these vari-
ous dangers are generally steep and over them there is frequently a breaking sea.
It is high water here (approximately) at 9h. 80m., full and change ; springs rise
8 feet.

OBBAT 80VVB BABBOVB. — Great South harbour, immediately northward
of Little South harbour, is separated from it by a narrow point of land (in one
part only about half a mile across) named Middle point. Its north point, Bord-
eaux point, has off it a high ronnd island of the same name. Its entrance is 1^
miles wide and 80 to 30 fisithoms deep ; thence it extends about N.E. by E. 2
miles and gradually decreases in breadth and depth to its extremity. The shelter
it affords is from all winds except those from south-westward.

Vessels can entei- this harbour with facility, there. bei^ no known sunken
dangers. The anchorage, H miles within Bordeaux island, is in 6 or 7 f&thoms;
and considered very good ; they may also go further in. and anchor where con-
venient, according to the draught of water.

0OBEB-BT>OBABCa BABBOVB.— From Bordeaux island the coast trends
N.E. i E. and after 3 or 4 miles forms with the land northward of it a large har-
bour named Come-by-Chance, the north point of whioh is distant 4 miles N.N.E.
from the island. It is li miles wide and IS to 26 fiithoms deep at the entrance,
and extends 4 miles in a N E. by E. direction, gradually decreasing in breadth
and depth as its extremity is approached. Atitsheadit is very shallow. The
anchorage is at about half-way up in 6 or 7 fathoms, sand, but exposed to the
full force of the sea sent in by south- westerly winds.

BOBTB BABBOVB. — Three miles northward of Come-by-Chance harbour is
North harbour, the coast between trending in a curve to the N.N.W. and being
safe to approach to a moderate distance, the depth at a quarter to half a mile
from it averaging 12 to 16 fathoms. This harbour is about a mile wide at its
entrance, and has an extent of about 3i miles in a north-easterly durection. Its
depth is 10 to 18 and 7 £Eithoms, there being 18 fathoms water at about a mile
from the sea. Vessels seeking anchorage should ascend the harbour about two
niiltis until in about 7 futhums ; it is however rarely visited, its exposure to the
heavy seas sent in by south-westerly winds rendering it somewhat insecure in bad
wenther. There ure no known sunken dangers off either of its shores.

PXPSB'S BO&B.— The entrance to Piper's Hole, N. by W. i W. about
H miles from the north point of North harbour, is about H miles wide and 7 tu
5 fathoms deep. From this the Hole extends miles N. by W. I W. and geadu-

.■¥■

:-}'\

i':-

!i»i-.

HH CAPE ST MARY TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

ally decreases in breadth and depth to its head, being for the most part too
shallow to receive vessels. In front of it is the north end of Sound, island,
and the passage in (between this and the eastern shore) is less th^n half
a mile wide, though 16 to 12 fathoms deep ; another entrance is through the
narrow channel westward of the island, which is 4 to fathoms deep. In the
limited space available for anchorage there is good shelter.

■eimd, Woody and Barren Xrtaada. — Sound island, just mentioned, is about
l\ miles long S.W. i W. and N.E. i E. and one mile broad ; its eastern dhore is
steep, with a depth almost close to it of about 16 fiathoms. Woody island, the
next island in succession, ia separated from it by a narrow channel 8 to 16 fa-
thoms deep; this island lies parallel to the coast, is nearly 3 miles long and
narrow, being scarcely half a mile wide — at its south end is a small islet, and
beyond this (but nearer the coast) are several large rocks. Barren island, about
1^ miles south-westward from the last mentioned island, is high, 8} miles long
and abput three-quarters of a mile broad ; its direction is similar to that of the
coast, and on its eastern side, near its southern end there is a small bay in
which moderately good anchorage and shelter can be obtained in 8 to 16 fa-
thoms water. In the wide channel between Woody and Barren islands the
depth is240 to 50 fathoms.

Th«,soiuid. — The channel separating the islands just described from the coast
is only half a mile wide (in some places much less) and 6 to 30 fathoms deep,
except in one part, the nalrowest, which is at about the middle of Sound is-
land, where is a depth of probably lesa than 4 fathoms. It can be navigated in
safety there being no known sunken dangers.

Plant and onUb Oov«b. — At the north end of Barren island there is a small
cove in the main land, named Plant; and, at about 21 miles N.W. f W. from
the south end of the same'island, is a large cove known as Gulsh inlet. Both
these are unimportant.

Ship Xaland. — W. by S. 2 miles from the south end of Barren island is the
north end of Ship island, an islet li miles long in aW.S.W. direction and about
half a mile across. In the narrow channel between it and the coast there is a
depth of 7 to 20 fathoms, and no known sunken dangers ; its southern entrance
is, however, much contracted in width by several rocks above water which lie off
the north point of entrance to Great Sandy harbour to the distance seaward of
about half a mile, — between these there are channels probably of sufficient depth
to permit the passage of small vessels.

aVBAT SAHDT BABBOUB. — The entrance to this harbour, one mile
N.N.W. I W. from the south side of Ship island, is very narrow and to some extent
obstructed by the rocks mentioned in the preceding paragraph. It is N to 4
fathoms deep, and this depth continues for only a short distance within, the
anchorage being in the north-east arm of the harbour in 4 to 4| fathoms. The
north-western arm is shallow. The shelter is from almost all winds.

xatua Bandy Barbour. — At less than a mile southward from the eutrance to
Great Sandy harbopr, is Little Sandy harbour, a bay of about three-quarters of
a mile in extent and having a depth of 7 to 4 fathoms. Between, is a small islet
close to the shore. When entering pass northward of a low rock lying in the
entrance. The anchorage is in to 7 fathoms on good ground, and there is no
shelter from easterly winds.

B«u Xaland.— At about U miles eastward from Littla Sandy harbour there is
a small island known as Bell island, from its remarkable appearance, being that

CLATISE HAUBUUXi, An.

8t)

of ti bell with the bottom upwards. From it. the western end of Merasheen is-
liiud bears S.W. (southerly) distant 18 miles. Close to its western sidejs.n
depth of 20 fathoms. '■

Biirs«e XaUndii. — The next island off the coast south-westward of Bell island
is the northern Burgeo, and then at half a mile further on is the southern Burgeo.
The latter ia about a mile lonj; in a direction parallel to the coast, and very nar-
row, being about a quarter of a mile across ; at its southern end ia a d^pth of
160 fathoms.

Whit* lataada.— In the direction of S.E. by S. from the western end of the
southern Burgeo, and distant 1} miles, there is a cluster of roclqr islets known as
the White islands. They are nearly midway between the coast and the Bagged
islands, off the west side of Merasheeri island, are not, we believe, separated.by a
navigable channel, and have deep water in their vicinity.

VaiMi XsUnds. — S.W. by W. ^ W. 6^ miles from the southern Burgee] island
is the northern end of Great Valen, an island 2} miles in extent parallel to the
shore, and about a mile in wiith. At its southern end there is a small bay,
which is probably of sufficient depth to receive boats. In the narrow channel
between this island and the coast (perhaps less than half a mile in width) there
is a depth of 20 to 50 fathoms.

At about H miles E. i S. from the north end of Great Valen island there is a
group of low rocirs, nearly awash, known to the fishermen as the Grammer
(Grandmother) rocks. The^e are probably steep-to, and should therefore be
carefully avoided.

Little Valen island, half a mile southward of Great Valen island, is separated
from it by a channel 18 to 80 fathoms deep, but obstructed by numerous rocks.

CX.ATI8B BABBOVB. — From Little Sandy bay the coast trends S.W. by
W. i W. about 9 miles to Clatise harbour, and after passing the Burgeo islands
is iu general steep, with a considerable depth of water in its close proximity.
Clatise harbour is of very limited extent, being less than a mile long and very
narrow. Within it is a depth of 20 to 17 fathoms, good ground. On the south
side of the entrance the coast falls iu and forms a bay of about half a mile in
extent, in which it is not recommended to anchor.

Vessels can approach Clatise harbour either through the narrow channel
between the Valen islands and the coast, or round the north end of Great Valen
island. The latter channel is three-quarters of a mile wide and 40 to 60 fathoms
deep. When within the harbour there is shelter from almost all winds.

BOIBABHBBIV iSbiXlfD and BasMd Islands. — Merasheen is a long and
veiy narrow island which for 18i miles runs through the centre of the upper
part of Placentia bay, in a direction parallel to and distant 5 nules from the west-
em coast. At its southern part it is 11 miles wide, and in other parts less than a
mile. Its shore is in general steep, there being in some places a depth of 36 to
50 fathoms at a very moderate distance from it, with the exception of its north-
western side, where, in a space of about 10 miles, is a cluster of islands and
rocks, known (from their irregular form) as the Bagged islands ; — of these, that
nearest to Merasheen is 6 miles long in a direction parallel to that island, and
very narrow. All these islands are but little known, not having been closely
examined, and should therefore be approached only with groat caution.

At a short distance W. by N. from the west end of Merasheen island there is
a rock, awash or nearly so, upon which the sea breaks iu ordinary wsather ; and,
there is also a group of rocks above water, at about half a mile from the island

i'.

- • -'TJ

'''**« I

yiM-::4

• ■ .• .-:

00 CAPE ST MAllY rO DANZIG POINT-PLACENTIA BAY.

i:.

iu the direction of S.E. by £. i E. (and distant 2 miles) from Merasheen harbour.

Mtreuheen Harbour. — At the western end of Merasheen island, on the soatheni
ooaati there is a small but good harbenr, known as Merasheen harbour, Ha which
is a depth of 10 to 6 fathoms. When entering, it is necessary to keep th« star-
board shore on board, to avoid the sunkvn rooks that extend a cable from a
ragged rocky point on the port hand. The depth immediately outside is 4
fathoms. When within there is shelter from all but southerly winds.* ^

Indian Harbour. — This little bay is on the east side of Merasheen ifdand, at
about lot miles from the harbour just mentioned. A small islet in its entrance
can be passed on either side. The anchorage is in 8 to 24 fathoms immediately
to the westward of this islet, and reported to be indifferent ; the ground not
holding well.

A duster of rooks, iawash or nearly so, lies one-third of a mile S.E. by E. from
the north point of Indian harbour ; and, an island (named Seal) having some
rocks off its south-east side lies off the shore of Merasheen island at a short dis-
tance northward of the same harbour.

BSD xnuuKO. — Bed island, 2 miles southward of Merasheen island, is barren,
steep, and sufficiently lofty to be visible at the distance of 30 to 85 miles. . It is
41 mil^s long S.W. by W. and N.E. by E. and 2i miles broad, and contains no
harbour or anchoring place, with the exception of a small cove on its eastern
side (near its northern end) into which only very small vessels can enter. The
south end of this island is distant 10( miles N. by W. I W. from Plaoentia har-
bour. Red island has a reddish appearance when viewed from a moderate
distance ; hence the name.

^VOOST zsXiAWO. — Boisee (Woody) island, distant about 8 miles N;E. by
E. f E. from the north end of Red island, is a little more than a mile long in a
N.E. i N. direction and a half to three-quarters of a mile broad. At a short
distance from its south-west end there are two small rocks above water. The
passage between this island and Red island is clear of any known sunken dangers,
as is also that between it and Long island to the north-eastward, the sea being
very deep in both.

AOiro n&Ain>. — The south end of Long island is distant 2 miles E.N.E.
from Woody island and 12} miles from point Latine in the direction of N. by
E. i E. The island tlience extends 8^ miles N.E. by N. and is very irregular in
form, containing many inlets, and being in many parts less than a mile in width.
Two of these inlets. Mussel and Buffet, are excellent harbours, in which vessels
may obtain shelter from almost all winds. Its southern end, which consists of
high steep rocks, has off it at the distance of about half a mile, an islet (Iron
island) and also a small rock above water.

Biiffet Harbour. — Buffet harbour, on the east side of Long island, is distant
about 3 miles ttom Iron island, and its locality may be recognised by the islands
that lie about a mile southward from it, and by others in front of its entrance ;

* While examining the ooorse of the sabmarine cable from Plaoentia to Sydney, in
Gape Breton island, the BOrreyors disoovered a 5-fothom patch, which they named Mer-
chant ehoal. From it 7orde point, Plaoentia, bears S.E. i £., 15 miles ; and the soath-
vest point of Merasheen island N.E. i N., 8 miles. From this shoal in the direction
of Merasheen island many shoal patches, with deep water among them, are reported to
edBt. A rook,' named Pylades, has also been reported to lie 12 miles W. by N. i N. from
Verde point, Plaoentia harbour ; we possess no particulars respecting ft.

PRESQUE AND La PEHCHE HARBOURS.

also, by an islet ntoated a mile from it in an E. by S. direction, and known as
Bufibt Harbour island. It is about a mile in extent, and consi^ of two arms,
one running westward, the other north-eastward, in each of which Tessels cnn
anchor and be sheltered from all winds except from south-eastward ; the best
anchorage is, however, in the last mentioned arm. in about 16 fkthoms water.
The passage in is northward of the islets at the entrance ; the channel is narrow
but IS fathoms deep.

Muntel Harbour. — Ifnsael harbour, on the western side of Long island and
8i miles from its south point, is an inlet 1} miles long in the direction of the
island and two-thirds of a mile wide. It has a depth of 10 to 20 fathoms, and
the anchorage is well sheltered, the only quarter to which it is exposed being the
western ; it is also but little inconvenienced by the heavy seas which south-
westerly gtdes send into Placentia bay, Merasheen island, in its vicinity, in
some degree protecting it from them. Southward of the harbour, and parallel to
Long island, from which it is distant a quarter of a mile (the passage between is
safe, being 14 to 17 fatlioms deep and containing no known suiUten dangers)
there is an island a mile long and with a rock o£F its southern end, which is a
good mark for the harbour to vessels bound to it firom south-westward. The
channel in is between a low green point on the starboard side (the north point of
entrance) and a small islet on the port hand ; having passed this point, such
anchorage may be selected as may be convenient.

Mussel harbour may be approached through the narrow channel between
Long island and Iron islet, off its southern end, which is believed to be free from
sunken dangers, and 26 fathoms deep, between the latter and Woody island ; or,
from northward, between Long and Merasheen islands, but in this track there
are rocks to be guarded against, situated nearly midway between the northern
ends of the islands, and rendering necessary a closer approach to Long than to
Merasheen island.

Bread and oiieMW Islets.— These two islets lie N.E. by E. i E. from the
northern end of Long island, the first at the distance of about half a mile, the
second as far as 2 miles from it. They are steep-to, and midway between Long
island and Bread islet there is a rook (awash or nearly so) which is equally
steep.

VBBSQVB and lUL PBBOBa BABBOmtS, *e. — At the distance of 4 mijes
N.W. by W. i W. from the south-western point of Merasheen island, is the har-
bour of Presque, a narrow inlet 3 miles long in an E. by N. } N. and W. by
S. I S. direction, and 88 to 40 fathoms deep, but difficult of access owing to
numerous rocks scattered in front of its entrance. Two miles S.W. i W. from
this harbour, and three-quarters of a mile from the nearest shore, is the Blaok
rock, a rock above water ; and, a quarter of a mile within this rock there is a
sunken rock,— other rocks also lie nearly midway between this rock and La
Ferche harbour. Marticot island 2 miles West from the Black rock, is about a
mile in length, and half a nule broad. The harbours of La Perehe and Little
and Great Paradiee, lie within the Black rock and Marticot island.

La Perehe Harbour runs in to the northward of the Black rook, and is about a
mile m extent. There is no safe anchorage in it, the ground being bad, and the
harbour itself everywhere exposed to south-easterly winds. Northward of the
east point of Marticot island and westward of La Perehe lies the creek named
LitiU Paradite, in which the only safe anchorage is in a cove, at the head of the
harbour, on the port side, where vessels moor to the shore, and lie land-locked.

.*>•■•

, - if

UU CXVK ST. MAUV TO DANZIG POINT— PLAOENTIA BAY.

The harbour of Oreat Panuline, westward of Little Paradiae is only tit for boats ;
opposite it is a rock above water. Between Marticot and the main is Foai
island; there is a safe passage (0 fathoms deep) between these islands,, but no
passage between Fox island and the main.

At about half a mile to the N.N.W. } W. from the north end of Fox island
tliere is a dangerous rocky patch ; and, north-eastward from this is Red cove, a
creek of no importance, but which is mentioned because its west point is also the
west point of the entrance to Paradise sound.

VAmAOiUi aovm. — This large arm of the sea (it extends 14 miles N.E. by
£. i E., and is nearly a mile wide throughout) has its entrance at about 1} miles
to the northward of Marticot island. Its eastern side is the peninsula upon the
eastern coast of which are the harbours of Clatise, Presque, La Perche, Litti«
and Great Paradise, &c., already mentioned ; and, its western aide is the ^o- 'n
land. In almost every part of it tliere is deep water (there being no bottom Wueu
sounding 60 fathoms in its centre), but no safe anchorage until near its north-
eastern extremity (the depth being too great) where soundings may be obtained
of 25 to 10 and 7 fathoms. A small cove, — on the ei? side just within the
entrance to the sound, has a depth of about 10 fathoms over a rocky bottc^m, and
is not consequently convenient for anchorage ; in it are, also, several rocks above
and under water.

Xrfrng Island. — Long island, south-westward of Paradise sound and almost
facing its entrance, is aboui 3} miles long E.N.E. and W.S.W., and half a mile
wide in its broadest paii;. It is high, rising into several peaks, and almost close
to it on all sides is a depth of SO fathoms.

VBTXT rOBT. — Petit Fort harbour, a mile westward of Paradise sound, is a
very good harbour having a depth of 14 to T fathoms over good ground. Tlie
entrance, which is ratlier more than a quarter of a mile wide, lies N.E. 6 miles
from the south point of Long island, and N. by E. 2i miles from the north point
of Long island ; it has in it no known sunken dangers. When within, the best
anchorage in the harbour will be found on the starboard or eastern side, on
account of tl>e inconvenience which is sometimes occasioned by the great swell
which strong winds from south-eastward send upon the western shore.

iroasneh Barbour. — About H miles westward of Petit F^.. harbour is Non-
such harbour, a creek 4 miles long in a N.E. direction, and with several islands
in its entrance. Its depth is 18 to 12 fathoms, but there is no safe anchorage
until within all tlie islets.

CAm BOOBB BAB80VB. — Gapr Roger, the extremity of the land forming
tbe western side of the inlet of Nonsuch, is a high, round, barren projection of
coast, easily recognised from southward by its position with respect to Long is-
land, as it is distant 34 miles N.N.E. from the west end of that island. The
harbour is on the western side of the cape, and consists of an inlet 3 miles long
in a N.E. by E. direction, and a half to one-third of a mile broad ; it has a depth
of 23 to 3 fathoms, the latter being at its extremity, and affords shelter from almost
all wiqds. Vessels bound in pass westward of the low islets and rocks off the
east point of entrance, and anchor northward of an islet on the western side of
the harbour (about a mile from the sea) in 7i fathoms good ground; or, go
further up the inlet into 7 fathoms. There are no known sunken dangers.

Oreen Island. — At about 2 miles S.W. ^ W. from cape Boger, and 2i miles
N. by W. i W. from the west end of Long island is Green island, wliich is one-
third of a mile in extent E.S.E. and W.N.W. and very narrow. It may be safely

BAY DE L'EAU, fto.

spproaolied to a moderate distance, there being a depth of 60 to 70 fathoms in its
immediate vicinity, with the exception of its east and west extremities from each
of which a reef extends about a cable.

UTTXiB 9AL1MWU RABBOVB.— N.N.E. 2^ miles from Oreen island, and
immediately to the westward of Cape Roger harbour, is the inlet known as iiittlii
Gallows harbour. It is of limited extent, and capable of receiving only stiiiiU
vessels, which must moor to the shore. A rock above water lies at its entrance.

OBBAT OAXAOWS BABBOVB. — This harbour is westward of that just
mentioned, and separated from it by a narrow neck of land. In A'ont of it is
Great Gallows island, a high island distant 2^ miles N. i W. from CJreen island,
and forming a good mark for it. Vessels entering can pass on either side of this
inland, and will soon see within, on the starboard shore, a low stony point, to which
a small berth must be given to avoid a rock off its extremity, which is awash or
nearly so at low water. Eastward of this point there is excellent anchorage in
about 7 fathoms water. The outer (western) point of the harbour has a reef ex-
tending from it to almost midway of the channel between it and Great Gallowa
island ; hence vessels sailing westward of that island must keep closer to it 'i in
to the coast.

um* Barbenr. — Little ha^V'ir the first harbour n'estward of thnt of Qi'eat
Gallows, is of very limited extent, and only cepable of receiving boats.

BATkBB X'BAV. — J i./ de I'Eau, immediately to the westward of Little Har-
bour, is a fine inlet in which vessels may anchor in complete shelter from all
winds. It[ has. an extent of about B) miles in a N.E. by E. direction, is nearly
half a mile broad throughout, and has a depth of (id to 2) fathoms, the latter
being off the sandy beach at its extremity.

BOAT BABBOVB. — Boat Harbour, westward of that of Bay de I'Eau, is
equally extensive and commodious. The sea in it is also very deep, until about
half a mile from its head, where is a depth of 7 to 5 fathoms; hence vessels must
ascend it a considerable distance before they get into water sufficiently convenient
for anchorage. There is a rock above water off the point separating the bay
from Bay de I'Eau.

BAMB and BV8BOOH BABBOVBS. — From the head of Boat harbour the
coast trends south-westward 4^ miles te Bane harbeur, a creek of very limited
extent and having a narrow entrance, but an excellent harbour for small craft.
The depth in the channel into it is about 2 fathoms, and within the entrance 3
fathoms. There is room for a vessel to moor. Kushoon, a creek H miles south-
westward from Bane harbour, is more extensive, but useless as an anchorage, as
it is very shallow.

CroiB Island, *e. — The largest and south-easternmost of the islanas in front
of the anchorages now described ia named Cross. It is high, woody, about 2^
miles in length by one in breadth, and is a good mark by which to seek the
anchorages alluded to. Between it and the western shore are tiie several islets
named. Gooseberry, Petticoat, Gull and Jerseyman, of which the first named is
the northernmost and smallest. All these are separated by deep water channels
in which are no known sunken dangers ; hence vessels may use them without
much apprehension, — they may also pass northward of Cross island, the channel
separating its north-eastern end from the coast being at least 70 fathoms deep.

BBOAB OOVB and BBD BABBOVB. — Broad head, a projecting point two
miles south-westward from Rushcon iniot, forms with the coast northward of it
an extensive bay known as Broad cove, in which is a depth of U fathoms on good

. M

-h1

;^ fci

'}f

«4 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

■'■>!■

holding gronnd. And, 9 miles W. by S. from this is Red harbour, an excellent
harbonr of but limited extent, though 17 to 18 fathoms deep ; it is, however, teo
exposed to south-eastward for a Tessvl to seek it except as a temporary stopping
place. Southerly winds, at times, send a very heavy sea upon this coast.

JOBir-TBii-BAT BABBomt.— The inlet known as John-the-Bay is distant
4 miles W.S.W. from Red harbour, and is a very small cove exposed to north-
easterly winds, but having a depth of 7 to 8 fathoms water on moderately good
ground. In front of it are two little islets. In the passage to this inlet from Red
harbonr and in nearly mid-channel between Flat islands and the shore, there is
a cluster of small islands, with deep water all round them ; and, further on (near
the land) is a rook above water, on all sides of which is a navigable channel, that
inside it being 17 fathoms deep. On the east side of this rock there is a depth of
IS to 26 fathoms.

Flat zsianda. — The Flat islands are a group of islands and rooks distant three-
quarters of a mile from the coast of Red harbour, from which they are separated
by a channel 10 to 16 fathoms deep. They occupy a space of about 8 miles, and
the bank upon which they rest is steep, especially on its southern side whence
the lead falls at once into 10 or 20 fathoms water ; consequently, and also because
isolated rocky patches lie off it at various distances, this side of the islands should
be approached only with the utmost care. At the last census the islands had a
population of 220.

auddU Xsiand. — EastWrd of Flat islands about H miles is Middle island, an
island about 2 miles long N.E. i N. and S.W. i S. by H miles in breadth. Its
south point, cape Judas, consists of a rounded hill, almost close to which is a
depth of 8 to 16 fathoms. In the channel between this island and Flat islands,
but nearer the latter, there is a cluster of rocks above and under water ; vessels
sailing through must keep over to the Middle island sh(Nre, but should give it a
good bertli on account of rocks extending from it, — in midway is a depth of 15 to
20 fathoms.

■addle Back. — The Saddle Back is a little islet distant H miles S. i E. from
oape Judas ; 20 miles E. by N. from the lighthouse on Burin island ; and il\
mUes N. by W. I W. from the lighthouse on cape St Mary. A chain of rocks
extends nearly 2 miles from it in a N.E. by E. direotion. In the immediate
vicinity of all these dangers is a depth of about 15 fathoms.

Strangers from southward should approach the Saddle Back and Middle island
with the greatest care it being probable that there are imdiseovered sunken dan-
gers in their vicinity. A rock lies 21 miles W. by N. f N. from the Saddle Back,
and another one mile N.W. by W. from the same islet ; these are both steep,
rising from a depth of about 20 fathoms.

Audieme Island. — Audieme island, half a mile northward of Middle island,
is about li miles in extent and very irregular in form, there being on its western
Bide an extensive creek, which is a moderately good harbour capable of affording
shelter to small vessels. To reach this harbour, the assistance of a pilot appears
to be requisite, although it has been asserted that the cliannel separating Audieme
island from Middle island is safe, and also that vessels may pass between
Crow islet and Patrick islet (two islets off the south-west end of Audierne island).
A sunken rock (a cable from the island, southward of the harbour) may be avoided
by vessels approaching from southward, if they refrain from hauling in for the
harbour till a conspicuous green psint on the south side of the harbour appears
open ; — a spit of rocks, covered at high water, extends a short distance from

ft;*.!:

BAY.

an excellent
lowever, teo
iry stopping
oast.

17 is distant
ed to north-
srately good
et from Red
ore, there is
ler on (near
tiannel, that
s a depth of

stant three-
e separated
I miles, and
ide whence
Iso because
Emds should
lands had a

B island, an
eadth. Its
which is a
lat islands,
»r ; vessels
Id give it a
)th of 15 to

i E. from
I ; and 31}
in of rocks
inunediate

idle island
nken dan-
Idle Back,
>oth steep.

He island,
;s western

alSbrding
>t appears

Audierne

between

le island;.

e avoided
in for the
appears
nee from

MORTIER BAY, «o.

this point. Hie best anchorage is o£f the north shore just within a small island.
' Entering the harbour of Audierne there are two rocks to be passed on the port
hand, one of which is known as the Bread-bux. A stranger should keep in mid-
channel, and steer for the church on an E.S.E. bearing; it is a gooa mark, viuihie
from a considerable dietance.'

rords Island. — The island off the north-east end of Audierne is known tis
Fords island. It is of very limited extent, and we believe tiie channel separating
them is not available for ordinary vessels. A sunken rock is distant about a
cable from its western side, and another lies off its eastern side ; the situation of
each is generally indicated by breakers.

The channel between Fords island and Qreen island, nearly li miles from it
in the direction of E. i N.. is very deep, there being in midway no bottom at 70
fathoms. Green island has been already described.

asOBTBBB BAT. — From the little creek of John-the-Bay tbe coast trends
S. i E. about 2 miles to John-the-Bay point, off which are several rocky islets ;
it then turns sharply W. by S. i S. for about 1} miles to Ruck harbour, and
ghuuld not be closely approached on acccunt of off-lying sunken dangers, — the
must easterly of these is situated about midway between the point and the har-
bour. Rook harbour, although a mile in extent, is available only for boats, being'
full of rocks, many of which are awash (or nearly so) at high water. The en-
trance to Mortier bay is nearly 2 miles W. by S. i S. from Rook harbour.

Mortier bay is a large inlet extending N. by E. } E. 2 miles, with an average
breadth of ratlier more than half a mile, when it widens considerably, opening
into a bay of about 2 miles in extent. In the southern part of this it divides into
two arms, one of which. Little bay, extends Ij miles S. by W., and although 7
fathoms deep at the entrance, is almost everywhere dry at low tide ; fronting it
is a rock under water. The other arm, a mile further to the westward, has at
high water an extent of Oi miles in the direction of W. by S. i S. ; at its entrance
it is 10 to 4 fathoms deep, and it soon becomes too shallow to receive vessels.

Vessels entering Mortier bay should keep over to the western shore to avoid
the rocks above and under water on the east side of the channel. The laud is
high, and the depth in mid-channel is 62 to 70 fathoms. Spanish Room, a cove
on the eastern shore at about 8 miles within the entrance, is an excellent harbour
in which vessels may ancher in 6 to 7 fathoms on good ground sheltered from all
winds ; the only known rocks are on the port hand and are above water, — these
must be passed on their east side, after which the anchor should be dropped in
6i fathoms. There is also good anchorage at the entrance to the western arm.

Boboy Inlet. — On the western shore, j..~t outside the entrauce to Mortier bay,
is Bnboy creek, in which is a depth of nut more than 10 feet. It is cun-
sequently only entered by boats.

The Ceaat. — From Boboy inlet the coast trends S. by W. i W. 2i miles to
point Croney, a bold cliffy headland SOU feet high, and having off it two rucky
islets, the outer of which (known as Croney island ) rises to the height of 160 feet.
Between are two creeks, Duriokle and Tides ; the first at three-quarters of a mile,
the second at half a mile from point Croney, — both are unimportant.

A 6-fathom patch having 8 to 10 fathoms water almost close to it on all sides
lies 1} cables S. by E. i £ from Croney island ; and, another of similar depth
(6 fathoms) lies three-quarters of a mile S. \ W. from the same island, and at
rather more than half a mile S.E. \ S. from Black head, — this is known as the
Black-head rock, and almost closis to its eastern side is a depth of 60 fathoms.

■ *

m CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

The coast from Croney island trends S.W. about 1^ miles to Eastern head,
the noi-th-eastem point of entrance to Little Mortier bay, and is very bold and
cliffy, rising to the height of 300 and 368 feet ; Black head, already alluded to, U
about halfway. The depth at a very moderate distance from this shore is 10
fathoms. Eastern head, 140 feet high, is a narrow point with a sunken ledge
projecting about a cable from it in a south-easterly direction, close to which is a
depth of 10 to 16 fathoms ; off it are two rocks named Jerseyman and Badger,—
the first (U fathoms) at 2 cables S.E. by E. ^ E. from the extremity of t^ie head ;
the second (0 fathoms) at 3 cables S. by E. from the same point.

UTTXA KOBTXBB BAT. — Western head, a bold point 373 feet high, is
distant 1\ miles W. by S. from the extremity of Eastern head ; between these is
Little Mortier bay, in which is a depth of 16 to 6 fathoms, the latter being in
Fox cove at its extremity. This bay is IJ miles in extent in a N. by W. direc-
tion, and a mile wide at its entrance, but it soon contracts to a breadth of 8)
cables. When well within there is shelter from all but southerly winds, and
even thesa are not much felt in Fox cove ; the anchorage has, however, but little
to recommend it, very heavy seas being sent in occasionally and especially when
a strong gale prevails from southward.

Western Island. — In the southei-n pai-t of the entrance to the bay there is an
islet, known as Western island, which is about three- quarters of a cable in extent
and 70 feet high. The depth between it and Western head (the channel is about
two cables wide) is 14 fathoms, rocky bottom. The island is steep on all sides.

Western Roch. — ^Within Western island, about a cable distant in the direction
of N. by E. i E., is the eastern end of a 6-fathom shoal which thence extends
N.N.W. almost to a little islet close to the west shore of the bay. This shoal is
vety steep, there being a depth of 10 fathoms close to its edge, and upon it are
two rocky patches of 3 fathoms and 8 feet water respectively ; it is, consequently
very dangerous to vessels entering the bay through the channel westward of
Western island. In bad weather the sea breaks upon it.

Breahheart Roch. — This rocky patch (SJ fathoms) lies on the north side of the
entrance to the bay, at about a cable from the northern shore and two-thirds of a
mile from the extremity of Eastern head. It is opposite Breakheart point (a
bold cliff 80 feet high, over which is a hill that rises to the height of 3U6 feet) and
close to it on all sides is a depth of 10 fathoms.

Harbour Shoal.— In the middle of the entrance to the bay is the Harbour
shoal, a rocky bank 3^ cables in extent N.W. i N. and S.E. i S., and about
H cables broad. The depth over it is 6 to 8 fathoms, and close to it on all sides
10 to 12 fathoms, except at its south-eastern end where it is 28 to 80 fathoms.
In bad weather there is a very rough sea upon it.

Vessels entering Little Mortier bay from north-eastward should give Eastern
head a wide berth to avoid the sunken rocks extending from it ; and thence, if
the starboard shore be kept on board at the distance of half a cable, they will
pass between Breaklieart rock and the land. Vessels from southward can go
either westward or eastward of Western island ; if the former, they must keep
along the coast at a moderate distance and pass half a cablS eastward of the islet
opposite Breaklieart point, they will thus go between the islet and Western rock
in 8 to 11 fathoms water ; if the latter (and this is much to be preferred) point
Herring-net (the south-eastern point of Fox cove, on the nortliern shore) should
be kept open eastward of Western island about twice the apparent length of that
island, N. i E., and steered for on that bearing until well within the bay,— the
eastern end of Western rook will thus bo safely cleared.

IRON ISLAND AND OUTLYING ROCKS.

«7

Fox cove is about one-third of a mile in extent N.E. and S.W. by a quarter of
a mile in breadth. The anchorage is in 7 fathoms, mud, and the ground Ijiolds
well. Mortier creek, at the head of the bay (on its western side' is half a mile
long, very narrow, and 7 fathoms to 3 feet deep. Small vessels frequent it, giving
the eastern point at the entrance a berth to avoid a sunken rock off it, and moor
to the shore.

The laud in all parts of Little Mortier bay is very bold and cliffy. On its
north-eastern side tlie cliffs are 80 to 100 feet high ; on the opposite coast they
are more lofty, rising to about ISO feet.

The OoMt, *e. — From Western head a high bold coast trends W.S.W. nearly
a mile to a low rocky islet close to the land, and then W. by N. ^ N. about 1^
miles tu a small inlet named Port-au-Bras, passing an open bay known as Gripe
cove. Port-au-Bras is a narrow creek extending three-quarters of a mile N.E.
by E. and haviug a depth of 10 fatlioms in its entrance, which gradually decreases
to 10 feet near its extremity. It affords good shelter from almost all winds, but
is rarely entered, Little Burin harbour, Ship cove and Burin inlet in its im-
mediate vicinity, being more commodious and better sheltered.

Iron Island and Outljrlng Books. — Off the coast just described, and eastward
of Burin island (of which mention will be made subsequently), there are various
rocks more or less dangerous to navigation. These are named Western shoal,
Brandy, Galloper, White-horse, Gregory, Duck, Dodding, and Mortier bank.
Over most of them are breakers in bad weather.

Iron Island. — Iron island (170 feet high) may be readily recognised by its
situation in respect to the coast in its vicinity. It is distant a little more than 1 i miles
S.W. by W. 4 W. from Western head (Little Mortier bay), and 2i miles N.E. by
E. ^ E. from the lighthouse on Burin island. It consists of two islets joined
together by a low beach, and its cliffs are high and steep. Its south part, which
is extremely irregular, has upon it a peak somewhat resembling a turret. At
about half a cable westward from this southern part there is a rock, awash or
nearly so ; and a rock, 6 feet under water, known as the Iron rock, also lies half
a cable S.S.E. i E. from the low beach.

Western Shoal. — The Western shoal, 6 to 9 fathoms, lies 4 cables from and
parallel to the coast in the vicinity of Western head. It is 2^ cables long, one
cable broad, and from its eastern end Western head bears N. by W. i W. distant
nearly half a mile. Tlie depth between it and the land is 17 to 13 fathoms ;
almost close to its seaward edge, 30 fathoms.

Brandy Bocks. — The Brandy rocks, awash at low water and with a depth close
to them on all sides of 12 to 10 fathoms, lie 2 cables from the land, in tlie direc-
tion of N.E. by E. i E. from Iron island, from which it is distant nearly half a
mile. Its situation is always shown by breakers.

Galloper Bock. — The Galloper (0 feet under water, and with a depth of 10
fathoms almost close to it on all sides) lies half a mile from Iron island, with its
liighest part bearing N. W. i W. Between it and the island, at a little more than
a third of a mile from the latter, there is a 6-fathom rock. In bad weather
breakers show the position of each of these rocks. Vessels will keep eastward of
the Galloper and White-horse rocks (see next paragraph) by not approaching
them nearer than when Croney island appears in one with Eastern head, bearing
N.E. ; and northward of them, by bringing the north-east end of Iron island in
[one with Pardy point (the north end of Pardy island) bearing N.W. by W. i W.

White-horse Rock. — This 4} -fathom rock lies 3 cables S.W. ^ S. from the
I Galloper, and a little more than half a le S.E. i S. from the south end of Iroa.

;:;rt-

i^d^y

'■'^'' :

f. ■ '■.-

■ .'ft , *,l

08 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

island, with that point of the island in one with the northernmost of the two
conspicuous white cliffs on the coast south-westward of Port-au-Bras. Vessels
will clear it on the south side hy not approaching it nearer than when the south
end of Iron island is in one with the east point of entrance to Port-au-Bras,
bearing N.N.W. \ W.

Gregory Rock. — The Gregory, 4 cables W. by S. i S. from the western end of
Iron island, is about three-quarters of a cable in extent and 6 feet under water.
Close to it on all sides is a depth of 5 fathoms, which rapidly increases to 10 and
17 fathoms, the latter being at about two cables northward, eastward, and west-
ward of it. From it Western head (Uttle Mortier bay) appears in one with the
west part of Iron island, bearing N.E. by E. i E. ; and Troak point (south
point of Ship cove) is in one with the north end of George island (the islet in Bull
gut, the narrow channel separating Pardy island from Burin island) bearing
W.N.W. J W. In bad weather the position of this rock is usually shown by breakers.

Duck Rock. — The Duck, a 3-fathom rock, lies nearly three-quarters of a mile
S.W. i W. from the west end of Iron island, and Ij miles N.E. by E. f E. from
the lighthouse on Burin island. The depth almost close to it on all sides is 10
to 12 fathoms. From it the north point of Pardy island appears in one with the
northernmost white patch on the coast south-westward of Port-du-Bras, bearing
N. by W. ; and Western head (Little Mortier bay) is seen just open to the right
of Iron island bearing N.^. by E. This rock has hitherto borne the name of
(walloping Andrew, and in the old charts of the coast (Captain Cook's survey) 5
fathoms appears as the least depth over it.

- Dodding Rock. — This dangerous rock (awash at low water) lies nearly 3 cables
from the south-east part of Burin island, with the lighthouse bearing N.W. J W.
It is on a small 5-fathom bank, and between it and Burin island is a depth of 12
to 15 fatlioms ; at 1) cables eastward from it the depth is 20 fathoms, and half a
mile from it in tlie same direction 50 fathoms. The south side of Little Buriu
island brought in one with that of Burin (the lighthouse) island, bearing W. 4 S.,
will clear it on the south side.

Mortier Bank, — The Mortier is believed to be the outermost of the shoals in
the vicinity of Burin liarbours. Its western edge is distant about 6 miles from
Burin lighthouse in the direction of E.S.E., and upon (or just within) it is a
3-fathom rock which lies with the lighthouse bearing W. by N. i N. about 6|
miles. This bank has not been very carefuUj' examined, but it is believed to
have an extent of about Hi miles in the direction of S.E. by E. and to be about
2 miles broad. The least known depth, 7) fathoms, is in almost its centre, and
is distant 8 miles E.S.E. from Burin lighthouse ; in other parts soundings of
of 1(1 to 20 fathoms have been obtained. In bad weather the sea frequently
breaks over the bank, as its edge is steep, rising from 60 or 60 fathoms.

BV&m XB&AHB and Iiiglit, — Burin island is nearly 2k miles long N.E. ) N.
and S.W. ^ S., very in-egular in shape, and naiTow, being only about a quarter of
a mile across, except at its southern end, where it increases in width to nearly
three-quarters of a mile. Its southern part is also the highest, the hill upon
which the lighthouse stands rising to 1(15 feet. Its eastern bide is very bold, the
cliffs in places being 100 feet high, und having a depth of 10 fathoms at a veiy
moderate distance from their base. Some rocks, with others under water near
them, lie off this side of the island at half a mile from its northern end ; and a
rocky islet known as Bartlett rock, is detached from the coast in the vicinity of
the lighthouse. At ii short distance from its south -\ve.steni end there is a small
island. I'^nt'fft liiufhjiiiniodCiit; tli<'(U>pthinthtinaiTo\\ chani el betwoon is 1 fiithonis

BURIN CHANNEL

The lighthouse on Dodding head, at the aouMiern end of Burin island, is a
circular building 25 feet high, which exhibits its light (revolving every 20 sebonds)
at 430 feet above the sea, visible 27 miles. Its geographical position is lat.
47" 0' 26" N. long. 55' 8' 43" W.

Cookie Rock. — The south-eastern side of Cat island should not be closely
approached because a rocky ledge extends from it nearly a cable: an^, it is
equally necessary to give a mde berth to its south-western end, on account of the
Cockle rock (a small patch of 3 fathoms), wiiich lies 2 cables S.W. i S. from the
island. The depth in the channel between the island and the rock is 8 to 10
fathoms, and at a very short distance southward and eastward of the rock 25 to
30 fathoms ; hence the greatest care is required to avoid it, particularly when
bound to Burin inlet from eastward, — its western side should not be approached
nearer than when the south points of Woody and Shalloway islands (both in the
entrance to the inlet) appear in one, bearing N. \ W. In bad weather the
position of the rock is generally shown by breakers.

Pardy Zaland, *e. — Pardy island, northward of Burin island, may be con-
sidered a continuation of that island, as it is separated from it by only a narrow
channel 4 to 6 feet deep, known by the name of Bull gut. It is irregular in formi
nearly two-thirds of a mile long N.E. and S.W., and three cables broad in its
\videst part. Its northern end (not the highest part) rises to the height of 200
feet; at this end there is a small island (Charlie island) a short distance off and
connected to its northern side by a bank dry at low water. George island (on
the south-west side of Bull gut) is in like manner connected to Burin island.

Staalloway Zaland, *o. — The large island off the south-west side of Burm
island, half a mile northward from Cat island, is named Shalloway. It is half a
mile long East and West, two to three cables broad, and 320 feet high. Its
middle is lower than its two ends, and it is cliffy in almost every part. Between
it and Burin island there is an island, and a bank (dry or nearly so at low water)
connects them both with that island but in such a manner that at the north-east
end of Shalloway island it forms with the two islands (Shalloway and Burin) a
email bay, known as Great Burin, wherein is a depth of 13 to 3} fathoms ; access
to this bay can only be obtained from the channel on the west side of Burin
island, or from Burin inlet. Shag rock, the large isolated rock off the south side
of Shalloway, has off its seaward side, at a very moderate distance, a depth of '.)
to 12 fathoms.

BVBZir CHAiriniL. — The channel separating Shalloway. Burin an<l Pardy
islands from the narrow but irregularly formed peninsula that bounds the outer
part of liurin inlet on its eastern side, is known by the name of Burin channel.
The land on each side of it is bold, and the channel is not more than two cables
broad in places, although at its northern end, where are situated the principal
anchorages sheltered by the islands (Ship cove and Little Burin liurbour) its
width is considerably greater. The depth throughout is seldom less than 17
fathoms, and there are few sunken rocks that need be feared by a careful seaman.
Neck point, the southern extremity of the peninsula, is only two cables northward
of the east end of Shalloway island ; the depth in midway between is about 17
fathoms. The following are the rocks against which precaution has to be taken,
namely : — Poor, Mine, Oven, and Hooper ; these are all in the southern approach
to Ship cove and Little Burin harbour.

Poor Islet and Rock. — At about 2i cables westward from Neck point, on the
northern side of the southern entrance to Burin channel is Poor islc't, a simill

■■•;■'■

100 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT-PLACENTIA BAY;

idet of moderate elevation and steep sides, and with a reef extending from it a
cable in the direction of W. by S. ; the channel between is not siife, on account
of the foul ground that juts off from the west side of the point. Poor rock. 12
feet under water, lies 1^ cables West from the islet, and has a depth of 4 to 6
fathoms close to it, which in a westerly direction rapidly increases to 19 fathoms.

Mine Rook. — The Mine (10 feet under water) lies on the eastern side of Burin
channel at 1-^^ miles from Shalloway head, the western point of Shalloway island.
In the narrow channel between it and Burin island the depth is 8} fathoms. From
it, the west point of Little Burin island appears just open of Neck point, bearing
W.S.W. ; and the island eastward of Shalloway is almost wholly concealed by the
west point of Burin island ; — the west part of Pardy island (beyond Hooper penin-
sula) is also just hidden by a small projecting point of Burin island, 3 cables
southward of the peninsula.

Oven Book. — The Qven, 4} feet under water, lies 2 cables N.E. ^ N. from the
Mine rock, and is also separated from Burin island by a narrow navigable
channel. There are no good marks for it. Vessels sailing through the channel
should keep over to the western shore ; Neck point touching the west end of
Shalloway island clears it on its west side.

Hooper Roeh. — The Hooper, similar to the two last mentioned rocks, is on the
eastern side of Burin channel. It is 9 feet under water, and lies about a cable
W.' by S. i S. from the w^st end of Hooper peninsula. Although it may be
passed on all sides, it will be prudent to keep over to the western side of the
channel when bound to or from Ship cove or Little Burin harbour. There is no
good mark for this rock.

■blp OoTe, on the western side of Burin channel, 1^ miles from Shalloway
island, is about 3^ cables in extent and 16 to 3^ fathoms deep, the latter being
almost close to the shore at its head. The bottom is of mud and holdE' veil ; th'
shelter is also excellent. It is usual to anchor in 10 fathoms water at 1^ cables
from the western shore. Troak point, its south point of entrance, is foul to the
distance of a quarter of a cable.

unie awrtn Barbour. — Little Burin harbour, north-eastward of Ship cove, is
about half a mile in extent, and has in its entrance two islands which form
with the land three channels, only one of which is navigable, namely,
that between the islands. The southern island, Simmons, is 140 feet high ; the
other, Jersey, is of small dimensions and very moderate elevation. The depth in
the channel is 8 fathoms, but as there is a 7 -foot rock near Jersey island, vessels
entering the harbour must keep nearer to Simmons than Jersey.

The depth throughout Little Burin harbour is to 7 fathoms, mud, on good
ground. In its eastern part are several islets, and its shore forms some creeks in
which vessels lie moored to the Ian d. Many fishing establishments are in this harbour.

Vessels approaching Little Burin harbour from eastward, through tlie
channel northward of Pardy island, will clear the Brandy and other rocks
by following the instructions already given. The coast westward of Port-
au-Bras rises to the height of 200 to 360 feet, and is cliffy. At a quarter
of a mile from the port are the two .onspicuous wliite patches in the
cliffs, to which allusion has already been made, and nearly half a mile further is
Jersey island at the entrance to Little Burin harbour. The north end of Pardy
is steep, a depth of 10 fatlioms being found at a very moderate distance from it ;
Charlie island (westward froM and connected to it by a shoal dry at low water) is
also steep. Arrived at Charlie island, Little Buiin harbour can be easily steered

ir^'f

BURIN INLET.

101

{nr, as it lies almost opposite ; or, Ship oove can be reached with equal facility.
There are nu known sunken dangers in the channel to impede navigatioii^

Vessels approaching the harbour from south-westward through Burin channel,
must have a favourable wind, otherwise the channel just mentioned should be
followed (there being room to tack eastward of Burin island, while tho channel
westward of the island is too narrow for long boards). They will clear the Cookie
rock (off tho south-west side of Cat island) by keeping the western extremes of
Woody and Shalloway islands in one, as already observed. The channel may be
steered for with Woody island in sight, bearing N. i E. until Neck point appears
well open of Shalloway island, E.N.E., when the course should be changed to the
latter bearing. Shalloway island may be approached as near as a cable, its shore
being bold and clear of any known sunken danger. If intending to anchor in the
bay of Great Burin (immediately eastward of Shalloway island) give the shore of
Shalloway a berth of three quarters of a cable, steering S.E. until in 14
fathoms water; care is required not to go too far in, as it rapidly becomes
shallow, — it should be considered only a temporary stopping place. The channel
will now appear open through its entire length, and may be ascended in mid-way, ,
although it will be more prudent to keep nearer to the main land than to Burin
island, on account of the Mine, Oven and Hooper rocks, of which mention has
already been made. The depth is 13 to 23 fathoms, and the land on each side
in cliffy. Ship cove is 1} miles from Shalloway island, and half a mile further is
Little Burin harbour. The scattered population of these harbours, of Burin and
Shalloway iRlands, &e., amounts probably to 2500.

It is high water at Little Burin harbour at Mh. 46m. ; springs rise (ii feet, neaps
4^ feet.

BURUr.ziruBT. — Burin inlet, westward of the peninsula forming the west
side of Burin channel, is about 5 miles in extent trending N.N.E., and where
narrowest about a quarter of a mile wide. The shore on each side of it is
1,'euerally steep, but in its upper part a shoal (nearly dry at low water)
extends from the eastern shore almost to the opposite coast, leaving however a
channel 5 fathoms deep. The depth throughout is considerable, and anchorage
can be obtair<'d in nearly every part. The shelter is also excellent, and riding
amy if ordinary judgment be exercised in selecting a spot free from the swell
occasionally sent in by south-westerly winds.

Woody Inlet. — Woody islet, in the entrance to Burin inlet, is 1 cables in
extent and 100 feet high. At about half a cable from its south side (the channel
is not safe being probably less than 12 feet deep) there is a large rock, known as
the Shag rock, almost close to the seaward side of which is a depth of 17 to 19
fathoms.

Vessels bound into Burin inlet may pass on either side of Woody island, each
channel being 10 to 12 fathoms deep, and the shores bold and safe to approach to
a moderate distance excepting just within the entrance on the eastern side
where, at nearly a quarter of a mile from the island, a bank (covered at three-
quarters ilood) extends from the land half a cable and has close off it a depth of
^i to 10 fathoms ; hence i(^ becomes necessary in th's part to keep more over to the
western than than the eastern shore. The course thence up the inlet is equi-
ilistaut between each shore until past Spoon point (western shore) when the breadth
of the inlet becomes almost double what it has hitherto been, and a rock (awash or
near so), named Stag, presents itself in mid-channel; this may be passed on all
sides, but us tlierc are other sunken rocks off the laud south-eastward from it,

lOa CAPE ST. MART TO DANZIG POINT— PLACENTIA BAY.

\ •*.

k: ^

the western channel is to be prererred. In Back cove (on the eastern side of the
inlet 2^ miles from Woody island) vessels can ride in 6 to 7 fathoms water ;
jmd, above this are several plnces where a depth can be found equally con-
venient for anchorage. Sugar-loaf island, a little more than half a milW from
Back cove, is 145 feet high : the channel eastward of it is only 3 feet deep, and
consequently, only suitable for boats.

atntnr bat. — The sea exterior to Burin inlet, that part which is included
between Little Bnrin island (subsequently mentioned), Shalloway island ^nd the
coast, is known under the general name of Burin bay. This coast, 300 to 360
feet high and cli£^, forms by its irregularity two coves of little importance, named
Loap (Wolf) and Eau (Water), in each of which small vessels can anchor in 6 to

8 fathoms while the wind is from the land, — the greater part of the last-mentioned
cove is very shallow.

' In Whale cove (at the end of the peninsula northward of Shalloway island)
the depth is 10 to 4 fathoms, and the anchorage moderately good; vessels
entering it should go westward of the Poor rock (12 feet under water), which they
may do by keeping Shag rock (off the southern end of Woody island) open to the
right of that island, until Poor island is in one with Neck point, — the course into
the cove is then E.N.E.

Vessels anchor in Burin bay only temporarily, or during fine weather, the near
neighbourhood of Burin channel and Burin inlet (both good harbours and easily
accessible from the bay) causing them to be at once run for when a change of
wind to South or S.£. occurs ; with other winds there is not much danger, unless
they prevail with extraordinary violence.

urn* Bnrln Island. — Little Burin island, 1^ miles W.S.W. from Shalloway
island, is one-third of a mile in extent and 200 feet high. Its coast is cliffy, dear
of any known outlying dangers, and has off it at a very moderate distance a depth
of about 10 fathoms. The channel between it and the land is two cables wide and

9 fathoms deep. When viewed from south-eastward it is not easy to distinguish
this island from the land behind it, as the coast of the main land is very bold
and cliffy, rising to the height of 300 and 3(55 feet.

Emherly Rock. — A 4-fathom rock has been discovered at a little more than
half a mile S. by E. from the east end of Little Burin island. From it Cat
island bears E. by N. f N. distant 1^ miles. It is known as the Emherly rock,
and close to it on all sides is a depth of 15 to 20 fathoms.

Odrbln Island. — AV.S.W. three-quarters of a mile from Little Burin island is
Corbin island, which is 4 cables long N.N.E. and S.S.W. by IJ cables wide at its
southern end, its broadest and highest part, where it rises in the form of a rounded
hill to the height of 25() feet. It is a bold cliffy island, clear of sunken rocks
beyond the distance of half a cable. The channel between it and the land is a
quarter of a mile broad, and to 12 fathoms deep.

Th« Oeaat. — The land within Little Burin and Corbin islands trends S.W. by
W. f W. and is very bold, rising to the height of 300 to 370 feet ; off it are no
known sunken dangers, hence it may be approached to a moderate distance.
Opposite Corbin island is Silver cove, the outlet of a small stream ; and, half a
mile further to the westward is Back cove, also an exposed anchorage. The land
over the latter is 315 feet high.

COBanr babbovb. — Long point, the south point of Back cove, is the north
point of entrance to Corbin harbour : it is a bold projection, with 6 fathoms
water almost close to its base, and from it the south end of Corbin island bears

THE COAST.

10.T

£. ^ S. distant a little more than a mile. MiUer head, the south point of tlie
harbour, S.W. i S. a quarter of a mile from it, is also held, and has extending
from it a quarter of a mile in' a south-easterly direction a bank of 3) to 54 falthoma,
upon which are rocks dangerous to navigation ; these, as f&r as half a cable east-
ward from the ;Poiiit,' are awash or nearly so, — and at H cables S.E. by E. ^ E.
from the point is a 2 i -fathom patch, known as the Miller rock. From 3i fathoms
on the south-eastern edge of this land the lead drops almost immediately into 15
or 18 fathoms water. The land forming Miller point is 250 feet high.

Old Harry Book.—Oixtaia the harbour is a bank a cable in extent, named
Old Harry, upon which is a depth of 2i £Eithoms, and near it on all sides 6 to 10
fathoms. This bank is very dangerous even to small vessels, there being on its
uorthem end a rock, awash or nearly so .at low water. From this, rock Long
point beara N.W. i W. distant a quarter of a mile ; the highest part of Corbin
island E. by N. (northerly) nearly a mile ; and Corbin head S.W. about the same
distance : — its position is frequently shown by breakers.

CorbiA harbour is about a quarter of a mile in extent and 12 to 4 fathoms
deep, the hitter being in Herring cove in the western pai-t of the bay. As it is
exposed to tlie full strength of easterly winds, which frequently send in . a very
lieavy sea, it is nut considered a safe anchorage. On the west side of Long point
is a narrow part of the harbour extending northward nearly half a mile to an
island at the eutnince of a lake ; this part is tS to 2 fathoms deep, and small
vessels anchor iu it, in 3^ fathoms, opposite Swolho cove (on the starboard side,
at a quaiter of a mile from the entrance), and escape iu some measure the in-,
convenience occasioned by the winds alluded to.

Til* Coast. — From Miller head the coast trends S.8.W. about two-tliirds of a
mile to Corbin head, and is bold with two detached ntuks. Corbin head is a lofty
headland rising to the height oi 180 feet, and with 10 fathoms water almost dose
to its base. The coast now turns sharply to West, and at the distance of nearly
half a mile we meet with Red head, another bold point 200 feet high ; from tliis
head a reef, awash or nearly so, extends a cable in the du-ectiou of South, and is
immediately succeeded by a depth of 10 to 15 fathoms, — hence it is extremely dan-
gerous to vessels getting close iu with the land. Between Corbin head and Red
head is Devil's cove, li cables in extent and exposed to south-easterly winds. In
front of it there is a rock tt feet under water, and having close to it on all sides a
depth of U to 10 fathoms ; tliis rock is 1^ cables from tiie nearest shore, and from
it Corbin head appears in one with the coast inside Ijittle Burin island, bearing
N.E. ^ E. To clear this rock and also the reef extending from Red head, the
land should not be approached nearer than when the north end of Corbin island
is in one with the coast just mentioned, bearing N.E. ^ E. ; Corbin head will
then be passed at the distance of a quarter of a mile, — a larger offing is desirable.

Small point, 2^ miles W. by S. i S. from Corbin head, is the lowest land on this
part of the coast. Off it in the direction of W. by S. 1 S., and distant 3i cables,
is the Bass rock, 20 feet under water. As there may be undiscovered dangers in
tlie vicinity of this point, it will be prudent to (.nve it a wide berth.

Sauker rock, 2 miles West from Small point, is a lofty hill of sugar-loaf form,
and similar to the latter point should be very carefully approached. Two sunken
rocks are known to exist off it, of which the outer (:U fathoms under water) is so
far out as a quarter of a mile in the direction of S. by £. } E. A rock (or two
rocks), awash or nearly so, lies off the south-west side of the head, near the land ;
and it has been asserted that thera is also a 8^-fathoui rock (the Sculpin) at
about two-thirds of a mile N.W. by W. I W. from the point.

-J, -it;
•J

104 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG POINT-PLACENTIA BAY.

From Saukcr point to capo Chnpoaii Rnii;:re the bearing and distaiioo are
W.N.W. i W. 'M miles. Between are the two inlets known as the St. Luwrenoe
harboiifR.

UTTUB ST. i.AW»airoii BABSOtni.— Liltle St. Lawrence harbonr, 3
miles westward from Saiiker heud. i» 2 miles in extent N. k W. and about half a
mile broad, its shores are steep, and clear of any known sunken rooks beyond
half a oable ; the land also on oaiih side is high— Blomedon hill on its western
side, three quarters of a hiile from the sea rises to the height of 420 feet,^hence
it is well sheltered from all winds except fh)m South. At 1^ miles within, a
peninsula 55 feet high juts ofT from the eastern shore and narrows the channel
to little more than a oable. The anchorage is northward of this peninsula, in 4|
fathoms, and is almost landlocked. In other parts of the harbour the depth is Hi
to 6 fiathoms, tlie latter being in the immediate vioinit}' of the peninsula.

Vessels seeking the anchorage may steer up in midway until past BlomMon
hill, when they should keep nearer the western than the eastern shore, the channel
to the anchorage being westward of the peninsula. Care is required to avoid a
rook, awash or nearly so, in nearly midchannel, at about three-quarters of a cable
8.S.W. from the south end of tlie peninsula — the depth northward of it is 4
fathoms, southward of it B fathoms — after passing which there is nothing in the
way and the general depth is 8| to 6 fathoms. At the anchorage the bottom,
consisting of mud and sand, holds well.

Oard^H Bank, do. — Outside the entrance to Little St. Lawrence harbour, and
off Middle point (the extremity of the land separating it from Oreat St. Lawrence
harbour) there are three rocks named Garden, Butler, and Point, each with a
considerable depth of water in its immediate vicinity. Oardtn bank (U fathoms)
lies half a mile S.W. \ S. from Scnlpin point, and \\ miles E.S.E. from cape
Chapeau Rouge; Butler rock (5 fathoms) is distant (5i cables W. by S. from
Sculpin point, and a quarter of a mile South from Middle head ; Point rook (4
fathoms) is 2 cables S.W. I.W. from Middle point, and two-thirds of a mile
E. i S. from cape Chapeau Rouge. An 8-fathom rook also lies in the entrance
to (ireat St. Lawrence harbour M'ith the extremity of cape Chapeau Rouge
bearing N.E. by E. \ E. distant half a mile ; the depth close to it is about 18
fathoms.

OBSAT ST. lUlWBimoil BABBOVB.— This harbour, between Middle point
and cape Chapeau Rouge, is half a mUe wide at the entrance, which is niuiutaiued
for nearly \\ miles, when it narrows to about one-third of a mile, and thence
gradually decreases in width to 1} cables at its head. Its length is 2^ miles, and
its general directiuu is in a curve to the N. i W. The depth in the middle
of the entrance is 21 to 17 fathoms, and near Shingle point (almost at its ex-
tremity) 6 to 41 fathoms, and no kuo^^'n sunken dangers exist beyond a cable from
the land. Vessels at anchor in it ride securely, being sheltered from all winds
except from southward ; these usually send in a heavy sea.

The locality of Great St. Lawrence harbour is easily recognised by mount
Chapeau Rouge on the south side of its entrance which rises to the height of 748
feet, is higher than any part of the coast east and west of it, and visible in clear
wejither at the distance of 30 miles. Cape Chapeau Rouge is very bold, with
clilTs 300 feet high, and almost close to its extremity is a depth of 17 fathoms ;
tlie islet forming Ferryland head, 1;^ miles W.S.W. from the capi^ is uii additional
means of ieco<j;nition, as it is vory hold and 100 feet high ; thoiv is nlso a little
while clili' on .Midillc lieud, cast side of the harbour. When buekiug this

LAUN HAY.

10ft

nnchoraj^o, it is recommended to give the cape a wide berth, especially with
westerly and south-westerly windu, on account of the violent gusta and eddies
that then descend from the mountain.

The course up Oreat St. Lawrence harbour is N.N.W. until Calipouse hill (on
the eastern shore, close to the sea, and 206 feet high) bears E.N.E., when it
should be changed to N.N.E. | E. to Herring cove (also on the starboard side)
where is the usual anchorage in from 6 to 10 fathoms, mud. Small Vessels
proceed further up the harbour and anchor off the village in to H feet water,
under shelter of Shingle point, the low spit that extends horn the western shore
at the head of the bay; here they are protected from almost all winds.

The houses of the inhabitants of this harbour are scattered along its shore, and
principally within Shingle spit. Of the two churches, the geographical position
of the easternmost (the Episcopalian) is lat. 46° 56' iH" N., long. 66° 22' 58" W.
It is high water here, full and change, at Hh. 80m. ; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 1
feet.*

Th« Oeaat. — The rocky coast south-westward of the point of cape Chapeau
Rouge is very irregtilar in outline, and should not be closely approached because
of the Rosey rock (12 feet under water, and a cable or more from the land),
situated nearly three-quarters of a mile from the cape, and almost midway
between it and Ferryland head. Ferryland head has been already described as
a bold islet 100 feet high ; off its south side there is a detached rock. The depth
close to the seaward edge of the Kosey rock is 10 fathoms.

UkJUK BAT. — From Ferryland head an irregular rocky coast trends 4 miles
N.W. by W. I W. to Laun head, the eastern point of a bay 6 miles in extent
W.N.W. and E.S.E. and about 4 miles deep. lu this bay are two harbours,
Little and Oreat Laun ; the former is iu its north-east comer, and although it
has 7 to 3 fathoms water is not considered a good anchorage, being open to south-
westerly winds (those most frequently experienced on this coast) and the ground
not holding particularly well.

Great Laun harbour, in the north-west corner of the bay, is about S miles in
extent in the direction of N.N.E. , and averages half a mile in width. In depth it
graduiiUy decreases from 14 fathoms at the entrance to 6 fathoms near its head ;
lieucu it is sufficiently convenient for all ordinary vessels. The host anchorage
is un its eastern side at about half a mile firom Black point (its eastern point), iu
U to ii fathoms tolerably good bottom, but exposed tu winds from South and S.
by W. wliich frequently send in a lieavy sea. At the head of the harbour there
is a barred harbour into which boats can enter at lialf tide, and find conveniences
for iishing, also wood and water.

Outside Great Laun harbour there is a rock 6 feet under water, known as the
Ragged rock, close to which is a depth of 15 to 17 fatliums. As this danger lies
about a quarter of a mile S.S.W. i W. from Black point, and almost in front of
the entrance to the harbour, care is required to avoid it.

Ou the western side of Laun bay are the Lauu islands, bold and rocky, and
I conspicuous by their dark appearance. The westernmost and most to seaward

'4'

•.-• 1

:t:../-!,.^

* Vessels apinoacliiut; Great St. Lawrence harbour from soutliward may pass over the
Clour bunk, a Buiall 10-ltithom shoal 8i miles 8. 1 E. from cape Ohapeau Itouge. The
t^t'u oil all sides of it i^ vuiy deep ; bctweLii it and the cape the dupth is as much au
iU lu 52 fathoms.

""BBP

■,^ * V mm

'l*.\

>■>•' ■

■. *'

;"-■•

, *' \

. •

• I. .

f
h'-

K *<

106 CAPE ST. MARY TO DANZIG I'OINT-l'LACENTIA HAY.

of these idleti (distant 10) miles W.N.W. from Ferr} land head) has off it in a
S.S.W. direction about a quarter of a mile, a sunken rook over which thu Htia
breakc ; close to the seaward side of this danger the depth is 18 to 3fi fnthunii,
consequently the island must be approached with caution. In the vicinity of and
among these islands there are other sunken rocks, but being near the coast they
are not impediments to navigation.

Taylor Bay. — From the west point of Laun bay the coast trends ii mil«i
W.N.W. i W. to the east point of Taylor bay, off wliich a reef extendu about a
quarter of a mile. Point Uauls, the west point of this bay (a low, narrow
rocky projection) bears from it West distant 2 miles, and hu8 off it several l-ock^*,
the outermost of which (the Shag) is above water and lias clutw to its seawHid
aide a depth of IS to 15 fathoms. Tiie bay is open to southerly winiLs. and is a
dangerous anchorage.

lamella lalanAs. — Point (lauls is the enstern point of a buy of no groat depth,
but which extends along the coast about 3) miles, and is unlit for tlie reception of
ordinary vessels, there being in many parts of it less tluin ;) fathoms water : in it
are also many islets and rocks, behind which small Ushing craft occasionally
anchor. In the western part of this bay are the two Laraelin islands, Allan iiiul
Morgan, of which the former (the easternmost) is almost connected to the shore Ht
low water by a long narrow neck of low land. The channel separating tlivse two
low islands is 3 cables wide and to 3 fathoms deep, and forms a secure harbour
except with soutlierly wirids ; it is not difficult of access, but care is required tu
avoid a rock 10 feet under water in about midway of the entrance, the situntiim
of which is generally shown by breakers, — having cleared this the anchorage is
in A\ fathoms, hard sand, at about three-quarters of a mile within the harbour.
The depth on all sides of the sunken rook, in its close proximity, is 5 to 7
fathoms.

At about 2 cables southward of Morgan island there is a moderately high rock,
known as the Lamelin sock ; and a rock 8 to 10 feet under water lies 1\ chIiIua
S.W. from this. — as the latter danger is stcep-to, and this part of the coast hits
not been very carefully examined, a wide bertli should be given to the Jjanieliii
islands. It is high water here, full and change, at Uh. luni. ; springs rise Hi feet.

Tylor Rook. — S. by W. J W. 4^ miles from Lamelin harbour is a small rocky
patch of 11 fathoms water, known as Tylor rock. Tlie depth in its immediate
vicinity is about 40 fathoms, and between it and the coast 27 fathoms.

lAneUa X««fk. — From the Lamelin islands a low coast follows to point May
(about 8 miles in the direction of N.W. 1 N.) and is dangerou to approach on
acccount of off-lying rocks, some of which are 3 miles from the laud. . These
rocks are generally steep-to, and require the utmost care to avoid. It haS' been
recommended to maintain a depth of not less than 30 fathoms when in their
vicinity, but we suspect a vessel even in that depth will nut give them a snfficieut
berth. They have been only imperfectly surveyed.

To clear Lamelin islands and reefs, and all dangers off tlie coast between cape
Chapeaa Rouge and point May, vessels should steer N.W. by W. } W. at the
distance of 3 miles from the land, until point May bears N.£. by N. when the
course may be changed to N. \ E. to pass midway between that point and \''erte
(Green) island.

rolat Kay.— Point May is in lat. 46° 65' N., long. 55° 58' W. and is easily
recognised by a great black rock, nearly joining t« the pitch of the point, and
somewhat higher than the land, which makes it look like a black hummock on

DANZIG POINT AND COVKS.

lOT

the point. OfT it. at about a quarter of ii mile, is a cluster of lunkeii rooks, over
which the son hreiikn ; near this is deep water. ,

DuiBlc Voint and Oovm,— From Point Ma}' the coast trends N.>I.^]. ) E. 41
miles to i))iii/i]L{ point, and is of moderate height, barren and Hteep. It is of
irregular outline and contains two bays or coves, in which is a depth of 5 tu
8 fathoms, but as they are open to westerly winds and afford no shelter, vessels
seldom enter them. Danxij; point is the soutliern boundary of Fortune bay.

Xote. — Of tiie coast described in the last tew paragraphs it nhould be observed
that westward of cape Chapeau Rouge it gradually decreases in altitude. Between
tliat cape niid Laun bay it is mountainous to the sea ; thence to Lamelin bay it
is of moderate height ; and from that bay to point May (the most dangerous part)
it is low with sandy beaches, whence it gradually rises to mountainous land
in the interior. , . '

Wlion approaching cape Chapeau Rouge from S.E. or S.S.E. in clear weather,
a mountain having a pointed summit will bo seen to the right of it ; it is in the
interior and N. 16° E. (true) from it. j^nd. when southward of Taj'lor bay three
peaked hills (3 miles inland) are di» iiutly visible; these disappear as the
observer passes southward of Lamelin islands, but come again into view on an
K. i N. bearing.

ST. PIERRE, LANGLADE, MIQUELON, BRUNET

AND SAGONA ISLANDS, &c.

. * M

■ .■'

'".

)■

♦ •'

•#

>-J

j'M

.■•'•

■■*•!

•; 4,.a

ST. MBRBB.— The island of St. Pierre, 33 miles W.N.W. i \V. from cape
Chapeau Rouge, is about 4^ miles in extent N.E. ^ E. and S.W. i W. and 3
miles across in its widest part, its southern end. It is barren in the extreme,
consisting of a mass of rocky hummocks which rises directly from the sea, iu
some parts to the height of 400 pr 000 feet; its highest part is at its northern
end, where at half a mile from the western coast it attains an altitude of 671 feet.
The hilly surface of this island renders it easily distinguishable by a distant
observer from the island of Langlade, to the north-westward, which is almost
level. In clear weather it can be seen at the distance of 30 miles. When
viewed from eastward, a high steep rocky islet (the Grand Oolombier) stands out
from its northern end, and is very conspicuous ; at the same time Galantry head
(ill the south-east part of the island, and 186 feet high) will be recognised by the
lighthouse on its summit. Viewed from south-westward, Gulantry head appears
to the right of the high land of the island ; while to the left of it is seen Lang-
lade, with its almost flat surface.

Ught.— The lighthouse on Galantry head shows a fixed light {flashing every
20 seconds) at 210 feet above the sea, visible 20 miles from all parts southward
and eastward of the island ; northward of it, high land hides it from view. It
shows on«^ red and two white flashes. The tower is almost square, 36 feet high,

108 ST. PIERRE, LANGLADE, MIQUELON, & BRUNET ISLAND, &c.

and painted white; its geographical position is considered is to be lat.
46° 45' 30"-36 N., long., 66° 9' »"-4 W.* During fog two guns are fired every
two hours at an interval of 3 minutes ; and a cannon also, in answer to a cannon
fired by a vessel signalling for position, but only till sunset. It is reported that
in very cold weather the light bums badly owing to the oil freezing.

The southern part of St. Pierre, of which Chdantry head (being the highest) is
the most prominent, is much lower than other portions of the island. It is also
off this and the eastern coast, that the chief dangers in the vicinity of t'he island
are to be found ; these are so numerous and difficult to be understood without an
inspection of the chart that a particular description of them is almost useless,
we content ourselves therefore by referring the reader to the Admiralty chart
No. 303 in which they are all accurately shown. This chart is a copy of the
French survey published in 1843. The position of most of the rocks is generally
indicated by breakers in bad weather.

St. Plerro Baurbonr. — The harbour of St. Pierre is on the eastern side of the
island, and limited in extent, but is fairly sheltered from all but easterly winds.
In front of it is Cliien (Dog) island, and eastward of tliis are Pigeon and Vain-
queur islands with numerous rocks above and under water ; these islands are of
moderate height, but little exceeding 100 feet, and are all higher at their northern
tliar at their southern extremity. Cape Chevre, the north end of Vainqueur
island, is bold, having an elevation of 102 feet ; it must not, however, be closely
approached, especially in hazy weather, on account of the rocks in its vicinity,

LiyhtH. — A smail fixed light, shown on the rocks oflf point Canon (on the north
side of the inner harbour) at about 36 feet above the sea, illuminates an arc of 270°
and is visible at the distance of 6 miles. At nearly half a mile from this in the
direction of N.W. there is & fixed red light, which is visible about 5 miles. These,
%Yhen in (me, form the leading mark through South channel.

The usual anchorage in the roadstead, northward of the town, is in 6 to 8
fathoms, sand and grey mud of moderate tenacity, and much inconvenience is
sometimes occasioned by strong north-easterly winds sending in a heavy sea.
Small vessels of about 11 feet draught also anchor in the inner harbour, southward
of the town, in 24 to 3J fathoms, but can enter only at high tide, access to it being
acioss a bar of 4 to 6 feet water that extends from the rocks of point Canon to
those surrounding Monies islet ; the ground here is not very good, but the sea is
tjelilom so rough that if the vessel touches the bottom much damage ensues.

South Channel. — The southern channel into the harbour (between Galantry
head and Chien island) is 4 cables wide, but the navigable portion is rendered
very narrow by a bank of 7 to 16 feet water extending 1^ cables from Chien
island, and by another that extends more than two cables from Bertrand point
(the south shore) and has upon it a ledge, awash or nearly so at low tide, known
as the Bertraud rocks, — on the most seaward part of this ledge there is a beacon,
painted white with a black band, which is sufficiently conspicuous to be visible at
the distance of 6 miles, and is consequently a good mark for the channel. The
depth midway between these two banks is 16 to 21 feet.f

* Dopeudent upon the position of Massacre island (harbour of St. Pierre) adopted by
Admiral 01ou6 of the French Navy (Seo the Pilots de Terre-Neuvc, «d. 1869;— lat.
46° 46' 46" N., long. 56° 9' 12"-3 W. In the French official list of Lights 1872 [Serie E)
the position given is lat. 46° 46' 3" N., long. 56° 9' 7" W.

t A small rocky patch, 12 feet under water at low tide, ha^ recently been dlacovcred in
the middle of the channel. The bearings given for it were, the two liglits of the harbout
iu one, and Galantry li^htliouiie in ouu witii tlu^ iimnr Lh-rtrund rock, S 3° W. {true.)

ST. PIERRE HARBOUR.

low

Arrived at the entrance to the channel, the two beacons northward of the town
ghould be brought in one, bearing N. by W. 1 W., — one of these is on the shore,
the other upon a large white rock a cable from the sea — and that mark stnctly
followed until the beacon on the hill at the back of the inner harbour (the Vigie
d'Aigremont) comes in one with the lighthouse on point Canon, S.W. by W.
when the course must be changed and the last mark followed, as it will lead to
the anchorage westward of Chien island. Or, the two lights of the harbour may
be brought into one N.W., and kept so until Massacre islet (ofiT the west side of
Chien island) appears open of that island, when the two iirst mentioned beacons
will come into one as before ; this mark should then be followed until tlie road-
stead is attained as just directed. ■•<

When tacking in the roadstead, the bay of Rodi-igue (immediately northward of
the town) must not be entered, because it contains two dangerous sunken rocky
patches of 3 and 1} feet respectively. The outermost of these is just southward
of the line of the two beacons in one, N. by W. i W., and is a little more than a
cable from the shore ; it is known as the Zoe bank.

North Channel. — This channel is wide and easy of access. Approaching firoin
eastward, all the rocks and rocky patches eastward of Chien and Vainqueur
islands may be avoided by keeping cape Perce (Langlade) open of Petit
Colombier, bearing N. by W. J W. ; or, from southward, point Blanche in one
with Chasseurs islet at Galantry head, bearing W. ^ N., will also lead clear of
them. The outermost visible rock, the Enfant Perdu, is very little above the
surface at high water, — perhaps not more than 3 feet ; 3i cables E. ^ N. from
this there is a rock 4i feet under water, which lies witJi the Enfant Perdu in line
with Galantry lighthouse, — and, a rock 10 feet under water, also lies 2 cables
S.E. by S. from it. The Cailloux de Terre, two patches of 3| and 4i fathoms
respectively, lie 4 cables S.W, by W. from the Enfant Perdu ; from the 3|-
fathom rock, the southern Canaille appears touching the north-east point of Vainqueur
island, and the outermost rocks of point Blanche are seen between Chasseurs
islet and the recks of the coast : — from ihe 4^-fathom rock, the Enfant Perdu
appears in one witli the western extremity of the land of Lamelin, and the north-
east extremity of Pigeon island is in one with the north-east extremity of Vain-
queur island. But all these dangers may be cleared by the marks already given.

Cape I'Aigle, on the western side of North channel, has oflf it a rock known
as Little St. Pierre, upon which is a white stone beacon visible about 5 miles ; at
about midway between this rock and the shore tliere is a rock C feet under water.
Noithward of this 2^ cables, is the outermost of the sunken rocks off cape Rouge
(two patches of 12 feet water) which Ues 2 cables S.E. i S. from the cape ; on
account of these, it is necessary to be very careful while in the vicinity of the
cape, and it is recommended not to approach them so closely as to bring Little
St. Pierre in one with the battery on the north-west end of Chein island (it
should be kept well open to the right of it, bearing S.S.W. i W.), — the red light
of the harbour kept open of cape I'Aigle also clears it.

The course through North channel is W. by S. The north joast of Chien
island, as far as Massacre island, should have a wide berth given to it, being
bordered by a shallow bank on which is a rock, awash, named Flet an.

:'t

■ ■ S:

U.,:-^

* The geographical position of Massacre island, as determined by M. liavui; i iji 1841, is
lat. 46" 46' 46" N., long. 50° 7' 6" W. (Connaissance de$ Temps, 187d.)

110 ST. riHiniH, LANdLADH. MlQL'EliOX. .^ P.KUNET ISLAND. Ac.

Fletarm Channel. — The KletaiiB channel, separntiiig Vaitiqueur and Pigeon
islands from Cliien island, is about one-tliird of a mile wide, and 5 to fathoms
deep, with tho exception of two patches of 4 J fatlioms respectively in midway.
Approaching it from southward, the rock Gros Nez (two cables from the east side
of Chien island and 27 feet high) should be kept in one with cape Baudry (the
north-east end of Chien island) bearing N. by E. i E.. until about a cable from
the rock, when the course should be directed for the middle of the channel, and
cape Baudry rounded not nearer than a cable. v

The mark just given. Gros Nez rock in one with cape Handrv, must be strictly
followed, because a rock (a foot above the surface at low water) named Marie
Rose, lies H cables S.W. by W. ^ W. from Gros Nez, and the mark will carry
the vessel about a cable clear of its east side. There is no channel westward of
Gros Nez.

With strong West to N.W. winds the Fletans channel is very convenient to such
vessels as are too large to tack in South channel, the navigable part of that
channel being very narrow except to vessels of little draft of water.

Colombter Xslets. — Off the north end of St. PieiTe is the Grand Colorabier, a
very steep rocky island, 492 feet high. In the channel between, which is about
.S cables wide, the depth is 7 to !) fathoms ; hence it can be navigated in safety,
if the coast of St. Pierre be not approached nearer than li cables to avoid the
reef which extends fi'om it in places about a cable. Sudden gusts are frequently
experienced off this part o^ St. Pierre, and ulso in the vicinity of the Grand
GAombier.

The islet Petit Colorabier, a cable from the north-east side of Grand Colom-
bier, is about 500 feet in extent and very conspicuous when viewed from south-
eastward or north-westward. A rock, 2 fathoms under water, lies one-tliird of a
mile E. by N. i N. fromit; this very dangerous rock is steep (m all side's, and
there is deep water in its immediate vicinity — vessels will go eastward of it by
keeping Gallantry lighthouse open of cape I'Aigle.

Oenaral Bemarks on 8t. Plexr*. — Vessels bound to St. Pierre from westward
can approach the harbour passing either northward or southward of the island.
If the former course be adopted, the channel between St. Pierre and Langlade
(termed ' the Bay ' by the inhabitants of the islands and neighbouring coast) is
quite safe, the land on each side being bold and free from any known outlying
sunken rocks, and the depth in various parts of it being 15 to 3H fathoms. St.
Pierre has a hiliy appearance when viewed from a distance ; Langlade, on the
contrary, is almost level. The passage round the north side of Grand Colorabier
calls for no special remark, as the island may be approached as n«ar as may be
convenient, but care is required to avoid the 2-fathom rock situated one-third of
a Miile E. by N. 1 N. from Petit Colorabier. In traversing the channel south of
Grand Colorabier the assistance of a leading wind is required, on account of the
violent gusts (succeeded by calms) that descend from the high land on each side
and frequently to a serious extent impede a vessel's progress, even, at times,
obliging it to anchor ; it is recommended to keep more over to the nortlieru than
the southern side of the channel, the coast of St. Pierre being shallow so far out
as half a cable.

The nuraen)us sunken rocks southward and eastward of St. Pierre make an
approach to it in foggy weather oxtreraely hazardous, as a vessel may get on the
outer dangers and tlie coast be not visible; in the event, however, of being
Biiddenly enveloped in fog trhen near the inland, and the nhip's poxition iiell known,

VEUTE ISLAND.

Ill

(I course mny be steered fur the anclinrape. Except in moderately fair weather,
witli a handy ship or one well under command (and these conditions we insist on)
it is decidedly imprudent to attempt to make or to anchor at St. Pierre during a
thick fog.

If the fog is not very thick, a steamer by taking advantage of ever)' favourable
circumstance, ma}' succeed in reaching the ancliorage. Suppose the fog has
detained the vessel on the north-east part of the bank of St. Pierre. It is moder-
ate weather and the fog lifts sufficiently to permit bearings to be taken of St.
Pierre and Langlade, a course may then be steered for the southern end of Lang-
lade, which is so very hold and steep that a vessel may almost lie along side ;
from this, the course tliould be directed to the opposite coast of St. Pierre, and
thence to the island of Grand Colombier. Having made the latter island,
whether leaving it to southward or taking Henry channel (the channel between
it and St. Pierre) a new departure must be taken from its eastern point, namely ;
—1^ miles S. ^ E. and then W. by S. to the vessels at anchor in the roadstead.
In these courses no error is possible except in estimating the distance (IJ miles),
aud then the vessel may come athwart the west side of Pigeon island, the
north end of Chien island, or the mck Petit St. Pierre, all which are bold.

Of course it is understood that if a fog be encountered while north-eastward of
St. Pierre, with Grande Colombier in sight, a vessel must make for the east end
of tliat island and proceed as just directed.

No other method of entering the roadstead from eastward can be attended with
the same success as that we have now described; any other plan is but groping
the wa}'. The lead gives no information, for all the dangers have deep water
around them, and there is as much chance of being misled by the soundings as
of being directed by them.

1'ide.i'. — The establishment of the port is 8 h. 38 m. Springs rise 6i feet.
The stream of flood enters by South and Fletans channels, passing out by North
ciiannel. The ebb stream takes the opposite direction — this is only near the
coast — , in the offing the current runs constantly to N.N.W. ; but neither tliis
uor the tidal one has much strength. In the roadstead of St. Pierre, however,
the tide is sometimes sufficiently strong to cause a vessel to ride head to stream
instead of head to wind, even when very fresh. Ships also not unfrequently
ride badly under the influence of a strong current running in the eye of a
tempestuous gale.

In the channel between St. Pierre and Langlade the flood runs N.E. in the
direction of the channel. About an hour, or an hour and a half after high water
it takes the opposite direction, or perhaps may continue to flow to N.E. but with
legs velocity,

VB&TB zszJiirD.— Yerte (Green) island, 4} miles E. by N. ( N. from Grand
Colombier, is about half a mile in extent and l&i feet high. Close to it on all
sides is a depth of 10 to 14 fathoms, and there are no known sunken rocks in its
immediate vicinity. i

At about two-tliirds of a mile south-westward from Verte island there is a group
of islets known as the Islets of Verte island (or South Green islands) the northern-
most of which is also the largest ; the southernmost. Enfant Perdu, is distant
nearly half a mile S. j W. from it, and 1^ miles S.S.W. i W. from Verte island.
Although there is a depth of to 12 fathoms in the near neighbdurhood of these
Islets, it is recommended to give them a wide berth, on account of the possible .
exiiiteuce of sunken rucks that may have escaped the attention of the surveyors.

»■•■

iirf'

. r

v».

r »

V ■

;. '

t \

T -

iff

112 St. PIERRE, LANGLADE, MIQUELON, & BRUNET ISLAND, &c.

- The cha?inel between Verte island and the Islets of Verte islund is » to 13
'fathoms deep, rocky hottim, aiid may b(! safely traversed if attention be paid to
avoid a rock that covers at two-thirds flood, situated nearly two- thirds of a mile
S.S.W. ^ W. from the en8t end of Verte island and half a niilo E. i S. from the
northenimost Islet. Tliis rock is steep, and its situation is generally shown by
breakers.

IiAiro&ASB and llKZQUz:xrf>ir. — Langlade and Miquelon, connected by a low
narrow istlimi).s, now form one island. Langlade is S miles northwa^-d of St.
Pierre island, being separated from it by the deep water channel of which mention
has already been made. With the exception of its northern part, it is very bold
with steep clififs, and its summit, which is almost level, attains thejheight of 650 feel,
appearing, especially when viewed from southward, almost horizontal. It is about
7 miles long. N.E. i N. and S.W. i S. and 4 miles wide. Throughout its
extent there are no secure anchorages ; small vessels, however, anchor occa-
sionally under its cliffs and iiud shelter against the prevaihug wind, — the best
anchorage is off its nortli-east side in U to 7 fathoms, sand, opposite the bay of
Belle Riviere, between cape Morts and tlie coast-guard station.

The isthmus connecting Langlade witli Miquelon commences at the sand hills
on the north end of the former, one of which is about 110 feet high, — it ia here
only about a cable wide — and thence gradually increases in width as Miquelon
is approached until at last it joins the saud-liills on the south end of that island,
enclosing, however, a large sheet of water into which very small vessels can eater at
high tide ; this harbour is named Grand Barachois, and its entrance faces south-
eastward. On account of the very moderate elevation of this isthmus, Langlade
and Miquelon appear to be separate islands when viewed from a distance ; the
water is shallow on each side of it to some distance seaward.

BUqnalott. — Miquelon extends from the lake just m utioned about 10 miles in
a northerly direction, and is 6 miles broad. Its surface is very hUly, rising to the
height of 65U to 820 feet : heuce it is visible at a considerable distance. At its
northern end a ntftrrow point of land, low at first, curves to the north-eastwai-d
and terminates in cape Miquelon. a bold headland dOd feet high, almost close to
the extremity of which is a depth of 12 to 15 fathoms ; this, when seen at
the distance of 6 miles from eastward or westward, appears to be an island
detached from Miquelon, tlie intermediate land being of very moderate elevation.

The projecting point of land just mentioned forms, with the main body of
Miquelon, a bay exposed to easterly winds, but in wliich is a depth of 3 to 7
fathoms, sand, nmd, and gravel. Small vessels occasionally anchor here when
fearing bad weather in the olKng; it is not, however, a very safe anchorage even
with westerly winds, for such have been known to cause vessels to drug their
anchors, compelling tliem to put to sea. A conspicuous peaked hiU on the
southern &ide of this bay, 3i miles S.S. W. from cape Miquelon, is known as the
Chapeau (Hat) of Miquelon ; it has an elevatioK of 308 feet. The village is on
the low shore of the bay and behind it is a large kke.

Vessels entering the bay just mentioned, must carefully guard against the reef
that extends half a mile from the southern shore, at about two-thirds of a mile
westward from the Chapeau de Miquelon, because the depth over it is less than a
fathom, and from it the lead drops at once into 3 fatlioms water ; a rock on this
reef, sitaated 1^ cables from the land and awash at low water, is known to the
seamen of the island by the name of Chatte (Siie Catj.

imUNET ISLAND.

iia

Miquehn Reef. — Point Soldats, the east point (if Mi(|ntlon, distant Oi miles
S. \ E. from cape Miquelon, has off it a group of rot ks above and nnder water,
the outermost of which are distant from tl:e hvn<l 1.^ to li miles and are also the
most conspicuous. The utmost oircumspefitio;i is necessary when in the vicinity
of these rocks, for they are very steep, the (h'jttli closr to tlieir outer edge being
12 fathoms, which rapidly deepens to 22 fatlt.)ms w it liiii a mile to seaward ; if
compelled by necessity, a vessel may pasa 'ivcr the hank connecting thelu with
tlie shore in about 4 fathoms water.

Veanx Marlns. — At about l>\ miles from the centre of Miquelon, with mount
Calvaire (the iirst and western mo t of the hills on tiie peninsula) bearing
E. by N. \ N. distant (ij miles, there is a group of rocks Ki feet above water,
named Veaux Marins (Seals;. I'hey are in two clusters, separated by a narrow
channel probably 7 fathoms deep, and iu their iniim'cliate vicinity is a deptli of 7
ti) 12 fathoms. Jieing very steep, and but little above water, more than ordinary
care to avoid them is necessary in hazy weather. There are no known sunken
daiigfs between them and Miqut Ion, tlie depth averaging 8 to Li fathoms.

aiiqnelon Bank. — A bank has recently (November 1872) been discovered off
the north-east coast of Miquelon, in the track of v(!ssels bound from St. Pierre
round cape Mi(iuelon. It has not been very carefully examined, but is said to
be 3 miles long N.E. and S.W. and to have over it a depth varying from 11 feet
to V^\ fathoms. The two shoalest spots are near its extremities ; the northern
one, 11 feet under water, lies i^\ miles N.L. by E. i E. from the rocks off point
Soldats, — the southern, 25^ feet under water, lies 8 cables S.E. \ S. from the
same nuiks.*

BBVNBT ZBLANA. — Brunet island lies 10 miles East from cape Miquelon,
and in the middle of the entrance to Fortune bay. It is of very irregular form,
about 51 miles in length E.S.E. and Vv.N.W. by nearly 2 miles in breadth, and
of moderate height. When viewed at a distance from south-westward, eastward
and north-eastward, its eastern end appears to have off it several islets, arising
from the circumstance tliat the intervening part of the iblund is very low and
not then distinguishable. Cape Mercer, its southernmost point, is a bold steep
cliff. The depth all round the island, at a short distance, is i:t to 40 fathoms,
the latter being at about three-quarters of a mile from it, and there are no known
sunken rocks in its vicinity, except what are in its close proximity.

The two bays at the cast end of liiunot island afford tolerable shelter to small
vessels from westerly winds. That on the northern side of the peninsula has a
deptii of 5 to 20 fathoms, and should be very cautiously entered because a reef
extends nearly a quarter of a mile from its western shore ; the shelter here is
from N. i E. westward and southward to East. The other i)ay or cove (on the
southern side of the peninsula, westward of cape Mercer) is of very limited extent
but has to 10 fathoms water ; it contains a rock always visible, which can be
passed on all sides, and it is behind this that vessels ride in oi to (i fathoms.
The last mentioned anchorage appears by the chart to be exposed only to winds
from W. S.W. ; it cannot, however, be much recommended, being suitable to none
but small vessels.

* Wo suspect that this may be the 6-fathom bank reported to exist 4 or 5 railos E.N.E.
to N.E. \ E. from Miquelon. It was sought for unBUCcessfnlly by the Froncli naval
officers engaged in the survey of Miquolon, in or about the vear 1841.

114 ST. PIERRE, LANGLADE, MIQUELON, & BRUNET ISLAND. &c.

Light. — The tower (on a square white house with a red roof) erected on Mercer
head, the south-east extremity of Brunet islnnd, exhibits a fi;ve(l light ( flashitiff
every 10 seconds) at 408 feet above the sea, visible 25 miles. It illunlinates an
arc of 2H2° (from North eastward and southward to W.N.W.). Its approximate
geographical position is lat. 47' 15' 32" N., long. 55° 51' 50" W.

Uttle Bnmets. — The group of islets off the south-west end of Brunet are
known as the Little Brunets. They are separated from Bmnet by a narrow
channel 13 to 19 fathoms deep, in which small vessels occasionally anchor and
obtain shelter from the prevailing wind ; they also sometimes ride under the
islets daring a stiflf breeze from westward. There are no known sunken dangers
in the vicinity of these islets.

Plata Islands. — The Plates are three rocky islets, of moderate height, the
northernmost and largest ot which is distant 3} miles W.S.W. J W. from the west
end of Brunet island. The southernmost is about 2 miles farther off, on a sup-
posed line drawn from point May to' Pass island (17 miles from the former, and
19 miles from the latter) and from it cape Miquelon bears about W. ^ N. distant
11 miles. The only known sunken rock in the vicinity of these islets, lies a
quarter of a mile from the northernmost islet in the direction of E.S.E. and
generally shows itself by breakers.*

The current in the neighbourhood of and among the Plate and Brunet islands,
flows with great irregularijty, and sometimes with considerable strength. Appar-
ently it has no connection with the tides, or the general flow of the current along
the coast, but owes its existence solely to local causes modified by strong west-
erly winds.

jerseyman Bank, — The Jerseyman bank, situated midway between point
Danzig and Miquelon, is about 10 miles long N.E. f N. and S.W. i W., and l\
to 2 miles broad. The depth over it is 20 to 26 Jathoms. It has been only
imperfectly examined.

BAOOlTA. — Sagona island, distant nearly 6 miles E.N.E. i E. from the north
end of Brunet, is about a mile across each way, of moderate height, and bold-to
all round. A little creek on its western side has a sunken rock in the middle of
its entrance ; hence the small fishing vessels that alone can enter it, must be
navigated with great care, especially in bad weather.

Sagona island rests on a bank of 10 to 20 fathoms water, wliich extends from
it about 7 miles in the direction of W. by N. This bank is about 3 miles wide
in the vicinity of the island, whence it gnidually tapers to a point at its western
extremity ; its edge is steep, rising from the depth of 50 to (iO fathoms.

paid

Tlis rishery, See. — The islands of St. Pierre and Miqueh)n are all that remain
' France of the vast territory she once possessed in North Apierica. These
Vv)e finally ceded to her by Great Britain by the treaty of 1814, conditionally,
h'-i, 1)0 fort should be erected, no military stores accumulated, and only 50 regular
troops sL'Vtld dwell on cither of the islands. St. I'ierre, owing to its port, is the
centre o( all the tishing operations iu connection with the Banks. There the
fishermen get their supply of herrings iu the early season, and there they re-

* A rock has been reported to lie IJ or 2 miles S.E. by E. i E. from the southernmost
of the Plate islands ; hence caro is required when navigating in thoir vicinity.

AND, &c.

ed on Mercer

ght ( flasMnfj

ilunlinates an

approximate

>f Brunei are
by a narrow
y anchor and
ide under the
aken dangers

e height, the
from the west
off, on a sup-
le former, and
^ I N. distant
16 islets, lies a
of E.S,E. and

irunet islands,
ngth. Appar-
current along
f strong west-

)etween point
, J W., and IJ
has been only

fom the north

it, and bold-to

the middle of

\er it, must be

extends from
'A miles wide

jat its western

Ims.

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE RAY;

116

provision themselves with \m\!, in June. The roadstead is then so full of vessels
that they range aa far as Little St. Herre, li miles from the town.

Vessels attached to cuiintf-homes at St. Pierre leave their first catch when they
come for ling, prior to their second expedition. These curing establishments are
extensive and important ; they not only employ a body of men — special experts in
tlie operation of curing — who, from the graves (or curing-houses) axeceXLedgraviers,
but they give occupation to the lishermen when the vessels (bancquiers) are
laid up.

The herring and ling used as bait for Cod are principally caught off the New-
foundland coast; and on that part of the coast opposite St. Pierre there reside
persons whoL^ en<;aged in this fishery, the produce being sold to the French
fishennea who pay from -l()0,000 to 500,000 francs annually on this account. The
iisliermen of Newfoundland carry their precious freight to St. Pierre in vessels
called (fulopern, the first ari-ivals get a very high price as there is generally a
great rush for the bait : vessels are even boarded en route ; for it is also of im-
portance to get the first catch of cod wliich also fetches a high price.

In autumn the inhabitants of Fortune bay, who had earlier in the season
carried bait to St. Pierre, return to that island with wood . Most of the money
paid for bait and wood to the Newfoundlanders is spent at St. Pierre in the pur-
chase of supplies and merchandise of various kinds.

The islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon annually equip about 80 schooners,
manned by (150 crew for the Bank fishery : they further equip for the Gulf fish-
ery about 14 schooners, employing 120 men ; to which add 350 boats and small
craft with 700 men, all engaged in the fisheiy on the neighbouring banks and in
the south part of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

The fishing vessels rarely carry their catch to the central depot, and are never
employed in distributing it abroad and among the French colonies. Abou< ^
transports, of great speed an i light tonnage, are engaged in this department,
and the rule is never to ovei'stock a market with fish sufficiently to lower its price.

Population. — The resident population of St. Pierre and Miquelon is about
2000 : but at the height of the fishing season it may be double that. Twice
within a recent date has the small town of St. Pierre been burnt down ; but the
inhabitants, who are active and industrious, have quickly set to work to rebuild
it. The inhabitants of Newfoundland, between cape Race and Fortune bay also
engage in the herring and cod fishery, carrying it on even in winter with great
protlt ; they also do a little in the hunting of fur-animals.

WJ:

&y-

/.^

If :■

I *■

'■'

'»

, '

1 .

'>^

It.- '

111 ihat remain
erica. These
jonditionally.
Illy 60 regular
|s port, is the
There the
|here they re-

southernmoBt I

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE BAY— FORTUNE,
HERMITAGE BAYS, &c., &c.

P'rom Danzig point to Pass island, the southern and northern boundaries to the
westward of Fortune bay, the bearing and distance are N. by E. 80 miles ; Pass
island in lat. 47° 29' N., long. 60° 10' W., is on the southern side of Hermitage
bay. Fortune bay is about 70 miles in extent, in the direction of East, and has

9 •<=

?;s • ■■*

lift

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE RAY.

.•f.*

on its south side land of moderate height, well wooded ; on its northern side the
country is mountainous and barren, with a cliffy coast much broken into deep
nan'ow inlets which constitute excellent harbours. Its navigation is easy, ex-
cept in hazy weather or during fog, when the utmost care is necessary, and it is
remarkable that the depth in some of the inlets is greater than that in the middle
of the bay. It is also equally easy to navigate along the coast westward to capo
Ray, there being no outlying dangers far from the land. In clear weather many
objects will be in sight by which the position of the vessel may be determined
with certainty ; among these may be mentioned the high land of Miquelon,
Brunet island and its light, cape Hune, Kamea islands, Burgeo islands, Great
Bruit mountain, cape Ray, &c. ; — in thick weather, or during night, the coast
should not be approached into a less depth than 80 or 70 fathoms.

The Coast. — From Danzig point the coast trends E.N.E. i E. 6J miles to
Fortune head, and thence S.E. by E. 1 j miles to Fortune village. It is steep, of
moderate height near the sea, and within a quarter of a mile of it is a depth of 10
to 12 fathoms ; hence it should have a good berth when the wind blows strongly
from westward, — at '2 miles from it 70 to 80 fathoms appears to be the prevailing
depth.

roitnn* Bay. — Fortune bay, at the back of which is the village, is of very
limited extent and exposed to northerly winds, yet vessels occasionally anchor in
it in 10 to 5 fatVoms, very inditferent bottom. The village is within a shallow
inlet, accessible by small' fishing craft only at a quarter Hood, and is inhabited
chiefly by fishermen— the population is about 4'20.

Ship and Great Bank Coves. — From Fortune village the coast trends E.N.E.
8j miles to cape Great Bank, the eastern termination of Fortune bay.
Eastward of this is Ship cove, where there is good anchorage in 8 or 10 fathoms
water, sheltered from southerly, westerly, and north-westerly winds. Great
Bank, half a league south-eastward from the cape, is a fishing village, off which
there is no security for shipping ; the entrance to the cove is barred.

Great Gamleli and Frenchman Coves. — From cape Great Bank to point
Eiiragee the bearing and distance are E. by N. J N. 24 miles. The coast
between forms a circular bay, in whicli the shore is generally low, with several
sandy beaches, having behind them bar-harbours, fit only for boats; of these,
the most important is Great Garnish, 13 miles from the cape. Off this shore
vessels while westward of the last mentioned inlet, may anchor in 8 to 10 fa-
thoms, but only while the wind is from soutliward.

The locality of Great Garnish bay or inlet may be lecognised by several rocks
above water, in front of it at 2 miles fiom the shore, the outermost of which is
steep-to ; between these and the land tire several dangerous sunken rocks. East-
ward of Great Garnish, and within these rocks, is Frenchman cove, a convenient
place for the cod-fishery, where small vessels sometimes anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms
water, tolerably well sheltered from sea-winds. The passage in is eastward oi
the rocks that appear the highest above water, and it is necessary to guard
against a sunken rock that lies in nearly mid-ciianuel between them and some
other lower rocks lying off to the eastward of the east point of the cove.

Point Bnrasee is low, with high land behind it in the interior ; it may be
recognised from the offing by two green hillocks near the shore, but not from any
great distance, as the high land then hides them from view. A rock under water
lies off its north part, at a cable or more fium the beach ; hence it should not be
closely npproached.

em side the
jn into deep
is easy, ex-
17, and it is
I the middle
vard to capo
iather many
I determined
f Miquelon,
ands, Great
[it, the coast

6f miles to
t is steep, of
, depth of 10
aws strongly
e prevailing

;e, is of very
ly anchor in
in a shallow
is inhabited

snds E.N.E.

rtnne bay.

10 fathoms

ds. Great

e, off which

ilk to point
The coast
dth several

,s; of these,
this shore
8 to 10 fa-

kveral rocks

I of which is

Eks. East-

1 convenient

5 fathoms

bastward of

to guard

1(1 and some

it may be
|)t from any

ider water
buld not be

ENGLISH HARBOUR, Sco.

117

Onat J«rv«y,— From point Eniagee to the little bay of Great Jervey the
coast trends E. by N. )> miles, and has deep water at a very short distanqe from
it, the depth at half a mile off being 40 to 60 fathoms. Vessels anchor here in
10 to 14 fathoms, but only with southerly winds.

From the bay of Great Jervey to the head of Fortune bay, about 22 miles, the
southern land is high, bold-to and of uneven appearance, with hills and valleys
of variable extent, the latter Iwing generally well wooded, and with many'rivulets
at which good water may be obtained.

Plat«, Orand Jean Mid Itangua da Oarf Barlioiira. — Plate, 2 miles eastward
of Great Jervey, and Grand Jean 2 miles further, are both small shallow coves
with deep water immediately outside, where vessels anchor while the wind is
from the land, choosing a depth convenient to them. The bay of Langue de
Cerf (Stag's Tongue) 34 miles further eastward, is about 1^ miles in extent, and
exposed to all winds from North to West (00°) ; ve.ssels anchor here occasionally
in 8 to 10 fathoms, but only while the wind is from southward.

Jack Fountain, Argant and BKUlaa Harboura. — Eagle point, the north-east-
ern extremity of Langue de (^erf harbour, has off its north side a rock under
water. Eastward of this point about 1 J miles, is the bay of Jack Fountain, wliich
is exposed to northerly and westerly winds au<l almost too deep for anchorage,
yet vessels occasionally ride in it in ;iO to 40 fathoms. Argent (Money) bay,
immediately to the eastward of that of Jack Fountain, is separated from it by a
peninsula off the northern side of which there is a rock above water ; tliis bay is
about two-thirds of a mile in extent, 12 to ;}() futlioms deep, and affords shelter
from almost all winds, the peninsula pn»tectin;j; it against those from westward.
Millee harbnur, north-eastward of Argent, is hu excellent anchorage 21 to 3 miles
in extent and well sheltered from almost uU winds, tliose only from westward
being felt throughout its extent. In front of it there is a rock resembUng at a
distance a sloop under sail, and hence known as the Shallop or Sloop rock. The
bay has two branches, one to the East, the other and larger to the north-eastward;
the depth in the former is 5 to 30 fathoms, in the latter 5 to 85 fathoms. Vessels
seeking anchorage can select any convenient depth.

Cape Millee, 3 miles to the N.E. ^ E. of the Shallop rock, is a high barren
rocky point of reddish colour ; thence to the lieiid of Fortune bay the land on each
side is high, with steep craggy cliffs. The width of the bay, which immediately
westward of the cape is ik to 3 miles, contracts at the cape to a little more than
1^ miles, and then gradually narrows to its extremity ; consequently this pro-
jecting point is readily recognised.

At the head of Fortune bay there is a low beach, with a large pond or bar-
harbour behind it, into which only boats can enter. In this, and in all other bar
harbours on the south side of Fortune bay, as far westward as Great Bank, are
convenient places for building stages and good beaches for drying lish.

Orand la narra, — Tho bay of Grand le Pierre, on the north shore, nearly
2 miles from the head of I'ortune bay, is a mile in extent and 20 to 3 fathoms
deep. It is an excellent harbour well sheltered from all winds, and contains no
known sunken dangers. The usual anchorage is in 8 to 4 fathoms, at about
three-quarters of a mile from the sea. The entrance is not readily distinguished
until the observer is abreast it.

EngUab Barbour. — English harbour, 1:^ miles westward from that of Grand
le Pierre, is about a mile in extent, and 20 to 5 fathoms deep, but being almost
everywhere exposed to south-westerly \vinds is not recommended as an Huchora;;u.

• )

■ S .'

\h ■'

118

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE RAY.

'■m

The usual ridin;^ is in H to i> fathoms oppositfl a (;ove at its head, on the eastern
side. Population, about ir»n.

UTatar Bay. — Potite Baie (Its rEiiii (I,itfle Water bay), the bay next to the
westward of that just descrilietl, is of limited extent and can receive only very
small vessels which anchor under protoction of an islet (or islets) lying in its
entrance. The channel in appears to be on the eastern side of the islet, that on
its western side being probably less than 2 fathoms deep ; it shoals gradually
from 14 to 5 fathoms, the latter being well within the entrance.

flTew'Burbonr. — New harbonr, westward of Water bay, is immediately opposite
cape Millie. It is about a mile in extent in the direction of North, has a depth
of 8 to 2 fathoms, and is well sheltered from westerly and almost all other winds.
The anchorage is in )) to ii fathoms.

iPanun* Barbonr" — Femme (Woman) harbour is 1^ miles westward of New
harbour, and 2i miles N.N.W. from cape Millee. Its general direction is E.N.E.,
and it is very narrow, but has a depth of (5 to 23 fathoms. There is an islet
(with rocks above water near it) in its entrance ; the channel in is eastward of
this islet, and vessels anchor in -'0 to 22 fathoms near the head of the bay.

Brawer'a Holo, about 2 miles westward of the harbour just described, is of
very limited extent and too shallow to receive any but the smallest vessels. In
front of it is a small island near the shore, and also some rocks above water.

JM Conta. — Le Conte (Story) harbour is a mile westward of Brewer's Hole, and
19 miles E. by N. ^ N. from point Euragoe. Its entrance is 2 miles wide, whence
it extends north-eastward about 2| miles, with a very variable breadth, being in
one part less than a quarter of a mile across. In front of it are two islands,
named Petticoat and Smock, of which the first mentioned is the larger and outer-
most ; there are also two smaller islets and a few sunken rocks between these.
When sailing along the coast at a distance it is not easy to distinguish Petticoat
island from the land, as it is of moderate height and presents no remarkable
feature by which it may be recognised.

The best channel into Le Conte harbour is westward of Petticoat island,
between it and Smock island. As soon as the harbour begins to open, keep
Smock island on board to avoid some sunken rocks near the small island between
the north-east point of Petticoat island and the point of land on the shore
opposite it, and also to clear a rock under water (but visible at low tide ) situated
further in on the side of the main, to starboard in entering. When within these
dangers, keep in the rnifhUe of the channel until the harbour appears quite open,
when it may be entered and any convenient anchorage selected. The depth is
17 to 2i fathoms, sand and mud, and there is shelter from all winds.

A small cove, eastward of Petticoat island, is spacious and deep enough to
receive fishin;,' \ essels of little draught of water. It is also convenient as a fish-
ing station.

XiOlVO HARtOWB.— Long harbour, 4 miles westward of Le Conte harbour and

15 miles N.E. by E. f E. from point Enragee, is a narrow inlet tliat extends

16 miles N.E. by E. ^ E. and for a considerable distance is very deep, there
60 to 10 and 20 fathoms water as far as 9 miles from the sea, whence it gradually
shallows to li lathoms at the salmon-fishery at its head. Gull island, at its en-
trance, is a good mark of recognition ; there is also a rock about half a milo
outside this in the direction of South, which resembles a small boat. When
within, there is shelter from all winds.

Vessels enter Long harbour either east or west of Gull island, but the western

BELLE BAY.

n\)

channel is to bo preferred, being the broader of the two. In nearly the middle
of this western cliannel, and a liti,?p outside the island, there is a rooky ledge
2 fathoms under water; and, within the island, ofiT two sandy coves! on the
etistern side, are other ledges visible at low water, at 2 cables from the shore.
Tlie usual anclionige is in Morgan cove, on the west side of the harbour, H miles
from Gull island, other parts of it being generally too deep and inconvenient ;
liero vessels ride in 1& fathoms, well sheltered from all winds, and sufficiently
near the entrance to permit them to enter and leave with facility. If the har-
l)our be entered further than Morgan cove, it must be ascended 6 or 6 miles
before the depth decreases enough for ordinary vessels to cast anchor.

BBLLB BAT. — Belle bay is the large bay formed by the western coast of the
liarbour just described and Chapel island, which bear from each other W. by N.
and E. by S. distant 10 miles. In it are many fine harbours and anchoring
places in which vessels may ride sheltered from all winds ; the principal of these
are named Rencontre, Belle, Five islands, and Corben.

Haras Harbour. — Immediately westward of Long harbour, on the south-
western side of the peninsula that constitutes its westen. point, is the little, bay
known as Hares harbour, wliich is suitable only for very small vessels. The
aucliorage in it is in some degree sheltered from westerly winds, and the swell
these send on the coast, by two islets and some rocks above and under water.

nxall Bay. — About 2 miles north-westward from Hares harbour is Mall bay,
an inlet extending 5 miles in a N.E. by E. direction, and a mile wide at its en-
trance. Its depth gradually decreases from 70 fathoms to ') fathoms, the latter
being very near its head. In consequence of this great depth of water, and the
absence of shelter from south-westerly winds, vessels rarely enter it in doubtful
weather. Its name MaP (bad) is significant of the estimation in which it is held.

Westward of Mall bay are the three Rencontre islands, the westernmost and
largest of which is joined to the shore at low water. The depth between the two
smallest islets is probably 1!) to 23 fathoms. South harbour, a small bay in the
eastern part of the largest island and opposite the southernmost islet, is to 3 fa-
thoms deep ; fishing vessels of very light draught occasionally anchor in it
during westerly winds. Vessels also anchor northward of the two small islets in
1(1 to -4 fathoms water, the anchorage there being moderately sheltered. Shelter
from southerly winds may likewise be obtained northward of the largest island,
in the immediate vicinity of the peninsula ; the deptli is, however, considerable
being 28 to 40 fathoms.

Belle Harbour. — Belle harbour, 4 miles N.W. by N. from the largest Rencontre
island, is 2 miles in extent and 50 to 10 fathoms deep. Its anchorage is sheltered
from all winds, and it contains no known sunken dangers ; yet, in consequence of the
narrowness of its entrance, it is held in only indifl'ereut repute by the fishermen.
Large vessels must ascend nearly to its head and riilo in 20 fathoms, the bay in
that part being wider than nearer the sea. Approacliing the harbour from east-
ward, an island will be observed nearly midway from Rencontre island ; tliis may
be passed on all sides, the depth between it and the CDast being about 28 fathoms.
In its entrance is an islet which should be passed on its western side, after which
a httle cove will be seen on the starboard side of the harbour, and it is in this
cove that the small vessels, which alone seek the shelter the inlet afibrds, anchor.

Belle island, a high steep islet half a mile in extent, is distant about 2 miles
S.W. I W. from Belle harbour. The depth almost close to its northern side is
()5 fathoms.

I:. ■ :

:7 J

DANZIO POINT TO CAPE RAY.

XMly OoTs. — Lally cove, i milos westward of Belle harbour, is Hlieltered by
an islet. It will only iK'conimodate very small fishing craft.

XMly Back Oot*. — Lnlly cove, just mentioned, is on the eastern side of a very
narrow point of land which is of white appearance, high and steep. This point
forms with the coast westward of it a small bay, known as Lally Back cove, in
which vessels anchor in 10 to 20 fathoms water.

Bait Bay. — North-eastward of Lally Back cove is East bay, which is about
1) miles in extent, and of square form. Its depth is considerable, there being no
bottom in its centre ai 60 fathoms, consequently vessels can anchor only very
near the land.

irertli Bay. — North bay, north-westward of East bay, is also very deep having
upwards of 50 fathoms water in its centre. At its head is the largest stream that
falls into Fortune bay, whence salmon is obtained in abundance during the sea-
son. The anchorage in this bay is in about 10 fathoms, and close to the land.

rive Islands Bay.— This bpy, about '2§ miles south-westward of North bay, is
60 named, because five small islets extend across its centre in the direction of
of W.N.W. and E.S.E. ; by these it is divided into two parts, in each of which
there is good anchorage. The southern of these divisions, the deeper of the two,
has in it 38 to 5 fathoms water, and it is here that large vessels ride in 11 to 5 fa-
thoms well sheltered from all winds. Small vessels anchor northward of the
islets in'5i fathoms, at the mouth of a river that falls into the northern part of
the bay, which isfamed as an excellent salmon stream.

dbrbsn Bay, 2 miles southwsird from l<'ive Islands bay (from which it is
separated by a bold headland named Corben head), faces E.N.E., and is 7 to
32 fathoms deep. Vessels usually anchor here in 20 to 22 fathoms ; the ground
is said to hold well.

S.E. by E. If miles from Corben head is Dog island, which is about half a
mile in extent, hi^ and steep, and has a rock above \>'ater off its east side. From
the south-east and east sides of this island a bank of 15 to 22 fathoms (possibly
less) extends 2 miles, and is then succreded by a depth of 40 to 5.') fathoms.
There is also u similar bank eastward of this, the western end of which is dis-
tant 3 miles from Dog ishind ; tliis bank extends 8 miles parallel to the shore,
its northern edge being 1} miles from the largest Rencontre island.

South-westward of Dog island IJ miles is Lord and Lady island, which is a
mile long and narrow. A rock, with deep water. close it a id whose position is
shown bj' breakers in bad weather, lies lialf a mile t > t':e N.E. ^ E. from its
northern end ; and, a rock, visible at low water, aino iies a quarter of a mile
N.E. i N. from the same end of the island.* Turm Capp island, nearly half a
mile eastward of Lord and Lady island, is very unaill, but steep on all sides.

Long island, half a mile southward of Lord and Lady and Turm Capp islands,
is 1^ miles long East and West. There is probably deep water, 11) to fathoms,
close to it on all sides, but the channel southward of it (between it and Chapel
island) is full of rocks, and should not consequently be attempted ; there is also
a rock in the channel northward of it (the channel that separates it from the
shore.)

Chapel island, the western boundary of Belle bay, is 3 miles in extent and
loffcy. with a steep coast rising from the depth of 20 to 30 fathoms. In the narrow
channel between it and the coast are 18 to 38 fathoms water, and no known

* We luspect that these two rucks are one and the same danger.

■ n*-;

BANDE DE LAKIEK BAY, &«.

ISI

sunken danger. The point of land nearest it. from which the island is distant
less tlian half a milo, is known as the Iron head, from its bold and lofty appear-
ance ; it rises almost perpendicularly from the sea, and is a good mark for Bande
de Laricr bay. of which it constitutes the northern boundary. Vessels occasionally
anchor between Chapel island and this headland in IH to 2;) fathoms.

Tlie BarryKway de Barre. northwiird of Iron hcn<i, is a little creek or lake into
which boats can enter at a quarter Hood.

Band* d« irfurlsr Bay is a little mort; tliiin a mile in extent and has a depth of
20 to '<\8 fathoms, with the exception of a small bank of I'i fathoms in its centre.
At its southern side a low point of 8hin<^le and Hand runs off a quarter of a mile
to north-eastward, and affords shelter to tliu ancliornge tliat in usually sought by
the small fishing vessels that enter this bay ; the depth in the little sheltered cove
is 4 to U fathoms. Good anchorage in 19 to 20 fathoms can also be obtained off
the west side of the bay. northward of the cove.

At about a mile outside Bande de Larier bay there is a small bank of the same
name upon which the least depth found was H fathoms. It is steep on all sides,
there being 2(! to 40 fathoms in its immediate vicinity. From it the beach of
Bande de Larier cove appears just open of the east point of the bnv under Iron
head, and Boxey point is in one with tlie north end of St. Jacques island.

8t.*Jao4n«s. — Two miles westward of Bande de Larier bay is the harbour of
St. Jacques which is about a mile in extent and exposed to southerly winds. In
it is a depth of 10 to 4 fathoms, and good anchorage suitable for almost all vessels.
It contains no known sunken danger. The population is about 100 ; their
occupation is almost wholly connected with the fishery.

At about half a mile south-eastward from St. Jacques harbour is the islet of
St. Jacques, an excellent mark for the harbour, as it is a prominent object to
vessels sailing up Fortune bay. It is two-thirds of a mile long S.S.E. f E. and
N.N.W. i W., and very narrow. Being low in the middle it appears to be two
islands when viewed from a distance. From it cape Great Bank bears S.W. by
\V. i W. distant 25} miles, and the south-east end of Brunet island W. J S. 21^
miles. Vessels bound to St. Jacques harbour sliould keep westward of this
island.

Sine Pinion and BngllBb Bajra. — At H miles south-westward from St. Jacques
harbour is the little bay of Blue Pinion, in which is a depth of 6 to 18 fathoms,
with the exception that throughout its novth-westera part a bank of 7 to 10 feet
extends from the shore. English bay, half a mile more to the westward, is also
very small, but will be at once recognised by an islet off its westeru side ; it»
depth is 5 to 14 fathoms. Both these bays are exposed to southerly winds.

Great Monjambe and Little Monjambe, two small bays westward of English
bay, are of no importance to shipping.

Boxey Barbonr. — Boxey harbour, 5 miles westward from St. Jacques island,
is an excellent anchorage for small vessels. It is a mile in extent, has a depth
of 4 to 5 fathoms, fine sandy ground, and contains no known sunken danger.
The shelter is also almost complete, as the only winds that are felt are from the
south-west quarter. When sailing in, keep in the middle of the channel between
the shoals that extend from each point of the entrance ; the depth is 3 fathoms
and the mark is, Boxey point open of a little black head just within Friar's head.
Boxey Point, 2i miles S W. i W. from Boxey harbour, is of moderate height
and visible from a considerable distance, as it stands out prominently from the
coast and is the most southerly of any of the land on the north side of Fortun*

> 1

122

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE RAY.

bay. It ia recommended not to approach it closely as some sunken rocks extend
from it possibly a few cables ; the depth in the immediate vicinity of these is 10
to ir> fathoms.

St. wTdha Island, a mile N.W. by W. from Boxey point, is half a mile in extent,
and of moderate height. Close to it on all sides is deep water, 10 to 3(1 fathoms,
with the exception that a rock lies oft' its north-east part.

St. John Bay. — St. John bay, northward of Boxey point, is bounded on the
north side by a long naorrow peninsula that terminates in a high, steep craggy
point, known as cape St. John. It is about 2 miles in extent, and exposed in
every pnrt to westerly winds. At its eastern extremity tliere is a small boat
harbour.

OBBAT DB ZAAV BAT. — Northward of cape St. John is Great de Lean
bay, which is 4 miles wide at the entrance (between cape St. Joliu and East head,
which bear from ench other N.W. and S.E,), whence it extends 10^ miles in the
direction of N.E. by E. i E. From cape St. John a narrow bank of lU to '2i
fathoms runs off IJ miles to the N.W. ^ N. ; and, eastward of this is a bank of
7 to 12 fathoms upon which are two rocks or islets named Gull and Shag, besides
some sunken rocks nearly half a mile from their western side. Further in the
bay is Devil island, and a short distance north of tliis a small islet. It is above
these that vessels anchor ; — the shelter is excellent, the bay being almost land-
locked.

Vessels bound to the upj)er pnrt of Great de Lean bay should give the islets
Gull and Shag a wide berth, to avoid the sunken rocks westward of them ; to
ensure doing this, it will be prudent to keep more over to the northern than the
southern shore. The channel eastward of Devil island must be taken, that west-
ward of it being less than 2 fathoms deep. Having entered by the eastern
channel (which is free from any known sunken dangers, and 17 to 50 fathoms
deep) anchorage may be obtained where convenient, either near Devil island in
15 to 40 fathoms, or further within in 7 to 20 fathoms.

Little JiurrifswaifHay. — On the northern side of Great de Lean bay, 21 miles
westward of Devil island, is Little Barryswny bay, an excellent harbour about a
mile in extent, and 7 to 20 fathoms deep, which is frequently resorted to by small
fishing vessels. It ia exposed to southerly winds. The only known danger is a
shoal that runs off about lialf n '^nblo from the west point of entrance. The best
part for anchoring in is said to be olf its western shore, in 7 to 10 fathoms.

BBBTOXV HABBOVB. — Breton haroour (or Breton bay, as it should be
designated) is a large inlet immediately westward of Great Bay de Lean. Its
entrance, which is about 3^ miles N.N.E. i E. from Sngona island, is a mile
wide, and the inlet thence extends nearly 8 miles in a curve in the direction of
N.E, being throngiioiit generally of tlie <anie breadth, one mile. In some parts
it is very deep, bottom being readied at 87 fathoms 3i miles from the entrance.
When well within there is shelter from almost all winds ; vessels, however,
seldom ascend it further than Jerseyman harbour, an excellent anchorage on its
eastern side 2 miles from tlie sua.

The East and West heads of l^reton harbour bear from each other N.W. and
S.E. ; each is bold, and has 10 to 15 fathoms water at a very moderate distance
from it. A rock above water off East head is a good mark of recognition, and
, ' ^uld always be passed on its seaward side.

Jerseyman harbour is li miles in extent and can receive large vessels, its depth
being 5 to 10 fathoms ; there is, however, a bar at its entrance over which there

CONNAIGllE BAY.

138

ia usually about 18 feet whter at low tide. The mark for crossing this bar is
stated to be, tlie point of Thomson beach (the south point of entrance into South-
west Arm) open of Jerseyman head (the high, bluff point on the north side of
entrance to Jeraeyman harbour) ; having crossed this, anchorage may be obtained
where convenient. The shelter is complete, being land-locked.

South-west Arm, on the western side of Breton bay and opposite Jerseyman
harbo'ir, is also an excellent anchorage, as it is 12 to 2 fathoms deep ; being, how-
ever, very narrow it is convenient only for small vessels. A ledge of locks
extends 2 cables from its south point, and there is al«o a sunken rock in nearly
midway of its entrance ; these are both steep-to. Large vessels anchor outside
the entrance in IH to 22 fathoms, good bottom, mooring nearly east and west.
The small craft that enter the harbour keep nearer the nortliern than the
soutliern shore, to avoid the rock in mid-channel, jnat mentioned.*

MortsBay. — From the western point of Breton harbour tlie coast tends N.W.
about 2 miles and thon W. by S. -VJ miles to Connaigre head, forining thereby a
buy named Morta (Deadmenj ; the direct bearing and distance between the two
points is W. by N. 5^ miles. An island, named (Jull, lies near tlie land (with no
siife cliannel between) at about li miles from Breton harbour, and rocks have
bei^n reported to lie oft it at various distances in a southerly and south-westerlj'
direction, as far out even as three-quarters of a mile ; hence the greatest care is
necessary when saihng in its vicinity, — upon some of these tlie sea usually breaks.
Morts bay is a dangerous anchorage and safe only wliile^ the wind is from the
land ; its bottom is very irregular, the depths being 12 to IS) fathoms, and in thick
weather the lead gives but little indication of the near vicinity ('f the laud.
The name Deadmen is sufficiently indicative of its evil reputation.

Two rocks, fi fathoms under water, have been reported off this part of the
coast. One, 8 or 4 miles wi stward of tlie north point of Sagona island ; the other,
at about .S miles northwar i of Brunet island. These bearings place them on or
near the north edge of Sagona bank. Another rock (12 feet under water;, the
apex of a small bank of 20 fathoms, lies -i^ miles W. by N. ^ N. from the last-
mentiimcKl ti-fiithom patch, witli the north point of Sagona island bearing S.E.
by M distant 7 miles ; cape Connaigre N.E. by N. f\^ miles ; and the west end of
liniuet island S.W.J S. 7i miles. It has also been as. »jrted that a 3 -fathom
rock lies 3 miles S.S.W. J- W. from cape Connuigre, and consequently a short
distance to the eastward of the last-mentioiu d rock ; — perhaps these two rocks
are heads of the same bank.

CONNAZOBX: BAT.— Cnpo Connaigre. the 'Extremity of a long, narrow, bold,
steep promontory is of sutlicient height to be visible at a considerable distance,
and is easilj' recognised wiien viewed fnmi almost any direction. The df!pth in
its immediate vicinity being l(i to 25 fathoms, renders more than ordinary care
necessary when approaching it in foggy weather. Its geographical position is
considered to be hit. 47° 2()1' N. long 56° 57' W.

Basfarre point, the western point of Connaigre bay, boars from cape Connaigre
(its eastern point) N.W. i W. distant 6 miles ; it is of moderate height, wooded
on its southern and western sides and steep, the depth close off its wewtern side
being 15 to 18 fathoms. The bay thence extends 12 miles in the dii ectiou of E.

* A rock, 12 feet under vater at low tide, has been reported at Breton li."rbour. The
bearings given were, the Euglisli ohurcl\ S. 21^ \V. and the lloman C'ptholiu church
W. 14'^ B. {true). We behove it is tliis 12-toot miu-chanuel rock.

r^rf

124

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE HAY.

by N. and gradually decreases in breadth to its extremity. Ta some parts it ia
very deep, exceeding 60 fathoms, but generally near the shore it is 15 to 20
.fathoms. As it is exposed in every part to westerly and south-westerjy winds,
none of its anchorage can be much recommended.

Connaigre Rocks. — In almost the middle of the entrance to the bay there is j
cluster of rocks above water, known as the €onnaigre rocks, which are very
steep, and may be approached to a moderate distance, 'le deptli close tc their
seaward side being IT to 23 fathoms, and in other parts 10 l:o 14 fathoms.
Vessels entering the bay should, liowever, pass eastward of them, the channel
westward and northward of them being rendered narrow and dangerous by a reef
that extends 1^ miles for perhaps further) from the land; in this narrow channel
is 8 to 12 fathoms water.

About 4i miles eastward from the Connaigre rocks is Great islnnd, in the
middle of the bay, on the southern side of which are some rocks above water ; the
best passage is consequently westward and northward of it. And, about half a
mile further in the bay is Little island. Both these islands are moderately high.

Gonnaiyre Harbour. — Connaigre harbour, 4t\ miles within cape Connaigro, is
on the eastern aide of the bay. It is of very limited extent and exposed to winds
from seaward. In front of it is a small island, which must be passed on its south-
eastern side by vessels seeking the anchorage. The depth is 40 to 7 fathoms.

Dawson Harbour. — Dawson harbour is on the northern side of Connaigre bay,
2 miles westward from Great island. It is exposed to southerly winds. The
depth is 15 to 4 fathoms, and the ground is said to hold well.

Fas* Island. — Pass island, the north-western limit of Fortune bay, lies off and
very near to the western side of Bastarre point. It is about a mile in extent.
narrow, and moderately high. Several rocks above and under water extend
from it fully a mile in a south-westerly direction, and a sunken rock also lies
about a quarter of % mile from its north-west side ; hence a close approach is not
desirable. The passage eastward of the island is perliaps cables wide, and 4 to
8 fathoms deep ; small vessels occasionally traverse it. and anchor wlien necessary
in 6 fathoms, bottom of fine sand. The sea around Pass island has tlie reputa-
tion of abounding in cod.

BBBMXTAOB BA.T. — This extensive bay is bounded on the south-west side
by Pass island, and on the north side by the islands that form Bonne bay and
Great Jervis harbour, and by the southern shore of Long i? lend, at which part it
begins to decrease in breadth. At its entrance it is more than (i miles wide.
Fox islands, within the bay, are distant from Pass island 10 miles. These islands
are opposite the entrance to Hermitage cove, at about three-quarters of a mile
from the land, and it is said that there is goodfishing about them. Off the northern
Fox island are several rocks above water, and a sunken rock also lies off the south
side of this island. To enter Hermitage cove, keep between the islands and the
shore (borrowing somewhat towards the main laud) in 80, :}2, and t)7 fathoms
water, the cove will soon appear open, and may be entered, steering about South.
The water in it is deep, and there i& no known danger ; the anchorage is also
good, and there is every convenience for lishing, and plenty of wood and fresh
water. From Hermitege cove, the bay extends 12 miles nearly West, with very
deep water, until near the head, \/here it gradually lessens to 25 and 22 fathoms,
and farther in to U fathor") : there is a small islet or two on the southeru ^.lue,
but no danger whatever.

Long Island, separating Despair bay from Hermitage bay, is of square iVum,

DESPAIR BAY, Ac.

laA

e partb it is

is 15 to 20

isterjy winds,

fty there is i
ich are very
sloae tc their

74 fathoms.

the channel
ous by a reef
rrow channel

slnnd, in the
e water; the
about half a
leralely high.
Connaigrc, is
)sed to winds
on its south-
' fathoms,
onnaigre bay,
winds. The

lies off and

lie in extent.

ater extend

ck also lies

)roach ia not

ide, and 4 to

cii necessary

the repiita-

ith-west side

nne bay and

vhich part it

miles wide.

hese islands

irs of a mile

he northern

aff the south

nds and the

HI fathoms

bout South.

rage is also

and fresh
;, with very
22 fathoms,

therii j'.iJe,

about 8 miles long and nearly H leagues in circuit. The eastern passage is very
(/ood. but narrow, and is between the east end of Long island and the main ; it is
nnmed the Passage of Long island. The west entrance into Despair bay from,
HevLiitage bay, is by the west end of Long island. About half a mile from its
S.VV. point are two rocks, above water, with deep water ail round them.

There are four harbours on the south side of Long island, the easternmost of
m which, named OaUaiis, is but small, and lies near the south-east point. of the
island. The best channel into the harbour is on the west side of several rocky
islands which lie at the entrance, wherein are four fathoms, but in the harbour
there are from 15 to 24 fathoms.

Tho next is Picarre, which lies N. by E. half a league from the easternmost Fox
island. In entering this harbour keep near the west point, in order to avoid
some sunken rocks off the other. The anchorage is in the first cove on the east
side, in 9 or 10 fathoms, sheltered from all winds.

Round harbour is the next, and is about 2 miles to the westward of Picarre.
It is fit only for small vessels, the channel in being so narrow.

Lonf^Islnnd bftrbour is the fourth, and lies about 2 J miles from the west end of
Long ^sla:!id. Tius harbour has two arms, one running to the north, the other to
the eastward ; they are both very narrow, and have from 40 to 7 fathoms water :
the eastern arm is the deeper, and affords the better anchorage. The passage in
is on either side of an island which lies off the entrance, and has several rocks
above water about it.

Despair Bay. — The entrance of Despair bay lies between the west end of Long
island and Great Jervis island (which lies in the mouth of the harbour of that
name). The distance between is 1;^ miles, and midway no bottom is found with a
hne of 280 fathoms. Despair bay forms two capacious arms, one extending fully
8 leagues to the north-eastward, the other about 1.^ miles northward. In the
N.E. arm are several smaller arms and islets, and tolerably good anchorage in
several places ; in the north arm there is very deep water, and no anchorage
excepting in the small b^iys and'6oves which lie on each side of it ; but in an arm
of this bay which vxwfi easterly there is a tine salmon-fishery, and wood in
abundance. In the N.E. arm also there are good salmon-fisheries at Little river
and Conne river. All ih>: country about this part is mountainous and barren ;
but about the head of thu biiy it becomes level, and has abundance of wood, such
as fir, pine, birch, witch h.r'.e\ spruce, 5rc.

Oreat Jarrls Barbonr, situated at the west, entrance into Despair bay is safe,
with good anchorage in every part in from 16 to 20 fathoms, secure from all
winds, and plenty of wood and water. The passage in is on either side of
Gretit Jervis island ; but the soutliernmost channel is the safest, there being no
diiiiger in it but the shore itself, while in tho northern channel there are several
sunken rocks. To sail in, bring the north point between the two rocks
above water oi: *h& starboard side, and then steer directly in; this will
carry clear ofs(.;ik* sunken rooks lying off the west point of the island, and
appearing at low vut*";-. T)ie entrance to this harbour may be known by the
east end of Great Jc'vis i.-land, which is a high, steep, craggy point, named Great
•Tervis head, and is the nortliern point of the southern entrance to tho harbour.

Bonn* Say. — Bonne bay lies about 3 miles westward of Great Jervis head, and
nearly N. by E. 7 miles from Pass island. It has several islands at its entrance,
tho westernmost of which is the largest and highest. The best passage in is
•aotward of the lar(;est island, between it and the two easternmost t . nds.

:*-'

W¥

■^■'

126

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE RAY.

The bay runs in North, 4 miles, and tliere is no danger but what shows itself.
Vessels may go on either side of Drake island, which is small and nearly in the
middle of the bay ; between which and two small islands on the west side of the
bay, within Great island, there is anchorage in 20 or ;}0 fathoms ; but the best
place for large ships is near the head of the bay, in 12 or 14 fathoms, clear
ground, and convenience for wood and water. On the N.W. side of Great island,
within the two small islands, is very good anchorage, in from 16 to 24 fathoms,
secure from all winds ; . the entrance to this, from the bay, is to the northward of
the two small islands. In sailing in or out of the bay, approach not too near the
south point of Great island, as there are some sunken rocks lying at a quarter of
a mile from shore. A little to the westward of Bonne bay is Mosquito cove, a
small inlet having from 30 to 47 fathoms water.

W.N.W. 4 miles from Bonne bay is the entrance to the bays of Faoheux and
Dragon; this entrance being ^ery conspicuous at sea, the coast may here be
readily known.

Faoheux Bay, which is the eat e *; branch, is verj' easily seen to seaward ;

it runs inN.N.E., 2 leagues, and i . • a mile wide at the entrance, with deep
water in most pai'ts of it. On the wesi, side of the bay are three coves, where
ships may anchor, in from 10 to 20 fathoms. Dragon bays runs in N.W. a
league, and is nearly half a mile wide, with 00 or 70 fathoms water and no
anchorage, excepting near the head ; and then you must lie very near the shore.
One mile to the westward of Fanheux is Little Hole, with shelter for small craft;
and a league to the westward ot Facheux is Richard's harbour, a place fit only
for small vessels and fishing shallops, with 23 fathoms water in it.

Bar* Bay lies N.W. by W. a league from Richard's harbour, and runs in
N.N.E. about 6 miles, Ijing about one third of a mile wide, with deep water
close home to both shores in all parts of it, except about a league up on the west
side, where there is good anchorage, in from 8 to 15 fathoms, with plenty of wood
and water ; and also in a small cove about a mile up on the east side, where there
are 30 fathoms, with gradual soundings to the shore.

About 4^ miles N.W. from Hare bay, and 4 miles N.E. from Hare's Eai'9
point is Devil's bay, a narrow inlet, extending a league to the northward, with
deep water, and no anchorage until close to the head.

The Bay of Rencontre lies to the northward of Hare's Ears point, and runs in
N.W. 2 leagues. It has deep water in most parts of it, and is nearly half a mile
wide at the narrowest part. The anchorage is in 30 fathoms, above a low woody
point on the south shore, quite land-locked. Hare's Ears point is large, with a
ragged rock upon it, which, from some points of view, looks like the ears of
a hare. It divides the bays of Rencontre and Chaleur, and bears N.W. i W.,
17 miles from Pass island. OS this point is a fisliing bank, extending a full mile
from the shore, having from 20 to ;i(5 fathoms over it.

Two miles to the westward of Hare's Ears point is the Bay of Chaleur,
which runs in about 2 leagues N.N.W. It is very narrow, and has deep water in
most parts. At the northern side of the entrance into tlie bay, and close to tlie
land, is a small island, of moderate height ; and half a league within the island, on
the N.E. side of the bay, is a rock above water ; a little within this rock, on the same
side, 18 a small cove with a sandy beach, off which vessels can anchor in 28
fathoms, a cable from the shore.

West, nearly half a league from the bay of Chaleur, is Buy Franoais, a smf.ll
inlet, running in N.W. i W. a mile, being at the entrance about a quarter of a

CAPE LA HUNE, Ac.

lar

and runs in

mile broad, and 17 fathoms deep ; bnt just within are 60 and (50 fathoms ; at the
lirad are from 30 to 20 fathoms, good anchorage, and very convenient for capping
on the fishing business.

Westward, 4 miles from the Bay Fran9ais. on the east side of cape La Hune,
lies Oar Bay : oflf the east point of the entrance to which is a low rocky islet, and
in the entrance of the bay is another, with a passage on each side of it. The bay
runs in N.N.E. about 4 miles, and is one-thii-d of a mile wide, with deep, water
close to both shores all the way up ; at the head is a liarbour for small vessels,
with only 5 fathoms water. At the west side of the entrance into the bay is a'
small cove named Cul de Sac, with 3 and 4 fathoms water, and good shelter for,
small vessels.

CAPB XiA BVNB, the southernmost point of land on this part of the coast,
lies in lat. 47' 32' N., long. 66^ 53' W.; it is distant 8i leagues W.N.W. i N.
from Pass island, and 10 leagues N.N.W. ^ N. from cape Miquelon. Itsi figure
much resembles a sugar-loaf; and, its locality may also be recognised l>y the high
land of La Hune, a league westward of it, which appears flat at the top, and is
visible about 50 miles.

PBlvavXN IBI.A1R>8.— The Penguin islands lie W.S.W. J S, 10^ miles from
cape La Hune, and N.W. i^ N. 10 leagues from cape Miquelon : they are an
assemblage of barrenrocks lying near to each other, and altogether about 2 leagues
in circuit, and may be approached in the daytime to the distance of half a league
all round. On the W.S.W. side of the large island, which is the highest, is a
small cove, fit for shallops, and convenient for the fisheries ; the ground about
it is considered to be good for fishing.

E.S.E. 7 miles from the Penguin islands, and S. by W. 3 leagues from cape La
Hune, lies the Whale or La Hune Rock, on which the sea generally breaks ; it is
about 100 fathoms in circuit, with 10, 12, and 14 fathoms water close-to all round
it. From this rock a narrow bank extends a league to the westward, and half a
league to the eastward, with from 24 to 58 fathoms water on it, rocky and
gravelly bottom. In the channel between the shore and this rock, and al? j
between the shore and the Penguin islands, are 120 and 130 fathoms of water,
muddy bottom ; and there is the same depth of water at a league without them.

LA XZUNB BAV lies close to the westward of cape La Hune ; it is about
2 leagues deep, and ^ of a mile wide, with deep water in most parts of it ; but
there is a sunken rock which lies off the west point of the entrance, nearly one-
third over the channel ; therefore, in sailing in or out of tliis bay, keep the
eastern shore on board.

Two miles up the bay is Lance cove, having anchorage in 14 and 16 fathoms
water, good clean ground. A cable off the southern point of this cove is a small
shoal, with 9 feet water ; and between it and the point there are 6 fathoms. To
sail into this place keep the east point of the bay open of a red cliff point, off
wliich is a rock above water, until the round hill over the valley of the cove is
brought on with t)>e north side of the valley ; you will then be above the shoal,
and may haul int<. the cove in safety. There is a narrow bank which stretches
quite across the ba^ , from the south point of the cove to the opposite shore,
whereon are from 27 to 45 fathoms.

La Hune Harbour lies half a league to the westward of cape La Hune, is fit
only for small vessels, and open to westerly winds ; before it lies an island near
the shore. The channel into the harbour is on the N.W. side of the island ;
there is no danger going in, and vessels anchor close up to the head, in 10

.<■■-'

■w

DANZIG POINT TO CAPE RAY.

fathoms water. This harbour is well adapted for the fisheiy, there being good
fishing ground about it, and a large beach quite across from the head of the har-
bour to La Hune bay, a space of 8U0 feet, exposed to the open air, and well
calculated for drying fish.

Four leagues N.W. J W. from cape La Hune is the entrance of Little River,
which is about 100 fathoms wide at the entrance, and 10 fathoms deep ; a little
way up there is anchorage in 10, 8, and 7 fathoms water, good gruniid. Between
cape La Hune and Little river the land is tolerably high, and forms a bay, where
there are several small islands and rocks above water, tli«^ oiit«M-iiii)!jt of which
lies N.N.E. i E. 8 leagues from tlie Penguin islands, and are cnlled tlie Magnetic
rocks.

S. by W. J W. 7 miles from tlie entrance of Little river, and N. by W. J W.
from the Penguin islands, lie the Little River rocks, which are just above water,
with very deep water all round them.

SAMBA ZS&BS. — The Ramea islands, which are of various extent, both in
height and circuit, lie N.W. i N. 5{ leagues from the Penguin islands, and a
league from the main. They extend east and west .'> miles, and north and south
2 miles, and have several rocks and breakers about them ; but more on the south
side than on the north. The easternmost island is the largest, and is high and
hilly ; the westernmost, called Columbe, is a remarkably high, round island, of
small circuit, with some rocky i&iandr md sunken rocks near it.

There is a harbour for small vessels, formed by the islands which lie near Great
Ramea and the Columbe, named Ramea harbour, where they may lie sheltered
from all winds. To enter this from the westward, give tlie southern point a
berth, on account of some rocks that lie off the starboard island, all of them
being above water ; steer E.N.E. towards the harbour, keeping as nearly mid-
channel as possible, — the passage is above a cable broad, — and run for the
anchorage in Ship cove. This is the second inlet on the north-western shore ;
the vessel will here ride safely, on clean ground, in 5 fathoms water. To enter
from the eastward, keep the northern side of Great Ramea on board, until
arriving at the west end of that island, then steer S.W. into the harbour, keeping
in the middle of the channel, in about 3 fathoms, and anchor as before directed.
This harbour is very convenient for fishing vessels, as in it, and also about the
islands, are several places which seem to be well calculated for erecting stages
and drying fish.

The Ramea Rocks, two in number and close to each other, lie about South,
4 miles from the east end of Great Ramea. W.S.W. distant 3 miles from these
rocks, is a small bank, with only 6 fathoms water on it : and nearly in the middle,
between Ramea and the Penguin islands, is the New bank, with from 11 to 50
fathoms water. To run npon the shoalestpart of this bank, bring the two Ramea
rocks ill one with the sruth-western part of Ramea islands, and between them
and Columbe : and tb' csntranoe of Little river N.E. } E.

Four miles to the westward of Little river is Old Man's hay, which runs in
N.N.E. about 7 miles, and is nearly a mile wide ; the water througliout the bay
is very deep. About Ik miles up the bay on the eastern side is a small island
named Adam's island, behind which vessels can ride, if necessary, iu 30 and 10
fathoms ; but the best anchorage is at the head, in 14 or Ifl fathoms.

Mosquito Harbour lies about half a league to the westward of Old Man's bay,
It is a snug and safe harbour, and will hold a great number of vessels in perfect
Mcurity ; but the entrance is so narrow, being only 48 fathoms in breadth, that

THE BURGEO ISLES, Ac.

ISO

it is difficult to set in or out. The land on hnth sides is lii^'li ; and off the
soiitliern point of entiance is a large white rodj, ahont a cnhle from wliich is a
black rock, above water, having on its sontliern side a sunken rock, whereon the
sea breaks ; from this black rock to the entrance of the harbour, the course is
about N.N.W., distance, one-third of a mile. In sailing either in or out,
give the black rock a small berth, keeping the western shore on board
and if obliged to anchor, be as quick as possible in getting a rope on shore, to avoid
drifting on the rocks. In this harbour the depths are from 18 to :iO fathoms
water, with good riding ever)'where, and plenty of both wood and water. In the
narrows 12 fathoms will be found, the shores being bold-to. South and easterly
winds blow right in, northerly winds right out; and with westerly winds it ia
commonly either quite calm, or descends in irregular puffs.

Fox Island Harbour is formed by an island of the same name ; it lies about
half a league to the westward of Mosquito harbour; between are several rocky
islands and sunken rocks. This is a commodious harbour for small vessels,
which may anchor in 8, !), and 10 fathoms water. Vessels may go in on eitlier
side of the island, and there is no danger but what shows itself.

White Bear Bay. — This bay lies about -2 miles to the westward of Fox island
hiirbour. and N.N.E. one league from Great Kamea island ; it has several islands
at its entrance. It runs in N.E. } N. about 4 leagues, is nearly half a mile wide
in the narrowest part, and has deep water close to both shores in most farts, to
the distance of 8 miles up ; then the ground rises at once to 9 fathoms, vhence
it shoals grad ually to the head, with good anchorage. The best passage into
tlie bay is to the eastward of all the islands. On the S.W. side of Bear island,
which is the easternmost and largest in the mouth of the bay, is a. small harbour,
running in about east, half a mile, with from 10 to 22 fathoms of water ; but there
are several sunken rocks before its mouth, readering it difficult of access. At
the western entrance is a high, round, white island ; and S.W. half a mile from
this island is a black rock, above water. The best passage into the bay, from' the
westward, will be to the westward of this black rock, and between White and
Bear islands ; some of the rocks are above a mile off the land.

At 5 or 6 miles to the westward of White bay, and nearly north from Ramea
Columbe, are two small hacbours, named Red Island harbours, formed by Red
island, which lies close under the land. The westernmost is the largest and best
and has from tt to 8 fathoms water, good anchorage. In going in keep the island
close on board, the outer part of which is composed of steep red cliffs ; hence iti
name.

Tba BVBOBO XBXiSB'!' are a cluster of islands extending about 5 miljss along
slioro, and forming several snug and commodious hiirbours. They lie about
9 miles N.W. hy >V. from Kamea Columbe. To sail into Burgeo from the east-
ward, the lie.st passage is on the N.E. side of Boar island, which is the northern-
most, and lies N.N.W. from Kamea Columbe. S.E. by S. from this island, half a
league, is a rock uncovered at low water, un which the sea generally breaks ;
vessels may go on any side of this rock, the water being deep all round it :
when north-westward of it, keep the north side of Boar island on board, and

■ ;

'The roast Uirnce 1o rapp Bay is ibiokly strewn with ctanpcrs which with the very

fitqueiit logs render the navigation exceedingly difficult. Sbipa bound into the Gulf

should therefore give this part a wide berth.

lid

DANZIO POINT TO CAPE RAY.

i*v,.»

steer W. } N. for Grandy's cove, the north point of which is the first low point
on the starboard bow ; haul round that point and anchor in the cove, in 14 fathoin»,
and moor with a fast on shore. The best place for large ships to anchor in is
betwixt Grandy's cove and a small island lying near the west point of Boar
island, in 20 or 24 fothoms, good ground, and sheltered from all winds. To sail
into Grandy's eove from the westward is dangerous, unless well acquainted ;
there are several safe passages in from the southward and eastward, between the
islands, and good anchorage ; and in bad weather, all the sunken rocks 'discover
themselves ; vessels may, therefore, run in any without fear. The islands do not
afford either wood or water.

Wolf Bay extends inward N.E. by E. a league ; the entrance is E.N.E., 2
miles from Boar island, and 2 miles to the westward of Red island harbour. The
east point of the entrance is composed of low rugged rocks, off which is a sunken
rock, at a distance of a quarter of a mile from shore, whereon the sea breaks in
bad weather. Near the head of the bay is tolerably good anchorage, and plenty
of wood and water.

King's harbour lies round the west point of Wolf bay, and runs in N.E. by
E. I of a mile ; before its mouth is a cluster of little islands. To sxil in, keep
the east point of these islands on board, and steer N. by W. and North for the
entrance of the harbour, anchoring under the east shore, in 9 fathoms.

RA>BA. — On the south side of the islands before King's harbour, and nearly
North, a mile from Boar island, is the entrance into the Ha-ha, which runs in
W.N.W. a mile, and is about a quarter of a mile broad, with from 20 to 10 fathoms
water, and good ground all over. Over the south point of the entrance into this
harbour is a high green hill; and 1} cables from the point is a sunken
ro'tk, that always shows itself. Over the head of the Ha-ha is Richard's head, a
niark for running upon Ramea shoal.

About 4 miles to the westward of the Burgeo isles is the Great Barachais
point, which is low, white, and rocky ; and E.N.E. i E., half a league from this
point is the west entrance into the Great Barachais, wherein is room and depth
of water for small vessels. Between the Burgeo isles and the Great Barachais
point, are several sunken rocks, some of which are half a league from the shure.
OOHXrontB bat. — N.W. ^ N., 4 leagues from the Burgeo isles, is the east
point of the bay of Gonnoire. This point is so far remarkable, that it rises with
an easy ascent to a moderate height, and much higher than the land within it ;
the west point of the bay is low and flat, and to the westward of this are several
small islands. The bay runs in N.E. by N., about a league (from the east point
to the middle head, where it divides into two arms), and is half a league in width,
with 14, 12, 10, and 8 fiithoms close to both shores ; it affords good anchorage,
with clear ground, but open to S.W. winds. The N.E. arm affords shelter for
small vessels from all vinds. To sail in, keep nearest the starboard shore, and
anchor before a small cove on that side, near the head of the arm, in 3^ fathoms.
Towards the head of the arm on the north-western side is a bank of mud and
sand, upon which a vessel may ran, if necessary, and receive no damage.

UUTTBAVBAT. — Gutteau bay lies about 2 leagues to the westward of Gonnoire,
tnd will admit small vessels only. Round the west point of Gutteau is Cinq Serf,
wherein are a number of islands, which form several small snug harbours. Right
off Cinq Serf, about half a league from the shore, is a low rocky island, named
Cipt isluid, westward of which is the safest passage into the largest harbour :
keep near this rock, steering E.N.E. ^ E. towards the south-eastern shore, until

LA POILE BAT, A«.

Itt

Bt low point
1 14 fathoms,
jichpr in is
oiut of Boar
is. To sail
acquainted ;
between the
icks iliscover
ilands do not

is E.N.E.. 2
rbour. The
I is a sunken
sea breaks in
!, and plenty

i in N.E. by
soil in, keep
forth for the
s.

r, and nearly
^hich runs in
to 10 fathoms
nee into this
is a sunken
ard's head, a

Barachais
16 from this
and depth
it Barachais
1 the shore,
is the east
it rises with
witliin it;
are several
le east point
;ue in width,
ancliorage,
shelter for
shore, and
3^ fathoms,
f mud and
ge.

fConnoire,
s Cinq Serf,
urs. Right
and, named
t harbour:
iBhore, until

abreast a small woody island : this is the eastemmoBt except one, and
lies about a quarter of a mile E.N.E. from the white rock in the middle of
the channel ; haul short ronnd this island, and anchor behind it in 7 fn^homs
water ; here you will lie safely, sheltered from all winds, or you may go farther
up, and anchor at the head of the bay, in 4 fathoms.

•r«ak Bruit. — F'our miles to the westward of the rooky island of Cinq Serf, is
tlie harbour of Great Bruit, which is small but commodious, and may be known
by a very high and remarkable mountain over it, half a league inland, which is
the highest land on all the coast ; down this mountain runs a considerable brook,
emptying itself by a cascade into the harbour. Before the mouth of the harbour
are several little islands, the largest of which is of middling height, with three
green hillocks on it. A little outside of thi» island is a round rook, rather high
above water, named the Columbe of Great Bruit ; and a quarter of a mi^e to the
southward of this rock is a low rock ; in a direct line between the low rock and
the rocky isles of Cinq Serf, half a league from the former,, is a sunken rock,
whereon the sea does not break in fine weather. The safest passage into Great
Bruit is to the north-eastward of this rock, and of the islands lying before the
harbour, between them and the three islands (which are low, and lie under the
shore) ; and after you are northward of the sunken rock above mentioned, there
is no danger but what shows itself. The harbour extends N.N.E., half a mile,
and is but a quarter of a mile wide in the broadest part ; but it is bold -to on both
sides, and has a depth of from 4 to 7 fathoms.

Bette B»y> — Westward of Great Bruit, between it and La Poile bay, lies the
bay of Rotte, wherein are a great many islands and sunken rocks. The southern-
most is a remarkable high round rock named the Columbe of Rotte, which lies
N.W. by W. 8} leagues from the southernmost of the Burgees. Between this
island and Great Bruit is a reef of rocks, some above and some under water, but
they do not lie to the southward of the direct line between the islands.

Within the islands of Rotte there is shelter for shipping : the safest passage in
is to the westward of the islands between them and Little Lreland, whioh lies off
the east point of La Poile bay.

XiA roUA BAT. — This large and spacious bay is 36 miles E.N.E. from oape
Ray, and contains several commodious harbours. Its locality may be recognised
by a beacon on the western point of entrance, by the high laud of Great Bruit,
which is only 6 miles eastward of it, and by the land on the east side of the bay,
which rises in remarkably high craggy hills. At a little more than a mile S.W.
from its east point lies Ireland island, a low islet with a large beacon upon it,
and surrounded with sunken rocks, some of which are one-third of a nule from it.
N. k E., about half a mile from Ireland island, is a sunken rock that shows itself
at low water ; this is the only danger in the entrance to the bay, excepting such
as lie very near the shore.

Two miles within the west point of the bay, and N. i W. 2 miles from Ireland
island, is Tweeds or Great harbour, the south point of which is low; this bay
extends inwards W.N.W., a mile, — it is about H cables wide in the narrowest
part, and the anchorage is near its head in 18 or 20 fathoms, clear ground, and
sheltered from all winds.*

* The beacon on the weat point of entrance to La Poile bay is on the Bonth side of this
harboar. A rock (9 feet under water)lieB North 2 cables from it ; benoe veasels entering the
bay must keep oloacr to ita northern than its soathem Bhore.

10 *

4 •

t-
m

K' : S- ■

*■■*■■

m.-

•v / •

¥>

DANZIG POINT T'> CAPE RAY.

At Imlf p TTi'lfl n'')rtli\vnr(1 nf Grent hnrhnnr is T/itflfi bftrhnnr. fTifi nortTi pf^fnt
or >\ icii. iianicil 'J'dofli lioiii), is llm fii-if lii'ili Mirfi' Ite "1 oi> tl o wpsf side of t)i(>
l)ny: 1'ip liiiil.oiir extoiuls iinvnnls W.N.W., nl'OMtn mflp. In sniliii'T in. ^yvptlie
Bonih point a small berth. Vessels iisiinlly andior about half-way up the harbour,
iu 10 fiitlioms water, in front of the stajje on its northern side.

Gallyboy harbour lies on the east side of the bay, opposite Tooth head ; its a
small, snug, and convenient, for ships bound to the westward. The north point
is high and steep, with a white spot in the cliif, and near its southern pnlint are
some hillocks close to the shore. To sail in pr nut, keep the nortli side on board.
Vessels anchor as soon as they are within the inner south point, in or 10
fathr ms, good ground, sheltered from all winds. One mile northward of Gallyboy
harbour, between two sandy coves on (he east side of the bay. and nearly 2 cables
from the shore, is a sunken rock, that just uncovers at low water.

Broad cove is about 2 miles northward of Tooth head, on the same side of the
bay, and is a convenient anchorage, where vessels ride in 11 to 14 fathoms sandy
bottom. On its eastern side are two rocky islets, the outermost of which is
nameil Vineyard. When ascending the bay from this cove, care is required to
avoid the Bennett rock, 2 fathoms under water, distant 2 cables S.E. from the
islet.

The north-east arm lies about 2 leagues from the entrance of the bay, on the
eastern side, and forms a spacious, safe, and commodious harbour. In sailing in
give the low sandy point on the south-east side a small berth, and anchor above
it. where convenient, in 10 fathoms water, good holding ground, slieltered from
all winds, and very convenient for wood and ^^-ater.

ndlan Harbour and De Plate, just within the outer west point of La Poile bay
are two small coves conveniently situated for the fishery, but fit only fur small
vessels which may enter at high water. The Cox rock (Ji feet under water) lies a
little more than half a mile W.S.W. from Indian harbour, at about three cables
from the shore, with Irelsmd island hearing S.E. by E. 1 E. distant 2 ^'^ miles ;
close to it on all sides is a depth of 10 to 15 fathoms.

Ireland island bears from the southernmost of the Burgees N.W. by W. i W.,
0^ leagues. It is distant nearly 11 leagues eastward of cape Ray.

From Little Ireland to Harbour la Coue and La Moine bay, the course is
W.N.W. i W., 9 or 10 miles; between lies the B«nj of (Jarin. and several coves,
fit only for small vessels, before which there are many islands and sunken rocks
scattered along the shore, but none of them lie without the above course. In bad
weather, all the Bunken rocks discover themselves. To sail into Garia bay, you
will, in coasting along shore, discover a white head, which is the south point of
an island, lying under the lnud, off the eastern point of the bay, and a little to
the 'vestward of two green hillocks on the main : bring this white point N.N.E.,
and steer directly tf)wardsit; keep between it and tlie several islands that lie to
the W.S.W.-ward. From the white point, the course into the bay is N. by W. :
bom)W towards the eastern point, which is low. The bay of Garia afloids plenty
of timber, large enouj^h for building ships.

The S.W. point of the entrance into Harbour la Ooue, named Ruse Bliiuche
point (near to which are some rocks above water), is tolerably high, and the land
near the shore over Harbour la Cone and La Moine Imy is much lii<>her ilian
any other land in the vicinity : by this tlie harbours may be known. La Mdiiie
bay extends inwnivls N.E. -J E., almiit 4 niih'S, and is one quarter of a mile broad
iu tHe nuri'uwest pait. Off llie east x^oiiit are ^ome smiill islands and ruckb ai>ove

DEAD ISLANDS HARBOUR.

18S

i(It>. nl" tltft

n. ;.'ivt' tlie
le liarbonr,

lead ; itn a
lorth po^nt

1 pdint are
i on board,
in n or 10
if Gallyboy
ly 2 cables

side of the
onis sandy
>f which is
required to
1. from the

lay, on the
n sailing in
chor above
Itered from

a Poile bay
ly fur small
rater) lies a
iree cables

2 ,«, miles ;

y W. J W.,

le course is
veral coves,
inlcen rnclcs
se. In bad
ia bay. you
ith point of
d a little to
int N.N.E.,
) that lie to
N. by W. :
Olds plenty

se BLinche
ud the land
ijiher thHn
La Mdiiie
mile bioad
uckb above

wi'er. In Railiiirr in. krpp tlie west point on I'oard, until within the
bay; tlifn edge ovor tdWiinls tin! oast siioie, nnd run up to (he liead of the bay,
whtn-e nr ^borage may be taken in 10 or 11 fathoms, good groimd ; here is
plenty of wood and water.

To sail into Harbour la Coue, which lies at the west entrance into La Moine
biy, steer in N.N.W., between a rock above water, in the mouth of the harbour,
and the west shore ; when tlie vessel is within the rock, haul to the westward
into the harbour and anchor in 6 or 8 fathoms water, mooring with a hawser
on shore: or steer into the arm, which runs in N.E. by E. from the
harbour, and anchor in 20 fathoms, sheltered from all winds. This has been the
resort of the small fishing vessels for many years.

To the westward of Rone Blanche point is the harbour of the same name ; it
is small and snug, and the anchorage is in !) fathoms water. The channel into
the harbour is between the island lying oti its western point, and Rose Blannlie
point ; give the island a good berth, on account of some sunken rocks which lie
on its eastcn-n side, and keep the west side of the small island wliich lies cl >se to
the point on board, then anchor within the N.E. point of this island in 9 fathoms.
For a stranger to enter into the N.W. part of the harbour would be dangerous,
because of its numerous islands and rocks.

Mill Face is a small cove, 2 miles to the westward of Rose Blanche point,
wherein is anchorage for small vessels in 1 fathoms- Off the west point of the
ove are two small islands, and several sunken rocks ; the passage in is to tlie
eastward of these.

Seven miles to the westward of Ruse Blanche point are the Burnt islands
which lie close under the shore, and are not easily to be distinguished from it ;
behind these is shelter for small vessels. Off these islands are sunken rocks, some
of which are half a mile from the shore.

Six miles to the westward of Rose Blanche point, are Conney and Otter bays,
both of which are rendered difficult of access by several sunken rocks outside the
passage, which do not show themselves in fine weather; but within Otter bay,
there is good riding in 7, H, and 9 fathoms water.

SBAD ZBXiAllDS BABBOTTB — ^^W.N.W. f W., nearly 4 leagues from Rose
Blanche point are the Dead islands, which lie close under the shore. In tlie
passage to Dead Islands harbour, between the islands and the main, is good
anchorage for shipping in 6 or 8 fathoms, sheltered from all winds ; but it is very
dangerous of access to strangers, as there are several sunken rocks in both the
east and west entrances. The eastern entrance can be known by a remarkable
white spot on one of the islands ; bring this spot to bear N. by W., and steer in
for it, ketiping the starboard rockj on board, and leave the white f. potted island
on the port side, Tiie western entrance may be recognised by a high point on
the main, a little to the westward of the islands, on the western part of which
point is a green hillock ; keep this point close on boar , until within
a little round rock, near to the westernmost island, at thj eastern point of
entrance ; then haul over to the eastward for the great island, distinguished by a
high hill, and steer E. | N., keeping the before-mentioned little rock in sight.

POKT Ainc BA8QVB. — From the Dead isles to Port aux Basque, the course
and distance are W.N.W. about 4 miles ; between lie several small islands close
under the shore, and there are sunken rocks, some of which are half a mile fi u;u
the shore. Port aux Basque is a small commodious harbour, lying aboui, i^
Uagues to the eastward of cnpe Ray. To fall in with it, bring tlie Su^'ar-Lu.-if

•• •(.

184

DANZIO POINT TO CAPE RAY.

hill orer cape Ray to bear N.N.W. | W.. or the west end of the Table Mountain
N.N.W. Steer in for the land with either of these, marks, and you will fall
directly in with the harbour: the S.W. point named Channel head, is of
moderate height, and of white appearance ; but the N>E. point is low and flat,
and has olosa to it, a black rock above water. In order to avoid the S.E. shoal,
on which are 4 fiathoma, and which lies S.E. ^ E., | of a mile from Channel head,
bring the flag-staff which is on the hill north-westward of the head, on with the
west point of Road island, N.V/. by N. : that direction will lead in the. middle
of the channel, between the East and West Baldwin rocks, the former of which
always show themselves, and must be left on the starboard hand:, continue
this course up to Road island, and keep the west point of that island on board
in order to avoid the Pancake rock, which stretches out from a cove on the west
shore, opposite the island.

As soon as you are above the island, haul to the E.N.E., and anchor anywhere
between it and Harbour island, in 9 or 10 Tathoms. good ground, and
sheltered from all winds ; this is named the road, or outer harbour, and ia the
only anchoring place for men-of-war, or ships drawing a great deptli of water, but
small vessels always lie up in the inner harbour. To sail into it, run in between
the west shore and the S.W. end of Harbour island, and anchor behind the said
island, in 3 or 4 fathoms. In some parts of this harbour ships can lay their
broadsides so bear to the shore as to reach it with a plank. This place has been
frequented by fishermen for many years ; it is well situated for their purposes,
and is capable of most excellent accomntodations. A mile to the eastward of
Basque is Little bay.

OBAm BAT lies about 2 miles to the westward of Port aux Basque ; there
are several small islands and rocks in and before it, the outermost of which are
not above a quarter of a mile from the shore ; on these the sea generally breaks.
It is only fit for small vessels.

From Port aux Basque to point Enragee, the bearing and distance are W.N.W.,
about a league, and thence to cape Ray, N.N.W., nearly li leagues. Point
Enragee is low; off it, to the eastward, are some sunken rocks, a mile from
the shore, whereon the seu breaks.

OAva SAT and jAght. — Cape Ray (Split cape) the south-west extremity of
Newloundluud, is in lat. 47° 37' N.. long. 59° 18' W. The land of the cape
is \ ttiy remarkable ; near the shore it is low, but 3 miles inland is a very high
table ntountaiu, which rises almost perpendicularly from the low land, and appears
to be quite fiat at the top, excepting a small hillock on the S.W. point of it. This
land may be seen, in clear weather, from the distance of 16 or 18 leagues. Close
to the foot of the table mountain, between it and the point of the cape, is a high
round hill, resembling a sugar loaf (known as the Sugar-Loatof cape Ray), whose
summit is a little lower than that of the table mountain ; and to the northward
of this hill, under the table mountain, are two other conical hills, resembUng
sugar-loaves, which are not so high as the former ; one or other of these sugar-
loaf hills is, from all points of view, seen detached from the table mountain.
The hghthouse on the western side of the cape is a good mark of recognition ; it
is an hexagonal wooden building 41 feet high and painted white,— the light
(flashing every 10 seconds) is probably visible at the distance of 20 miles.*

• Cape Ray light when seen at a considorable distance has the appearance of a stead;
light.

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

Ill

il« Mountain
you will fall
head, is of
low and flat,
B S.E. shoal,
hannel head,
on with the
1 the. middle
er of which
d : . continue
id on board
on the west

or anywhere
ground, and
r, and is the
of water, but
It in between
lind the said
:an lay their
ace has been
eir purposes,
eastward of

asque; there
>f which are
rally breaks.

are W.N.W.,
es. Point
a mils Arom

extremity of
of the cape
a very high
and appears
ttofit. This
S^ues. Close
pe, is a high
Ray), whose
6 northward
, resembling
these sugar-
e mountain,
cognition ; it
e,— the light
niles.*

;e of ft steady

There in a sandy bay between cape Ray and point Enrag^e, wherein shipt
may nnchor with the winds from N.N.W. to East, but they should be cautious not
to be surprised there with S.W. winds, which blow direotly in, and cause « great
sea. The ground is not the best for holding, being fine sand. Towards the east
aida of this bay is a small ledge of rooks, a mile from shore, on which the sea
does not break in fine weather. The best place for large ships to anchor in is,
tu bring the point of the cape N.W., and the high white sand-hill in the bottom
of t' ^<^y N J!., in 10 fathoms water. Small Teasels may lie farther in. Be
cat ji to run so far to the eastward as to bring the end of the table mountain

on with the sand-hill in the bottom of the bay, by which means the ledge of
rooks, before mentioned, 'will be avoided.

N.W. i W., nearly a mile from the point of the cape, is a small ledge of rocks,
named the Cape rocks, whereon the sea always breaks ; and one mile to the
northv-ard of the cape, close under the land, is a low rocky island. There is a
«)iaunel between the ledge and the cape, with 14 and 16 fathoms water ; and also
between it and the island with 4 and 6 fathoms ; but the tides, which run here
with great rapidity, render it unsafe for shipping.

The soundings, under 100 fathoms, do not extend above a league from the land
to the southward and eastward of the cape, nor to the westward and northward
of it, except on a bank which lies off Port aux Basque, between 2 and H leagues
from the land, whereon are from 70 to 100 fathoms, good fishing ground. S I!]. |
S., about 13 leagues from Port aux Basque, in the lat. of 47° 14' N., is said to be
a bar 'vhereon are 70 fathoms.

1 'I9BS. — Between cape Chapeau Rouge and oape Ray, in all the bays,

in., . ..de generally flows till i) o'clock, on full and change, and its perpendicular
rise is about 7 or 8 feet on springs ; but it must be observed, that the tides are
everywhere influenced by the winds and weather. On the coast, between cape
Chapeau Rouge and St. Pierre, the current sets generally to the S.W. On the
south side of Fortune bay it sets to the eastward, and on the north side to
the westward. Between cape La Hune and oape Ray, the flood sets to the west-
ward in the offing, very irregularly ; but generally 2 or 3 hours after it is high
water by the shore. The tide, or current, is inconsiderable, excepting near cape
Ray, where it is strong, and at times sets quite contrary to what might be
expected from the common course of the tides, and much stronger at one time
than at another : these irregularities seem to depend chiefly on the winds.

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

Cape AagniUe, bearing N. i E., 17 or 18 miles firom cape Ray, is the nmrthem-

most point of land you can see, after passing to the westward of cape Ray ; it is
high table land, and the country above it is covered with wood. Between the
high land of the two capes, the coast is low, and the shore forms a bay, wherein
are the great and little rivers of Cod Roy ; the northernmost, or Great Cod Roy
river, is a barred-harbour, which, at high water, will only admit yessek whose
drau;^ht does not exceed 8 or 10 feet. The shore between the two capes may be
approached to about half a league, there being no danger at that distance off ijt. It ii

Ii:

CAPE RiY TO CAPE NORMAN.

a finn(\ snlnion-fisViPry. aiifl is adapted for bnilding small vessels and boats, there
beitiyr tiinlier in nliiniiliii y.

Tlie island Cod Hoy lies 1;J or 2 miles to Hie southward nf cnpp .\na;iiille. olose
under the iiigh Isind, and is a low, Hat. fi[recn island, of nearly •> mWvy in compass,
in the yhape of a horse-shoe, forming, between it and the main, a small snug
harbour for vessels of 10 or 12 feet di*aught, the safest entrance to which is from
the southward.

Cud Roy Road lies sojith-eastward from the island, and affords good anchorage
for shipping, in 8, 7, or (i fathoms, on a clay bottom. With the south point of
the island bearing about W.N.W., and tlie point of the beach on the inside of the
island, at the south entrautd of the harbour, on with a point on the main to the
n<n'thward of the island, you will lie in 7 fathoms, and nearly hnlf a mile from
the shore. A league to the southward of Cod Roy inland is a high bluif point,
named Stormy point, off which a shoal stretches out a full half mile ; tliis point
covers the road from the S.S.E. winds, and there is good anchorage all along the
shore, between it and the island.

8T. OSORas BAT. — From cape Anguille to cape St. George th^ course and
distance are N.N.E. I E., about 12 leagues ; between these two cai)es is the bay
of St. George, which extends inward E.N.E., 18 leagues from the former, and
E.S.E., 11 leagues from the latter. At the head of this bay, on the south side,
rouxtd a low point of land, is a hf^rbour, with anchorage in 8, 10, or 1£ fathoms
water. The river St. George empties itself into the head of this Lay, liu it is
not navigable for anything but boats, and it appears to be fast filling up with sand-
On the north side of the bay, before the isthmus of Port-au-Port, is good anchornge.
in 7 or 8 fathoms, with northerly winds; from ofT this place a fishing-bank
stretches'two-third across the bay, with from 7 to IJ) fathoms water on it, dark
sandy bottom.

Cape St. George lies in lat. 48' 28' North, and may be readily known, not only
by its being the luath point of the bay of St. George, hut also by the steep cliffs
on the north part of it. which rise perpendicularly from i\w sea to a considerable
height ; and by Red Inland, which lies 5 miles north-eastward of the cape, and
half a mile from the shore.* This island is about IJ miles in length, and of a
middling Jieight : tl;e steep cliffs around it are of a reddish colour-. There is
anchoniLf uiili off-skove winds under the N.H end of the island, before a ??.ndy
COM' un the nmin, which lies just northward of the steep cliff's, in 12 or 14
lathoras ; vesselo will there ride, sheltered from the S.W. winds by the island, and
frcm the s»>utherly and easterly vinds by the main land: but there is no shelter
whaie^'er wiih winds from the North or N.V/., although this place was formerly
much resorted to by v^i^sels in the fishii.;g trade.

From abreast Red island, distant 4 or 5 miles, to Long p(i?nt, at the entrance
of the bay of Porc-au-Port, the bearing and distance are E. by N., 7 or 8 leagues ;

from R
nearly

20 leagi

• The deep passage hitherto sepaia'inp Red island frora the main, has been recently
dosed by a bank of shingle t'.irown \'p by tLi sea. Vessels are, consequently, no longer
cble to make use of the c'lannel when coast'ng along this part of Newfourdland, but
must pi?3i '•utside Red island, giving it a ^'ood burlli. Ttie bank is a prolongat on of th?;t
named Mnlon, a pebble beach jutting out from tlie east siJe of the is'and, amt violent
storms appear to ha^e bo considerably Ifssenei th« water, that only boats can now
<^roiS it.

ndts. there

[iiille. close
1 compass,
small snug
ich is from

anchorage
li point of
isiJe of the
iiain tn the
mile from
bluif point,
t}iis point
. along the

course and
I in the bay
urmer, and
south side,
I'Z fathntns
', liu it is
with sand-
anchorage,
shing-bank
m it, dark

1, not only
steep cliffs
msiderable
cape, and
and of a
There is
re b. scndy
12 or 14
bland, and
no shelter
s formerly

entrance
8 leagues ;

en recently
no longer
ndland, but
it on of thut
aii'l violent
can now

> r

PORT-AU-PORT.

1»7

from Red island to Guernsey island, in the mouth of the bay of islands, E.N.E.,
nearly 16 leagues ; from Red island to cape St. Gregory, N.E. by E. i E., fully
20 leagues ; and from Red island to point Rich, which is the north poi^t of
Ingrenachoix ba.v, N.E. by E. 4!) leagues.

FO&T-AV-POBT. — The laud between Red island and the entrance into Port-
PU-Port is rather low, with sandy beaches, except one remarkable high hillock,
named Round head, close to the shore, about 2 leagues to the E.N.E-ward of
Red island; but up the country, over Port-au-Port, are high lands; and if dis-
tant 3 or 4 leagues off at sea, the long point of land which forms the bey can-
not be discerned. TIua baj' is capacious, being about 5 miles broad at the entrance,
and four leagues deep, running in to the south and south-westward, with good
anchorage in most parts of it.

Long point is the west p( Kit of the bay ; it is low and rocky, and a ledge of
rocks extends from it E.N.E. nearly a mile. S.E. by E. J E., 4 miles from Long
point, and half a league from the east shore, lies Fox island, which is small, but
of middling height. From the north end of this island a shoal stretches out
nearly 2 miles to the N.N.E-ward, named the Fox's tail; and, nearly in the
middle of the bay, betsveen Fox island and the west shore, lies the middle
ground, on one part of which, near the S.W. end, there are not above 3 or 4 feet
water. From the head of the bay, piojecting out into the middle of it, is a low
point known as Middle point, off which, extending 2 miles N.E. by N. is a shoal
spit, part of which dries at low water ; this Middle point divides the baj' into
two parts, named East and West bays.

From the head of the East bay over to the bay of St. George, the distance is
above a quarter of a mile ; this isthmus is very low, and has a pond in the
middle of it, into which the sta frequently dashes, especially at high tides, and
with gales of wind from the southward. On the east side of it is a tolerably high
mountain, rising directly from the isthmus, and flat at the top : to the northward
of this, and at about 5 miles distant from the isthmus, is a conspicuous valley or
hollow, hereafter to be used as a mark. N.E. by E. J E., above 2 leagues from
Long point, and half a league from the shore, lies Sliag island, which appears at
a distance like a high rock, and is easily to be distinguished from the main ; and
W.N.W. about a league from it, lies the middle of Long ledge, a narrow ledge of
rocks, stretching E.N.E. and W.S.W. about 4 miles; the eastern part if them is
above water, and the channel into the bay of Port-au-Port, between the west end
of this ledge and the reef which stretches off from the west point of the day, is a
eague wide. ,

Li sailinj^ in, if coming from the south-westward, advance no nearer to the
Long point of the bay than U miles, ui til you have brought the valley in the side
of the mountain before mentioned (on the east side of the isthmus), over the east
ei;d of Fox island, or to the eastward of it, which will then bear South a little
easterly ; Long point reef will then be cleared, and the vessel may haul into the
bay with safety ; but. if coming from the N.E. without the Long ledge, or turning
into the bay in order to keep clear of the S.W. end of Long ledge, bring the
isthmus, or the foot of the mountain (wliich is on ih*' east side of tiie isthmus),
open to the westward of Fox island, nearly twice the broadtli of the island, and it
will lead into the bay. clear of Long ledge ; and wlioi\ Shag 'sland is brought
on with the foot of the high land on the south side of Coai river, bearing then
£. i $., the vessel will be within Long ledge. There is also a safe passage into
the bay, between the Long Jedgt and the main, on either side of Shag island,

■

f-'i

■t, ■

1 ?.

'■■'■.

-.•■

188

CAl'E RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

though caro must be taken to avoid a amall shoal of 2 J fathoms, lying W. 1 y K
a mile from the island.

To sail up into West bay and Head harbour, keep the western shore on
board; tliis shore is bold-to. In turning between it and the Middle ground
stand no nearer to the Middle than into 8 fathoms ; but you may stand to the
spit of the Middle point into or 5 fathoms. The anchorage in West bay is in
about 8 fathoms, and in Head harbour in about 5 fathoms. The West road lies
before a high stone beach, about 2 miles south westward of Long point, where
you may li« very secure from westerly and N.W. winds, in about 10 or 12
fathoms water ; tlus beach is steep-to. and forms an excellent place for landing
and drying fisli. There is a good place at the northern end of Fox island for the
same purpose. The whole bay and the adjacent coasts aboun'' Ith cod, and
exten^nve lisbing banks lie all along them.

The East road lies between Fox island and the east shore. To sail ur .(,
vessels should keep the high bluff head, which is about a league E.N.E i. ^,ihe
island, bearing to thr; southward of S.E. by E. k E., until the isthmus is brought
to the eastward of Fox islaiid ; they will then be within the shoal named the Fox's
tail, and may haul to the southward, and anchor anywhere between the island
and the main, in from 10 to m fathoms.

To sail up into the East bay. pass between t)ie island and the east shore ; and
when above the island, approadi no nearer to the main than half a mile,
until abreast a bluff pyint above the island, known as Road point, just
abovff which is the best anchorage with N.E. winds, in about 12 fathoms water.
To sail up into the East bay between the Middle ground and the Fox's tail, bring
the said bluff point on with the S.W. point of Fox island ; this mark will lead
up in the fairway between the two shoals. Give the island a berth, and anchor
as before directed, in from H to 12 fatiioms water

BAT OT XSXkAiros. — From Ijong point at thu entrance of Port-au-Port tu
to the Hay of Islands, tlie bearing and distance are N.H. by E. \ E., 8 leagues.
Be careful to avoid tiie Long l«dge. The land between is of consideralile
height, rising in craggy barren hills, directly from the shore. Tl»e Bay of Islands
may be known by tlie many islands in tl»e mouth of it, particularly the three
named Guernsey, Tweed and Pearl which arts nearly of equal height with the
land on the main. If bound for Lark or York harbours, which lie on the
S.W. side of the bay. and coming from the southward, run in between
Guernsey island and the South head, both of which are bold-to; but with
southerly and S.W. winds approach not too near the South head, lest calms and
sudden gusts of windshould proceed from the high land, under which vessels cannot
anchor witli safety. There are several tthannels formed by tite different islands,
through wliich vessels may sail into or out of the bay, there being no danger but what
shows itself, excepting a small ledge of rocks, whicii lies lialf a mile north-east-
ward from the northern Shag rock, and in a line with the vwo Shag rocks in one.
By bringing the south Shag rock open on either side of the north Shag rock,
a vessel will go clear V, the eastward or westward of the ledge. The safest passage
into this bay from the northward, is between the two Siiag rocks, and then between
Tweed and Pv>arl islnnds.

P'rom Guernsey island to Tortoise head, which is the north point of York
harbour, and the S.E. point of Lark harbour, the course and distance are nearly
S. by W. \ W., h miles, l^ark Hnrhour extends inwards W. by S. nearly 2
mileti, and is one-third of a mile broad in the entrance, whicli is the narroweit

CAPE ST. GREGORY.

ISd

I W. ly N

n shore on
[dl« ground
and to the
It bay is in
st road lies
oint, where
it io or 12
for landing
;land for the
th cod, and

mil ur (,
.N.E ., „the
!i is brought
ed the Fox's
1 the island

shore ; and
alf a mile,

point, just
loms water.
l's tail, bring
irk will lead

and anchor

-au-Port to

8 leagues.

consideralde

y of Islands

y the three

it with the

lie on the
in between
but with
it calms and
ssels cannot
ent islands,
!er but what

north-east-
ocks in one.

Shag rock,
fest passage
len between

part. In sailing into it with a large ship, keep the port shore on board, and
anchor with a low point on the starboard side, bearing W.N.W., N.N.W., or
N.N.E., and you will ride in (1 or 7 fathoms water, secure from all winds.

York Harbour lies W.S.W., near) -^ league, from Tortoise head. There is
good turning room between the Head and Governor island, which lies before the
harbour ; but care must be taken to avoid a choal running off from a low beach
point on the west end of Governor island, nnined Sword point. There is also a
shoal which spits off from the neyt point of Governor island, which must also
be avoided : Tortoise head just touching Sword point will lead clear of it. In
sailing in, give Sword point a berth ; passing which, the best anchoring ground
is in 10 fathoms, along a sandy beach on the main, with Tortoise head open of
Sword point. West and north-westerly winds blow here with great violence.

Harbour island lies at the entrance of the river Hiimber, and S. by E. j E., 7
miles from Guernsey island; and its S.W. point is Wood's harbour, a place unfit
for shipping. The river Humber, at about 5 leagues writhin the entrance,
becomes narrow, and the stream is so rapid in some places, for about 4 leagues
up, to a lake, that it is with great difficulty that even a boat can stem the
current. The banks of this river are well clothed with timber, and formerly a
great salmon-fishery was carried on here.

The North and South Arms are both long inlets, with very deep water up to
their heads. On the east side of Eagle island, between the North and South
Arms, is anchorage is 8, 10, or 12 fathoms water. Under the north side of
Harbour island also is good anchorage with S.W. winds ; and opposite to the
S.E. end of Harbour island, on the south side of the bay, is Frenchman's covk.
wherein is good anchorage in from 20 to 12 fathoms.

The Bay of IsLnds was formerly much frequented by vessels in the cod-fishery,
and stages were erected at Small bay, which lies a little on the outside of South
head ; and a large beach on Sword point, in Governor island, is an excellent
place for drying the fish.

From the north Shag rock to cape St. Gregory the course and distance are
nearly N.E. 8 miles ; and thence 13 or 14 miles, on a similar bearing, will carry
to the entrance of Bonne ba}'. The land near the shore, from the north
Shag rock to cape St, Gregory, is low ; but a very little way inland it rises into
a high mountain, terminating at the top in round hills. Along this part of the
coast there are sunken rocks a quartev of a mile from the shore.

OAPB BT. OltBOOKT ib liigk. and between it and Bonne bay the land rises
directly from the sea-shore to a considerable height. It is the most northerly
land seen when sailing along shore between Red island and the Bay of Islands.

BONNB BAT* — This bay may be rtTOgiiiscd at the distance of 4 or 5 leagues
by the land about it ; all that on its south-western side being very high and hilly,
and that on its nortii -eastern side, and thence also along the sea-coast to the
north v.nrd, being low and flat; though at about a league inland, there is a range
of mounta'ns parallel with the sea-coaat. Over the south side of the bay is a
very high mountain terminating at the top in a remarkable round hill, which is
very conspicuous to an observer northward of the hay. This bay extends in-
wards S.E. nearly 2 ^ '^ues, then branches into two arms, one of which runs in to
the sot 'hward, and the other to the eastward. The southern arm affords the
best at chorage ; small vessels should ride just above a low woody point on the
westeri. side of tlie entianoe to this arm, before a sandy beach, in B or 10 fathoms
water, ftSnut ii cahle from the shore. There is no other Hnchorage in less than

if^l

14C

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

30 or 40 fathoms, excepting at the head of the arm, wliere there are 25 to 20
fathoms water. When entering tho east arm, keep the starboard shore on board ;
and a little way round a point on the south side of the entrance will b^ found a
small cove, with good anchorage in 17 to -10 fathoms ; it is. however, necessary
to moor to the shore. Tiiere is also a snug cove close within the north point,
with anchorage in H or 7 fathoms water.

Vessels entering or leaving Bonne bay, with W.S.W. winds, should not
approach the weather shore, lest they be becalmed, or meet with heavy gusts of
wind. The depth of water is too great to admit of anchoring.

At 10 miles to the northward of Bonne bay is Martin point, high and white;
oflf which, about tliroe-quarters of a mile, is a small ledge of rocks, whereon the
sea breaks. Broom point is low and white, and lies about a league to the north-
ward of Martin point; about half a mile W.S.W. from it lies a sunken
rock that seldom shows itself. On the north side of Broom point lies the bay of
St. Paul, wherein vessels may anchor with off-shore winds ; but it is quite
exposed to the sea.

comr HBAS lies about 3 miles to the northward of the bay of St. Paul ; this
is a promontory, which has the appearance of an island, being joined to the main
only by a very low and narrow neck of land. About three-quarters of a mile off
this head lies Steering island, which is low and rocky, and is the only island on
the coast between the Bay of Islands and point Rich. Cow cove lies on tiie south
side of Cow head, and ships may lie there, in from 7 to 10 fathoms, sheltered from
northerly and easterly winds. Shallow bay lies on the north side of Cow head,
and has water sufficient for small vessels. At the N.E. side of the entrance is a
cluster of rookj' islands, extending E.N.E. and W.S.W. ; and at the W.S.W. side
are two sunken rocks close to each other, which generally show themselves ; they
lie a cable from the shore, and there is a channel into the bay on either
side of them. Steering island lies right before this bay, audit may be passed on
either side; but come not too near its N.E. end, as there are some sunken rocks
extending from it. This is consideied the best situation for a fishery on all the
coast, and the grounds about its environs are eminently productive.

XirORXslTACHOIX BAT. — Point Rich, the nortiiern point of Ingrenachoix
bay, is distant above 50 miles, N.E. JE. from Steering island; all the way
between Shallow bay and the south point of Ingrenachoix ba3% the coast forms
nearly a straight line without creek, cove, or shelter from seaward, though vessels
may here and there anchor, with ofl'-shore winds.

About <i leagues from Steering island, i a mile inland, stands Portland hill,
so named from its resemblance to the bill of Portland in the English Channel;
the appearance of this hill ctmtinues the same from whatever poi.iL ii is viewed.

rORT 8AVNDSB8 and HAVTKES HARBOTO.— These are <^^ituated within,
and to the eastward ol'Ingremiclioix buy.

Keppel itsland lies at the entrance of Ingrenachoix. and though at a distan'*" it
appears joined to the main land, yet there is a passage on either side of it. In
sailing into port Saundiirs, the island will be left on the stnrhoard side, and when
half a mile within the entrance, anchor in li or 14 fathoms. Vessels pro-
ceeding to the liend of the harbour must keep the port shore on board, to avoid a
ledge of rocks that lies nearly in mid-channel. Port Saunders is considered the
best harbour for vessels bound southward.

The entrance to Hnwkes harbour is to the southward of Keppel island. The

POINT RICH AND LIGHT.

141

stfivboard slioro is shoal, and lins a sand-hank stretchin<» along the land, and
riinning out two-thirds of llie passage over, a greiit part of n"iiich dries at low
water. The course in is E.S.E., keeping nearer the island than the niain.'imtil
the eastern end of the former, a low sandy beach, bears N.E, by N. or N.N.E. ;
then steer S.S.E. ^ E. for a small island which is situated farther up the
harbour ; keeping the port shore well on board, run direct for this island, and
when j'ou have brought the point, at the south entrance of the harbour, io bear
N.N.E. i N., and are at the S.S.E. point of a bay on the starboard side of the
harbour, you will then be beyond the shoal ground, and may anchor in 12 fathoms
water ; or else run within half a mile of the small island, and anchor there,
wliich will be more convenient for both wood and water. This is the best
harbour for ships bound to the northward. The land round about these harbours
is generally low and covered with wood. Vessels may occasionally anchor outside
these, in the bay of Ingrenachoix, according to the prevailing winds.

FOZHT BXCB and Zilgtat. — Point Rich is the south-western point of a
peninsula, which is joined to the main by a very narrow neck of land. It is
everywhere of moderate height, and projects farther to seaward than any
land on this side of Newfoundland. Off it at a short distance is a ruck under
water; hence a good berth should always be given it. The lighthouse (a white
hexagonal tower, 40 feet high, and having near it the keeper's dwelling, also
painted white) shows a light linshintj every 15 seconds, at 180 feet above the sea,
visible IP miles from all parts of the sea horizon ; its geographical po.sition is
considered to be lat. 50' 41' 50" N., long. 57° 25' 28" W.

Rounding point Rich, on its northern side, you will meet with Port au Choix,
small, but }'et capable of admitting a ship of burthen, mooring head and stern ;
to sail in you should keep the starboard shore ou board, and anchor just above a
small island lying in the middle of the harbour. In this place, and also in Boat
cove, which lies a little to the north-eastward, there are several stages and places
for drying fish.

Old Port au Choix lies to the eastward of Boat cove ; it is a small but safe
harbour, having at its entrance an island, named Harbour island, and on its
western side some rocks above and under water. There is also another island
lying E.N.E. \ N., distant nearly a mile from Harbour island, about which are
several rocks, some of which stretch out towards Harbour island, thereby render-
ing the passage between them very narro'.v. There are 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathoms
water between Savage island and the main, and 4 and 5 fathoms between Savage
island rocks and harbour island, and nearly the same depth between Harbour
isliind and the western shore.

To sail into Old Port au Choix, on the western side of Harbour island,
keep the island close on board : but to go in on the eastern side of the island,
give the north-eastern point of the island a berth, and having well entered,
anchor anywhere on the port side of the harbour, only avoiding the starboard
side, for a shoal of sand and mud runs all along it.

BAY OP BT. JOHN. — This is an open and extensive bay (bounded by point
Rich to the southward, and point FeroUe to the northward), having several
islands within it, and some sunken rocks. The largest of these islands, St. John,
is about 2i miles in length, and \\ miles broad, and lies E.N.E. distant 8} miles
from point Rich ; on its south-western side is a small harbour, well calculated for
the cod-iishery, but too much exposed for shipping, as south-westerly winds com-
monly diive iu a heavy sea. Ou the south-eastern, or inner side of the island,

m-^

iff^

I4.i

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

and between it tind Konnd head islnnd, vessals may lie much more secure, in 14
or Irt fntiioras water, and sheltered from most winds ; this is considered to be the
o'lly safe anchorage in the whole bay.* West from St. John island, a long mile, is
riat i.-iland. having a rock above water at its southern end. The channel between
St. Jolin and Flat islands has from 18 to 26 fathoms in it, and the shores are
biith b(>ld to. The Twin-islands lie N.E byN. from Flat island, distant a league
end have no danger about them. To the westward of the Twins are several
scattered rocks above water, named the Bay islands ; they have deep water
around them, but no anchorage. At the bottom of the bay the land is very high,
and there is the Itttle river of Castors, the entrance to which is dangerous and
slittllow, therefore seldom frequented. From the northern point of this bay a
rocky shoal extends all the way to point FeroUe, stretching out three miles from
the shore.

■ roxifT rSBOXiXifi lies N.E. by E. i E. from point Rich, diistant 22 miles; it
is of moderate heiglit, and joined to the main by a narrow neck of land, which
divides the bay of St. John from New FeroUe bay, making it appear like an
island, when seen from a distance. Its northern shore is bold-to ; and this part
of the coast will easily be known by the adjacent table land of St. John, the west
end of which mountain lies from the middle of Ferolle point S. by W., and its
eastern end S.E. ^ S.

New Ferolle bay is a small cove lying to the eastward of the point, and is quite
flat all over, there being not more than 2 and S\ fathoms at any part. It is quite
open to the northerly winds, and has a stage on each side of it, with plenty of
room for others.

ST. BKABOABBT BAT is large, and has several islands within it, also various
inlets or coves, affording good anchorage, particularly on its western side, which
is the best situation for ships, being most clear of danger, and convenient for
wooding and watering. On its banks are spruce and fir trees in plenty, and many
rivulets of fresh water. Dog island, which is only an island at high water, is to
the eastward of point Ferolle fully 3 miles ; being higher than any land near it,
it has the appearance, when seen from the eastward, of an island situated at some
distance from the main.

OZiS rSBOL&a. — Ferolle island lies about 5 miles to the eastward of Dog
island. This island lies parallel to the sliore, and forms the harbour of Old
P^erolle, which is very pood and safe : the best entrance to it is at the S.W. end
of the island, passing to the southward of a small island in the entrance, which
is bold-to. As soon as you are within it, haul up E.N.E., and anchor under the
S.W. end of Ferolle island, in 8 or 9 fathoms, good ground, quite land-locked.
There is also good anchorage anywhere along the inside of the island, and a good
anchorage anywhere along the inside of the island, and a good channel up to the
N.E. end thereof. There are some little islands lying at the N.E. end of Ferolle
island : and on the outside ar6 some ledges of rocks, a short distance off.

BAT or 8T. asiniVZBVB.— From the north end of P'eroUe island to St.
Genevieve head the course is E.N.E. 4| miles ; and thence to the west end of

* In 1865 the Catinat, when approaching this anchorage from Bouth-weetward, touched
on s rock with 1 1 i feet water on it, situated a cable East from Horn islet, on the weit
side of the entrance ; oonsequently vesMls should keep at least 1} cables from the islet.

BAY OF ST. BARBE.

14S

Currant island it is north-eastward, about 3 miles. There are several small
islands lying in and before this bay, only two of wliich are of iiny considerable
extent. Tlie before-mentioned Currant island in the northernmost of the two.
and the largest ; it is of a moderate height, and when you are to the E.N.E. of
it, the western point will appear bluff, but not high : and when you are to the
westward of it. it appears flat and white. The other, named Gooseberry island,
lies nearly a mile to the southward of it, and its west point bears from the west
point of Currant island S.S.W. ^ W. nearly a mile. Gooseberry island has a
cross on its S.W. end, from which point a ledge of rock stretches out nearly half
a mile to the southward ; there is also a shoal about half a mile to the W.S W.
from the S.W. point of Currant island. The best channel into this bay is to tlie
southward of these islands, between the rocks which stretch off them and a smnll
island lying S.S.W. from them near the south shore. In this channel, which is
very narrow, there are not less than 5 fathoms at low water ; and the course in is.
E. by S. southerly, until you come the length of the before-mentioned island ;
passing which you should haul to the southward, and bring St. Genevieve head
between the small island and the main, in order to avoid the Middle bank. Vessels
may either anchor behind t)ie small island, in 5 or 6 fathoms water, or proceed
farther, with the said mark on, until the S.W. arm is open, and anchor in the
middle of the bay, in 7 or 8 fathoms water. Wood and water may be procured
here. There is tolerably good anchoring in most parts of the bay, but the
snuggest place is the S.W. arm ; the entrance to it is narrow, and has only i
fatlioms at low water. In coming into the bay, if you get out of the channel on
either side, you will shoal water immediately to 3 or 2 fathoms.

DAT or 8T. BARBB. — From the west end of Currant island to St. Barbe
point the bearing is E. by N., 2i miles ; and from St. Barbe point to Anchor
point it is N.N.E., nearly IJ miles. Between them lies the bay of St. Barbe,
which runs in S. by E. about 2 miles from Anchor point. To sail in give Anchor
point, and all the east side of the bay, a good berth, to avoid the sunken rocks
which lie along that shore ; you must be well in before you can discover the
entrance into the harbour, which is very narrow ; then steer South, keeping the
middle of the channel, and anchir as soon as you are within the two points, in a
small cove, on the west side, in 5 fathoms water, on sand and mud, quite land-
locked. Near this place branch out two arms, or rivers, one named the South
and the other the East ; the latter has 3 fathoms a good way up, but the former is
shoal. Between the S.W. point o^ the bay and the west point of the harbour is a
cove, wherein are sunken rocks, which lie a little without tlie line of the two
points. In the open bay are 7,8, or Q fathoms; but the N.W. winds cause a
heavy sea to fall in here, which renders it unsafe.

From Anclior point to the extremity of the Seal islands, the course is E. by
N. f N., a league. Off Anchor point a ledge stretches westward about half a mile.
There are no other dangers between it and the Seal islands but what lie very near
the shore. The Seal islands are white and rocky, and must be approached with
care on their north and western sides, because there are some sunken rocks near
them.

From the N.W. Seal rock to the N.W. extremity of Flower ledge, the bearing is
N.E.,t}y N. 1} miles; part of this ledge appears at low water, and there are 10
fathoms close off its outside.

From the north part of Flower ledge to Grenville ledge, the beariAg is E. byS.
i S. about 1 mile. Grenville ledge lies about t>wo-tbirda of a mile W. by N. from

I'-''
til.

«■'

■

Hir

CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN.

f'^ ' '. •

the pustorn f oint of Alistnlfpn rove hrf wp^n wliiclj nnrl Seal islanils lie also Name-
less cove iiml Flower cove, ncitlier of tliein Ix-iiii;' fit for ships.

SAVAOB OOVfi. — Close to the eastward of Mistaken cove is Savage cove,
which has a little island in its entrance, and is only fit for small vessels and
boats. Sandy bay lies 2 miles eastward from Savage cove ; here small vessels
maj' ride in 3 or 4 fathoms water, with the wind from East to S.W.

About E. J N. 6 miles from Sandy bay, -is Green island ; between them,
at 3 miles distant, W. jj' N. from Green island, is the north extremity df Double
ledge, which extends nearly two-thirds of a mile from the sliore, and has only
8 or 9 feet water on it. Green island lies about three-quarters of a mile from the
main, is two-thirds of a mile in length, very low and narrow, and agreeable in
colour to the name it bears ; from the east end of it a ledge of rocks extends three-
fourths of a mile to the eastward, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. There
are 4 or 6 fathoms water in tlie channel between the island and the main, where
ships may anchor, if necessary. To go in from the westward, keep the island
close on board for the deepest water, which is 4 fathoms ; and going in from the
eastward, keep the main on board. From tliis island to the opposite part of the
coast of Labrador, named Castles or Red clip's, the bearing and distance are about
N. \ W. and S. J^ E. 11 miles. Hereabout is the narrowest part of the strait
of Belle Isle.

From Green island to Boat head the bearing is E. ^ S. 2i' miles ; between
there is no shelter on the <:oast. but to the south-eastward of Boat's head is a cove,
named Boat harbour, where small vessels and boats may lie very secure, except
with N.E. winds.

Cape Norman lies E. f S. 3i miles from Boat head, and is the northernmost
point of land in Newfoundland.

8TBAXT OF BBLXiB ZBLB, *e. — In crossing the strait of Belle Isle from
Quirpon to Chateau bay, the soundings will be irregular, from 20 to 30, and in
some places from 30 to 38 fathoms. In the stream, or middle of the strait, will
be found 25 and 35 fathoms, coarse sand and broken shells, and towards Chateau
bay 45 to 80 fathoms ; within a mile of the Labrador coast are 35, 30, and 25
fathoms. To the northward, between Belle isle and St. Peter's bay, there are
69, 86, 90, 96, 65, and 30 fathoms.

Captain Bayfield says : — " The soundings in the strait are so irregular that they
afford very little assistance to a vessel at night, or during the fogs which so
frequently prevail. In general the deepest water is on the Labrador side, as, for
instance from York point to Red bay. where, however, it is interrupted by the
shallow water off Wreck bay. It is also very deep on thiit side, from Black bay
to Forteau bay inclusive : but the line of deep water is not direct, nor, I believe,
continuous through the strait, and it is still more jierplexing, tliat there is as deep
water within 2 miles of the dangerous Flower ledge on the Newfoundland side,
opposite Forteau bay, as in any part of the strait. The depth of water varies in
different purts from between CO and 70 to 20 fathoms, and the nature of the
bottom is as various as the depths, being sometimes of rock, and at others of sand,
broken shells, pieces of coral, or gravel. Fogs occur with all southerly and
easterly winds, and they are frequent likewise with the S.W. wind ; it is only
when the wind is from between the noith and v\ est. that clear weather can be
safely reckoned on

orthernmost

STRAIT OF BFJ.LE ISLE, &o.

146

Near tlie shores on either side there is usually a rejjular alternation of flood and
ebb in fine weather, but it is not constant. The flood comes from northward along
the coast of Labrador, and also from south-eastward, from cape Bauld to capo
Norman. The latter stream, I have reason to beliuve, is often turned off to the
northward by cape Norman and the same thing takes place at Green island, on
the Newfoundland side towards Greenly or Greenlet island, on the opposite side
of the strait. There is, moreover, at times, a stream running from the S.W. for
several days together, along the west coast of Newfoundland. This stream
occasionally sets from point Ferolle obliquely across the strait towards Forteau
bay. Sometimes, and especially with N.E. winds, the current runs directly in
an opposite direction along the west coast of Newfoundland, from point Ferolle
past point Rich. In short, there is no constancy either in the rate or set of these
streams, for the winds and the irregular tides modify the set and rate of the
equally irregular currents in a manner which it is extremely difficult, if not
impossible, to calculate upon with any degree of certainty. The prevalent current
from the northward comes from between Belle isle and the coast of Labrador.
It is often at the temperature of ihb freezing point, bringing many icebergs into
the strait, and frequently carrying them through it many miles up the Gulf.
Some of these bergs ground in deep water, whilst others are continually chang-
ing their position. They are much more numerous in some seasons than in
others, as I have seen 200 bergs and large pieces of ice in the strait in the month
of August in one yo&r, whilst there were not above half-a-dozen to be seen in the
same month of the following season.

I have observed this cuiTent from the northward and eastward assisted by the
N.E. wind, running 2 miles an hour, whilst at other times it was almost impercepti-
ble. It is even reported that there is sometimes a current in the opposite direction,
and I believe that this report of the fishermen is correct, especially during the
ebb tide and when S.W. winds prevail in the Gulf. At the same time that this
cuiTent is running to the westward, there is at times a stream of warmer water
running out to the eastward on the Newfoundland side, especially during the
ebb tide.

HaTisaUen of th« Strait at mgbt. — From these remarks it will plainly appear
that the navigation of the strait is attended with very great danger in dark or
foggy nights, during which no vessel should attempt to run through ; for I have
found that, with all our experience, we could not be sure of the vessel's position
within 10 miles under such circumstances. On the approach of a dark or foggy
night, therefore, it would be pnident to anchor in some one of the bays on the
north side of the strait, rather than continue under way. A vessel bound into
the Gulf, and running with an easterly wind, will, however, find no place fit for
that purpose until she arrives at Black bay, and that is not a very good anchorage,
for Red bay cannot be entered by a large vessel with an easterly wind. Loup
bay is the first good anchorage under such circumstances, and there the vessel
would be so far advanced in her run through the strait that it would not be woi-th
wliile to stop, since she might easily clear everytliiug in the remaining short
distance. But with a S.W. wind, at the approach of night, and appearance of a
fog, a vessel bound out through the strait to the eastward had better stand off
and on under easy sail, tacking by her deep-sea lead from the Newfoundland side
till morning, if she be not farther to the eastward than point Ferolle. If she be
farther advanced, she had better endeavour to make Forteuu bay before dark,
and anchor tliere for the night. In light winds or calms, during dark ni^jhts ur,

% .

■S'".i

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

foggy weather, it is better to bring up with a Htroam anchor anywhere in the
Htniit tlian to drive abont with the tides, witliout knowing wliitlier ; but tlien a
look-out must bo kept for drifting ieebergs."

sK.

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN. '

OAra NOBMAN and Uglit. — Capo Norman, the northornmogt point of
Newfoundland, in of moderate height and very barren, which appearance con-
tinues far inland. The lighthouse, a white hcxiigonal building 40 feet high,
shows a revohiiuj light (Hashing every two lainutos) at 188 feet above the sea,
visible 18 to 20 miles from all parts of the sea hori/.ou ; its geographical position
is lat. 61° !W N., long. R6' 63' .JO' W.— at 100 feet from it is the keeper's dwelling,
also white.

BBZiZiSl zsZiB.— Belle island, at tlie eastern entrance of the strait to which it
gives its name, is distant about 14 miles from capo Bauld (Kirpon island) and the
same distance from Labrador. It is about I) miles long and 2} miles broad,
moderately high, and of an uniform sterile appearance. On its north-western
coast there is a small harbour named Lark cove, lying within an island almost
closo to the land, which is tit only for small craft ; and at the eastern side of the
island is another cove named Batteaux creek, frequented ocoasionally by shallops.
About two miles north-eastward of the island there is a lodge of rocks, \)artly
above water, over which the sea breaks very high ; this is known as the North-
east Ledge, — close to it is a depth of 16 to 20 fathoms, and 65 fathoms between
it and the nortli part of the island. The soundings about Belle isle are very
irregular; near the island is seldom a less di.^ h than 20 fathoms, except that a
small bank of 6 to 7 fathoms is said to lie 4 miles northward from its northern
ptu't.

Uaht. — The lighthouse on the south-west point of Belle island consists of a
circular tower built of stone, and faced externally with fire-bricks ; it is (12 feet
high, and exhibits Vk fixed light at 470 feet above the sea, visible about 28 miles
from all parts of the sea horizon. It is shown only during the navigable season,
from December Mist to March l&th. During fog or haze signals are made by
means of an air or fog-whistle, sounded at short intervals ; or by a nine-pounder
gun fired every hour when the whistle is out of order. The geographical position
of the lighthouse is lat. 51° 63' N., long. 65° 22' 15" W. The arc illuminated is
about 237° (East southward to N.W. by N.). There is a depot of provisions for
shipwrecked mariners.

vzBTOZiBT. BAT. — Pistolet bay, south-eastward from cape Norman, is exten-
sive, being about 6 miles square. In almost every part of it there is good
anchoiiige, and particularly on its western side, a little above the islands, where
is a depth of about 5 fathoms. Its shore is also tolerably well timbered.

Cook harbour, in the north-west part of Pistolet bay, within the islands, is
about 2 miles above Norman I^edge point. These ledges are about a mile to the
eastward of the noiih point. To clear them as you enter, be sure to keep Burnt
cape, the east point of Pistolet bay, well open of the outer rocks that lie off the
islands at the western entrance to Pistolet harbour, and if going in, so soon as

KIUrON ISLAND, &.!

whero in tlio
r ; but then n

t»t point of
)oarance con-

foot higli,
ibovo the 8oa,
hical position
er's dwelling,

lit to which it
land) andtho

1 miles broad,
lorth- western
island almost
rn sido of the
y by shallops.

I rooks, \)artly
la the North-
loms between
isle are very
except that a
1 its northern

consists of a

it is (S2 feet

)out 28 miles

able season,

arc made by

nine-pounder

ical position

luminated is

rovisious for

an, is exten-
here is good
ands, where
red.

le islands, is
I mile to the
keep Burnt
at lie oil the
so soon as

you consider yourself to bo to the southward ut' iliu.so lud^oK, stoor in for tiie
liiirhonr, loiiviiif^ tlio JNlands and rocks on tlio port uiile ; keep tbu southern sltore
on hoard, for fuar of a lodge of rocks that juts out from a littlo rocky island on
tiio othur sido ; and ho soon as you get within the iHlund, haul over for the north-
ern shore, and anchor in 4^5 fathoms water. This harbour might be made
vary convenient, with several rishing housus ; and proper stages, to which the
boats might resort and cure their fish, might ho eroctod in all the coves between
it and capo Norman.

HA-BABAT. — Burnt cape boars S.S.E. } E. distant 7 miles from cape Nor-
man ; it is of wliito appoarauco and of uonsidorablo height. On its eastern side
iH Ha-ha bay. wliich runs in southerly about 2 mileo. It lies open to northerly
winds, but within the cape is anchorage in (( or 7 fathoms, or farther up in H or
'2^ fathoms. This is a coiiveniont place for the fisheries and has plenty of wood.'

From Burnt cape to cape Onion the distance is 4 miles in an E. by B. i 8-
direction. The latter is higli and steep, and has near it a remarkable rock, known
as the Mowstronc, from its resemblance to the rock of that name in I'lymouth
Huund) England. In a little cove southward of this rock, a small vessel nay find
toniporary shelter during bad weather.

BAOKBD BAT, — Capo Onion forms the north-western point of Sacred bay,
an extensive inlet, containing many small islands, among which vessels anchor
iu 4^ to fathoms. In front of it are the two Sacred islands, th« westernmost
lind largest of which is 2(») feet high; both those are bold, and may be safely -
up])roR(!hod to a moderate distance.

MAWB BAT* — Following the coast eastward from Sacred bay we pass
Maria, Mauve, Wood, and Kirpon bays, and nt the distance of 7 miles from cape
Onion reach Kirpon island. Mauve bay, 5i miles from the cape and hitherto
known as Noddy harbour, is half a mile wide at its entrance. It extends IJ
miles S.W., gradually decreasing in breadth to near its extremity, whore it opens
into a largo basin, in which however the depth does not exceed lU or 12 feet.
The anchorage in this bay is in 12 to i^ fathoms, and vessels can ride where
convenient ; it is sheltered from almost all winds.

In the approach to Mauve bay from nortliward there are several reefs to be
avoided. The easternmost of these are known by the names of Grand Mulou
and Maria ; the first mentioned lies a mile S.E. ^ E. from the south end of littlo
Sacred island and is 10 feet under water, — Maria reef is three-quarters of a mile
S. i E. from the Grand Mulou and consists of rocks abovo and under water.
And, there is also a rock, Foirou islet, which must be avoided with equal care ;
this lies 2 miles E.S.E. from the north end of little Sacred island, and 2^^ miles
N.W. by W. from cape Bauld. As a reef 10 to 12 feet under water extends a
quarter of a mile S. J E. from Foirou islet, vessels must give a wide berth to its
southern side. In bad weather breakers generally show the positions of these
various reefs.

XIBPON ZSZiAflS. — Kirpon island forms the south-east point of entrance to
tko strait of Belle Isle. It is large, high, and barren, and cape Dograt (on its
eastern side, iu the centre of the island) is visible, in clear weather, about ;30
miles, being upwards of 600 feet high.

Tlie narrow channel southward of Kirpon, which divides it from tlie main, is
tho eastern approach to Kirpon harbour. It is very shallow, having a depth of
only 12 to 15 feet at low water and can consequently be traversed only by small
vessols ; there is however good anchorage in 4 fatlioms off the south point of the

11*

WW'

I4fl

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST JOHN.

island, at the entrance to the ehannel, and no known sunken dangers. Vessels
commonlj' moor head and stern, and lie in perfect security.

Dograt and Pigeon coves, on the eastern side of Kirpon island, northward of
cape Degrat, have at their entrance several small rocky islets, and rocks above
water. Behind these there is very fair security for shipping, in 4 fathoms water,
and good conveniences for fishing.

Cap* Banld, the northern extremity of Kirpon island, is in lat. 61" 38' 45" N.,
long. ft5° 25' 6" W. It is rooky and steep-to, and may be approaohed with
safety.

XXitPOir RASBOVB. — Kirpon harbour, on the west side of Kirpon island, is
a mile eastward of Mauve bay already described. It lies between Kirpon island
and Jacques Cartier island. Vessels approaching it from northward may borrow
as close as they please to Bauld head, there being no invisible danger until they
arrive at the entrance to the harbour, where there are some shoals, which must
be passed on their western side ; to do this, keep Black head (Kirpon island)
open of all the other land, until Raven point comes ov<»r Noddy point, then haul
in for the harbour, giving a berth of half a cable to the point of Jaqu'^s Cartier
island. The anchorage is eveiywhere good, with room and depth enough for any
ships, and the ground holds well.

The best place to ride in is near the south-western end of Jaques Cartier
island, abreast Green island, in 8 fathoms water. The passage to the inner
harbour, on either side of Green island, is good for vessels of a moderate draught,
the depth being 2} to 3f fathoms ; the depth in the inner harbour is 7 to U
fathoms, and the shelter is complete, being land-locked.

WHl T B zs&AinDS.— At about 2i miles S. by E. i E. fiom Galets head, the
nearest pnrt of Kirpon island, is a cluster of islands known as the White islands.
In the channels separating them there is generally deep water, but as there are
a few sunken scattered rocks strangers should refrain from traversing thera.
These rocks usually show themselves in bad weather by breakers.

Tlx« Coast. — Partridge point, the north-eastern extremity of Newfoundland and
southern point of the channel leading to Kirpon harbour from eastward, is very
irregular in outline, and has off it two islets separated b}' a narrow channel which
is too shallow and rocky to admit vessels. The coast thence to Broize point, on
the northern side of Griguet harbour, trends S.W. i W. 21 miles and although
bold should not in any part be approached nearer than a quarter of a mile on
account of the Madeleine and Green shoals, — the first of these dangers is a rock
two feet under water (its outer part, 2^ fathoms, is IJ cables from the land, at a
little more than half a mile south-westward from point Partridge) which may 1>
cleared by keeping Galets head, the easternmost part of Kirpon island, open
ward of the islets at point Partridge : the second, Green shoal, lies a cable
the coast midway betweeii Partridge point and Griguet harbour, and will .
avoided by giving the land the berth already mentioned, — the depth over it is
feet and close to its seaward side about 25 fathoms. In bad weather Madeleine
and Green shoals both show themselves by breakers.

Storm point, two-thirds of a mile eastward from Griguet harbour, has off it a
small islet. The land here, close to the sea, is 138 feet high.

OBIOITBT BAJtBOVB.— Between Broize point and White cape, 2^ miles from
it in the direction of S.W., the coast falls in to the northward and forms the fine
harbour of Griguet, in which the largest vessels can anchor and be sheltered
from almost all winds. In the southern part of this harbour are several islands,

GRIGUET HARBOUR.

140

rs. Vessels

known by the names of Camel, Black, Griguet, Four-ears, &c., and among these
are deep channeln affording convenient anchorage.

Camel, the northernmost and largest of the islands, is a mile long from north
to south, and so named from a remarkable hill, which bears some rosemblance to
a camel's hump, situated at its north-east extremity ; this hill is 90rt feet high.
Griguet on the east side of Camel island, is cliffy and of much less elevation.
And, at a Little more than a cable eastward of Griguet is the small rooky islet
known as Black island. The last mentioned is the easternmost or most to sea-
ward of the islands, and should not be closely approached, being surrounded by
a rocky ledge ; the depth close to tliis ledge is IH fathoms.

Four-ears island, southward of Camel island, is 171 feet high. It forms with
Griguet and Camel islands an excellent well sheltered harbour having a depth of
4 to 10 fathoms ; and, with White cape, an equally convenient roadstead, known
as White Cape harbour, in which vessels anchor in 7 to bi fathoms.

Griguet harbour is 4 cables wide at the entrance, between Broize point and
Camel island, and extends thence 1^ miles in a N.W. and N. by E. direction
maintaining throughout an average width of one-third of a mile. On its northern
side, just within the entrance, there is a large bay, known as North bay, which
lias a depth of 5} to 18 fathoms, and affords shelter from all winds except those
southward and south-eastward : hence it is a convenient temporary anchorage,
subject, however, to a heavy swell when a strong south-east wind prevails. In
the middle of the entrance to, and just within a supposed line joining the outer
points of, this bay, is the Baleine rock, always above water, and with a depth
close to it on all sides of 5 to 8 fathoms. The usual anchorage is in 15 fathoms,
sand and mud.

Prune islet, in the middle of the harbour, is small and only Iff feet higli.
It is steep on its north and south sides, but a spit of 3 to li feet extends a
short disfance from its north-east and south-west sides ; with these exceptions
tlie depth close to it is 7 to 8 fathoms.

In the bay north-eastward of Prune islet vessels anchor in 10 to l.'{ fathoms.
When entering, its east and west points must have a good berth given to them,
because a dangerous spit extends nearly a cable from each. At the extremity of
the spit from the last mentioned point there is a rock, almost awash, known as
the Rose rock ; close to wliich is a depth of 13 to 18 fathoms.

Ronciere, or North- west bay extends from Prune islet IJ miles in a noiijierly
direction and has a depth of 18 fathoms to 3 feet, the latter being in its north-
c'i'<( 001 ' where small vessels anchor, selecting their ground, and are sheltered

)m eveiy wind. At li cables within the entrance, on the eastern side, there is

small islet known as Crab islet. In the passage to this bay small vessels can
make free ' i the land on each side of the entrances to Griguet harbour and
tilt pass on either side of Prune isleti but large vessels should keep nearer to
t north-eastern shore than to Camel island because some patches of 3 to 5} fa-
taoms lie off the latter and in bad weather cause heavy breakers, and should
tlien pass north of Prun slet steering such a course as will afterwards carry
them clear of Rose rock, which must be passed on its western side. When tlie
bay appears open it can be ascended in mid-channel and anchorage obtained
either one-third of a mile from Crab islet in 18 fathoms, or nearer the head of the
bay in !) fathoms.

lu the narrow channt^ south of Prune islet there is a rock of 2f fathoms. It
lies on the extremity of a 5-fatliora flat that extends from Camel island.

South-west Bay. — In South-wost buy. tho narrow channel westward of Camel

150

CAPE NOKMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

3,'

iw->

'"•" i

".*

M..:-

island, the depth h fi\ to iO fathoms. Small vessels anchor here at the entrance
in 9 to 7 fathoms under shelter of the north-west point of Camel island, to which,
however, a good berth slionlJ he given on accouni of the shoal spit extending
from it ; large vessels should ascend Ronciere bay in preference, there being veiy
little room in this bay te swing. South-west bay affords good anchorage through-
out, but is seldom entered beyond the anchorage referred to, as its breadth ia
very inconeiderabJe. The only detached danger in it is a rock, a foot under
water, off thd south end of Camel isLmd, at the part where the bay turi\s north-
ward. Th ? channel south cf Camel island can be navigated only by boats at
high water.

The route to South-west bay from seaward is similar to that to Ronciere bay
until Prune islet is passed, when instead of pro'-eeding northward the course ia
directed south-westward. The *^nchorage Vfithin it is land-locked.

It is high water, full and change at 7 h. 10 m Springs rise 5 feet ; neaps
2} feet. The evening tide always makes better tl.an the morning tide.

Carnal Island Barbonr. — Camel island harbour is southward and to seatvard
of the harbours we have just described, being on the south-east side of Camel
island, bet veen it and Griguet island. It is only two cables in extent, but ha& u
depth of 9 to 10 fathoms and affords shelter from almost all winds. Vessels enter
it either northward or southward of Griguet island ; if by the former channel,
there is no danger until within the hili of Camel island, when the shore of that
island hecomes dangerous and soon afterwards that of Grigu ;t island becomes so
also, — hence the greatest circumspection is necessary to keep precisely in mid-
way, in which the least depth will be 3^ fathoms. The latter channel cannot be
used by strangers, being almost filled with sunken rocks nearl}' awash at low
water ; it is a little broader than the northern channel, and between the beds of
rocks has a depth of 3 to 5 fathoms.

mmite Cape Barbour. — White Cape harbour, soutliward and westward of
Four-ears island, lies between that island and the shore of which White cape is
the extremity. It is very narrow, being only about 2 cables wide, and has a
depth of 10 to 7 fathoms excepting in one part, wliere a bar of 3 feet water at
low tide unites the west end of the island with the main. On each side of the
channel are rocks above and under water, which narrow the navigable passage
to about half a cable ; these, on the southern side especially, are very steep.
When entering it is recommended to keep along the southern shore to avoid the
rocky flat that extends Ij cables from the west end of the islai^d. When so far
within as that the entrance is apparently closed by the rocks the anchor may be
cast in 7 fathoms, mud. Large vessels moor head and stern.

vraXTE CAPS. — White cape is a bold chffy point which, at a quarter of a mile
from the sea, rises into a hill 262 feet high. As its name implies it is of whitisli
appearance, and is consequently conspicuous at a considerable dittauce. A sun-
ken ledge extends from its base about a quarter of a cable, and is immediately
succeeded by a depth ot 18 to 26 fathoms. The coast from this headland south-
ward as far as St. Lunaire bay is also bold and steep.

Great Co^e. — At about half a mile south-westward from White capo is Great
cove, an inlet in the coast affording shelter to small fishing vessels when the wind
is from the land. It is about a third of a mile in extent south-west and north-
east, and 2 cables tvide, with a rocky shore from which sunken ledges extend
Bomo distance. In its southern part is a detached rock, awasli or nearly' so. Its
gdueral deptli is !) to 2i fatlioms.

ST. LUNAIRE BAY.

161

he entrance
d. to which,
it extending
! being veiy
ge throngh-
bieadth is
foot under
turi^a north-
by boats at

onciere bay
lie course ia

feet ; neaps
e.

I to seatvard
ie of Camel
t, but hab a
''essels enter
er channel,
hore of that

becomes so
sely iu mid-
si cannot be
wash at low

the beds of

(westward of
liite cape is

and has a
eet water at

side of the
ble passage
very steep.
avoid tlie
Vhen so far
hor may be

ter of a mile
s of whitisli
ce A sun-
mmediately
laud south-

)c is Great
!n the wind
and north-
ges extend
•ly 80. Its

Oow.Qey«. — Cow cove, a quarter of a mile south-westward &om Great cove,
is a rocky inlet of very limited extent, into which only boats can enter. At low
water, its whole surface is little else than a bed of rocks.

BT. LVITAZBB BAT. — St. Lunaire bay is one cf the finest harbours in New-
foundland, being of considerable extent, and easy of access with all winds except
those that blow strongly from north-westward (land winds) which from some
cause are usually accompanied with violent gusts. In almost every part of it is
good anchorage, and there are no dangers in the entrance but what are easily
avoided, especially as breakers generally show their position. White cape is an
excellent mark for it ; and in addition, the White hills (141 feet high, on its
northern shore at IJ miles from the entrance) are sufficiently conspicuous to
prevent the bay being mistaken for any other inlet on this part of the coast.
When opposite to it the islands in its interior are distinguishable, and St. Lunaire
peak (a wooded hUl 334 feet high, in the south-west part of the bay) will be seen
in the direction of W. ^ N.

From White Dog point, the north-east point of entrance, St. Lunaire bay
extends about 3 miles in the direction of N.W. 1 W., and in its broadest part
(including South-west bay) is 2i miles across. Its depth varies greatly, being
17 to 30 fathoms over a considerable part, and in South-west bay 10 to 3} fa-
thoms ; hence vessels can choose such water for anchorage as may be most
convenient.

Of the various islands at the entrance and within St. Lunaire bay it Is useless
to furnish a description, as the chai*t (No. 273) shows them all with accuracy and
without that publication it is not possible to understand their relative position
one with the other. The laud on the south side of the entrance is of i».jderate
height (less than 100 feet) and consists principally of Granchain and other
islands, wliich are all m(>re or less connected at low water. The width of the
channel from shore to shore is half a mile, but at the north end of Granchain
this is decreased to 2| cables by a bed of rocks, above and under water at low tide,
that extends northward from that island, and has upon it two islets named Coal
and Salut, of which the latter is the northernmost and (56 feet higli. A rocky
ledge, always dry and known as the Flat rock, lies a cable north-eastward from
Salut island ; *liis must be specially guarded against when entering the bay, its
northern edge icing so steep that the lead drops at once from it into 11 fathoms.

Vanguard Rod'. Tin principal danger in the entrance to St. Lunaire bay is
the Vanguarc', a rock 12 feet under water, lying nearly half a mile W.N.W. from
White Dog p(»int, and 3 cables S.E. ^ S. from Salut island ; it is consequently
nearly in the middle of the channel, being nearer the southern than the northern
shore. A 4J-fathom flat connects it to the rocky ledge off the north side of
(hanchain island. To ovoid this rock on its north side, no part of Elizabeth
islet (the westernmost of the two islands, within the bay, to the N.N.W of Salut
island) should be brought open southward of Flat rock ; or, the northern-
most part of Nymph island should be kept in one with the north und of Salut
island, bearing N.W. 4 W., — this mark if followed in from sea leads close to
White Dog point. Another mark to clear the rock on its north side is Adelaide
islet open eastward of Flat rock, N.W. by N. ; this is an excellent liiie of direc-
tion as it leads into the bay, in mid-channel, from seaward. The depth close to
tlio north-eastern side of the rock in 7 fathoms.

Amelia Oot*. — Having entered St. Lunaire bay, convenient anchorage will be
found in Amelia cove, on its northern shore, where vessels ride in 1(> to 7 fa-

,' . -v,^

.il

;i.v.

'■'■4'

152

CAl^E NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

thorns, mud and sand, sheltered from all winds except those directly from sonth-
ward. Although the ground here holds well it is inferior to that in North-west
and South-west bays, and also to that in the roadstead southward of Nymph
island ; south-easterly winds also occasionally send in a heavy sea.

irorth-mrMt Bay. — The north-western part of St. Lunaire bay is known as
North-west bay. Vessels anchor here in 20 to 8 fathoms, sheltered from all
winds, and on very tenacious ground. When entering, keep closer to the southern
than the northern shore, to avoid the sunken rocks extending two cables, from the
latter.

nymph Bay, — In the roadstead southward of Nymph island is a depth of
17 to 21 fathoms and vessels ride here in complete security, being sheltered from
all winds ; inconvenience is, however, sometimes occasioned by the violent gusts
which accompany westerly and north-westerly winds. The only danger in the
route to this bay is in midway of the entrance, where is a S -fathom bank having
upon it a rock fl feet under water, named from its position. Middle rock. From
this rock Adelaide islet appears midway between Carentonne and Red islets :—
therefore to clear it on the east side, bring Adelaide islet in one with the east
Bide of Carentonne, bearing N.E. by N. ; and on the west side, keep Adelaide
islet in one with Red islet. The cliffs of White Dog point in one with the south
end of Salut island, S.E. by E., lead northward of the rock; and, in one with
Coal islet, S.E. by E. | E., lead southward of it.

8onth-weat Bay. — In South-west bay, the narrow inlet at the head of Nymph
bay, vessels anchor in 11 to 5 fathoms. This inlet is about a mile in extent
S.W. and N.E., and in its narrowest part about a cable wide. It affords com-
plete shelter from every wind, and vessels can be hove down in it and repaired
with facility.

It is high water in St. Lunaire bay at 7h. 6m. ; springs rise 5 feet, neaps
2f feet. The evening tide makes better than the morning ; the current is very
weak at the entrance to the bay and is imperceptible in the interior. Outside
the bay the current flows northward and southward along the coast, apparently
without rule, and occasionally at the rate of 2 knots.

Westerly winds in St. Lunaire bay prevail usually with greater strength than
in the bays in its vicinity. Generally they abate in force towards evening.

BBAHA BATS, *e. — From St. Lunaii-e bay a bold rocky coast trends 8 miles
in the direction of S.W. ^ W. to cape St. Anthony, the eastern point of St. Mein
bay. At about 2 miJos from St. Lunairo bay is Little Braha bay, an inlet of
very limited extent having 8 to 2 fathoms water, and only capable of sheltering
very small fishing vessels while the wind is from the land. Its northern point
has off it some moderately high rocks of needle form, known as the Little Braha
Needles. This bay was formerly a fishing station.

Great Braha bay, 1^ miles southward of the bay just mentioned, falls in about
half a mile from the general line of coast and is about two-thirds of a mile in
extent N.E. and S.W. Vessels anchor at its head in about i)^ fathoms water,
but only while the wind is from the land, as easterly winds send in a heavy sea.
. The locality of Great Braha bay may be readily recognised by vessels approach-
ing from north-eastward by the needle rocks off its northern point, which are of
extraordinary appearance ; one of them is very pointed and erect. These rocks
ju'e known to seamen as the Great Braha Needles.

< Jreen cove, half a mile westward from the Great Braha Needles and within
the inlet of Great Braha bay, is a small inlet having in front of it an island

F<i%«

ST. MEIN BAY.

15H

from soath-

North-west

1 of Nymph

s known as
ed from all
the southei-n
tle^from the

a depth of
eltered from
violent gusts
mger in the
bnnk having
rock. From
led islets : —
I'ith the east
ep Adelaide
th the south
in one with

,d of Nymph
ie in extent
affords com-
tnd repaired

feet, neaps
rent is very
Dr. Outside
, apparently

rength than
ening.
ends Smiles
of St. Mem
an mlet of
)f sheltering
rthern point
jittle Braha

ills in about
of a mile in
homs water,
heavy sea.
Is approach-
I'hich are of
These rocks

and within
t an island

known as Green island. South-westward of this island, about half a cable, is a
rock 3 feet nnder water ; and, South of it, a cable, is a similar rock, named Little
John Baptist. Great John Baptist, a shoal of 2^ fathoms, lies 9^ cables S.S.W.
J W. from the same islet. These shoals are in the entrance to Great Braha
Imy, approaching it from north-eastward, and upon them, the sea usually breaks
with easterly and southerly winds. The cove will only admit boats, and these
even cannot enter in rough weather.

Braha point, the south-western point of the bay, has oflf it about IJ cables, a
black rock above water, upon which the sea always breaks ; this rock is known
by the name of Foundling (Enfant trouve). The coast within this is steep and
rocky and much broken into deep narrow creeks.

Vessels entering Great Braha bay must cautiously avoid Great John Baptist
shoal, the smthernmost of the dangers off Green islet. There are no good leading
marks to guide southward of it. but it will be passed when Green cove appears
open westward of Green island. Vessels leaving the bay will also know when
they are eastward of it by the head of Green cove disappearing to the right
of the black rock close to the east side of Green island.

The anchorage at the head of Great Braha bay is very limited in extent, and
the ground is of only moderate tenacity. There is not space for more than four
or five vessels, which ride with a fast to the shore, and are consequently in
security even with a strong westerly wind (the strongest on this coast) ; south-
easterly winds blow directly in.

It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. 7m. ; springs rise 6 feet, neaps
n feet.

Braha Sboal, — A very dangerous rock, 2^ fathoms under water, lies 1} miles
from this part of the coast, with the Great Braha Needles bearing N.N.W. i W. ;
it is consequently in lat. 61° 20' 3" N., long. 55" 25' 32" W. It is known as the
Braha shoal, is about 8 cables in extent north and south by a quarter of a cable
in width, and has close to it on all sides a depth of 20 to 25 fathoms. From it
Camel hill (Griguet harbour) appears open a little to the right of the cliffs of
White cape ; consequently if that hill is brought on with the hill of the cape,
vessels will pass between the rock and the coast without danger. Goose cape
open to the left of French point bads southward of it.

At about 2i cables south-westward from Braha shoal, or rock, and separated
from it by a depth of 22 fathoms, there is a small rocky patch of 6 fathoms. The
sea close to it is very deep.

In bad weather, and especially when the wind blows strongly from north-east-
ward, the sea breaks violently over the Braha shoal ; even in fine weather its
position is generally showii by strong ripples. In fine weather fishermen of the
neighbouring coast know that they may expect a N.W. or N.E. gale by observ-
ing a rippling over this shoal.

In the channel between the Braha shoal and the land the depth is 24 to 70
fathoms. As the coast is very bold, with no sunken dangers off it, it is always
safer to run along the land, giving it a moderate berth, than seek to avoid the
shoal by passing eastward of it.

ST. MBZir «AT. — From Great Braha bay a steep cliffy coast trends 4 miles to
the 8.W. i W., terminating in cape St. Anthony, the eastern point of St. Mein
bay; this cape is also very bold with a depth of 20 fathoms almost close to its
extremity. In its irregularity it forms several small coves in which boats or
small fishing vesselB can obtain shelter while the wind is from the land ; the

164

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

largest of these, French bay, a mile north-eastward from cape St. Anthony, is
about half a mile in extent and exposed to southerly winds. In hazy weather,
French point, on the eastern side of French bay, has frequently been mistaken
for cape St. Anthony, being not unlike it in general appearance.

St. Mein bay extends 2h miles in the direction of North and is throughout
nearly a mile in width. Its depth of water is considerable, 40 to 5 fathoms, the
latter being off the shore at its head. On account of this great depth and also
because it is in every part exposed to the full force of southerly winds, vessels
should avoid anchoring in it. On its eastern side, at about li miles from the
sea, there is a small fishing village. The coast current, which at cape St.
Anthony flows sometimes at the rate of 2 knots, is not felt within this bay.

Fox point, the western point of St. Meiu bay, is distant 1^ miles N.W. by
W. i W. from cape St. Anthony, and will be easily recognised, being ot very
moderate height compared with the land in its vicinity. Beliind it, at nearly
half a mile from the sea, there is a hill 418 feet high, having in its side a great
black cliff, which is very conspicuous.

«t. Anthony Harbour. — St. Anthony harbour, a large inlet on the western
side of St. Mein bay, just within the entrance, affords excellent slielter, being
land-locked ; the depth also is not too great for anchorage, as it nowhere jxceeds
10 fathoms. Its entrance, which is on the northern side of Fox point, and 11
cables wide facing N.E., may be easUy recognised by the depx'ession of the Lmd,
even before it becomes actually visible. The harbour then turns sharply to
N. by W. i W., and continues in the' direction \\ miles, with an average width
of about two cables. At nearly half a mile within the entrance a slioal extends
from the western shore, and, with another from the opposite side, narrows the
navigable channel to half a cable or less ; upon the former of ti:ese are some
low rocks, named Piquenais. When sailing up the harbour the eye is the best
guide, very little more being required than to keep the mid-channel.

At nearly the head of St. Anthony harbour on its eastern side, tliere is a large
bay named Marguerite, where vessels anchor in 6 to 8 fathoms. When running
in, it must be borne in mind that a shoal runs off from each point of entiuiice;
particularly the northern, whence shallc w ground extends upwards of a cable;
the depth in the channel is 4^ to 6} fathoms.

The strongest winds experienced in St. Anthony harbour are those from N.W.
and West, and these are unfortunately almost always accompanied with strong
gusts and calms ; hence vessels under sail cannot enter with facility wlien those
prevail (the harbour being too narrow to permit of tacking), and should wait at
the entrance for a change of wind. The best ground for anchorage will be found
between Piquenais rocks and Marguerite bay.

It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. lOni. Springs rise 5 feet, neaps
2f feet. Good water is abundant, but inconvenient tcobtain.

■C&BDKAZXiZJBBB BABBOVB' — From Fox point a bold cliffy barren coast
trends W. by S. If miles to Savage point, on the eastern side of the entrance to
Cremaillere harbour ; this point is low, has a bold coast behind it, and almost
close to it is a depth of 20 to 2S fathoms. The harbour is two-thirds of a mile
wide at the entrance between Savage point and cape Haut-et-Kas, its western
point ; whence it extends N. by W. i W. 1^ miles, gradually decreasing in
breadth to one-third of a mile as Anchor point, half a mile within Savage point,
is approached, and then widening to about half a mile, which width it thou maiu-
tams throughout. Its depth is IH to 3J fa*;homs, the latter being at a very short

CREMAILLERE HARBOUR.

155

Anthony, is
zy weather,
in mistaken

throughout
ithoms, the
th and also
ids, vessels
ss from the
at cape St.
3 bay.

es N.W. by
;iiig ot very
t, at nearly
side a great

the western
lelter, beinj,'
lere-Jxceeds
oint, and 1)
of the land,

sharply to
?rage width
loal extends
narrows the
e are some

is the best

re is a large
len running
af eulninee!
of a cable;

from N.W.
with strong
when those
ould wait iit

11 be found

feet, neaps

distance from the high land (Cremailldre hill, 476 feet high) at its head. Vessels
usually anchor in 7 to fathoms at l.t miles within Savage point, where vhe
ground is of mud and sand, and holds remarkably well ; in other parts they p.ee
liiiblo to drag their anchors. The only known detached danger in the harboi'r is
Bear rock, !» feet under water, in its north- west comer.

Cremaillore is an excellent harbour affording shelter from almost all winds ;
those from southward blow directly in, but against these vessels obtain protection
in Anchor cove, its south-east corner. Its locality is easily recognised by its
position witii respect to Hare bay, the opening to which is so large as to resemble
a strait, and of which the peninsula forming cape Goose (its north-eastern point)
is very bold land, 835 feet high ; and, by the mountain (known as the Three
iJoun tains, its summit appearing with as many heads) midway between Goose
cape and the harbour, immediately behind Notre Dame island, which rises to the
height of 525 feet, and is a conspicuous object from all directions seaward.

Approaching the harbour from southward the east pointof Notre Dame island
(subsequently mentioned) must have a good berth given it, because a rocky ledge,
having close to it a depth of :{0 fathoms, extends from it a cable or more ; and, it
is equally necessary to guard against the Notre Dame shoal, a small patch 12 feet
under water lying 3 cables from the island, with its east point bearing S. ^ E. dis-
tant nearly half a mile,— this rock is very steep, there being 20 to 23 fathoms
water in its immediate vicinity, and breakers show its position only in bad weather.
When entering, keep in mid-channel to avoid the sunken ledge that extends
nearly a cable from each side of the entrance, and when fairly within, anchor,
although the best anchorage is found in 10 fathoms at a couple of cables from its
northern shore. Anchor point, half a mile within Savage point is foul to nearly
IJ cables from the shore.

It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. 13m. ; springs rise 4^ feet, neaps
21 feet. Strong north-west winds are attended with violent gusts and eddies,
which are sometimes dangeronc, and have to be specially guarded against;
against these it is sometimes almost impossible to make way.

Itotxd Same Island, ftc, — Notre Dame island, 1^ miles to the S.S.W. from
Cremaillere harbour, is about half a mile in extent, 85 feet high, and almost
level. A sunken ledge extends about a cable (rom its eastern and western ends.
Midway between it and the land westward of it there is a rock, known as Fleury
island, with foul ground surrounding it, especially on its eastern and southern
sides.

Virgin Bay. — The coast south-westward from cape Hattt-et-Bas is bold. At
about half a mile from it is Virgin point, the north side of entrance to Virgin bay, —
a bay which is too much exposed to easterly winds to be a safe anchorage ; at the
back of this inlet is the cl".ater of hUis. the Three Mountains, already mentioned,
of which the northernmost* ^uiO highest) has an elevation of 525 feet. The depth
in Virgin bay is 12 to 9 fathoms.

Throe Mountains Say, southward of Virgin bay, is separated from it by
Angel point, a narrow projection having foul ground at its extremity. It is of
very limited extent, being about a Quarter of a mile long N.W. and in its
narrowest pai*t less than a cable broad ; it has also no great depth, as the water
decreases from M fathoms at the ent'.ance to less than a fathom at its extremity, —
over a considerable portion of its area the depth is less than 3 J fathoms. Only
small vessels can anchor here. Easterly winds blow directly in and are occasion-

»?

•■

156

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

ally acooinpanied with a considerabio sea, although Notre Dame island in some
measure shelters it.

Three Mountains bay may be approached either northward or southward
of Notre Dame island, and cannot be made without a leading wind. If
northward of it, Notre Dame shoal (already mentioned) must be carefully
guarded against, and Fleury islet should be passed on its western side.
If southward of it. the foul ground ofi Lobster point (the eastern extremity
of cape Goose) and 9^ 2-fathom rock adjacent to the coast one-third of a mile
westward from the point, are dangers to wliich a good berth must be given.
In the absence of a leading wind to carry the vessel into the harbour, it is
usual to anchor in its entrance ; when within, the ship should be moored fore and
aft with a good scope of cable.

Cap* OooB*. — Cape Goose is veiy bold land, as already mentioned, with cliffs
along its southern side, off which is a depth of 20 to 24 fatlioms. T.he rock off
Lobster point, its eastern extremity, has its seaward edge at 1 i cables from the
land, and is a formidable danger to vessel:' making free with the coast when
bound into or tui of Hare bay, as it is 8 feet under the surface, has 11 fnthoms
water close to i^, and in very calm weather does not show its presence by breakers.
To pass eastward of this rock, keep mount St. Anthony well open eastward of
Notre Dame island, bearing N.E. \ E. ; and northward of it (when bound into
Three Mountains harbour) keep the head of that harbour in sight, N.W.

a&BB BAT. — Hare bay, of which cape Goose is the north-eastern extremity,
is veiy extensive, being nearly 18 miles long in a t :rth-westerly direction and
7 miles broad. In it are many excellenti but little frequented, harbours ; among
these. Goose cove, on the western side of cape Goose, has the reputation of being
one of the best, although diiGcult to enter. Its southern shore is bordered by
numerous islets and rocks under which vessels anchor and obtain shelter against
the prevailing wind ; its northern shore on the contrary, is believed to be clear of
sunken dangers with the exception of a rock 2i fathoms under water reported to
lie half a mile S.W. by W. | W. from the east point of How harbour and S. by
W. \ W. from the west point of the same harbour. Unless driven in by severe
weather vessels seldom enter the bay so far as How harbour. Cremail)(ire and
St. Anthony harbours being much more convenient and accessible.

Oooae eov*. — Goose cove is Uttle more than half a mile in extent and has
sufficient water witliin for large vessels, which can anchor in 7 to 9 fathoms, mud.
sheltered against all winds ; but the entrance is narrow, 3J to -IJ fathoms deep,
and not easily navigated by strangers. A leading wind is almost essential tu
enable vessels to run in.

How Barbonr. — How harbour, 11 miles N.W. from cape Goose and 13 miles
N. by W. I W. from the northernmost Fichot island, is very commodious, being
easy of access and capable of receiving the largest vessels. It extends 1^ miles
N. i W., is nearly half a mile broad, and has a depth gradually decreasing from
14 fathoms at the entrance to 6 feet at its extremity. When entering, its western
point should have a good berth as a rock with foul ground extends from it IJ
cables and is steep-to. It is high water here, full and change, at 7 h. and 20m. ;
springs rise 2 to 4 feet.

The hills around How harbour are barren, but small stunted wood may be
found in the valleys. Marshes and ponds extend northward from it to Pistolet bay.

In the northern arm of Hare bay, 3J miles beyond Hare harbour, vessels
anchor in fathomsi but exposed to viiiids from southward. This arm has au

Jill in some

• southward
I wind. If
be carefully
stern side,
rn extremity
ir4 of a mile
b be given,
arbour, it is
red fore and

i, with cliffs

["he rock oif

es from the

coast when

I 11 fathoms

by breakers.

eastward of

bound into

n extremity,

reclion and

lurs ; among

;ion of being

bordered by

Iter against

) be clear of

reported to

and S. by

in by severe

uailinre and

3nt and has

;homs, mud,

loms deep,

essential to

nd 13 miles
lious, being
Is If miles
asing from
its western
from it li
and 20m. ;

ood may be
istolet bay.
)ur, vessds
rm has au

ST. JULIEN HARBOURS.

157

extent of about 2 miles N.N.E., is three-quarters of a mile broad, and shoals
gradually from It) fathoms to t) fatlioms at its extremity. A 3-fathom rock has
been reported to exist in its entrance, at about midway between Hare 'island
(its western side) and its eastern shore, but nearer the former than the latter ;
tliis rock has recently been unsuccessfully sought for.

In the southern arm of Hare bay there is also good anchorage, and vessels are
able to select a convenient spot, the depth being 17 to 8 fathoms. Here are
several large islands, the easternmost and most to seaward of which is known
as Brent island.

Spring island, 4 mihs S.E. by S. from Brent island, and a mile N.E. by N.
from Spring bay, is small, of moderate hvught, and easily recognised. At about
half a mile S.E. ^ E. from it is the Jeheni e rock, 21 fathoms under water, which
is probably the outermost of the sunken dangers r.ff this shore of the bay ; its
position has not been satisfactorily ascertained, and it is believed that it lies half
a mile from the land, or even further out.

Spring bay is open to E.N.E. winds. Vessels obtain good anchorage in it in
6 to 8 fathoms.

riebot Xalands. — The Fichots, on the southern side of the entrance to Hare
bay, consist of about foarteen small islands, lying in a N.E. by E. direction, and
occupying a space of H miles. The largest and southernmost is separated from
the islets ofiT the shore by a channel half a mile wide and 9 to 18 fathoms deep,
in thu southern part of which there are some rocks nearly awash ; hence its navi-
gati(m requires the utmost care. About and among the islands are many reefs
under water, rendering local knowledge necessary when sailing in their vicinity.
Vessels frequently run through the passages formed by the islands keeping, as
much as possible in mid-channel ; but a stranger should not attempt to pass
between the northernmost of the group and the small islet on its north- '?.-estern
side (the Grand and Petit Gormorandiers) because there is a rock almost awash
exactly in mid-channel.

These is an excellent harbour for small vessels on the north-east side of the
southernmost and largest Fichot island, which harbour is sheltered from eastward
by numerous small islets, all more or less joined together by a rocky ledge. As
strangers cannot enter the harbour without having the assistance of a pilot, it is
useless to give instructions for it ; suffice it, then, to say that when inside there
is protection from all winds. There are two passages into the harbour, the
nortliern and southern ; of these, the southern or Flag Pass is very shallow, and
will only admit very small vessels. Cape Croix, on the eastern side of the
harbour, is considered to be in lat. 61° 11' 2" N., long. 55° 38' W.

Orandes Uettes Harbour. — On the west side of the southern entrance of the
channel separating Fichot islands from the main, there is a small harbour named
Grandes Ilettes, on the noithem side of which vessels anchor in 12 to 13
fathoms, sheltered from most winds. The best position is midway between
Chabert island and Admii'alty cove. Fronting the harbour on its north-eastern
side, there are a number of islands, which form the two harbours, Four and
Pctites Ilettes.

8T. JUUBir BABBOVBB. — From the southernmost Fichot island to the
north end of St. Julien island the bearing and distance are about S.W. ^ W. 3^
miles. The harbours of Great and Little St. Julien and also that of Grandsway
are all adjacent to the island of St. Julien, and bear about N. i W. from the

'■Ml

.^•'*i

^ >-'^

w.t

■9 4^ '

V / * -

168

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

northern part of the island of Groais (subsequently mentioned). The island of
St. Julien being very close (at its south west end) to the land cannot be easily dis-
tinguished from southward until the observer is very near it; there is at this end
no channel, except for boats, — therefore, to sail into either of the harbours, it is
necessary to pass round the north-east end of the island, after wliich the
harbours sdon come into view.

Greatest. Julien, the easternmost harbour, can be approached without difficulty
there being no known sunken danger outside the enti-ance ; within it the star-
board shore is foul to nearly one-third over. When past tlie first stages vessels
anchor in 8 to 4 fathoms water.

To sail into Little St. Julien, steer for Great St. Julien harbour, in order to
clear'a sunken rock in front of the harbour's mouth; having arrived opposite the
entrance of Grandsway, run into the harbour, and anchor in 5 or 4 fathoms.
Ships using either of these harbours, moor head and stem. Grandsway is not
a harbour for shipping, although it is very convenient for fishing craft.

CBOC HAB80VB. — From the north end of St. Julien island a bold steep coast
trends 5 miles W.S.W. i W. to cape Vent (Wind) on the southern side of the
entrance to Croc harbour. At about half a mile south-westward from the narrow
channel separating this island from the shore there is a barren, weather-beaten
islet, known as Black or Irish islet, which is steep on all sides. And, south-west-
ward from the islet, a very short distance, is Flemish cove, an exposed boat
anchorage ; the land on the south side of this cove is 279 feet high, rising into a
hill known as the great hill of St. Julien, which is not unfrequently mistaken for
the hUl forming cape Vent. From this hill to the harbour, the land may be
safely approached to a moderate distance, and in passing along, an islet (Raven
island) will be observed close to the coast at about a mile from the harbour ; the
depth near this islet is 9 to 25 fathoms. Cape Vent rises into a hill 404 feet
high and has, close off it, two islets the outermost and largest of wliich is separated
from the inner by a narrow channel Si fathoms deep.

Croc harbour, the central point of the French fishing station, is easy of access,
although somewhat difficult to discover, particularly when approached directly
from eastward. When the north part of Bell island is seen open of the south
part of Groais island, the observer will be a short distance southward of the har-
bour ; this is an excellent mark for its locality, and it should also be borne in
mind that the headland forming the southern shore, is bare of trees, and has a
round appearance, — the two rocky islets off this headland are also aids for its
recognition.

The entrance is about two-thirds of a mile wide, between cape Vent on the
south and cape Groux on the north, with a depth in mid-channel of IK to 20
fathoms, sand, gravel, and rock. At the foot of cape Vent, just outside the har-
bour, are the two rocky islets, just mentioned ; the outer rock is clean close-to,
80 that a vessel may pass pretty near it, there being to 8 fathoms water in its
near vicinity.

When within the harbour, the south shore will be observed to run first W. by N.,
and then to the W. by S., forming South-west bay, which is seldom used, being
exposed to North and N.E. winds; yet small vessels, drawing 9 to 10 feet water,
occasionally run up to the head of the bay, and anchor westward of an islet off
the small fishing station of Petit-Maitre, opposite the stage, but it is necessary to
moor fore and aft. A short distance within the entrance of the bay, on its west-
ern side, is a rock above water, at low tide, known as the Baloine ( Whale)

oil

wliich \
oast sid
avoid a
channel

From
short d:
the othe

Then
colouret
age is ai
is good
point G(
a large i
point G
There i
far in.

The E
are gent
but they
creek ah
a vessel

The s
decayed
country,
more iiha
The sho]
veer in g
takes abt
in squalli

OBOA
bold hea
Newfoun
slightly (
position
55° 30' "V
which is
extend fr
not appr
bears S.I
to be safe
eastern si
about hal
In the I
probably
dark mud

long W. i
end there
can enter
shelter tc

GROAIS ISLAND.

16U

lie island of
be easily dis-
,s at this end
irbours, it is
er wliich the

out difficulty
L it the star-
tages vessels

•, in order to
apposite the
ir 4 fathoms,
isway is not
raft.

d steep coast
rn side of the
n the narrow
iather-beaten
I, south-west-
exposed boat
rising into a
mistaken for
land may be
islet (Raven
larbour ; the
, hill 404 feet
1 is separated

isy of access,
ched directly
of the south
d of the liar-
be borne in
es, and has a
aids for its

Vent on the
b1 of lt» to 20
[side tlie bar-
ean close to,

water in its

rstW.bvN..

used, being

feet water,

)f an islet off

necessary to

on its west-

( Whule], on

which the eea always breaks ; in sailing up the bay this must be passed on its
cast side, — as soon as past it, bear over to a small bay, named Biore cove, to
avoid a breaker which lies in the direction of the islet, — after this, steer up the
channel formed by the islet with the shore of Petit-Maitre.

From the entrance of South-west bay the harbour runs N. by W., and after a
short distance divides into two arms, one, the Fond (running northward) and
the other, Epine-Cadoret, south-westward.

There is anchorage in any part of the bay, in 9 to 82 fathoms, dark slate-
coloured mud ; but all parts are not considered equally good, The best anchor-
age is at the entrance of the Fond, in IH or 19 fathoms, clayey mud, where there
is good shelter from easterly and westerly winds ; here cape Vent is hidden by
point Genille. With a strong breeze from north-westward, when it is difficult for
a large vessel to tack so as to reach this anchorage, it is prudent to anchor near
point Groux, in 18 to 20 fathoms, rocky bottom, and wait a favourable wind.
There is also anchorage in Epine-Cadoret, but it is seldom necessary to go so
far in.

The strongest winds are those from south-westward and north-westward, and
are generally squally. North-easterl}' winds are also prevalent in bad weatlier,
but they never cause a very heavy sea. In Epine-Cadoret, beyond a narrow
creek almost dry at low water, there is a oonvenient place on the rocks to heave
a vessel down.

The soil of Croc harbour is wet and spongy, being composed principally of
decayed vegetable matter, and covered with the dwarf pine indigenous to the
country, which does not attain any great dimensions, the largest tree being not
more than li feet in diameter, and the wood, when full grown, of but little value.
The shores are bold-to ; a frigate can tack in, but great attention must be paid to
veer in good tini because th. vvind under the land is uncertain ; and frequently
takes aback at the moment of tacking, particularly when it is from the N.W. and
in squalls. '

OBOAxa iBLAXiD. — Groais island is distant 7^ miles from cape Rouge, a
bold headland 6^ miles S.W. by W. from Croc harbour and the nearest part of
Newfoundland. It is about 6 miles long M .E. and S.W., in whioh direction it has a
slightly curved form, and 2i miles broad in its widest part. The geographical
position cf its north-east point is estimated to be lat. 50° 5&' 30" N., long.
55° 30' W. ; off this point are the Sisters, several rocks above water, close to
which is a depth of 15 to 35 fathoms and no kno^vn sunken danger. Rocks also
extend from its north-west point as far out as 1^ miles ; these may be cleared by
not approaching the point nearer than when the north-east point of the island
bears S.E. by S. With these exceptions the island is bold all round and believed
to be safe to approach to a moderate distance, the ascertained depth close to its
eastern shore being 10 to 24 fathoms, and a similar depth is known to prevail at
about half a mile from its western coast.

In the channel between Groais island and Newfoundland the greatest depth is
probably 72 fathoms. In that between it and Bell island it is 47 to 50 fathoms,
dark mud and rotten shells.

BSXA iBUAXm. — Bell island, 5 miles S.S.W. from Groais island, is 8^ nules
long W. I N. and E. ^ S. and 6 miles across in its broadest part. At its southern
end there is a harbour into which small fishing vessels, but not ordinary vessels,
can enter ; there are also other coves about the shores of the island which afford
shelter to fishing smacks against the prevailing wind. Green islet, off its

^■tl^l

f.:.'; ;-

.!' ., .').

b''>.'

lecr

CAPE NOUMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

' 4'

•^"

■

V .

■ !^ "

'■y*

'■"

. • ' "■

western coast, is small and rocky, and a quarter of a mile westward from iliia
there is a rock with 1(1 fathoms water close to its western side. From the
Boutliern side of the island a bank of 12 to .'(() fathoms extends .') or 4 miles, but
its limit lius not been ascertained ; upon this bank are some rocks, above and
under water, some of which lie as much as two miles from the island. North-
east rock, a rock off the north-east point of the island, is bold, tlie depth close to
it being 12 fathoms ; it must, however, be approached with ciiiition on accouat
of a rock, 10 feet uud6r water, which lies 1} miles E. ^ N. from it.

South rock, about two miles S.W. f W. from the south point of Bell island, is
the south«rnmoBt of the rocky islets in its vicinity. A sunken danger, nearly
awash, lies a third of a mile south-westward from it; hence, upon that side
especially, vessels should avoid getting too near.

OAPB BOVOB KABBOVB. — Cape Rouge harbour, on the south side of capo
Rouge and 8 miles from Croc harbour, is distant 10 miles N.W. i N. from the
south end of Oroais island. It is about 2^ miles in extent, has a depth of 34 to
6 fathoms, and affords shelter from almost all winds, those from southward, how-
ever, sending in a heavy sea, which would be a serious inconvenience were it nut
that Bell and Groais islands in some degree break the swell from the Atlantic,
From the southern point of its entrance a shallow rocky flat extends a cable or
more, and in nearly the centre of its south-west part there is a shoal known us
the Harbour shoal. The anchorage is good throughout, where the depth is not
too great ; but the best and most secure is in the northern arm of the harbour.
Vessels experience little difficulty in beating in or out, there being ample roum
to tack.

Bons* bland, — In front of Rouge harbour, 2} miles from the coast and in the
direct course from the south end of Groais island, there is a small island named
Rouge (Red) from its reddish colour. It is about one-third of a mile in extent,
and covered with herbage. Its north point is low and should have a wide berth
in passing ; in other parts it may, we believe, be approached to A moderate
distance. The depth in mid-channel, between it and the land, is 82 to 50
fathoms.

OOircBB and HU&ZBB8 BABBOVB8.— Conche harbour, on the south side
of the peninsula forming the south side of Cape Rouge harbour, is exposed to
winds from southward, but has excellent anchorage well up to its liead, in 11
fathoms water, good holding ground. About 8 miles W. by S. | S. from Conche,
is HiUiers or Botitot harbour, which is a bad place for shipping, but veiy con-
venient for fishing craft.

OAXTASA BAT. — The entrance to the large inlet, Canada bay, is distant 15}
miles W. by S. i S. from cape Rouge harbour, and 19i miles N.W. from South
rock off the south end of Bell island. Its southern point of entrance, known as
Canada head, is high bold land, easily recognised when viewed Irom north-east-
ward or south-westward, but not when seen from E.S.E., as it is then over-
topped by the high laud behind it ; from tliis headland the inlet extends
N.E. i N. about 12 miles, and is in almost every part very deep, consequently
vessels experience little difficulty in entering and finding shelter. In Bide arm,
an inlet on the eastern side of the bay (within Englee island, an island off its
northern point of entrance) which runs parallel to the bay about (3 miles, vessels
also anch^j;, but the depth is inconveniently great.

Vessels entering the bay, as soon as they are within the two rocky islets near
Bide head, known as Cross islands, will see a lew white point, and anutlier black

HOOPING AND i'OCKCHETT HAUBOURS.

m that bide

nnc a littlo beyond it ; off thia latter, distant, 2 cablua, lies a sunken rock ; they
sliould keep, therefore, towards tlie middle of the buy, and all dangers will be
avoided, except a rock above water, wliich lies about a mile below the point of the
nixrrows; thia they must endeavour to leave on the port hand, keeping mid-
chanucl, and they will liave 10 fathoms through the narrowest part. Above the
narrows, the buy widens to more than a mile, and here is ancliorage in 18 to 20
fatlioms, good liolding ground, secure from all winds. •

Bnglee Harbour is on the north side of Canada bay. 'When enteiing, pass a
low white point, the northern point of entrance to Canada bay ; then keep near
tlie shore until abreast the next point, which makes the harbour ; haul round to
the S.E., taking care not to approach too near the point, for it shoals fully
a cable off. Having so far advanced, andior in 15 to 7 fathoms, good
holding ground ; but this is well up the cove, which is too small to lie in, unless
the vessel is moored head and stem.

Mr. R. Bnrsell, of St. John, says : — " The rock off the south end of the pro-
montory (White point, forming the north side of the entrance) is laid down too
near the shore ; there is a good passage between it and the main for any large
vessel ; but ships not taking this passage, must give White point a good berth —
not approaching nearer than two-thirds of a mile, as the rock is upwards of ono-
tliird of a mile from the point. Fishermen told me, that at tindes there are only
fl feet of water on this rock. I sounded all round it and found from 14 to 18 feet.
At Englee, three rocks, marked on the chart in the anchoring ground on the
north-east of the island, between it and the main, do not exist. Several large
French brigs were there the last time I visited it. There are a few rocks off the
northern point of Englee'i', but so close in shore as not to affect the navigation of
tlie channel." Mercantile Murine Magazine, 1860.

\Vithin the south end of Englee island there is a good harbour for shallops,
alihough thence to where the ships lie, there is no channel, even for boats, unless
at high water, or beyond half -tide.

Oouftre Harbour, in the south-west corner of Canada bay (about 2 miles west-
ward of Canada head, and 3 miles from the north point of the entrance), extends
about a mile in a south-westerly direction, and contains good anchorage in 16
fathoms, well sheltered from wind and sea.

Canada Harbour is the first anchorage on the port hand of Canada bay, within
Canada head ; here is a fishery establishment. As it is unsafe with N.E. winds,
ships anchor in Goufre, and only use this harbour with boats.

HOOFZMTO ZTAUBOVR. — From Canada head the coast trends 6i miles in the
direction of W.S.W. to Hooping harbour, an inlet having two arms, one of which
runs north-eastward, the other north-westward. Its extent is about 2J miles, and
it aH'ords shelter from northerly and easterly winds. Vessels usually anchor
near tlie head of the northern arm in 6 fathoms, although it is open to south-
ward ; yet the western arm is more sheltered, and the water is much deeper,
there being as much as 16 to 24 fathoms near its head.

roVRCHETT HAKBOmt. — The entrance to Fourchett harbour is nearly
6 miles S.W. ^ W. from that of Hooping. This harbour is but little frequented,
being too deep for anchorage until near its western extremitj', where is a cove on
its northern side. This cove is two or three miles from the sea, and is suflSciently

■J^J

* About half a cable from the north end of the island, there is a rock 2 feet under
water.

.^iiiu

nmfr

1«2

CAPE NORMAN To ('Al'K ST .fOIIN.

large to accommodate very Hmall veHscls, which must moor head and stern ; the
depth is 18 fathoms. The land on butli sidos of the hay is extremely high and
steep to the shore. There is also another arm running in about 'i miles farther
than the cove, but it is so narrow and deep that it is almost useless to shipping.

OSAirOB BAT. — Orange bay, nearly 11 miles tu the W.S.W. of Fourchett
harbour, is a large and very deep inlet which at l\ miles from the sea branchus
off into two arms. Its locality may be recognised by the lana at its entrance
being much lower than any other on the north side of White bn}', ^nd by itg
bearing N, | W. from cape Partridge, from which it is distant 17 miles. In the
nortliern arm the water is too deep for anchorage, until near the head ; and in
the western arm it is much too deep, there being in almost all parts of it 50 to f)()
fathoms water. A short distance within the entrance of the bay there is a cove
on each side, which is frequented by fishing vessels ; but both these are very
dangerous for a ship to lie in, although mooring head and stern, because a gale
from eastward would almost certainly drive them on shore. Orange bay is also
known by the name of Great Harbour Deep.

OBAma VACBB and UTTZ.B HABBOVR SBBP.— These bays are distant
about 7 miles S.W, by W. i W. from Orange bay. Grande Vache, the eastern-
most of the two, is about li miles deep, and exposed to southerly winds. Its
locality may be recognised when near the shore, by its northern poii*^ appearing
like an island, and by its bearing N.N.W. J W. from cape Partridge, irom which
it is distant 14i miles. This bay is but an indifferent place for shipping, and
seldom frequented.

Little Harbour Deep is larger than the bay of Grande Yache, and but little to
be preferred to it as an anchorage, being exposed to south-easterly winds. It is
about 20 fathoms deep at the entrance, which decreases rapidly to 5 fathoms at
about two-thirds of its extent from the sea, and t!>en the harbour becomes very
shallow to its extremity. Some rocks above water lie off its northern part at
about half a mile from the shore ; good fishing, it is said may be obtained in their
vicinity.

WMITB BAT. — White bay is a large and extensive arm of the sea, fully U
miles wide at its entrance, between Little Harbour Deep, and cape Partridge, and
running in a south-westerly direction about 43 miles, to its ujtper end, where it is
contracted to a river's mouth, 1| miles wide. lutliis bay or gulf are several islands,
coves and inlets, affording both anchorage and shelter. The first of these
on the western side is the bay named Little Cat arm.

lattls Cat Arm. — Little Cat arm is a small bay R miles W.S.W. from Little
Harbour Deep, and 17 miles N.W. by W. from Partridge point. Its entrance is
narrow and deep, while within it the water shoals from 22 to 3 J fathoms, being
moreover shallower on the southern than the northern side of the harbour.
Vessels entering should keep along the northern shore.

Oreat Oat Arm — Great Cat arm, two miles south-westward from Little Cat
arm, is 3^ miles in extent trending N.W. j W. It has 37 to 15 fathoms water,
the latter being at the western extremity of the bay, where is safe anchorage
sheltered from south-easterly winds by its southern head. Some rocks above
water lie off the northern point of entrance ; it is consequently necessary to
keep nearer the southern than the northern shore when entering.

Oony Avma. — At about 10 miles S.W. by W. \ W. from Great Cat arm and
25 miles W. ^ N. from Partridge point, is Cony Arm head, the most remarkable
land on this part of the coast, ai it is a bold headland which projects out U

'^v

1 riKNCIIMAN OOVK.

i stern ; tlie
ly hi}2h nnd
uiles farther
:o shipping,
of Fourchett
ea branchtis
its entrance
, ^nd by its
ilea. In the
lead ; and in
of it 50 to (to
ere is a cove
ese are very
3cause a gale
9 bay is also

s are distant
the eastern-
f winds. Its
V* appearing
, irom which
hipping, and

d but little to
winds. It is
) fathoms at
ecumes very
lern part at
lined in their

sea, fully U
artridge, and
I, where it is
treral islands,
irst of these

from Little
i entrance is
;hom8, being
the harbour.

m Little Cat
homs water,
) anchorage
rocks above
necessary to

mil(?3. On its western side is the deep bight, named (Irriat Coney arm, whera
id no good shelter for shipping; but in Little Coney arm. N.W. by W. from the
liond, is convenient anchorage for small vessels, although its eutrunoe ' is too
shallow for large ships.

rrenehman OoT«, 4 miles south-westward fi m Cony Arm head, ia a aroall
inlet in which vessels can anchor in about 12 fathoms. The anchorage is said to
1)0 safe, the ground holding well.

Jackson Arm. — About 2 miles south-westward of Frenchmen cove ia Jackaon
arm. a small hay extending 2 miles in the direction of N.W. by W It has a
depth of 2(1 to 15 fathoms, and is consequently too deep for anchorage, except in
a small cove on its northern side, where is sufficient room for a vessel to moor
liead and stern. It has been asserted that the largest timber on this part of the
const grows in tlie vicinity of this bay.

Bops Arm. — Sops arm, a bay 6 miles in extent, is the next inlet south-west-
ward from Jackson arm. and is a convenient anchorage, althi>ugh very deep in
almost every part. In front of it is a large island, known as Sops island ; and
near the western end of this island is another of smaller size, named Goat ; these
form with the coast a long narrow channel at tlie north-eastern end of which
vessels occasionally anchor under shelter of Sops island, — this is on the best side
of the channel. There is also anchorage in deep water further up the channel,
eastward of Goat island.

At the north end of Sops island there is a small cove, and two coves, known as
Harts covea, exist within this ; at these, fishing vessels sometimes anchor,
although it is more usual to go to the upper part of the arm, inside Goat island.
Large vessels cannot pass between Goat island and the coast.

Lobster Karbonr. — Entering White bay from north-eastward the first cove
met with after leaving Partridge point is Lobster harbour, 111 miles from the
cape. This is a small round inlet, with a shallow narrow entrance, having at low
tide, in some places, not above 8 or 9 feet water ; but within, it is as much as 12
and IH fathoms deep. It is most accessible therefore at flood tides. It is high
water here, full and change, at about 6h. 45m. ; springs rise «. neaps 4 feet.

Southern Arm. — Southern arm lies about 5 miles from I^obster harbour, and
farther up the bay. Here a ship may anchor with great safety, in 17 fatlioms
water, at about A miles within the heads ; but there is also good anchorage in any
part below this, nearer the entrance, in 20 and 25 fathoms. A short distance
iihove the inner point, on the northern side, is a mussel bank, which stretches
quite across the arm, and nearly dries at low water; within this is a depth of 11
and 12 fathoms, and the channel continues deep until near the river's head. This
is the first great inlet on the eastern side of White baj', and may, therefore be
rniidily recognised.

Middle Arm. — Middle arm lies about Ij miles W.S.W. from Southern arm,
and has at its entrance a rocky island, which is joined to tho shore by a shoal,
fi to 12 feet under water. This inlet runs in southward 3 or 4 miles, and is very
convenient for small vessels, which in entering should keep the port shore on
board.

About Oi miles W. i S. from Middle arm is Hauling point ; between them Ue
the Pigeon islands, where is good fishing.

Western Arm. — Western arm, the inlet under Hanling point, has an extent of
about 3 miles, and a depth of 14 to 16 fathoms. There is a cove on each side
just within its entrance ; that on the north side is named Chance, that on the

12*

■ ■I

[wWWkT

1B4

CA1>E NORMAN TO CAPE ST. .lOlIN.

other side is known as Wild cove. In Chance cove vessels anchor incomplete
security, it being land-locked ; these, when enteriii<r should leave a small islet
in the mouth of the cove on the port hand, they will thus carry a depth of 5 or 6
fathoms, whereas in the other passage are not more than 8 feet water. Wild cove
ia a very indifferent anchorage, open to north-westerly winds and with a roc'jy
bottom.

At about 7 miles up the bay from Western arm, and nearer its eastern than
its western shore, is Granbys island, without either cove or place of siielter ; a
shoal M feet under water extends from the south-eastern part of this island about
2 cables. Nearly abntast the island, on the eastern side of the bay, is Purbec-k
cove, where shipping may find safe anchorage, and lie with good convenience for
the fisheries.

Southward of Granbj's island White bay narrows in the direction of its head,
which is about I'i miles from the island. Hera is Gold cove, widi an islet in its
centre, named Miller.

rAXTIkZOOB FOXHT. — Partridge point consists of moderately elevated land
which falls in a gentle slope to the sea, where it has not much height. It is bare
of trees and of yellowish colour. Its approximate geographical position ia hit,
50'»'N.,long56»7' JO" W.

From Partridge point a l)old rocky coast trends 3 miles S. by E. i E. to cape
Grapaud, forming by its irregularit}' an open buy exposed to easterly winds. This
cape is very steep, with 5 fathoms water immediately off it, and is easily recog-
lused by its position with respect to point Partridge, and also by some white
patches on its eastern side due to its rocks of marble.

rXiBVB-nB-Xi'S'S HaBBOUR'- — From cape Crapaud to Pigeon island, the
southern limit of the bay in which this excellent little harbour is situated, the
bearing and distance are S. ^ W. li miles; the latter is a quarter of a mile long
East and West, and separated from the bold conspicuous land, forming Paradise
point, by a very narrow channel, through which we believe oven boats are unable
to pass.

Fleur-de-Ljs haibour is about a mile in extent, in the general direction of
N.W. and very narrow, but affords shelter from almost all winds. It derives its
name from the peculiar form of the summit of the mountain behind it, which
mountain is sufficiently lofty to be visible at the distance of .'>:j miles and when
brought to bear N.W. k W. leads to it. Its entrance cannot be seen until south-
ward of its parallel, as it is not easy to distinguish its starboard iimnt from tli*'
opposite shore while the observer is north-eastward of the harbour.

The depth in Fleur-de-Lys harbour decreases gradually from 14 fathoms at the
entrance to 4J fathoms in the pait known as tlie basin, which is abo' ' v hie
northward of the island oft' its western shore and the usual place of iuichnt ii4t'. in
almost the middle of the channel there is a rock, 8 to 12 feet under \\> tr. the
seaward edge of which is about three-quarters of a cable S by E from the island;
this rock ia the only danger, and may be avoided by* keeping nearer to rii.'
eastern than the western shore.

Vessels bound to Fleur-de-Lys harbour Rhould have the Admiralty cliaM
No. 281 at hand for reference.

When running in, keep along the starboard shore, steering between estabh^hinent
No, 2 and the little cliflf at Welch establishment to avoid the sunken rock in the
channel southward of the island ; then as soon as Bear hill comes over the north
side of the island, alter the course for Welch point, iv get into the middle of the

GREEN BAY.

105

nnrrowg, where the summit of Fleur'de-Lys mountain will be seen a little to the
right of Bear hill,— this will lead into the basin in the centre of which vessels
anchor in complete security over stiff' mud.

The strongest winds are from N.W. and West and frequently prevail in violent
squalls. There is never any sea at the anchorage, but after N.W. gales it breaks
with fury on the outer coast, and the surf then extends across the entrance, a
lioiivy swell being also experienced as far within as the island.

It is high water here, full and change, at 7h. 16m. Springs rise 2 to 4 feet.
The approximate geographical position of its northern shore (the foot of Bear
mountain) is lat. 50° 6' 39"-4 N.. long. «fi° 7' 37" W. The only convenient
watering place is outside the harbour, at the cascade near Pigeon island. Fleur-
de-Lys is a French iishing station.

OKl!BN BAT. — From Pigeon island a steep irregular coast tre ic- s S.S.W. J W.
:> iniles to Green cape, tho west point of Green bay and by its irregularity forma
a bay conlaining a small rocky islet. Mings point, the east point of the bay, is
^ miles S. i Fi. from Green cape, and will be easily recognised by the two steep
leddi.ih looking islets off its south-eastern side ; these are steep, with 30 fathoms
water almost close to them.

Til nearly the middle of the entrance to Green bay, almost upon a supposed
line connecting its western and eastern points, are the two dangerous rocks known
ns tiie Sisters, wliich are distant from ea<!h other a little more than three-quarters
of a mile S. 1 E. and N. i W. The northernmost lies a little more than a mile
S.S.E. \ E. from Green cape, is 5 feet under the surface, has deep water on all
sides of it. and generally shows itself by breakers. The southernmost, which is
distant 1\ miles Nor.li from Mings point, is above water (almost awash) and upon
it the sea breiiks excepting in the calmest weather; it is also very steep, the
drptli near it being '^0 to W futlioms. Th«! channel on each side of these rocks
is sixfe. and there is no other known dangtr in the entrance of Green bay.

Etain Harbtmv. — The coiist southward of (Jreen cap« forms, with a very
imrrow projecting low point 1^ miles south-westward from it (off which close-to
is a low islet, known as French islet), r '-'vie bay named Etain (Tin), where is a
Iishing estiibliKhment. Here vessel;, ancii •• in .^4 fathoms, sheltered from east-
wnvi hy Gentille island, a small v/l'it that Khould not be closely aj^proached
lecHiise a spit of (t feet to 2^ fatli ir extends from it about a cable in a north-
ousterly dire<!.ti<)n ; the Iwttomisof sand and it is seldom that any inconvenience
is occiisioiii'd by even strong easterly gules. Tiie northern and w-ntern shores
if U\<- buy iire'fonl ns far out as about 'i cables.

Sonth-eastward of P'rench island are two very steep rocky islets known as the
islets of f.btf I'ot d Ktain. lletwcen and around them is deep water, awl also
Jiefwcen them and French isjiuul.

Tm.'' cou'^t around Etaiu harbour is very bold. It '.s high water, full and
rluinge ;it 7l) l(!m.

Green bay is about 10 miles in extent W.S.W , and 8J miles wide at the
(Mitrance. wlien(;e its breadth gradually decreases nntil its two sides meet at the
tni'.ent at its head. The land on each side is high, steep, ai"d almost everywhere
well wooded ; the water is also very deep. b"ing 50 to Oil fathoms in the vicinity
iif tlie Sisr.> ;-s rocks and thence shoaling to 1(1 fathoms at less than a mile fro.u
Us liead. At about IJ miles within the bay, on its eastern side, there is a vfr)'
low rocky islet ; and midway in the bay, at ne^irly 4J miles from the Sisters, is
11 small steep islet of reddish colour with a little herbage on its summit ; — a mile

Ififl

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

within this, but nearer the western than the eastern shore, there is another
wooded islet, the eastei-n side of \vlii(;li is very steep.*

The anchorage in Green bay is westward of the last-mertioned islet in 11 to 14
fathoms, over mud which holds well, and i? ajiprnentl!/ almost landlocked. This
anchorage is found at a shoit distwnce east ward of the second low point on the
starboard side, which is fronted I'V very \»liite rocks ; furthei in, the depth of the
bay deci'eases suddenly, until at its hond it dries out a mile or more.

With strong N.E. or easterly winds, to which direction the bay is open, vessels
need not hesitate to seek the anchorapte, where {Iiey can remain until the wind
moderates or changes to West. In gales from N.W. or N.E. a heavy sea is
experienced in all parts of it etistward of the inner islet.

BKINOB BZOHT. — Mings jioiiit. the cfistern point of Green bay, and western
point of Mings bii3\'is a bare r^cky projeftion having oif its south-eastern side
two islets, as alretidv menticned. Cajie (Irappin, the eastern point of the bay,
1} miles S.E. by S. frt)m it. is liigli, steep and clifTy, and has near it a very low
rocky is iet within whici I boats obtain sliolier in a little creek. Mings biglit is
also known by the nan:e of I'inc b ly.

Mings bight is 1^ miles wide at the entrance, has an extent of 4 miles in the
direction of S.W. by W., and is a little more than a mile in breadth until near
ite head, where it diminishes to about a quarter of a mile. Its depth of water
is considerable, being 68 to 7 futhoms (the latter almost close to the shore at its
extremity), hence vessels seeking anchorage must advance a long distance within
it before they decrease their soundings sufficiently, and should do this cautiously,
keeping the lead going, because this depth is very suddenly attained. The only
known danger in the bay is some foul ground off its eastern side, near a low point
dominated by bare land, at about midway between its extremiiy and the low rocky
islet off cape Grappin ; to this sliorea berth of two cables should be given. When
anchoring, care is required so to place the vessel that it may r(>adily get away, if
occasion arise, as a N.E. wind is felt throughout the bay ; gales Iroxn this quarter
frequently send in a heavy sea.

Bardy Barbour. — From cape (irajipin a very high bold coast trends 2i miles
S.E. by E. i E. to cape Corbin; and is clear of off-lying dangers ; it then trends
2 miles S.S.E. to cape St. Martin. A small barren islet, known by tiu name
of Wood islet, off this last portion of coast was formerly a lishing station, ilardy
harbour, a little boat creek unaer Wood islet and shelteied by that islet from
easterly winds, is difficult to enter, especially when strong winds prevail from
north-eastward. The northern side of Wood islet is said to be foul to the dis-
tance of nearly two cables.

PAQVBT BARBOVB. — From cape St. Martina steep cliffy and irregular coast
trends i^ miles S. i W. to point Pelee, on the northern side of the entrance to
Paquet bHrbour. which is a peninsula of moderate height, having otV it several
rockj islets separated by boat channels. The southern point, cape Brule, is bold,
rising into a steep hill ."<70 feet higli; by this hill the harbour may be recognised
from eastward, and also by the hill (270 feet high and surmounted by a cross; on
the northern siile of point Pelee.

* The country round Green bay is said to abound in copper. Traces of the ore are
obaerred at the northern and southern end of this islet, and also at the turrtut at tiie
heitd of the bay.

; ia another

ill 11 to 14
iked. This
oint on tlie
lepth of the

[)eii, vessels
1 the wind
eavy sea is

nd western

sasteni side

oH the bay,

a very low

?8 bight is

liles in the
: until near
1) of water
hore at its
ince within
cautiously.
The only
a low point
e low rocky
'en. When
|ct away, if
his quarter

ds -ii miles
len trends
y tliv name
on. xiardy
islet from
oviiil from
to the dis-

gular coast
putriiuce to
it several
iile, is bold,
recognised
a cross I on

the ore are
>rreut at the

CONFUSION BAY.

18T

Paqnet harbour is a quarter of a mile wide at the entrance, where is a depth
of 15 to 24 fathoms. It thence extends westward about 2 miles, branching into
two arms, one to the northward the other to the westward ; its depth also
decieasing gradually to 7 and 2 fathoms as either extremity is approached. The
anchorage it affords is excellent, and shelter against the prevailing wind can be
uli'ained in aln-.ostitny part of it Both points of entrance are hoV-to, and can
be safely approached to a moderate distance ; it is, however, advisable when
running in to keep more over to the southern than the northern shore, on account
of a shoal of !.t^ fathoms which lies half a cable or more from the rocky islets.

The northern arm of Paqnet harbour is about a quarter of a mile long,
and 20 fathoms deep at its entrance, whence it rapidly becomes shallower.
\'essels entering should keep the starboard shore on board, there being at about
two-thirds up the channel, on the port side, a rocky shoal, a small part of which
occasionally appears above water : on other parts the depth is i\ feet to 4 fathoms,
—having passed this shoal, steer up mid-channel, and anchor in 5, 7, or 8
fathoms. Tlie northern ])art of the bay near the land is shallow, and a rivulet
here falls into the bay, which is said to issue from some extensive lakes about
two miles inland.

The western arm is somewhat narrower than the northern, but is quite free
fniiii danger; the shores on both sides are steep-to and bold, and there is a depth
of l-l to 7 f-tl'onis for half a mile in ; it then shallows to the head of the bay,
where is r o-nuiy beach and also a riv«r. This is a snug and secure place for
vessels.

Tiie entrance to Paquet harbour should not be attempted when the wind is
between N.W. and S.W., as the squ-ills off the land are then both heavy and
changeable; and to miss stays wiien in the narrows would be dangerous. If
apprehensive of bad weather, it is more prudent to make for Round harbour, in
Confusion bay, 5 miles to the southward. It is high water here, full and change,
ai (ih. i!hn.

The Coast. — From Paquet harbour the coast trends S.S.E. 4 E. 3^ miles to
cape Cagnet on the west side of Confusion bay, and is very irregular in outline,
high and Udd ; it contains several open bays which are too much exposed to
ciisteriy winds to be available for anchorage. Cape Cania, tliree-quarters of a
mile from the harbour, has off it a dangerous rock, partly awash at low water,
tin; seaward edge of which is two cables from the land, and very st«cp, the- depth
close to it Ixiing --l-i fathoms ; if necessary, vessels can pass betweeu this rock and
(lie cape, the narrow channel separating them having « to 12 fathoms water, but
a prudent shipnnister will give it a wide berth especially in thic'^ weather, —
bioakers n.siially show its position. Cape Cagnet is a great bluff point with
ror' s eKteudiiig from it a short di.stauce.

CONFUBXOIV BAY, — Brent head, the eastern extremity of Confusion bay, is
distant 2} n»iles E. by S. J S. from cape Cagnet. It is a very high bold head-
land, visible at a considerable distance, and off its eastern side is a reef, separated
from it by a very narrow channel, through which iishing boats occasionally pass
in line weather.

Confusion bay is about 2} miles in extent, and lias deep water almost every-
where. At its south-western end it forms a large exposed bay, the coast of which
is bold and dangerous ; consequently this part is safe only while the wind is
from the land, hshing v''£sels avoiding it at other times. Round harbour, east-
ward of this dangerous bay, is an excellent harbour, and very safe.

. ■; I

ir.ft

CAPE NORMAN TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

Bound Rarboiur. — Round harbour affords the only safe anchorage in Confusion
bay, and is a favourite resort of lisliing vessols caught by strong northerly winds;
it is also easy of egress with wcstorly winds. It is formed by cape Coup de
Hiiche (a bold, stee|), round niountniu) and a whitish looking point within.
When entering, it is necessary to remember that there are opposite this point, on
the other side, two rocky patches outside the port point of thecove. The anchorage
has a depth of 4 to 6 fathoms, is secure from the weather, and entirely land-
locked.

Little Round harbour, about Ij miles eastward of Round harbour, is merely a
cove, and unfit for shipping.

&A BCXB HARBOVB. — From Confusion bay a bold rocky coast trends S.E. f E.
3^ miles to La Scie harbour, the locality of which may be easily recognised by its
eastern point being very rugged at its summit and of reddish colour. This
harbour is about a mile in extent S. by E. i E., and a little more than a cable
wide, and affords good shelter against uU winds with the exception of those that
blow directly in ; it is, however, very deep, shoaling gradually from :(2 to 4
fathoms. Winds from N.N. W. send in a heavy sea. The best holding ground
is in 15 fathoms, muddy bottom, just within a little cove on the starboard side;
further within, the bottom is \ ery indifferent.

CAPB ST. JOBlf- — From La Scie harbour the direction of the coast is about
E. f S. to the north Bill of cape St. John, which is distant H miles from the
harbour. All this land is very bold, moderately high and clear of any known off-
lying dangers. The north Bill is very rugged at its extremity, and almost close
to it is a depth of 16 to 20 fathoms. Cape St. John, 2J miles S. i W. from the
north Bill, is high, steep and bold. Close to it, off the high cliff which consti-
tutes it, is a high very pointed rock of pyramidal form, which stands out
prominently when viewed from north-eastward. The approximate geographical
position of the cape is lat. 4!»° 57i' N. long. 55° 20^' W. and the depth in its
immediate vicinity is 20 to 50 fathoms.

OuU Island. — At about 5 miles E. by S. i S. from cape St. John and 5i miles
S.E. § E. from the north Bill of the cape, is Gull isUnd, a high barren islet of
about one third of a mile in extent, close to which on all sides is a depth of 14 to
20 fathoms. There are no known sunken rocks in its vicinity.

The current in the neighbourhood of Gull island and cape St. John almost
always flows southward. Occasionnlly, and especially with the northerly winds,
it has considerable strenfffh.

ST. BABBB or EORBE XSZJkmB. — These two islards lie 10 to 12 miles
from the coast between Partridge point and cape St. John, the westernmost point
of the western ii land being distant 10 miles S.E. by E. I E. from Partridge point,
and the soutliei nmost point of the eastern island 13i miles N. J E. from the
north Bill of cape St. John. They are of moderate height, have generally level
summits, and me separated by a channel a mile wide in its Tiarrowest part, in
which is a depth of 22 to 4H fathoms, black mud, and no known sunken
dangers.

The easternmost mid largest island is 4^ miles long S.S.E. and N.N.W and
about IJ miles across in its widest part. On its western side ai'c two steep rocks,
which must always be passed on their western side by vessels passing between
the islands. Near its northern point there is a rock; a rock also lies a mile
from Hs eastern side, with the south-eastern end of the island hearing S. by
W. J W., and t!>e northern end W. by N. f N., — around and also between this

rocky
east p
given
westei
the ea
The
and a
appeal

'\>

CAPE BON AVISTA TO CAl'E ST. JOHN.

loii

in Confusion
herly winds ;
ipe Coup de
loiut witliin.
his point, on
lie anchorage
intirely land-

, is merely a

ids S.E. f E.
gnised by its
olour. This
than a cable
jf thoso that
rom ;<a to 4
ding ground
irboard side;

^ast is about
lies from the
ly known oflF-
almost close
W. from the
vhich consti-
1 stands out
geographical
depth in its

md 5i miles

rren islet of

pth of 14 to

John almost
herly winds.

;o 12 miles
nmost point
tridge point,
fjdiii tlie
I'Milly level
est part, in
wn sunken

I^.N.W and
steep rocks,
ing between
lies a mile
!aring S. by
jtween this

rocky islet and the island is deep water, 14 to 25 and 50 fathoms. The south-
east part of the island is foul to nearly a mile oif ; liencc .. good berth should be
given it, especially in foggy weather. This end of the island contains on its
western side two small coves into which boats can enter, and at IJ cables outside
the easternmost of these there is a rock under water.

The western island is 3 miles long S.E. by E. ^ E. and N.W. by W. i W.
and about a mile broad. It is steep on all sides ; and its sides are vyhitish iu
appearance.

CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

Cape Bouavista, to which reference has already been made in page 18, is a
steep rocky point having a depth of 4 fathoms almost close to its base. From it
to the south Bill of cape Freels, the northern boundary of Bouavista bay, the
bearing and distance are N. by E. 3(i miles. The whole coast of this bay is much
indented, very rocky, difficult, and dangerous. On its south side the land is high
and mountainous, and the coast steep and iron-bound ; on its north side it is low
and marshy, and from this shore the water is shoal to a considerable distance.
Tlie bay abounds with small islands, and is encompassed with dangers on every
side. The harbours, sounds, and inlets, are deep, extensive, numerous, well
sheltered, and safe ; but they are generally so deeply embayed, the passages into
them are so intricate, and the surrounding land is so similar in appearance, that
their navigation is seldom attempted by strangers. The best harbours for shelter
are considered to be Barrow and Great Chance (in the south-west part of the
bay) or New harbour and Cat cove (in its north-western partj ; but the extreme
narrowness of the entrance to New harbour is a great impediment, and renders
Cat cove the more to be preferred.

BONAVISTA. — Eioui the extremity'- of cape Bouavista to Black head the
coast trends W.S.W. about ,"; miles, and is rocky. Betweeti are three small coves
known as Red cove, Bailey cove, nnd Bonavista ; the last is the most southern
and the only one ufl'ording anchorage, the otliers being encumbered by rocks and
more exposed. Off the western side of the '^ape is Green island, 3 cables in
extent and (5!) feet high, which is separated from the shore by a elninnel lA cables
wide and carrying in its deepest part (eastward of a rock nearly in midway) only
'.i fathoms water, — consequently large vessels always go westward of the island.
And, a mile W.N.W. from tireen island is Stone island, a small i.ilet 10 feet
high, consisting of several musses ot slate ; tlie channel between is free from any
known sunken dangers.

Bouavista cove is onlj' available for small vessels during sunnner. Strangers
b .and to it sliould not approach the shore nearer than to have a small portion
(pf Gull island just seen westward of (ireen island, until Squarey island bears
South ; tliey may tlien haul in, yiving the hitter a short berth and anchor in (i
fathoms water. Squarey island is 4S feet iiigli and the outer of a ridge of
locks forming tlie north side. if the cove.

iHirrivista cove is a veiv iiul'll»'nu( aiicinu'agt', luiiig so badly sheltered that.

h. ■- m

170

CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

in N.W. gales, immediately following a continuance of heavy winds from sea-
seaward, the sea breaks athwart it, and sometimes occasions considerable
damage ; the whole of the fishing-boats have been known to founder at their
anchors, and not unfrequently many of the stages are dostroyed. In suumer,
vessels moor under Squarey head, but even there, as in every other part of the
harbour, the ground is very rocky and uneven.

8&AOK BBAB BAT. — Black Head bay. west«vard of cape Bonavista, is 7^
miles wide between Black head and Southern head, and (i miles deep. From
Black head its eastern shore trends W.S.W. 4J miles to Wolf head, the coast
being steep and clear of danger ; the small open bays have a few scattered
inhabitants, but afford no shelter for vessels. The coast hills are about 200 feet
high, and appear separated by valleys from those of the back range, which are
400 to 500 feet high.

Wolf head is a remarkable bluff, 225 feet high ; from this a low coast, clear of
danger, trends S.W. by W. 2J miles to the head of the bay, which is IJ miles in
extent, with a broken and rocky shore ; thence for 2 miles N.N.E. to Kuiglits
point the coast is shelving. '.>ith shoal water a cable off Between Knights point
and Kings cove is an open bay, IJ miles deep, and tlie entrance a mile wide ;
there are two coves at its head, — the bay is clear of danger, but affords no
shelter.

XingB Cove is a small bay, being li cables east and west, and three-quarters
of a cable wide, shoaling gradually from 20 fathoms at the entrance to the beach
at its head. It is open to tlie nortli-east, but said to be a safe anchorage for
small vessels ; — as the water slioals suddenly they do not drag in-shore, but at
times drift to sea.

Broad Head is a bluff, 817 feet high (with a front three-quarters of a mile
north and south; separating Kings cove from Broad cove and village ; the latter
is immediately Bouth of Southern head, a steep cliff rising to a hill 510 feet high.

From Southern head to Western Iiead the distance is .S^ miles N.W. by W. ^ W.
The coast between forms five coves, at the second of which Keels, is a fishins
village ; but neither this nor any of the coves are fit places for vessels of
burthen.

From Western head the land changes its direction to W.S.W., and leads to
numerous coves, bays^ and arms of the sea, most of which have deep water and
contain places of anchorage. Wo shall here enumerate the principal of these,
with their respective situations ; but, as many of them are too deeply embayed
for general navigation, we shall not extend our directions to a minute or par-
ticular description of them all, but confine ourselves to such only as are situated
in prominent parts of the baj', and are mostly fitted for general use aud commonly
frequented.

Plate Cove is situated about 7 i miles from Western head ; its entrance,
between Arrow point and Plate Cove head, is three-quarters of a mile wide,
whence it bends in more than a mile southward. At its eastern extremity is a
run of fresh water, but the bottom is foul and rockv ; it is therefore not much
frequented.

Indian Arm lies about S.W. i W. from Plate Cove head, distant 3 miles ; it is
a narrow inlet running in nearly S.W. about two miles, and terminates in a
rivulet of fresh water.

80VT8WARI> B Av, separated from Indian Arm only by a narrow neck of
land, is un exi'Msive branch of the sea. Its entrance between Red liead and

i>.

SWEKT HAY, A<\

171

is from sea-
considerable
ider at their
In suumer,
r part of the

avista, is 7^
[eep. From
id, the coast
iw scattered
tout 200 feet
e. which are

ast, clear of
i 1} miles in
. to Kuiglits
nights point
I mile wide ;
t aflFords no

ree-quartcrs
,0 the beach
iichorage for
shore, but at

rs of a mile
; the latter
feet high.

. by W. i W.

is a iishing

vessels of

and leads to
water and
pal of these,
)ly embayed
nute or par-
are situated
d commonly

;8 entrance,
a mile wide,
tremity is a
not much

miles ; it is
iiiuatcs in a

row neck of
[>d liead and

Kate Harbour head, is fuUj- a mile wide, and 'iO to 90 fathoms deep in mid-
chnnnel; thence it bends south-westward 7i miles, becoming narrower as its
extremity is ppproaclied, but with deep water and no danger. On the western
side tliere is an opening named Hayes cove, which lies about 2 miles from Kate
Harbour head.

Vessels intending to seek either of these places, must beware of the Bacon-
bone ri^ck, a danger of only 18 feet water, rt-liich lies W. f N., distant a mile
from Western head, and directly in tlie fairway of the navigation. To avoid this
danger. Southern head should not be shut in until Little Denier island comes on
with the outer Shag island.

Kate Harbour lies westward of Plate cove. Its entrance is three-quarters of a
mile wide and 3(1 to 27 fathoms deep in mid-channel, which decreases gradually
lo 10 and ;. fathoms at its extremity ; the extent of the harbour is about 1} miles.
There is a sunken rook off its entrance with 7, H, and i) fathoms water round it,
which lies nearer to Kate head than the opposite shore.

8WBET BAV. — Sweet bay, westward of Kate harbour, is another extensive
inlet. Its entrance is between Cutler head and Chance point, and is also the
entrance to Maidenhair cove, and Little and Great Chance harbours. Sweet bay
is the easternmost inlet. Having entered it. and passed Cutler head, which is
rocky and steep-to, vessels will see Turfpook island, which is small and narrow,
and about half a mile to the south-west of it an island named Woody island ;
between them is a rock under water. There is a passage on either side of these
islands. Beyond Woody island the bay becomes about three-quarters of a mile
wide, and is (iO fathoms deep in midway ; advancing still farther they will
observe several islands. There is also a rocdc under water on the starboard side,
lliree-quarters of a mile beyond Woody island; it lies abreast a little island in
mid-channel ; farther on is Wolf island, between which and the main there is no
passage ; olf this lies Gooseberry island, between wluch and Wolf island there
are 30 fatiionis water, but the channel is narrow, and that on the eastern side of
Gooseberry island is much wider than the western. Sweet bay here divides into
two branches ; that to the eastward is known as the South-west arm, and has
directly before its entrance Hunt island, the channel to the eastward of which is
10 to 1 i fathoms deep, and that to tlie westward 7 and fathoms : they will then
see on their starboard side a small island, and can pass it on either side, and,
having done so, will drop into 24, 22, and 20 fathoms water ; tiie head of the arm
is foul and rocky. The Nortli-west arm is divided from the South-west arm a
little below Hunt island, and at the fartlier end of Wolf i-land is nearly a mile
wide, whence it runs south-westerly 3^ miles, with a good depth of water ; it is
"lear of any known sunken dangers, and terminates in sandy beach, where is a
.small rivulet.

Great Chance Rarbour. — The entrance of Great Chance harbour, which is an
excellent anchorage, lies Oi miles W. ^ S. from Western head. The passage to
it is clear with the exception of the Bacon-bone rock already mentioned. In
sailing for this place the safest way is, not to sliut in Southern head until the
isle named Little Denier conies on with the outer Shag island ; thus the Bacon-
bone rock will be avoided, and the course may be directed W. by S. for the
harbour, until abreast Chance point. It is necessary to guard against a rock 6
feet under water, at the southern part of the entrance . Within this rock, and in
a line with it. are two islets known as the Mustard-bowls ; in order to avoid the
i(K k, he careful nol to shut in the western Mustaid-bowl with the eastern, —

BPT

172

CAPE IJONAVISTA TO CA1»K ST. JOHN.

' i

having passed the latter, stand boldly in, and anchor anywhere above the nar-
rows in 11 to 5 fathoms, good liolding-ground. Wood and water may easily be
procured here.

Off Chance point (the outer point of Chance harbour), and directly in a line
between the southern part of Long islands and Cutler head, there is a 7-fathom
patch, over which the sea breaks in very heavy gales.

At the distance of almost a mile N.E. i E. from Chance point is Chance Gull
rock, which is steop-to, and always visible. Westward of this is Deer island,
H miles long and very narrow ; between it and the main there is a good channel
to Chandler reach.

OHAWBUBB BBAOR.— Chandler Reach is the channel leading to Goose bay
and Clode sound. The course through it is W. J S., from the north-west point
of Deer island to Connecting point, the point of the peninsula that divides the
former from the latter.

OooB* Bay runs in south-westerly about 7^ miles, and as far as Lubber's hole,
is 47 to 3() fathoms deep in mid-clianuel, with no known sunken rocks ; above
this the depth decreases to 12 and 8 fathoms, the latter being near Shag island
Behind and westward of this small island vessels anchor in 4 to 7 fathoms, or
farther to the southwaixl in 5i fathoms. Fresh water and wood are plentiful,
and easily obtained.

Clode Sound is a fine branch of the sea, running in from Cliandler reach fully
20 miles ; it has many places of very good anclunage, and is without any known
sunken rocks. Vessels find perfect safety on the northern shore, at Brown cove,
or farther in at Long cove, or Platter cove ; or on tlie southern shore, at Bunyau
and Love coves ; or, passing the I'liitter rocks, and steering westward, at Fresh-
water cove. The mid-channel has deep water throughout, and there are no rocks
except, as in Goose bay, near the sshores.

Ziion's Sen is an opening norfliward of the entrance to Chandler Reach.
Vessels bound to it must sail nortliward of Deer island and also of Cluster
islands, and pass through the Narrows, a narrow channel about one-third of a
mile wide and 21 fathoms deep. Within the entrance about a mile is a sunken
rock, with 4 to (i fathoms water close to it. The inlet branches oif into two
divisions ; that to the north-west is v ery narrow, and has a rocky islet at its
entrance : that which runs to the south-west is broader, and has 11, 14, and 10
fathoms water in it — it runs in fruin the sunken rock about li miles, and at its
farther end becomes sho.;!, vnnow, and rocky.

Iiong Islands. — The Long islands are four in number, and separated by nar-
row channels, some of which ai'e encumbered with rocks and are consequently
dangerous. The eastern island is the largest and broadest, the next to it is the
longest, the two western ones are smaller and narrower. These islands form the
northern boundary of the passage from Western head to Chandler Reach, and
also the southern boundary to Swnle Tickle and Newuum sound. Olf the north-
eastern part of the largest of the islands there is a sunken rock, close to the laud,
and therefore easily avoided ; this point bears from Western head W.N.W. ^ W.,
distant 5 miles.

irBWasAlv BOT7in>. — Newman sound is a large arm of the sea, running iu
W. by N., and having at its entrance Swale island, which is nearly 4J miles long,
and less than one mile broad in the widest part ; this island divides the entrance
into two channels, the southern of which is known hs the Swale Tickle, and tiie
northern by the ^'cneral nanu' of Niwudui sound.

SOUTH BllOAD COVE, &c.

178

bove the nar-
aay easily be

ctly in a line
is a 7 -fathom

Chance Gull
Deer island,
[ood channel

to Goose buy
;h-\ve8t point
t divides tlie

iubber's hole,
•ocks ; above
Hliag island.
' fathoms, or
ire plentiful,

T reach fully
it any known
Brown cove,
e, at Bunyan
rd, at Fresh-
I are no rocks

dler Reach.
of Cluster
ne-third of a

is a sunken
oflf into two

islet at its
, 14, and 10
s. and at its

ated by nar-
onsequently
t to it is the
ids form the
lieach, and
If the north-
to tho land,
N.W. i W.,

miles long,
he entrance
kle, and the

The course from abreast Wester i Iiead into the Swale Tickle is W.N.W. If
iibreaat Gull island (Bonavista), sieer W.N.W. ^ W. ii4 miles, and it will carry
to a little southward of the island off the south side of Swale islaiid, and
in the fairway of the passage ; but as there are several obstructions in this
channel and the passages thence into Newman sound are narrow, it is always
advisable to go northward of Swale island. To do tliis, having rounded Gull
island, steer W.N.W. (westerly) 23 or 24 miles, and the sound will then appear
open, after which any convenient course can be followed ; the sound is fully 1{
miles wide, and extends nearly in a W. by N. direction from the east end of
Swale island 11 miles, — in it are several places of good anchorage ; those on the
southern shore are South Broad cove, Minchins cove, and Stanford cove.

■ontb Broad Cot* is U^ miles beyond the western point of Swale island, and
is a place of great safety. The passage in is to the south-westward, and vessels
ride in 10 fathoms, free from any danger, There is a small island at the entrance,
which must he passed on its western side.

Mlnehina Oo^e. — On this, the southern side of Newman sound, there is a long
narrow point of land running out to the northward, and forming the eastern
boundary of Minchins cove, where vessels lie in 5 fathoms, opposite a sandy
beach. Westward of this is mount Stanford, off the point of which lies a small
island, reaching half-way over the passage, and making the channel in tins part
very nari'ow ; the best course through, is eastward of this island, in 9 fathoms ;
here an opening called Buckley's cove appears to the eastward — into this cove only
small vessels can enter. The coast now winding to the westward, forms a broad
bay, with 20, 26, and 27 fathoms water in it, free from any known sunken danger,
and shallowing on each side towards the shores. At the south-western part of
this is Stanford cove, where is a sandy beach, the approach towards which.
shallows gradually.

Bandy Cove, on the north side of Newman sound, about 4 miles beyond Bar-
row harbour at its entrance, has good anchorage. It will be readily recognised
as it contains the only sandy beach on the north side of the sound ; there is no
danger in entering it, and it is perfectly safe, the depth being 10 to 20 fathoms.
The Halfway rock, between this place and Barrow harbour, is above water, and
steep-to, the depth close to it being 4 fathoms ; it should be passed on its south
side.

Adventure Covea. — At a mile westward from Sandy cove, are Great and
Little Adventure coves, two snug little places on tlie same side of the sound, but
which from the narrowness of their entrances are adapted only fur small vessels,
lietween these places there is a sunken rock at about 80 yards from the shore,
with only 4 feet of water on it. Sydney island, off the entrance to Great Adven-
ture cove, shelters it on the south side ; the passage is northward of this island,
there being no cliannel between the island and Harbour liead.

North Broad Cove lies also on the northern side of Newman sound, and is a
convenient well-sheltered anchorage. Its entrance may be known by a high
round island named Black Duck, off its western side. When entering, vessels
keep this island on board, until they make a tickle or inlet between it and the
western shore, in order to avoid a sunken rock at the eastern side ; after which
they keep as close as possible to the eastern shore, a dangerous rock lying nearly
in mid-channel. The anchorage witliin is in 10 to 25 fathoms, muddy bottom.
Wood and Water may be procured here.

There are some dangerous rocks off the northern shore further up Newman

V ;'•

171

CAIM: HONAVISTA to (Wl'K ST. JOIIN.

sound, one of wliich known as the Shaj;, lies three-quarters of a mile beyond
]31ack Duck iHlaml ; and, a mile fartlier on is Halls rock. These rocks are under
water, and about a cable from the land ; close to them is a depth of 4 and 5
fatlioma, and between them and the shore (t and 7 fathoms; vessels should there-
fore always give the northern shore of Newnnin sound a wide berth, for by
keeping nearly half a mile ofl'it tiiey will avoid them all.

BABBOW BABBOVB. — This excellent harbour is three or four miles to the
eastward of Swale islaqd, and on the northern side of the entrance to Newman
sound. Little Denier island which faces it, is au excellent mark for it, as the
harbour lies W.S.W. from it.

Barrow harbour is formed by three islands, Richard, Goodwin, and Keat ; and
the entrance, between Goodwin island and the main, is about 500 yards wide,
and not very difficult of access. The harbour is a mile long ; the eastern part
is rocky, and not well-sheltered, but the western is completely land-locked, and
has good holding ground. The course to this place from Gull island (Bonavista)
is nearly N.W. by W. J W. •-i'J miles. Approaching from northward, the course
from the eastern Gooseberry rock will be S.W. J W., 18 miles ; this rock is just
above water, and lies in lat. 48° 5«' 45" N., long. 63° 27' 30" W. In this course
the Malone rock and ledge must be carefully guarded against ; the latter is a
4-fathom shoal distant a mile S.S.W. \ W. from the rock.

On approaching Little Denier island be careful to avoid the Outer rock, lyiujr
three-quarters of a mile B. i N. from that island. It has only 4 and 6 feet of
water on it ; but as the sea constantly breaks, is easily guarded against.
Between Little Denier and Richard island there is also a range of rocks, named
Brandishes, at various distances from each other, and extending nearly half way
over towards Little Denier; the depth over them is 14 to 17 feet, fjnd between
them are channels of 7 and 8 fathoms. These make the northern channel
preferable for stranijers without a pilot. To run clear of the Brandishes, keep
Wedge point (the projection within the harbour) a little open to the southward of
Smoky ridge (a range of high land at the top of the harbour), until Broom head
is brought on with the middle Shag island ; the passage is then without obstruc-
tion till near Wedge point, oft" which at 70 yards lies a rock 8 feet under water ;
then sail up abreast Pudners cove, until j'ou are entirely shut in from the sea, and
anchor in 10 to 18 fathoms. Some vessels prefer anchoring in Garlands creek ;
but without running well up, the ground is foul. There is a small hsiiin"
establishment here ; good water may be procured in Pudners cove, and abundance
of fire-wood. Tlie land about Barrow harbour is liigher than that of the neigh-
bouring coast, and may consequently be easily recognised.

BAXiVAOB BAT. — Salvage bay. on the northern side of the iiromontorv',
which divides it from Newman sound, contains several runs of fresh wafer, but
has no place of good shelter.

Ship island, in lat. 48° 45' N., long. 53° 37' W., is distant 21 miles N.W. i W.
from Gull island (cape Bouavista) ; and Damnable harbour lies W. |^ S. 6i miles
from Ship island. Ship island may be known by a remarkable bald point like a
sugar-loaf. The harbour is well adapted for small vessels, but its very narrow
entrance disqualifies it for ships of burthen ; there is a rock oflF the southern part
of the entrance, and another off the northern side of the island in the middle of
the harbour. There is good anchorage all round the island, in 4 to 5 fathoms,
sandy bottom. Water may be easily procured here, but very little wood.

Between Damnable harbour and Salvage bay are several small islands and

<l()()«EliEiaiV ISl.KS. Ac.

17.%

mile beyond
ks are under
1 of 4 and 5
liould there-
erth, for by

miles to the
to .Newman
)Y it, as the

1 Keat ; and
yaids wdde,
eastern part
locked, and
(Bonavista)

the course
rock is just

this course
3 latter is a

;' rock, lyin<i(
.nd feet of
ed against,
icks, nnnied
fly lialf way
nd between
!rn channel
lishes, keep
outhward of
irooni head
)ut obstruc-
nder water ;
le sea, and
iiids creek ;
lall fishing
abundance
the neigh-

romontorv',
water, but

N.W. 4 W.

S. 64 miles
)oint like a
ery narrow
ithern part
middle of
5 fathoms,
ood.
slands and

rocks: the largest of these, tlie Baker's Loaf, iu a narrow island, about three-
rjuiMft'is of a mile long.

Tlie course from Gull ishind (lioimvisliO to Damnable harbour is N.^Y. by W.
ns far as Shag islands, iind afterwards noithward of the Baker's Loaf, Or, steer
N.W. } W. from (Jull islmul towards Ship island, and then W. J N. from Ship
i.sland to the entrance of Damnable harbour.

Morris Co^e. — Morris cove is a safe anchorage on the north side of the island
bearing that name, which lies northward of Damnable harbour. Vessiels bound
to it from eastward must keep Ship island well on board, to avoid the dangerous
reefs that extend fro'ii Flat islands nearly two-thirds over the channel in the
direction of Ship island, on some of which are not more than 17 or 18 feet water;
they must proceed, tlierefore, northward of Ship island, passing it at not more
than half a mile distance, and when well inside, avoid shutting in Lackington rock
with Varket island (known by its forming two remarkable hummocks), as there
are several clusters of rooks between Ship and the Horsechop islands, on the
south side. Tliey must steer for Varket until abreast Lackington rock, then keep
liackington rock on the northern extremity of Ship island, until Varket bears
North, to clear two sunken rocks off the north-east end of Morris island. The
cove may be then steered for and entered without hesitation. Tiie anchorage is in
25 to 5 fathoms, and the western side is to be preferred. Wood is plentiful, but
water is scarce in summer.

Pair and Falsa Bay, &e. — The bay of Fair and False may contain several
good anchorages, but it is so filled with small islauds and rocks, that any descrip-
tion we could give of it would be useless. A cluster of large islands extends off
the frontage of this bay, fully 20 miles, or so far as Offer Gooseberry island ;
between these are innumerable passages, with deep water. There is also a wide
channel from Fair and False bay and Morris island to the northward, which leads
to Bloody bay, and then turns westward, where it is divided into vaiious branches,
forming the North-west arm, the Middle arm, and the North-east arm ; the last
is a peculiar and extensive channel, running in one direction, soutliward, almost
to Newman sound, and in another, almost to Damnable harbour. Bloody bay is
navigable in every part, and contains many excellent anchorages ; also plenty of
both wood and water.

There is also an open strait from Bloody bay eastward, through Bloody and
Cottel Reaches, and out to the northward of Offer Gooseberry island. Other
channels branch off northward from Bloody and Cottel Reaches, and between
tlie Lakeman islauds, running into Pitt sound. Locker and Content Reaches, and
llience to Freshwater bay. Within these, and on the northern shore, are Hare,
Locker, Trinity, Indian, and many otlier bays, coves, and inlets, abounding with
good anchorages, and capable of affording shelter to the largest vessels in case
of need. These are at present frequented only by the local traders ; we shall,
therefore, pi'oceed to those which are the usual places of resort, and more con-
veniently situated for the purpose of fishing.

OOOBBBEBBT ZSLBB, Sec, — The Gooseberry isles are a cluster of islets, near
the middle of Bona vista bay. The Offer or Outer Gooseberryis in lat.48''36' 30" N.,
long. 53°30'W. From Gull island (Bonavista) Eastern rock, which lies 1 J miles
S.E. by E. from Offer Gooseberry isle, bears N. by W. di-stant 20 miles. From
Eastern rock, Copper island (at the mouth of Greenspond Tickle) bears
N. by E. i E. ; here it is possible to obtain pilots for this and the adjacent
anchorages, which are Pools harbour. New harbour, and Cat cove.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

itt 122 12.2

S Iil4 ■■

1.25 III 1.4

■ 2.0

li
1^

Photographic

Sciences

Corporation

23 WIST MU«Ji-i ST^TiT

WUSTH.N.Y. MSM

(716)«72-4S03

irn

CAPE liONAVISTA TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

'*.-,'

:^^- , Vi

There is good holding ground between Greenapond island and the main, but
the water is so deep that a vessel is liable to drift on shore in the act of getting
under way, nor is there sufficient room to veer to a lengthened cable ,in heavy
gnles from the S.W., to which quarter it is much exposed.

Vessels ertering Btmavistft bay from northward must cautiously avoid the
Charge rock, which lies S.E. by S. 2^ miles from Gull island (cape Freels)'
this rock has only 6 feet water on it, and is circumscribed by a large spot of
rough fishing-ground, having from 8 to 30 fathoms. From Gull islt^nd (cape
Freels) they may run immediately for the Stinking islands, taking care, how-
ever, not to open cape Freels eastward of Gull island ; this will carry them in-
side the danger. Keep a good look for the Mid-rocks, which are just above
water, and lie 2 miles to the N.N.E. ^ E. of the Stinking islands. But, a vessel
not bound up the bay, is enjoined to keep vvell outside all the islets and rocks, for
should the weather become suddenly thick and foggy (which occurs frequently
with an easterly wjnd), she will run a great risk of getting bewildered among the
innumerable rocks for which this part of the coast is remarkable, and from which
neither chart nor compass can direct the stranger. At about three-quarters of a
mile N.N.W. i W. from Gull island there is a 3-fathom rock with a depth close
to it of B to 12 fathoms.

In winter, when the uorth-easterly gales are very heavy and continuous, the
sea breaks extremely high over several spots of the Stinking banks, which lie
E. i N. 2k miles from the'Stinking islands. In two places the depth on these
banks is only 7 fathoms ; in such weather, although a vessel would not strike,
she would be in very gi'eat dangc of foundering in the tremendous sea which
would break over her ; — in fine weather no danger iS to be apprehended.

Having roun<^ed the Stinking islands, and wishing to sail into New harbour ur
Cat cove, steer direct for Offer Gooseberry island, S.W. by W. J W., until
Pouch and Flower islands appear to touch each other ; the three rocks 1^^ miles
soutliward of Flower island, will then be avoided, — the outer of these rocks has on
it 3 fatlioms water, the middle 14 feet, and the inner only 11 feet. Now alter the
course to about W. J S., keeping the white face of Chalky hills (in Locker reach)
a little on the starboard bow, and it will carry clear of Copper island dangers, to
seaward of Shoe point ; then, if the roughness of the weather prevent your
getting a pilot on board thereabout, continue this course until Shoe point (which
may be distinguished from its bearing a semblance to white marble) bears
N.W. i W., when shape course for Indian bay about N.W. by W. i W.

Haw Harbour is 2 miles westward of Shoe point. With easterly winds it is
quite inaccessible, its entrance being very narrow ; when these prevail it is
recommended to continue onward for Cat cove, 4 miles farther up Indian bay, on
the same side.

Cat OoTtt is formed by Cat island, Q,nd may be easily recognised, the island
being the only part in the vicinity covered with wood, the surrounding
forests having been destroyed by conflagration (1817). On steering for this
place proceed between Silver Hair with Brown Fox islands and the main, and as
you approach the latter, the channel narrows, and you keep Cat island open on
your starboard bow. 0£f the upper part of Cat island lie two high green rocks,
which you must round, the passage formed by them being too shoal to pass
between ; you may then run till you get some distance inside the upper point of
the island, and anchor in from 6 to 18 fathoms, with the hawse open to N.W., the
winds from that quarter being iu general most heavy and squally. In working
in, you may stand close to either shore, except off the point of the island, as there
is a sunken rook within 100 yardi of it, with not more than 10 feet of water.

CAPE FREELS.

iri

le maiu, but
.ct . of getting
)le in heavy

ily avuid the
sape Freds) •
arge spot of
islt^nd (cape
^ care, how-
arry them in-
e just above
But, a vessel
md rocks, for
rs frequently
sd among the
d from which
•quarters of a
a depth close

atinuons, the
iks, which he
pth on these
Id not strike,
9U8 sea which
ided.

iw harbour or

. \ W., until

ocks 1^ miles

rocks has on

4ow alter the

jocker readi)

d dangers, to

jrevent your

point (which

narble) bears

winds it is
prevail it is
idiau bay, on

1, the island
surrounding
ring for this
main, and as
,nd open on
green rocks,
loal to pass
iper point of
N.W., the
In working
,nd, aa there
water.

Ito

Veela Barbour, in lat. 49' 7' N., is the best anchorage near cape Freels,
but access to it cannot be made with facility, because 6f the numerous islands
in its neighbourhood, which are almost indistinguishable one from tl^e other.
The greatest danger encountered in the approach from southward, is the
cluster of sunken rocks, known as the North rocks, which lie E.N.E. about a mile
from Puffin island, and have only 12 to 18 feet water upon them; to avoid thet;e be
careful not to open Pools island, at the entrance of North-'west arm.(wliich is
somewhat higher and more prominent than the other islands, and is covered with
trees, except tlie crown), to the westward of the southern Pound islet, until
Butterfly island is brought to touch the inner point of Flower itiland, or until
Puffin and Copper islands touch each other : then, leaving the Pound inlets on the
starboard hand, steer in for Pools island, which it is advisa ble to keep well on board,
as there is a sunken rock lying exactly in mid-channel, between it and Partridge
island rocks, with 18 feet upon it ; to clear wliich, it is impossible to give a descrip-
tive mark. The course then into the Arm is N.W. i W., and as soon as inside
Odd island, anchor in 7 to 9 fathoms muddy ground, with Pools island bill
bearing S.E. to S.E. by S. During dry summer months, vessels are compelled to
send to Loo cove for water, nor is wood to be procured on tliis part of the coast
witliin tlie distance of 12 miles. (See the \dmiralty chart No. 2U4 for Pool and
Greenspoud harbours).

OrMaapond is a small harbour on the south-eastern side of Greenspond island.
The island is about a mile in breadth each way, &nd a reef of rocky islets runs
off the southern part of it, the south-eastern of which is known as Puffin island.
The harbour is of very little importance, not being capable of receiving vessels
whose draught of water exceeds 14 feet ; its dangers are the Northern, the Cook-
room, the Harbour rocks, but it is imp )S8ible to get in with a foul wind, or even
with a fair one, without a pilot. Ships sometimes anchor between the island
and^ the maiu ; but the channel is narrow, and the water very deep ; it is also
much exposed to S.W. winds, so that it cannot be recommended as a place of
safet}'. To sail into it, pass westward of Copper island, in doing which cautiously
avoid the Midsummer rock, 6 feet under water, distant a little more than half a
mile W. by S. t^ S. from the island ; when Silver Hair island is shut in with Shoe
point, vessels are inside it. Also give Newell and Ship islands a wide berth, as
water shoals off them a considerable distance.

Li(jht. — A lighthouse has been brected on Puffin island. It shows a fixed red
light at 65 feet above the sea, visible 12 miles between the bearings of S.W. by W.
and N.E. b}' E. Its approximate geographical position is lat. i\)° A' <')7" N.,
long. M° 32' 27" \V.

OAVB rSBBXiS. — Cape Freels consists of three points, known as the south
Bill, the north Bill, and middle Bill of cape Freels ; extending from these, and
also in their vicinity, are numerous shoals and rocky dangers— therefore, a wide
berth should be given them at all times. Over the cape is some high laud, com-
monly named the Cape Ridge, which is visible at a considerable distance. '

From cape Freels the coast trends N.N. W. } W. about 4^ miles to a conspicuous
hill on the shore side, known as the Windmill hill. Off tliis there is a small
island. And, H miles further in the same direction the onast projects a mile
north-eastward towards an island named Gat, which is surrounded uud ooniieoted
to the land by a reef. The whole of tliis shore should have a wide bertli
although tlie deptli towards it decreases gradually from seaward.

Gat island is the southern boundary of Deadman bay, its u«)rthem boundary,
Deadmau head, being a bold bluff point distant 3^ miles N.N.W, i W. from the
island. This bay is exposed in ctrery part to easterly wiuds« and ooataini no

178

CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

■« . .1.

«>■:;:■■

''4.

known detftohed sunken danf^ers ; it is consequently only nsed as a temporary
anchorage while the wind is from tlie laud. The depth in it is 10 to 8 fathoms.

Vsacnla lalands. — From Deadman point the two Penguin islands bear N. ^W.
distant 4 to 6 miles. Between them the passage is clear, with .5^ to '7 fothoms
water, but vessels should not go between them and the shore, there being several
scattered neefs. A sunken rock is also reported to lie about 2 miles N.N.E.
froitt Deadman point.

Ml* Oeaat. — From Deadman point the coast trends N.N.W. i W. Ipi miles to
Rugged harbour and is generally low and sandy. Rugged harbour is an open
bay, exposed to easterly winds, and difficult of access from eastward, there being
a dangerous reef and several scattered rocks between it and the Penguin islands.

North-westward 2i miles from this harbour is Ladle cove island, which is
separated from the shore by a narrow channel 5 fathoms deep ; and 6 miles
W.N.W. from this island is a large open bay, known as Rocky bay, from the
numerous scattered reel's it contains. Tliere are three islands in this bay, named
Noggin, Oreen and White ; the last is the nearest to the shore. Vessels may
pass between the two outer islands in 7 fathoms; between Rooky point and
Green island in 7, B, 13, or 10 fathoms ; between Green and White islands in
18 and 14 fathoms ; and between Noggin island and the western point of the bay
in Si, 7, 12, 9, and 4 fatlioms. The shores of these bays, for there are three
opoungB, are fronted by a rocky ledge ; hence vessels cannot go far into them.

rvm laxJUTOB.— ^he Funk islands, which lie N.E by E. about 32 miles
from cape Freels, are a little group of rooks, just above water. The largest of
them is 46 feet high, not half a mile long, and cannot be seen farther than 10 or
12 miles; but it will always be distinguished by the numerous birds hovering
over it,— its geographical position is lat. 49" 46' 29" N., long. 53° 10' 49" W.
About 200 yards northward of this island there is a large rock above water, and
N.W. by W. 180 yards from this are still larger rocks ; these are all barren, and
only the resort of sea birds, tliat inhabit and breed there. The depth between
these rocks is 18, 37, and 42 fathoms, with a clear passage ; but between the
eastern rock and the largest island tliere is a dangerous 10-foot rock, over which
the sea generally breaks ; near this sunken rock the depth is 14 and 10 fathoms,
and between it «ind the largest island, 30, 26, 60 38, 24, and 17 fathoms. Off
the western point of the largest island are some rooks, and at its eastern part a
sort of creek with 6 fathoms water in it.

In the immediate vicinity of l<'uuk islands there are many sunken rocks, the
most dangerous of which appear to be o£f its south-west side. These were
examined in 1806 by Commander J. H. Kerr, R.N., and appear to be all included
within a radius ot 2i miles of the islands. The following is a list of them
with their positions in respect to the islands ; —

6 fathoius. Funk island centre bearing S. by E. i E. 2 miles.

10
15
10

9
11*
18*

S.E. i £., 2

E. i S., li
E. I N., }

N.E. by E. h E., 2

N.E. i N.. 2

N.W. i W., 2

N.W. by W., U

W. i N., 2|

S.W. by W., U

* These rookti are parts of narrow banks, eaoh upwards of half a mile long N.E. and
B.W., with less than 80 fathoms water on them, the others being saaall with a depth of 4^
to 60 fothvus close round them.

a temporary

8 fathoms.

boarN.tW.

^7 fathoms
leing several
jiles N.N.E.

Ipi miles to
' is an open
I, there being
iguin islands,
ad, which is

and 6 miles
»ay, from the
9 bay, named
Vessels may
ky point and
ite islands in
int of the bay
ire are three

into them,
out 82 miles
'he largest of
ler than 10 or
^ds hovering
10' 4»" W.
ve water, and

1 barren, and
ipth between

between the
c, over which

10 fathoms,
athoms. Off
istern part a

en rocks, the
These were

e all included
list of them

miles.

WADHAM ISLANDS.

ITf

long N.£. and
adepthofiC

Brcntoa B«««.— A rock 5 fathoms under water lies 6 miles West from Funk
islands. Th« depth close to it on all sides is 82 to 70 fathoms.

Snap Seek. — The Snap rook, awash, is probably the easternmost of tl^e rooks
between the Funk islands tfnd Fogo island. It lies in lat. 40' 63' 80" N., long.
53° 41' W., and irom it Funk islands bear S.E. I S. distant 22i miles ; Barrack
rocks W. i N.. m miles: and Oifer Wadham light S.W. i S., 17| milas— oloae
to it on all sides is very deep water.

WASBASK isijkzrss.— These consist of a cluster of islands in lat. 4d* 86' N.,
and about 20 miles northward of cape Freels, which are separated from eaoh
other by deep channels a mile wide. The largest, named Peckford, is about 1^
miles long, N.E. and S.W., and bears from cape Freels nearly N. \ W., distant
il miles. From its southern part towards the land about Rugged harbour, there
are a number of rocky islets and reefs, with channels between them, rendering
navigation extremely hazardous. About 1^ miles N.N.W^ i N., from Peckford
island is White island, but the passage between them should not be attempted,
there being several small rocks off the north and north-western parts of Peckford
island, some of which extend over almost as far as White island. N.W. i W.
from the north end of Peckford island, about 44 miles is Copper island. Duck
island lies W.N.W. ^ N. 2i miles from the same part of Peckford island, and
about 14 miles S.S.E. i E. from Copper island. There ar6 also some rocks off
the north-west end of Duck island, which, being visible, can always be avoided
mth ease.

Llgbt. — Offer Wadham, the outer and easternmost of the group, is distinguished
b}' a circular brick tower, from which a /ixed light is shown at 06 feet above the
sea, visible in clear weather at the distance of 12 miles.

The S.S. \y. Book above water, is distant 24 miles S.S.W- i W. from Offer
island, and has near it a depth of 13, 17, and 21 fathoms. About three-quarters
of a mile W. by S. from the lighthouse is a small flat island. Ther;. is also a
rock about li miles S.E. 4 E. from Offer island, namedthe E.S.E. Ground ; this
is dangerous, and must have a berth in passing either north or south of it. The
Turn God Rook, likewise dangerous, lies three-quarters of a mile S. by W. from
Ofi'er island. The East rock, 10 i'athums under water lies 24 miles E. f S. from
Otl'er Wadiiam lighthouse ; and the Outer East rock, 12 fathoms under water^
lies 54 miles E.S.E. from the same building.

rooo XBIiAiniS. — The Fogo islands lie to the nortli-westward of the Wed-
ham islands. Great Fogo is 12 miles long and 9 miles broad ; off its south-
western point lie the Indian islands, and N.E. by N. 34 miles from the Body of
Great Fogo, are the Little Fogo islands. Numerous other rooks and small
islands are scattered about them.

rogo RarlMnr, on the north side of the island, is considered good for the
iisheries, but its entrance is dangerous and difficult. A strong current flows
south-eastward, especially with a westerly wind ; to guard against this as much
lis possible hug Fogo close on board, until the entrance, which is narrow, appears
open. When within, anchor in 7 to 3 fathoms, mud.

Vessels bound to Fogo harbour from eastward, must cautiously avoid the
Dean's rock, a sunken danger lying between Joe Batts point (the north point of
the island) and the harbour.

The Little Fogo islands are nearly surrounded by rooks, above and under
water ; hence this part of the coast of Newfoundland is extremely dsngeroos.
Ti) the eastward of Little P'ogo. is n small rook just above water, named North-
Eastern rock. Northward of Little l''ogo are the Turr rocks, and thenoe, in the

I ..

"^ m

i ;• '■'*"

■ ■,'■;■ *,a

180

CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE ST. JOHN.

diFAction of the western sidi of Groat Fcgo island, are the Storehouse rooks,
(he Seals' Nests, Oappy and Stone islands, the Jigger and Black rooks, and
Yarioas other dangers, all with deep water rou^d them, which increases the
diiSculty of the navigation. . ». .

Ireland Book, about 3 miles E.N.E. } E. from Little Fugo islands, is the north-
easternmost t of the Fogo reefs, and the sea always breaks on it. The reefs
extend nearly IS miles in a westerly direction from Ireland rock to Fogo Head
rook, which lies about a mile north»westward of Fogo harbour. Between the
reefs and islets are several deep-water channels, which might be taken :by those
^ell acquainted. At' the distance of 4 miles S.S.E. f E. from the Little Fogo
islands, and 6 miles eastward of the north-east part of Fogo island, lie the
Barraok Rooki, which extend N.W. and S.E. fully a mile, and pMrt of them are
above water. At about 2 miles south-eastward of the Bamick roclcs, and 7) miles
N.E. i £. from cape Fogo, is the Itupeotor Bock, on which the sea generally
breaks. Other rocks also lie off this side of Fogo island and between it &nd the
Wadhand islands ; those that are known are as followfy —

Pigeon Bock has 2 fathoms on it, and from it South Barrack rock bears
North. 3 miles ; extreme of cape Fogo S.W. by W. ; Joe Batts point N.W. f W.;
and Pigeon island W. | N.

Lanee lEeut Bock hka 2 fathoms on it, and from it the west end of Barracks
bears N.E. by E. ^ E., li miles ; Bound head W. by N. ; and the extreme of cape
Fogo 8.8. W. 4 W. ,„ .

Lanee Wett Book has 3 fathoms on it, 4id from it Bound head bears
W. by N. \ N., 2 miles ; and Lanes East rock E. by S. \ S., 1^ miles.

Olam Rock has fathoms on it, and fiY>m it Offer Wadham light bears
8. 1 W., 7 miles ; and the south extreme of oape Fogo W. i N.

Pinnade Bock has 10 fethoms on it, and from it cape Fogo, in a line with
Bound head, bears N. \ W., 2 miles ; and Copper Island summit S.W.

White Clam Bock has 9 fathoms on it, and from it cape Fogo. in a line with
Bound head, bears N. \ W., 4i milas ; and Copper Island summit S.W. by
W.iW.

Frampton Bock has 4 £&thoms on it, and from it Copper Island summit bears
S.E., 2miles. ^

Fithing Bock has 9 fpthoms on it, and from it Copper Island summit bears
B.E. i S., 4i miles.

WeeUm Head Book has it fathoms on it, and from it Western head bears North,
1 mile; the south extreme of cape Fogo E. \ N., 2} miles; Burnt point open
of Wild point W. by N. f N., 4 miles; and Copper Island summit, South,
6 miles.

Olumc* man** Tlokle. — This harbour is very secure, uid has good anchor-
age, with 6. or 7 fdthoms, muddy bottom. The islands about it are, generally,
low and marshy, but abundance of fire-wood may be procured, though water is
scarce. The passage in is between Ruths rook and the Tobacco islands, the
mark being'Brimstoue head kept between botlb which will clear all tlie dangers
on the nori^hisRi shore, and ako off Skinness harbour; or bring the Tickle to the
westward, between the points, and steer directly through in safety.

VOVxmaini* ISlJuro.— This island lies 17 miles westward of Fego, and
has iMveral small isUnds about it. Here is what is named Toulinguet bay ; and
Bonih-wertward of Toulinguet island, is the harbour of Herring Neck, which is
■aid to be a fine spaeious harbour, and fit for any vessels.

From Toulinguet bay to cape St. John, the course is N.N.W. 90 miles.

ck rock bears
It N.W. t W.;

i of Barracks
Ktreme of cape

1 bears North,
it point open
^mmit, South,

good anohor-

Ire. gftnemlly,

|ough water is

islands, the

the daugen

[Tickle to the

|of Fego, and
let bay; and
[eck, which i>

TILT COVE.

IHl

house rooks,
k rooks, and
increases the

I, is the north-
t. The reefs
o Fugo Head
Between the
iken 'by those
e Little Fogo
ilaad, lie the
rt of them are
I, and 7i miles
sea generally
een it And the

Blahop Beeka. — At about 2 miles southward from cape St. John is a cluster of
rocks known as the Bishops. Close to them on all sides is deep water, -ind their
situation is generally shown by - breakers. In mid-channel between them and
the nearest part of the coast there is a reef, also surrounded by deep water.

TIUF OOVB. — Tilt cove, now rendered famous by the copper mine in its
vicinity, is on the south side of the pfi'omontory of which cape St. John is the
eastern termination. It is 6| miles firom the cape, of very limited extent, and
open to southerly winds. Its depth is 10 to 7 fathoms. The mine is very near
the sea, and the quality of the ore raised is only inferior to that of the Burra
Burra mines, in Australia. Marble has also been found at the same spot, and
pieces of great beauty, equal to the finest Carrara marble, have been obtained.

id head bean

ies.

m light bears

in a line with

imit S.W. by

summit bears

I summit bears

,.rl

THE END.

lea.